Download - F900R Service Manual 2006
HD CAMCORDER
HDW-F900R
MAINTENANCE MANUALVolume 1 1st EditionSerial No. 10001 and Higher : HDW-F900R (SY)
DOWN CONVERTER BOARDHKDW-702
PICTURE CACHE BOARDHKDW-703
HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
! WARNINGThis manual is intended for qualified service personnel only.To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than thatcontained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing toqualified service personnel.
! WARNUNGDie Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt.Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um dieGefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind beiWartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegebenWartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigungdazu besitzen.
! AVERTISSEMENTCe manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l’entretien. Afinde réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d’incendie ou de blessure n’effectuer que lesréparations indiquées dans le mode d’emploi à moins d’être qualifié pour en effectuer d’autres.Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement.
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 1 (P)
Vorsicht!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austauschder Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vomHersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ. Entsorgung
gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben desHerstellers.
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacementincorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mêmetype ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le
constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément
aux instructions du fabricant.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri-Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtighåndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteriaf samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
ADVARSEL
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare.Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som
anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukt batteri returneresapparatleverandøren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en likvärdig typsom rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt gällandeföreskrifter.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää jos se on virheellisestiasennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajansuosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeidenmukaisesti.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.
HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
For the customers in the NetherlandsVoor de klanten in Nederland
Hoe u de batterijen moet verwijderen, leest u in de tekstvan deze handleiding.
Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in als kleinchemisch afval (KCA).
Für Kunden in Deutschland
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur entladeneBatterien in die Sammelboxen beim Handel oder denKommunen. Entladen sind Batterien in der Regel dann,wenn das Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert “Batterieleer” oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer der Batterien“nicht mehr einwandfrei funktioniert”. Umsicherzugehen, kleben Sie die Batteriepole z.B. miteinem Klebestreifen ab oder geben Sie die Batterieneinzeln in einen Plastikbeutel.
For the customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.You can help preserve our environmentby returning your used rechargeablebatteries to the collection and recyclinglocation nearest you.
For more information regarding recycling of re-chargeable batteries, call toll free1-800-822-8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ionbatteries.
2 (P)
1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Table of Contents
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual ................................................................. 6
Related manuals ........................................................................... 6
1. Service Overview
1-1. Locations of Main Parts and Circuit Configuration ....... 1-1
1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of
the Printed Wiring Boards ..................................... 1-1
1-1-2. Locations of Main Mechanical Parts ..................... 1-4
1-1-3. Functions and Locations of Sensors ...................... 1-6
1-2. Matching Connectors ...................................................... 1-8
1-3. Signal Inputs and Outputs ............................................... 1-8
1-4. Removing and Reinstalling the Outside Panel
Assembly ...................................................................... 1-11
1-5. Opening and Closing the Inside Panel Assembly ......... 1-12
1-6. Removing and Reinstalling the Connector Box ........... 1-13
1-7. Removing and Reinstalling the Plug-in Boards ............ 1-14
1-7-1. DCP Board Assembly ......................................... 1-14
1-7-2. DVP Board Assembly ......................................... 1-16
1-8. Removing and Reinstalling the Flexible
Card Wires .................................................................... 1-18
1-9. Removing and Reinstalling the Cassette
Compartment ................................................................ 1-19
1-10. On-Board Switch/Slit Land Description ....................... 1-22
1-10-1. AT-172 Board ..................................................... 1-22
1-10-2. EQ-88G Board ..................................................... 1-23
1-10-3. FP-152 Board ...................................................... 1-24
1-10-4. MDC-13G Board ................................................. 1-25
1-10-5. SS-92G Board ..................................................... 1-26
1-10-6. RP-131 Board ...................................................... 1-27
1-10-7. AXM-33 Board ................................................... 1-27
1-11. How to Eject a Cassette Tape Manually ....................... 1-28
1-12. How to Insert a Cassette Tape While the Outside
Panel Assembly is Being Removed .............................. 1-30
1-13. How to Clean the Heads When the Heads are
Clogged ......................................................................... 1-30
1-14. List of Tools and Measuring Equipment ...................... 1-31
1-14-1. Tools .................................................................... 1-31
1-14-2. Measuring Equipment ......................................... 1-34
1-14-3. Alignment Tapes ................................................. 1-35
1-15. How to Extend the Circuit Board ................................. 1-36
1-15-1. Extending the AT-172 Board .............................. 1-36
1-15-2. Extending the HKDW-702
(DC-110A Board) ................................................ 1-37
1-15-3. Extending the DCP Board Assembly .................. 1-38
1-15-4. Extending the DCP Board Assembly
(When you want to check the B side or a
part of A side of the DVP board assembly) ........ 1-39
1-15-5. Extending the DVP Board Assembly .................. 1-40
1-15-6. Extending the DVP Board Assembly
(When you want to check the B side or a
part of A side of the SS-92G board) .................... 1-41
1-15-7. Extending the EQ-88G Board ............................. 1-42
1-15-8. Extending the HKDW-703 (MY-99 Board) ........ 1-43
1-15-9. Extending the SS-92G Board .............................. 1-44
1-15-10. Extending the RP-131 Board
(When you want to check the B side or
the A side of the PA-340 board) .......................... 1-45
1-15-11. Extending the CCD Unit ..................................... 1-46
1-15-12. Extending the Mechanical Deck Assembly ........ 1-47
1-16. Description on Cassette Mechanism ............................. 1-49
1-17. Adjustments/Setting Items When Boards Are
Replaced ....................................................................... 1-51
1-17-1. DR-614 Board ..................................................... 1-51
1-17-2. CN-2871 Board ................................................... 1-51
1-17-3. PA-340 Board ...................................................... 1-51
1-17-4. RP-131 Board ...................................................... 1-51
1-17-5. TG-256 Board ..................................................... 1-52
1-17-6. CCD Unit ............................................................. 1-52
1-17-7. DCP-43 Board ..................................................... 1-52
1-17-8. MDC-13G Board ................................................. 1-52
1-17-9. MDR-14G Board ................................................. 1-52
1-17-10. FP-152 Board ...................................................... 1-53
1-17-11. EQ-88G Board ..................................................... 1-53
1-17-12. CCM-45G Board ................................................. 1-53
1-17-13. IFA-19G Board ................................................... 1-53
1-17-14. DC-110A Board (HKDW-702) ........................... 1-53
1-18. Contents of the EEPROM, NV-RAM and
FRAM Data .................................................................. 1-54
1-19. Description on the CCD Block Number ....................... 1-55
1-20. Filter Knob Position Adjustment .................................. 1-56
1-21. Memory Backup Battery ............................................... 1-57
1-22. Fuse and IC Link Replacement ..................................... 1-57
1-23. Circuit Protection Element ........................................... 1-58
2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version ........................................ 1-59
1-24-1. Confirming the ROM Version ............................. 1-59
1-24-2. When a Memory Stick is Used for Version
Upgrading (AT-172 Board, FP-152 Board,
SS-92G Board) .................................................... 1-59
1-24-3. When the ROM-28 Board is Used for Version
Upgrading (AT-172 Board) ................................. 1-61
1-24-4. When the FL-272 Board is Used for Version
Upgrading (SS-92G Board) ................................. 1-62
1-25. How to Replace the Photo Sensors on
the MDC-13G Board .................................................... 1-63
1-26. Circuit Description ........................................................ 1-64
1-26-1. CCD Block (TG-256 Board, DR-614 Board,
BI-199/200/201 Board, and PA-340 Board) ....... 1-64
1-26-2. Camera System (DCP-43 Board) ........................ 1-65
1-26-3. Video Signal System (DVP-41 Board) ............... 1-66
1-26-4. Audio System (FP-152 Board, IFA-19G
Board, APR-59AG Board, AL-43 Board,
and AXM-33 Board) ........................................... 1-67
1-26-5. System Control (FP-152 Board and
SS-92G Board) .................................................... 1-71
1-26-6. Servo Control System (SS-92G Board,
MDC-13G Board, MDR-14G Board,
and SE-613 Board) .............................................. 1-74
1-26-7. RF System (EQ-88G Board) ............................... 1-75
1-26-8. Power Supply Systems (CNB-23 Board,
RE-186 Board, and RE-187B Board) .................. 1-76
1-26-9. Option Board (DC-110A Board,
MY-99 Board) ..................................................... 1-77
1-27. Unleaded Solder ............................................................ 1-79
1-28. Notes on Repair Parts ................................................... 1-79
1-29. Precautions for use of Condensation Sensor ................ 1-79
2. Periodic Maintenance and Inspection
2-1. Cleaning .......................................................................... 2-1
2-1-1. General Information for Cleaning ......................... 2-1
2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum Tape Running
Surface and Video Heads ...................................... 2-3
2-1-3. Cleaning the Lower Drum Tape Running
Surface and Rabbet Guide .....................................2-4
2-1-4. Cleaning the Stationary Heads .............................. 2-5
2-1-5. Cleaning the Tape Running Path and
Cleaning Blade ...................................................... 2-6
2-1-6. Cleaning the S/T Plate Assemblies and
S/T Slider Assemblies ........................................... 2-7
2-1-7. Cares after Using under Special Environment ...... 2-8
2-2. Periodic Inspection ......................................................... 2-9
2-2-1. Hours Meter ........................................................... 2-9
2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List ....................................... 2-10
2-2-3. Applying Oil to Reel Drive Gear Assembly ....... 2-11
2-2-4. Applying Grease to S Tension Regulator
Assembly .............................................................2-12
2-2-5. Notes on Repair Parts .......................................... 2-14
2-2-6. Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts ........ 2-15
2-2-7. Recommended Replacement Parts ...................... 2-17
3. Error Diagnostics
3-1. When Does the Error Code Appear? .............................. 3-1
3-1-1. Description of Error Codes ................................... 3-2
3-1-2. Details of Error Codes ........................................... 3-4
3-2. Device Check .................................................................. 3-8
4. Setup Menu
4-1. Setup Menus ................................................................... 4-1
4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus ......................... 4-1
4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu .................... 4-2
4-2. TOP Menu ...................................................................... 4-3
4-3. USER Menu .................................................................... 4-4
4-4. OPERATION Menu ....................................................... 4-5
4-5. PAINT Menu ................................................................ 4-23
4-6. MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................... 4-36
4-7. FILE Menu .................................................................... 4-51
4-8. DIAGNOSIS Menu ...................................................... 4-61
4-9. SERVICE Menu ........................................................... 4-65
4-10. Setup Menu List ............................................................ 4-77
5. File System
5-1. Structure of File System ................................................. 5-1
5-2. Data Structure ................................................................. 5-2
5-3. Operating the USER File ................................................ 5-3
5-4. Operating the ALL File .................................................. 5-6
5-5. Operating the SCENE File ............................................ 5-10
5-6. Operating the REFERENCE File .................................5-13
5-7. Operating the LENS File .............................................. 5-16
3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5-8. Special Saving Items ..................................................... 5-18
5-8-1. White Gain .......................................................... 5-18
5-8-2. Master Gain ......................................................... 5-19
5-8-3. Shutter ................................................................. 5-19
6. Parts Replacement
6-1. CCD Unit and its Components Parts Replacement
Procedure ........................................................................ 6-1
6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement ......................................... 6-1
6-2. Filter Disk Unit Replacement ......................................... 6-5
6-3. Replacement of the Circuit Boards inside
the CCD Unit .................................................................. 6-6
6-4. Shutter, AUTO W/B BAL Switch and AUDIO
Volume Controls Replacement ....................................... 6-8
6-5. MIC IN Connector Replacement .................................. 6-10
6-6. Rotary Encoder Replacement ....................................... 6-11
6-7. Connector Box Board Replacement ............................. 6-13
6-7-1. Removing the Connector Box Assembly ............ 6-13
6-7-2. Removing the CNB-23 Board and
AL-43 Board ....................................................... 6-13
6-7-3. Removing the IO-202 Board ............................... 6-13
6-7-4. Removing the RM-201 Board ............................. 6-14
6-7-5. Removing the SW-1309 Board and
the AXM-33 Board .............................................. 6-14
6-7-6. Removing the DC IN Connector ......................... 6-15
6-7-7. Removing the DC OUT/HD SDI OUT
Connectors ........................................................... 6-15
6-8. DC-DC Converter Replacement ................................... 6-16
6-9. Fan Replacement .......................................................... 6-18
6-9-1. Replacing the Fan on the Inside Panel
Assembly ............................................................. 6-18
6-9-2. Replacing the Fan in the Unit .............................. 6-19
6-10. Camera SW Ornamental Plate (3) Replacement .......... 6-20
6-11. 50P Fitting Bracket Assembly Replacement ................ 6-21
6-12. MS Lid Assembly Replacement ................................... 6-22
6-13. VF Connector Replacement .......................................... 6-25
6-14. POWER Switch Replacement ...................................... 6-26
6-15. IFA-19G Board Replacement ....................................... 6-27
6-16. Battery Connector Assembly (DC-111 Board)
Replacement ................................................................. 6-28
6-17. CCM-45G Board Replacement ..................................... 6-29
6-18. PS-595 Board Replacement .......................................... 6-30
6-19. IF-794G Board, HN-277G Board and
RX-54G Board Replacement ........................................ 6-31
6-20. SS-92G Board Replacement ......................................... 6-34
6-21. LP-114 Board Replacement .......................................... 6-35
6-22. SW-1312 Board Replacement ...................................... 6-36
6-23. MB-1096 Board Replacement ...................................... 6-37
6-24. Mechanical Deck Assembly Boards Replacement ....... 6-38
6-24-1. MDR-13G Board Replacement ........................... 6-38
6-24-2. MDR-14G Board Replacement ........................... 6-38
6-24-3. SE-613 Board Replacement ................................ 6-39
7. Part Replacement of Mechanical DeckAssembly
7-1. General Information on Mechanical Part
Replacement ................................................................... 7-1
7-1-1. Index ...................................................................... 7-1
7-1-2. Notes ...................................................................... 7-2
7-1-3. Threading-End State and Unthreading-
End State ............................................................... 7-3
7-1-4. How To Eject a Cassette Tape Manually .............. 7-4
7-1-5. About Oil and Grease ............................................ 7-6
7-1-6. Screw Tightening Torque and Washer .................. 7-7
7-2. Upper Drum Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-8
7-3. Drum Assembly Replacement ...................................... 7-24
7-4. Replacement of Brush Assembly for Slip Ring ............ 7-31
7-5. Slip Ring Assembly Replacement ................................ 7-34
7-6. Replacement of AHC Roller Assembly for
Video Head ................................................................... 7-38
7-7. Pinch Roller Assembly Replacement ........................... 7-41
7-8. S-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement ..... 7-44
7-9. T-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement ..... 7-47
7-10. Timing Belt Replacement ............................................. 7-50
7-11. S Idler Assembly Replacement and T Idler
Assembly Replacement ................................................ 7-52
7-12. CTL Head Replacement ............................................... 7-54
7-13. FE Head Replacement .................................................. 7-57
7-14. Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) Replacement ............. 7-60
7-15. End Sensor Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-62
7-16. Full Top Sensor Assembly Replacement ...................... 7-63
7-17. S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide Replacement ............................ 7-64
7-18. (S) Soft Brake Assembly Replacement ........................ 7-66
7-19. T Soft Brake Replacement ............................................ 7-68
4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-20. Manual Eject Assembly Replacement .......................... 7-70
7-21. S-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement .............. 7-72
7-22. T-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement .............. 7-75
7-23. Cassette Stopper Replacement ...................................... 7-78
7-24. Gear Block Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-80
7-25. S Reel Table Replacement and T Reel Table
Replacement ................................................................. 7-83
7-26. Reel Drive Gear Assembly Replacement ..................... 7-87
7-27. Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) Replacement ................. 7-90
7-28. Top Sensor Assembly Replacement ............................. 7-92
7-29. Pinch Arm Assembly Replacement .............................. 7-94
7-30. Threading Arm Assembly Replacement ....................... 7-97
7-31. CUE/TC Head Assembly Replacement ...................... 7-101
7-32. S Slider Assembly Replacement .................................7-106
7-33. T Slider Assembly Replacement ................................ 7-111
7-34. Cam Gear Assembly Replacement .............................7-116
7-35. Mechanical Deck Assembly Removal/
Installation .................................................................. 7-122
7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement .................................. 7-126
7-37. Capstan Motor Replacement ....................................... 7-131
8. Mechanical Adjustment
8-1. Mechanical Adjustment .................................................. 8-1
8-1-1. Reel Table Height Adjustment .............................. 8-3
8-1-2. S Tension Regulator Operating Position
Adjustment ............................................................ 8-5
8-1-3. FWD Back Tension Adjustment ........................... 8-7
8-1-4. REV Back Tension Adjustment ............................ 8-9
8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ........................ 8-11
8-1-6. T Tension Regulator Operating Position
Adjustment .......................................................... 8-12
8-1-7. S3 Guide Height Adjustment .............................. 8-14
8-1-8. Gear Chain Phase Adjustment ............................. 8-16
8-2. Tape Run System Adjustment ...................................... 8-19
8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment .......................................... 8-21
8-2-2. Video Tracking Adjustment ................................ 8-27
8-2-3. CTL Head Height Adjustment ............................ 8-32
8-2-4. CTL Head Position Adjustment .......................... 8-34
8-2-5. CUE/TC Head Height Adjustment ...................... 8-36
8-2-6. CUE/TC Head Azimuth Adjustment ................... 8-39
8-2-7. CUE/TC Head Tape-to-Head Contact
Adjustment .......................................................... 8-41
8-2-8. CUE/TC Head Position Adjustment ................... 8-43
8-2-9. CUE/TC Output Level Check ............................. 8-46
9. Electrical Alignment of Camera System
9-1. General Information on Electrical Alignment ................ 9-1
9-1-1. Notes on Electrical Alignment .............................. 9-1
9-1-2. Required Equipment, Fixtures and Tools .............. 9-1
9-1-3. Initial Position of Switches during Adjustment .... 9-1
9-1-4. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance .................. 9-2
9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment .......................................... 9-4
9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment ........................................ 9-4
9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment ............................................... 9-5
9-5. VA Gain Adjustment ...................................................... 9-6
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment ................................................ 9-7
9-7. VSUB Adjustment .......................................................... 9-9
9-8. PA Gain Adjustment .....................................................9-10
9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment .................................................... 9-11
9-10. DCC Pre Knee Adjustment ........................................... 9-12
9-11. Black Shading Adjustment ........................................... 9-13
9-12. White Shading Adjustment ........................................... 9-14
9-13. Flare Adjustment .......................................................... 9-16
9-14. Gamma Correction Adjustment .................................... 9-17
9-15. Knee and White Clip Adjustment .................................9-18
9-16. DCC Knee Adjustment .................................................9-19
9-17. Crispening Adjustment .................................................9-20
9-18. Level Depend Adjustment ............................................ 9-20
9-19. Detail Signal Frequency Adjustment ............................ 9-21
9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment .................................................. 9-22
9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment .................................... 9-22
9-22. Knee Aperture Adjustment ........................................... 9-23
9-23. H. Detail Black Clip Adjustment .................................. 9-23
9-24. V. Detail Black Clip Adjustment .................................. 9-24
9-25. Skin Tone Adjustment .................................................. 9-25
9-26. Zebra Adjustment .........................................................9-26
9-27. Auto Iris Adjustment .................................................... 9-27
9-28. Adjustment upon Replacement of Filter Disc Unit ...... 9-27
9-29. SD VCO Adjustment .................................................... 9-28
9-30. SD Y Level Adjustment ................................................ 9-28
9-31. SD ZEBRA Clamp Level Adjustment .......................... 9-29
9-32. SD ZEBRA Y Level Adjustment .................................9-29
9-33. RPN Concealment ........................................................ 9-30
9-33-1. Manual RPN Concealment .................................. 9-30
9-33-2. When RPN Concealment Does Not Succeed ...... 9-31
9-33-3. Effectively Performing Auto RPN
Recognition .........................................................9-31
9-33-4. RPN Concealment Flowchart .............................. 9-32
5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10. Electrical Alignment of VTR System
10-1. Preparation .................................................................... 10-1
10-2. Audio System Alignment ............................................. 10-2
10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment .............................. 10-2
10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment .............................. 10-3
10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control
(Inside Panel) Adjustment ................................... 10-3
10-3. CUE Audio Alignment ................................................. 10-4
10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment .......................................... 10-4
10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment ....................... 10-4
10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias Preset Adjustment ............. 10-5
10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-1 ....................... 10-6
10-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2 ....................... 10-7
10-4. System Control Alignment ........................................... 10-8
10-4-1. Battery Voltage Correction Adjustment .............. 10-8
10-4-2. Antenna Tuning Frequency
Adjustment (Tele-File) ........................................ 10-8
10-5. Servo System Alignment .............................................. 10-9
10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment Data Initialization ..... 10-9
10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment .................. 10-10
10-5-3. Capstan Add-On Recording Adjustment ........... 10-10
10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment .................................... 10-11
10-6. RF System Alignment ................................................. 10-11
10-6-1. RF System Continuous Automatic
Adjustment ........................................................ 10-11
10-6-2. Saving the RF System Adjustment Data ........... 10-12
10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check ........................... 10-13
10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check ......................... 10-13
11. VTR Maintenance Mode
11-1. Introduction ................................................................... 11-1
11-2. Operation Procedure ..................................................... 11-2
11-2-1. Identifying Switches ............................................ 11-2
11-2-2. How to Enter VTR Maintenance Mode .............. 11-2
11-2-3. How to Exit VTR Maintenance Mode ................ 11-3
11-2-4. Tips on Operations .............................................. 11-3
11-3. Contents of Menus ........................................................ 11-4
11-3-1. Servo System Self-Diagnosis Mode
(C0 : SERVO CHECK) ....................................... 11-4
11-3-2. RF System Self-Diagnosis Mode
(C1 : RF CHECK) ............................................. 11-14
11-3-3. Audio System Adjustment Value
Check Mode (C2 : AUDIO CHECK) ............... 11-18
11-3-4. SERVO System Adjustment Mode
(A0 : SERVO ADJUST) ................................... 11-19
11-3-5. RF System Adjustment Mode
(A1 : RF ADJUST) ........................................... 11-24
11-3-6. Audio System Adjustment Mode
(A2 : AUDIO ADJUST) ................................... 11-38
11-3-7. Mechanism Adjustment Mode
(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST) ........................ 11-41
11-3-8. Other Adjustments
(A9 : OTHERS ADJUST) ................................. 11-42
6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Purpose of this manualThis manual is the maintenance manual volume 1 of HD Camcorder HDW-F900R.This manual is intended for use by the trained system engineers and service engi-neers. The volume 1 describes the information (periodic inspection and mainte-nance, diagnosis, part replacements and adjustment procedures) on the premise ofcomponent level service.
Related manualsBeside this Maintenance Manual Volume 1, the following manuals are available forthe unit.
. Operation Manual (Supplied with this unit)This manual is necessary for application and operation of this unit.Part number: 3-991-852-0X
. Maintenance Manual Vol. 2 (Available on request)This manual intended for use by trained system and service engineers describes(the parts list, semiconductor model list, block diagrams and board layouts)required for parts-level service.For obtaining, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.Part number: 9-968-282-0X
. HDVF-20A Maintenance Manual (Available on request)This manual is the maintenance manual of the supplied viewfinder.This manual is intended for use by trained system and service engineers, anddescribes the information regarding the service overview, electrical alignment,parts list, semiconductor pin assignments, block diagrams, schematic diagramsand board layouts.For obtaining, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.Part number: 9-968-559-0X
..... “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (Available on request)This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search forsemiconductors used in Broadcast and Professional equipment.This manual contains a complete list of semiconductors and their ID Nos., andthus should be used together with the CD-ROM.Part number: 9-968-546-0X
Manual Structure
1-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 1Service Overview
1-1. Locations of Main Parts and Circuit Configuration
1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards
System Board Name Circuit No.Configuration Function
CCD Block BI-199, 200, 201 CCD Imager #[
CN-2871 Connector for $\DR-614
DR-614 CCD Driver $]
PA-340 Pre AMP #]
RP-131 Pulse Generator #=
TG-256 Timing #/Generator
Camera AT-172 System ![System Control
DCP-43 Camera Processor 2
Video Signal DVP-41 VTR Processor 3System
Audio System AL-43 Audio AMP 0
APR-59AG Audio Volume !,
AXM-33 Connector 9
FP-152 Audio Processor 1
IFA-19G Lens Control #;
System/Servo MDC-13G Mecha Deck @/Control Control
MDR-14G Drum Motor @-Drive
SE-613 Sensor @.
SS-92G Servo/System !.Control
RF System EQ-88G Equalizer @'
Power Supply CNB-23 Circuit Breaker 8
DC-111 Battery DC Filter 6
RE-186 Regulator $/
RE-187B Regulator #.
Connector IO-202 In/Out !-Box
LP-114 Rear Tally 4
RM-201 Connector (RM) @]
Mic MA-103 Mic AMP #'
System Board Name Circuit No.Configuration Function
Others BP-33 Battery !]
CCM-45G TELE-FILE @[
CI-32G 50pin adaptor $[Interface
ENC-61 Rotary Encoder !'
HN-277G Harness #,
HP-103 Headphone !;
HP-104 Headphone 5
IF-794G Interface $-
KY-475G Function Key @,
MB-1096 Motherboard 7
PS-595 Power Supply @=(Light)
RX-54G Wireless $=ReceiverInterface
SW-1312 Light Switch #-
SW-1031 Switch #\
SW-1038 Switch !\
SW-1309 MIC SWITCH $;
TX-78 HDSDI Driver @;
Option DC-110A Down Converter !=(HKDW-702)
MY-99 Picture Cache @\(HKDW-703)
1-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
<View of the inside panel assembly>
<Rear view>
1 2 3 4
5
67
$;
9
0
!.43@;
2
![
1
!]
@/
@-
@=
6
@]
9
!-
0@\8 $;
5
7
!-8!=![!]!\!;
!'
!,
@'
@[!=
1-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
<View of the outside panel assembly>
<Front view>
#\
!\
$]
$\
!'
#-
#;
!;
#]
#=
#'@-@/#,#.@]
$/
$-
$=
@[
$[
@=
!. @.@, #/ #-
#=
#[
#]
#\
#;
#[
#'
1-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-1-2. Locations of Main Mechanical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6 #\
78
9
0
!-
!=
![
!]
!\
!;
!'
!, !.
@/
@- @=#]@[@]
@\
@;
@'
@,
@.#/
#-
#=
#[
1-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1 CCD block2 Fan motor3 Threading arm assembly4 S1 tape guide (on top of S-slider assembly)5 S2 tape guide (on top of S-slider assembly)6 S4 tape guide (on top of threading arm assembly)7 S5 tape guide (on top of S-tension regulator assembly)8 S3 tape guide (on top of threading arm assembly)9 Full erase head0 CTL head!- Brush assembly!= Slip ring assembly![ Cleaning assembly!] Upper drum!\ Lower drum!; T4 guide!' CUE/TC head!, Manual eject gear (A)!. Loading motor@/ Capstan motor@- T3 tape guide@= T5 guide (on top of T-tension regulator assembly)@[ Pinch roller assembly@] T2 tape guide (on top of T slider assembly)@\ T1 tape guide (on top of T slider assembly)@; (T) soft brake@' T reel table assembly@, Timing belt@. S-tension regulator band assembly#/ S reel table assembly#- T-tension regulator band assembly#= (S) soft brake assembly#[ Reel drive gear assembly#] T-tension regulator assembly#\ S-tension regulator assembly
1-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-1-3. Functions and Locations of Sensors
1 2 3 4 5
6
6
789
0
!-
!=
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
1-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1 Temperature sensorDetects temperature and drives the fan.
2 Cassette-in sensorDetects whether a cassette is inserted or not.
3 REC INHIBIT sensorDetects REC INHIBIT plug of a cassette tape.
4 Tape end sensorDetects the tape end of a tape that is running in the FWD direction.
5 Full top sensorDetects whether the inserted cassette tape is in the full top position or not.
6 Humid sensorDetects the dew condensation inside the unit.
7 Tape top sensorDetects the tape end of a tape that is running in the REV direction.
8 Function cam sensorDetects the rotary position of the function cam.
9 T-reel table assembly rotation sensorDetects rotation of the take-up reel table with the use of the T-reel table assembly rotation sensor. TheFG generator output of this sensor is input to the servo circuit where diameter of the remaining tape iscalculated.
0 Cassette lock sensor (switch)Detects whether the cassette compartment assembly is locked or not.
!- Cassette ID sensorID1 : Tape type
Detects the tape type (Oxide or Metal).ID2 : Tape thickness
Detects thickness of the tape that is wound in the cassette tape inserted in the set, with theuse of the tab on the rear of a cassette tape.
ID3 : Reel hub diameterThe reel hub diameter of a cassette tape is different depending on the length of a tape thatis wound in the cassette tape. The reel hub diameter sensor detects the reel hub diameterwith the use of a tab on the rear of a cassette tape.
ID4 to 6 : Tape formatDetects whether a cassette conforms to the HDCAM format or not.
!= S-reel table assembly rotation sensorDetects rotation of the supply reel table with the use of the S-reel table assembly rotation sensor. Theoutput of this sensor is input to the servo circuit where diameter of the remaining tape is calculated.
1-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-2. Matching Connectors
Use the following connectors at the ends of the cableswhen connecting the cables during installation and mainte-nance, or alternately use the following cables.
Panel indication Matching connectors/cables
GENLOCK IN (RETURN)TC IN 1-569-370-12TC OUT Plug, BNCTEST OUTVBS/SDI OUT*
HD SDI OUT 1-750-489-21 Plug, BNC orBELDEN 8281 or equivalent
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 1-508-084-00 XLR 3-pin, male
AUDIO OUT Audio cable(XLR 5 pin-XLR 3-pin, 2 m)CCXA-53 made by Sony orequivalent
MIC IN +48 V 1-508-370-00 XLR 5-pin, male
DC IN 1-508-362-00 XLR 4-pin, female
DC OUT 12 V 1-566-425-11 round type 4-pin,male
REMOTE 1-766-848-11 round type 8-pin,male
EARPHONE Mini jack (commercially availableon market)
LIGHT Power tap (OE)Made by ANTONBAUER Inc.,33710 or equivalent
WIRELESS WRR-855A (by Sony) onlyRECEIVER IN connectable
nDo not connect with a connector/cable other than above.
* : Camcorder in which DC-110A board (HKDW-702) is installed.
DC IN : XLR, 4-pin (Male)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 GND _ GND for BATT OUT (+)
2 _ No connection
3 _ No connection
4 BATT OUT (+) IN +11 to 17 V dc
AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2 : XLR, 3-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)MIC/LINE INPUT
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 MIC/LINE (G) _ _60 dBu/+4 dBu, selectable
2 MIC/LINE (X) IN High impedance, Balanced
3 MIC/LINE (Y) IN
AES/EBU INPUT
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 AES/EBU (G) _ 1Vp-p, 110Z, Balanced
2 AES/EBU (X) IN
3 AES/EBU (Y) IN
1-3. Signal Inputs and Outputs
InputsGENLOCK IN (RETURN) : 1.0 V p-p, 75 ZTC IN : 0.5 V to 18 V p-p, 10 kZ
OutputsTEST OUT : 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z unbalancedVBS/SDI OUT*1, 2 : VBS 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z unbalanced,
or SDI 0.8 V p-p, 75 Z, 270 MbpsTC OUT : 1.0 V p-p, 75 ZHD SDI OUT : 0.8 V p-p, 75 Z, 1.485 GbpsEARPHONE : 8 Z or more, _∞ to _18 dBu variable
*1 : Camcorder in which DC-110A board (HKDW-702) is installed.*2 : Selectable by the SD REAR BNC OUT in the OUTPUT SEL page of the
menu.
1
2 3
4
12
3
1-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
DC OUT 12 V : DIN, 4-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 UNREG GND _ GND for POWER
2 _ No connection
3 _ No connection
4 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 to 17 V dc
AUDIO OUT : XLR, 5-pin (Male)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 ANALOG GND _
2 AUDIO CH-1 (X) OUT 0 dBm (600 Z terminated)
3 AUDIO CH-1 (Y) OUT
4 AUDIO CH-2 (X) OUT
5 AUDIO CH-2 (Y) OUT
BATT IN : 5-pin (Male)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 BATT (_) IN
2 BATT ID IN
3 BATT REM IN
4 LIGHT CONT OUT
5 BATT (+) IN +11 to 17 V dc
LENS : 12-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 RET (SW) IN ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN
2 VTR TRIG IN ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN
3 LENS GND _
4 AUTO +5 V IN AUTO : +5 V,MANU : 0 V or OPEN
5 IRIS CONT OUT +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)
6 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 V to 17 V
7 IRIS PSTN IN +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)
8 REMOTE/LOCAL OUT AUTO IRIS : 0 VMANUAL IRIS : +5 V
9 EXTENDER IN EX 2 ON : 0 VEX 0.8 ON : +1.8 VOFF : +4.8 V
10 ZOOM PSTN IN WIDE : 2 V, TELE : 7 V
11 LENS RX
12 LENS TX
WIRELESS RECEIVER IN : D-sub, 15-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 GND _ GND for AUDIO IN
2 AUDIO IN IN WIRELESS RECEIVERAUDIO IN
3 _
4 DC +7V OUT OUT
5 GND _
6 _
7 _
8 GND _
9 WRR CLK IN WRR SERIAL CLOCK
10 CS OUT WRR SELECT
11 WRR DI OUT WRR SERIAL IN
12 WRR DO IN WRR SERIAL OUT
13 _
14 EXT OSC OUT _
15 OSC GND _
14
3 2
1
23
4
5
1 2 3 4 5
123
45678
90!-!=
18
915
1-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VF : 20-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 SDA VF I/O TTL level
2 _ No connection
3 _ No connection
4 SCL VF OUT TTL level
5 COLOR/BW IN ON : Color, OFF : B/W
6 _ No connection
7 _ No connection
8 G TALLY OUT ON : 5 V, OFF : GND
9 VF PEAKING CTL OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
10 _ No connection
11 _ No connection
12 VF VIDEO (Y) OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
13 VF VIDEO GND _ GND for VIDEO
14 VF VIDEO (Pb) OUT ±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
15 VF VIDEO (Pr) OUT ±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
16 _ No connection
17 R TALLY (UP) OUT ON : 5 V, OFF : GND
18 _ No connection
19 VF GND _ GND for VF
20 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 V to 17 V
REMOTE : 8-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 TX RCP DATA (X) OUT SERIAL DATA OUT
2 TX RCP DATA (Y) OUT SERIAL DATA OUT
3 RX RCP DATA (X) IN SERIAL DATA IN
4 RX RCP DATA (Y) IN SERIAL DATA IN
5 TX GND _ GND for TX
6 UNREG +12 V OUT +11 V to 17 V
7 UNREG (GND) _ GND for UNREG
8 Y OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
CHASSIS GND _ CHASSIS GND
LIGHT : 2-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
No. Signal Specifications
1 LIGHT +12 V OUT 50 W MAX
2 GND
MIC IN +++++48 V : XLR, 5-pin (Female)
_____ EXT VIEW _____
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)
No. Signal I/O Specifications
1 CAM MIC (G) _ _50 dBu
2 CAM MIC1 (X) IN High impedance, Balanced
3 CAM MIC1 (Y) IN
4 CAM MIC2 (X) IN
5 CAM MIC2 (Y) IN
18
2 73 645
12
15
4 23
1-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-4. Removing and Reinstalling theOutside Panel Assembly
Removal
nBe sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug thepower cord or remove the battery before starting any of thefollowing procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.
1. Loosen a screw (with drop-safe) in the left of the frontlid assembly.
2. Loosen the four screws (with drop-safe) and removethe outside panel assembly.
Reinstallation
1. Pass the connector of the RM board of the main unitthrough the hole of the outside panel assembly.While inserting the hook of the outside panel assemblyinto the guide shaft of the cassette compartmentassembly, install the outside panel assembly.
2. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.nStandard tightening torque :
Screw (with drop-safe, B3 x 12)80 x 10-2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)
Outside panelassembly
Screws (with drop-safe)
Screws (with drop-safe)
Front lid assembly
Screws (with drop-safe)
RM boardconnector
Screws (with drop-safe)
Hook of outside panel assemblyGuide shaft ofcassette compartmentassembly
1-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-5. Opening and Closing the InsidePanel Assembly
Opening
m. Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug the
power cord or remove the battery before starting any ofthe following procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.
. Insert a piece of paper between the hinge and theconnector box.
1. Loosen the four screws (with drop-safe) and open theinside panel assembly in the direction of the arrow.m. The flexible card wires that is connected to the FP-
152 board, will be significantly shortened its life if itis folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wires.
. Stand the unit in the posture that the POWER switchside faces upward when the inside panel assembly isopened.
Closing
1. Check that the hinges in the right and left are engagedsecurely with the hooks of the chassis.
2. Insert the inside panel assembly and tighten the fourscrews (with drop-safe).nStandard tightening torque :
Screw (with drop-safe, B3 x 12)80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)
nBe careful not to pinch the harness between the insidepanel assembly and the chassis.
Flexible card wires
Inside panelassembly
Screw(with drop-safe)
FP-152 board
Inside panelassembly
Hook
Place a sheet of paper here to protect the frame.
Hinge
POWER switch
Hinge
Hook
Screws(with drop-safe)
Screw(with drop-safe)
1-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-6. Removing and Reinstalling theConnector Box
Removal
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Remove the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the DCP board assembly and the DVP boardassembly. (Refer to Sections 1-7-1 and 1-7-2.)
4. Slide the shoulder pad assembly in the direction of thearrow.
5. Remove the two screws (P2 x 4). While removing theVIDEO OUT assembly, remove the coaxial cable fromthe groove.
6. Disconnect the harness from connectors (CN101 andCN103) on CNB-23 board.
7. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN114)on the RM-201 board.
8. Remove the two precision screws (P2.6 x 5) fixingthe DC IN connector and separate it from the shieldfinger (BATT).
9. Remove the four screws (B3 x 8). Loosen the board-to-board connector that is connected to the MB-1096board. While removing the connector box assembly inthe direction of the arrow, remove the coaxial cableand harness from the groove.
10. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.m. When attaching the VIDEO OUT assembly, route
the coaxial cable such that the coaxial cable passesthrough the groove.
. If the coaxial cable is pinched between the frameand the VIDEO OUT assembly or the CNBOX subpanel, the coaxial cable can have open-circuit.
nStandard tightening torque :P2 x 4 : 19 x 10_2 N.m (1.9 kgf.cm)B3 x 8 : 80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)
CNB-23 board
CN103
CN101
Coaxial cable(Orange)
Groove
Shoulder pad assembly
P2 x 4VIDEO OUT assembly
Coaxial cable (Brown)
B3 x 8
B3 x 8
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
MB-1096 board
Connector box assembly
Groove
DC IN connector
Board-to-boardconnector
Board-to-boardconnector
Shield finger (BATT)
RM-201 board
CN114
Harness
1-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-7. Removing and Reinstalling thePlug-in Boards
When removing and reinstalling the plug-in boards, bevery careful not to damage the parts on the printed boardand also not to install them in the wrong direction or in thewrong slot.
1-7-1. DCP Board Assembly
Removal
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the harness from the coating lead pin, thendisconnect the harnesses from the connectors (CN3and CN4) of the DCP-43 board.
3. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN105) of the DCP-43 board.n. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly
shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.
4. Remove the coaxial cable from the connector (CN1)when the DC-110A board is installed.
5. Remove the four screws. Open the board levers in thedirection of arrow A to release the board-to-boardconnector that is connected to the MB-1096 board.Pull the DCP board assembly in the direction of arrowB to disconnect, and remove the DCP board assembly.
DCP-43 board
DC-110A board
CN3
CN4
CN105
CN1
Flexible card wire
Coaxial cable (Orange)
Coating lead pin
Harnesses
DCP board assembly
MB-1096 board DCP-43 board
Board lever
Board lever
AB
Board-to-boardconnectors
PSW2 x 5
1-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Reinstallation
1. Close the board levers.2. Insert the DCP board assembly into the groove on the
board holder in the direction of arrow A, and raise theDCP board assembly in the direction of arrow B.
3. Connect the DCP board assembly and the MB-1096board with the board-to-board connector.
4. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.m. When re-installing the harness that is disconnected
in step 2, the CN3 harness must be hooked on thetop edge of the AT-172 board.
. When re-installing the CN4 harness, twist it by 3turns and install it by pushing in the direction ofarrow A. The CN4 harness must be installed 20 mmmore far from the CN3 harness.
. Fix the harness with the coating lead pin.
Illustration when viewedfrom the top
Illustration when viewedfrom the front
Distance of20 mm or more
DCP-43 board
DCP-43 board
AT-172 board
AT-172 board
DCP-43 board
CN4
A
CN3CN4
CN3
Harness
Harness
Coating lead pin
DCP board assembly
DCP board assembly
B
A
ABoard holder (F)
Board lever
Board lever
Board-to-boardconnectors
MB-1096 board
1-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Open the board levers in the direction of arrow A andremove the board-to-board connector that is connectedto the MB-1096 board, and remove the DVP boardassembly in the direction of arrow B.
1-7-2. DVP Board Assembly
Removal
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the DCP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
3. Remove the flexible card wire from the EQ-88G boardconnector (CN101).nLife of flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.
4. Remove the two coaxial cables from the connector(CN201, CN202) on the TX-78 board.
5. Remove the three screws (PSW 2 x 5) that fix theDVP board assembly.
EQ-88G board
TX-78 board
DVP board assembly
CN202CN201
Coaxial cable (Green)
Coaxial cable (Brown)
CN101
Flexible card wire
PSW2 x 5
DVP board assembly
DVP board assembly
MB-1096 board
A
B
DVP board assembly
Board lever
Board lever
Board-to-boardconnectors
1-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Reinstallation
1. Close the board levers.2. Insert the DVP board assembly into the groove on the
board holder in the direction of arrow A, and raise theDVP board assembly in the direction of arrow B.
3. Connect the DVP board assembly and the MB-1096board with the board-to-board connector.
4. Reinstall it by reversing the steps of disassembling.nWhen routing the two coaxial cables, pass themthrough the three clamps and the groove on the SDIshield plate, and connect the coaxial cable (green) toCN201 on the TX-78 board, and the coaxial cable(brown) to CN202.
DVP board assembly
DVP board assembly
DVP board assembly
Boardholder (F)
MB-1096 board
B
A
A
A
Board lever
Board-to-boardconnectors
Coaxial cable (Brown)
Coaxial cable (Green)
Groove on the SDI shield plate Insert a sheet of paper in the protected part.
TX-78 board
Clamps
CN201
CN202
1-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-8. Removing and Reinstalling theFlexible Card Wires
This unit uses two types of flexible card wire.m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it
is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.. When a flexible card wire is disconnected, check if it has
peeling-off or scratch on the tin plated contact of theconnector. If the copper plating of the base materialexposes due to wear of the tin plated contact of theconnector, replace it with the new flexible card wire.
Type-A
Removal1. Open the connector latch in the direction of arrow A to
release the lock.2. Remove the flexible card wire in the direction of arrow B.
Reinstallation1. Hold the flexible card wire with its blue surface to the
front, and insert it in the direction of arrow A.2. Close the connector latch in the direction of arrow B to
lock it.
Type-B
Removal1. Open the connector latch in the direction of arrow A to
release the lock.2 Remove the flexible card wire in the direction of arrow B.
Reinstallation1. Hold the flexible card wire with its blue surface to the
front, and insert it in the direction of arrow A.2. Close the connector latch in the direction of arrow B to
lock it.
Flexible card wire
Connector
Connector latch
A
B
Flexible card wire
Connector
Connector latchAB
Blue surface
Flexible card wireConnector
Connector latch
A
B
Flexible card wireConnector
Connector latch
A
B
Blue surface
1-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Remove the three precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5) andmove the cassette compartment assembly by holdingthe specified position as shown in the illustration andremove the cassette compartment assembly in thedirection of the arrow.
Reinstallation
1. Adjust position of the joint arm so that the gap be-tween the outside circumference of the white roller ofthe joint arm and the end surface of the mechanicaldeck assembly is 0.5 mm.
1-9. Removing and Reinstalling theCassette Compartment
m. Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug the
power cord or remove the battery before starting any ofthe following procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.
. Only when the release plate is attached to the T-tensionregulator assembly, remove and reinstall the Cassettecompartment assembly at the thread position shown inthe illustration below. When the TC head is at the otherposition, T-tension regulator assembly interferes with thecassette compartment.
n. Cassette compartment can be removed when it is raised
up or when it pushed down.
Removal1. Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board from the
connector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.3. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board while
removing the cable retainer 2 from the notch.nLife of the FL-283 printed wiring board will besignificantly shortened if it is folded. Be very carefulnot to fold the FL-283 printed wiring board.
T slider (at the front of the TC head)
S slider TC head
CCM-45G board
CN1
FL-283 printed wiring board
Notch
Cable retainer 2
Cassette compartmentassembly
Mechanical deck assembly
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
0.5 mm
Roller (WHT)
Joint arm
1-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Raise the white locking roller of the cassette compart-ment assembly to set the cassette compartmentassembly to its up position.
3. Slide the cam plate (A) of the right side of the cassettecompartment assembly in the direction of the arrow asfar as it can go.
4. Hold the cassette compartment assembly at the positionshown in the illustration and insert the chassis so thatthe two cassette guide pins enter into the round hole ofthe stage.At this moment, confirm that the white roller at theother end of the joint arm that is adjusted of its positionat step 1, enters into the notch of the cam plate (A) onthe right side.
5. Press the lid arm (L) of the cassette compartmentassembly and check to see that the stage can move upand down smoothly. If the stage does not move up anddown smoothly, check above procedure starting fromstep 1.
6. Attach the cassette compartment assembly with threescrews.nStandard tightening torque :
10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)Locking roller (WHT)
Cam plate (A)
Notch ofcam plate (A)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5Lever
Stage
Roller (WHT) at the other end
Roller (WHT) of step 1
Joint arms
Notch
Cassetteguide pin
Cassette guide pin
Round holeof stage
Round holeof stage
1-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Engage the recess of the FL-283 printed wiring boardwith the two claws of the cable retainer 2, and insertthe cable retainer 2 into the notch.
8. Insert the FL-283 printed wiring board into theconnector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.
FL-283 printed wiring board
CCM-45G board
CN1
Recess
Claw
Cable retainer 2
Notch
1-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-10. On-Board Switch/Slit Land Description
For the function of the on-board switches on the APR-59AG board, KY-475G board and SW-1312/1031/1038/1039 board, refer to the Operation Manual.
m. Never change the settings of the switches that are specified as “Factory-use”.. The number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the address on the circuit board.
1-10-1. AT-172 Board
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S1-1 (C-5/B side) SERVICE mode Selects to display or not to display the SERVICE OFFmenu.ON : To display the SERVICE menuOFF : Not to display the SERVICE menu
S1-2 to 7 (C-5/B side) _ Factory-use OFF
S1-8 (C-5/B side) FRAM reset ON : FRAM reset OFFOFF : Normal operationWhen the main power of the unit is turned onwhile the switch S1-8 is being set in ON, FRAM(IC51)/DCP-43 board is reset.Upon completion of resetting, be sure to return theswitch S1-8 to OFF.
m. Resetting the FRAM erases adjusted value
of the SERVICE menu and all of the users’unique values (such as the MENU settings andthe AUTOWHITE/BLACK data).
. Upon completion of resetting the FRAM,be sure to perform the automatic black balanceadjustment using the AUTO W/B BAL switch(on the front block).When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is kept pressed in the BLK position, the display changes as follows.[BLACK SET] → [BLACK BAL] → [BLACK SET].Keep pressing the switch until the second [BLACK SET] is displayed.
. After resetting, return the switch S1-8 to OFF.If not, the adjustment data is not saved in theFRAM hereafter.
C B A
1
2
3
4
5
S3
S2
S1
AT-172 board (B side)
1-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S2-1, 2, 3, 4 (C-4/B side) _ Factory-use OFF
S3 (C-4/B side) TOP MENU Turns ON/OFF the function to display the OFFDISABLE TOP menu.
ON : Not to display the TOP menuOFF : To display the TOP menu
1-10-2. EQ-88G Board
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S1101 (F-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF
1
2
3
A B C D
E
F
S1101
EQ-88G board (A side)
1-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-10-3. FP-152 Board
nRefer to the Operation Manual for the function of the switches on A side.
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S305 (F-5/B side) _ For the REAR EARPHON switching HP (default)
S501 (C-3/B side) AUDIO OUT Set this switch when the AUDIO OUT XLR5PXLR5P-XLR3P connector is changed to XLR3P
S502 (C-4/B side) CUE ON/OFF Selects to output or not to output the CUE OFF (EE)playback signal to the AUDIO OUT connector.(For the CUE adjustment)CUE : To output the CUE playbackEE : Not to output the CUE playback
S809-1 to 4 (G-5/B side) _ Factory-use OFF
FP-152 board (B side)
G F E D
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
B
A
S809 S305
S501
S502
1-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-10-4. MDC-13G Board
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S401 (C-2/B side) _ Factory-use OFF
S402 (C-2/B side) TRACKING MODE Every pressing of this switch toggles the OFF (FIX)change TRACKING mode.
OFF: FIX (fixed) modeON: Variable mode
Tracking RV (RV401) is enabled.nD404 (C-2/B side) turns on when Variable isselected.
S403-1 to 4 (C-2/B side) _ Factory-use OFF
H GF E D
C
B
A1
2
3
4
5
6
S403
S401 S402
MDC-13G board (B side)
1-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-10-5. SS-92G Board
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S101-1 to 2 (C-2/A side) _ Not used _
S101-3, 8 SIGNAL FORMAT Selects the signal format of the HDW unit. S101-3 : ONS101-3 S101-8 S101-8 : ONOFF OFF 59.94i/29.97POFF ON 50i/25PON OFF 24PON ON 23.98P
S101-4 Leaded/Unleaded Recognizes whether the SS-92G board is ONleaded or unleaded.OFF : LeadedON : Unleaded
S101-5 DIP SW SELECT Selects whether to follow the DIP switch setting. OFFOFF : Does not follow the DIP switch.ON : Follows the DIP switch.
S101-6 to 7 REC FORMAT Sets REC FORMAT. S101-6 : OFFS101-6 S101-7 S101-7 : OFFOFF OFF HDCAMOFF ON IMXON OFF D-BETAON ON _
A
B
C
1 2 3 4 5
S101
SS-92G board (A side)
1-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A
1
2
3
B C
D E
S1
RP-131 board (A side)
1-10-6. RP-131 Board
Ref. No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S1-1 (C-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF
S1-2 (C-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF
S1-3 (C-3/A side) _ Factory-use OFF
S1-4 (C-3/A side) NV-RAM reset ON : NV-RAM reset OFFOFF : Normal operationnUpon completion of replacing theRP-131 board, be sure to perform theNV-RAM reset. (Refer to Section 1-17-4.)
1-10-7. AXM-33 Board
For the details of the functions of the switch S101 and S201 on the A side, refer to the operatin manual.
Ref No. Address Name Description Factory setting
S202 (A-2/A side) INPUT Sets the input reference level. +4 dBREFERENCE +4 dB : Sets the input reference level to +4 dB.
0 dB : Sets the input reference level to 0 dB._3 dB : Sets the input reference level to _3 dB.
AXM-33 board (A side)
BA
1
2S202
S101 S201
+4
0
_3
+4 dB0 dB
_3 dB
1-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-11. How to Eject a Cassette TapeManually
nBe sure to set the POWER switch to OFF, unplug thepower cord or remove the battery before starting any of thefollowing procedure to protect inside of the unit fromdamage.
1. Open the drop protection (ME) of the outside panelassembly in the direction of the arrow.
2. Align tip of a philips (+) screwdriver with the manualeject gear (A) tooth and push the manual eject gear (A)to rotate the manual eject gear (A) in the clockwisedirection.nWhen rotating the manual eject gear (A), check to seethat a tape is wound onto the cassette reel.
3. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) until the front lidassembly is opened. When the front lid assembly isopened, take out a cassette tape.
m. When the front lid assembly is opened, never rotate the
manual eject gear (A).. How to close the front lid assembly
The front lid assembly cannot be closed and locked if themanual eject gear (A) is completely rotated opening thefront lid assembly. Close the front lid assembly either byrotating the manual eject gear (A) by 2 or 3 turns in thecounter-clockwise direction while pushing in the manualeject gear (A), or by turning off the main power and thenback on.
If the front lid assembly cannot be opened eventhough the manual eject gear (A) is rotated
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. While raising up the cassette lid of a cassette tape,move up the cassette compartment assembly. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
3. Take out a cassette tape with care not to damage a tapeinside.
Outside panelassembly
Drop protection (ME)
Gear
Rotate it whilepushing in.(Clockwise direction)
Front lid assembly
Philips (+) screwdriver
1-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Manual Eject after Error
When an error has occurred, due to large slack on the tapeor mechanical trouble, the tape may not be wound onto thecassette reel correctly with the normal manual ejectprocedure.Perform manual eject after an error has occurred in thefollowing steps.
1. Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Check the condition of the tape.
If the tape has slack, make sure that the tape is nothooked onto the guide roller or other parts.
3. Press and hold the manual eject knob, and turn itclockwise.At this time, turn the knob while watching that the tapeis not hooked onto the pinch arm, threading arm, Sslider, T slider, or any other parts.
4. When all the guides are stored in the cassette, stopturning the knob. (See the figure.)If the knob is turned too much, the cassette compart-ment moves up.If the tape still has slack at this time, the tape isdamaged.
When the S slider and the T slider reach theindicated positions in this figure
5. If the tape still has slack, turn the capstan motorcounterclockwise until the tape has no slack. (Windthe tape with the T-side reel at this time.)If the tape still has slack even after this, turn thecapstan motor clockwise to eliminate the slack.(Wind the tape with the S-side reel at this time.)If the tape still has slack even after this, raise thecassette lid of the cassette tape, and perform step 6.
6. Press and hold the manual eject knob, and turn itclockwise until the cassette compartment moves up.
T slider
Cassette
S slider
1-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-12. How to Insert a Cassette TapeWhile the Outside Panel Assemblyis Being Removed
nDo not use nor press the lid arm (L) when the cassettecompartment assembly is moving down to the DOWNposition in step 4 below.If the lid arm (L) is pressed, the lid arm (L) may bedeformed. If the lid arm (L) is deformed, the front covermay not be locked any more after the outside panelassembly is reinstalled.
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Move the cassette compartment assembly to the UPposition. (Refer to Section 1-9.). When the main power is turned on :
Press the EJECT button.. When the main power is turned off :
Raise the locking roller (WHT) in the direction ofthe arrow.
3. Insert a cassette tape to the cassette compartmentassembly.
4. Insert a screwdriver tip or the like into the hole of thecassette compartment assembly as shown and move thecassette compartment assembly in the direction of thearrow until the cassette compartment assembly islocked. Doing this, the cassette compartment assemblymoves to the DOWN position.
1-13. How to Clean the Heads When theHeads are Clogged
When the heads are clogged, clean them by the followingsteps below using a cleaning tape.If head clogging cannot be cleaning even though thefollowing “How to Use the Cleaning Tape” is implement-ed, clean the heads by referring to “2-1. Cleaning”.
How to Use the Cleaning Tape
Required tool. Cleaning tape BCT-HD12CL
nBe sure to use the cleaning tape that is specified above.If any cleaning tape other than the specified one is used, itcan result in abnormal abrasion or fatal damage of videoheads.
1. Insert the cleaning tape BCT-HD12CL in the unit.2. Head cleaning starts automatically. After about five
seconds of tape running, the cleaning tape is ejected.3. Confirm that the head clogging is removed.
If the heads remain clogged even after the above step 2is implemented, clean the heads with the cleaningcloth.(Refer to “2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum TapeRunning Surface and Video Heads.”)
Hole of the cassette compartmentassembly
Cassette compartmentassembly
Locking roller (WHT)
Lid arm (L)
Screwdriver or the like
1-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-14. List of Tools and Measuring Equipment
1-14-1. Tools
Fig. No. Part No. Description Used for
1 A-8327-706-A DCP-DVP extension Extending the DCP/DVP board assembly/assembly extending the EQ-88G board/ extending the
HKDW-703 (MY-99 board)1-A 1-783-253-11 Coaxial cable assembly (Refer to Sections 1-15-3, 1-15-4, 1-15-5,
1-15-6, 1-15-7 and 1-15-8.)
2 1-831-116-11 Flexible card wire Extending the CCD unit (Refer to Section 1-15-11.)(30 core, 250 mm)
3 1-831-117-11 Flexible card wire Extending the SS-92G board/extending the(45 core, 250 mm) mechanical deck assembly
(Refer to Sections 1-15-9 and 1-15-12.)nThe four flexible card wires of this type arerequired to extend the SS-92G board. The sixflexible card wires of this type are required toextend the mechanical deck assembly.
4 A-8327-709-A RP extension assembly Extending the RP-131 board/checking the PA-340board (Refer to Section 1-15-10.)
5 A-8327-636-A 100P-EXT assembly Extending the EQ-88G board/extending theHKDW-703 (MY-99 board)(Refer to Sections 1-15-7 and 1-15-8.)
6 A-8327-457-A EX-764 board Extending the mechanical deck assembly.(Refer to Section 1-15-12.)nThe three EX-764 boards are required to extendthe mechanical deck assembly.
7 A-8327-708-A AT-DC extension assembly Extending the AT-172/HKDW-702 (DC-110A7-A 1-783-282-14 Flexible card wire (50 core) board) (Refer to Sections 1-15-1 and 1-15-2.)/
8 A-8327-707-A DR extension assembly Extending the CCD unit/extending the DCP boardassembly (Refer to Sections 1-15-4 and 1-15-11.)
9 A-8327-637-A SS-EXT assembly Extending the SS-92G board(Refer to Section 1-15-9.)
0 A-8327-453-A EX-784 board Extending the DCP board assembly/extendingthe DVP board assembly(Refer to Sections 1-15-4 and 1-15-6.)
!- A-8327-454-A EX-785 board Extending the DVP board assembly(Refer to Section 1-15-6.)
0
!-
7-A
1
1-A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Fig. No. Part No. Description Used for
!= J-6001-820-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (3) Upper drum eccentricity adjustment
![ J-6001-830-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (2)
!] J-6325-530-A Drum eccentricity adjustment (6)
!\ J-6026-110-A Multi burst chart Camera adjustment
J-6026-130-B Gray-scale chart (Transparent type) (4: 3)
Commercially Gray-scale chart (Reflective type) (4: 3)available on market
J-6394-080-A Gray-scale chart (Transparent type) (16: 9)
!; J-6029-140-B Pattern box PTB-500
!' J-6035-070-A IC extraction tool (CT-2101) Removing the PLCC IC
!, J-6080-840-A Mirror (small oval type) Video tracking adjustment
!. J-6152-450-A Wire clearance check gauge Clearance check
@/ J-6322-420-B Tape guide adjustment screwdriver (45) Tape path adjustment
J-6322-420-3 Tool, 0.89 bit (45)
@- J-6323-530-A Stop washer fastening tool Stop washer installation
@= J-6323-890-A Torque cassette (FWD back tension) FWD back tension adjustment
@[ J-6324-150-A Reel table height gauge Reel table height adjustment
@] J-7032-610-C Cassette reference plate
!; !' !, !.
!= ![ !] !\
@/ @- @= @[
10JB-OOOO
MW-389
@]
1-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
@. #/ #- #=
@\ @; @' @,
#[ #] #\ #;
d
Fig. No. Part No. Description Used for
@\ J-6325-110-A Torque screwdriver bit (For M1.4) Fastening screw
J-6325-380-A Torque screwdriver bit (For M2)
@; J-6326-120-A Hexagon bit (For torque screwdriver)(size 1.5)
@' J-6325-400-A Torque screwdriver (For 3 kg)
@, J-6325-360-B Flatness check tool Upper drum assembly replacement
@. J-6531-110-A Drum install plate DJH-27A
#/ A-8315-553-B HN-255 assembly Video tracking adjustment
#- 3-184-527-01 Cleaning cloth Cleaning
#= 7-432-950-03 Sealant TSE-392W Adhesive sealing agent to preventwater drop
#[ 7-661-018-18 Diamond oil NT-68 Lubricant(Mitsubishi diamond oil hydro-fluid) (50 ml)
#] 7-651-000-10 Sony (SGL-601) 50 g grease
7-651-000-11 Sony (SGL-801) 50 g grease
#\ 7-700-736-05 L-shaped HEX (1.5 mm) wrench Removing screw
7-700-736-06 L-shaped HEX (0.89 mm) wrench
#; 8-960-076-01 Alignment tape, HR5-1A Audio/video adjustment
8-960-076-11 Alignment tape, HR2-1A Video tracking adjustment
#' 9-919-573-01 Cleaning fluid TTP cleaning
#'
1-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
#, #. $/ $-
* : The component tool assembly (CN-2070 board) is the tool to output the HD analog component signal (Y/Pb/Pr). Use this tool to checkthe circuits without using the HD SDI. Insert the component tool assembly (CN-2070 board) to the slot that is assigned to wirelessreceiver, output the HD analog component signal (Y/Pb/Pr).
1-14-2. Measuring Equipment
Use the calibrated equipment or equivalent as listed below for the adjustments.
Required equipment Model name
Oscilloscope Tektronix 2465
Digital oscilloscope Tektronix TDS460A
HD analog waveform monitor Tektronix 1735HD
HD digital waveform monitor Tektronix WFM1125
Frequency counter Advantest TR 5821AK
Digital voltmeter Advantest TR 6845
B/W monitor Sony BVM-D20F1J
Audio analyzer Tektronix AA501A (OP.2)
Generator Tektronix SG-5010
Fig. No. Part No. Description Used for
#, J-6531-100-A Sensor MCB (DF-110) tool assembly Photo sensor replacement
#. A-8326-017-A ROM-28 board AT-172 board ROM version upgrading
$/ A-8328-404-A Component tool assembly Component tool assembly*
$- 7-700-751-01 Box screwdriver (size 4.5 mm)
$= J-6531-270-A S3 guide height adjustment tool adjustment of the S3 guide
$[ 3-703-358-04 Parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) adjustment of the gear chain phase
$] J-6531-280-A FL-272 board For the Software download
$\ J-6531-320-A SYSCON/SERVO ROM For the Software download
__ 7-432-114-11 Screw lock
__ Commercially Blank tape, BCT-40HD For recording
available on market Cleaning tape, BCT-HD12CL Head cleaning
Memory label made by Sony, Adjustment after replacement of theMLB-1M-100 CCM-45G board
Memory Stick Saving the camera setup data
$= $[ $] $\
1-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-14-3. Alignment Tapes
The alignment tapes that are required for adjustment of this unit are listed below.1. Alignment tape HR2-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-11)
2. Alignment tape HR5-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-01)
TIME CODE
(00:00:00:00)CTL PULSE
(00:20:00:00)
(00:25:00:00)
(00:30:00:00)
(00:15:00:00)00:15:00:00
Ordinary time code here after TIME CODE
CTL CUE
1 kHz0 VU
12 kHz0 VU
8T A ch onlyMarker at the SAT IN point at the top of frame
A ch 8TC ch 8T
A/C ch, front half 8T, latter half 2TB/D ch, front half 2T, latter half 8T
2TMarker at the A ch SAT IN point at the top of frameAll ch
VIDEO / AUDIO
TIME CODE
00h00m00s1 kHz _20 dBFS
1 kHz 0 dBFS
20 Hz _20 dBFS
20 kHz _20 dBFS
_∞ dBFS
CTL VIDEO CUE
Color Bars (100%)
RAMP
Multi Burst
Above signals are repeated
See the table below.
D-AUDIO
00h02m00s
00h04m00s
00h06m00s
00h08m00s
00h10m00s
00h15m00s
00h20m00s
00h30m00s
TIME CODE
00: 00: 00: 00
00: 01: 25: 0000: 01: 30: 00
00: 02: 25: 0000: 02: 30: 00
00: 02: 55: 0000: 03: 00: 00
00: 03: 25: 0000: 03: 30: 00
00: 03: 55: 0000: 04: 00: 00
00: 04: 25: 0000: 04: 30: 00
00: 04: 55: 00
00: 05: 00: 00
00: 06: 25: 0000: 06: 30: 00
00: 07: 25: 0000: 07: 30: 00
00: 07: 55: 0000: 08: 00: 00
00: 08: 25: 0000: 08: 30: 00
00: 08: 55: 0000: 09: 00: 00
00: 09: 25: 0000: 09: 30: 00
00: 09: 55: 00
00: 10: 00: 00
00: 11: 25: 0000: 11: 30: 00
00: 12: 25: 0000: 12: 30: 00
00: 12: 55: 0000: 13: 00: 00
00: 13: 25: 0000: 13: 30: 00
00: 13: 55: 0000: 14: 00: 00
00: 14: 25: 0000: 14: 30: 00
00: 14: 55: 00
00: 15: 00: 00
00: 16: 25: 0000: 16: 30: 00
00: 17: 25: 0000: 17: 30: 00
00: 17: 55: 0000: 18: 00: 00
00: 18: 25: 0000: 18: 30: 00
00: 18: 55: 0000: 19: 00: 00
00: 19: 25: 0000: 19: 30: 00
00: 19: 55: 00
1 kHz 0 VU
1 kHz -20 VU
3 kHz -20 VU
7 kHz -20 VU
10 kHz -20 VU
12 kHz -20 VU
90 Hz -20 VU
CUE
1-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15. How to Extend the Circuit Board
1-15-1. Extending the AT-172 Board
Required tool : AT-DC extension assembly
nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened ifit is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible cardwire.
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the two screws and remove the AT-172 board
3. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-778board side) to the connector (CN5) on the DCP-43board.
4. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-777board side) to the connector (CN5) on the AT-172board.
AT-172 board
DCP-43 board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
AT-172 board
DCP-43 board
EX-777 board
EX-778 board
CN5
CN5
AT-DCextension assembly
1-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-2. Extending the HKDW-702 (DC-110ABoard)
Required tool : AT-DC extension assembly
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector(CN1) on the DC-110A board.
3. Remove the three screws and remove the DC-110Aboard.
4. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-778board side) to the connector (CN6) on the DCP-43board.
5. Connect the AT-DC extension assembly (EX-777board side) to the connector (CN6) on the DC-110Aboard.
6. Connect the coaxial cable that is disconnected in step 2to the connector (CN1) on the DC-110A board.
DC-110A board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
DCP-43 board
Coaxial cable (Orange)
CN1
DCP-43 board
EX-778 board
EX-777 board
AT-DC extension assemblyCN6
DC-110A board
Coaxial cable (Orange)
CN6 CN1
1-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-3. Extending the DCP Board Assembly
Required tool : DCP-DVP extension assembly
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it
is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damage
the coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Connect the connector (CN1) of the DCP-DVP
extension assembly to the connector (CN104) on theMB-1096 board.
4. Connect the removed DCP board assembly to theconnector (CN2) of the DCP-DVP extension assembly.
5. Connect the harness, coaxial cable and flexible cardwire of the connectors (CN1, CN3, CN4, CN105) thatare removed in step 2 to the connectors (CN3, CN5,CN7, CN11) on the DCP-DVP extension assembly.
6. Connect the harness and flexible card wire of theDCP-DVP extension assembly to the connectors(CN3, CN4, CN105) on the DCP board assembly.
7. Connect CN12 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN1 on the DC-110A board with the coaxial cablesupplied with the DCP-DVP extension assembly.
DCP-DVPextension assembly
DCP board assembly
CN1
CN2
CN104MB-1096 board
DCP board assembly
DC-110A board
DCP-DVP extension assembly
CN3
CN1
CN11
CN12CN5
CN7
CN3
CN4
CN105
Coaxial cable (Orange)
Coaxial cable
Flexible card wire
CN8
CN4 CN6
1-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-4. Extending the DCP Board Assembly(When you want to check the B sideor a part of A side of the DVP boardassembly)
Required tools : EX-784 board, flexible card wire(30 core, 250 mm) (DCP-DVP extensionassembly), EX-776 board (DR extensionassembly)
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the DCP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
3. Connect the EX-784 board to the connector (CN104)on the MB-1096 board.
4. Remove the flexible card wire from the connector(CN1) on the DR-614 board and connect the optionalflexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm) in stead of it.
5. Connect the connector (CN105) of the DCP-43 boardto the other end of the flexible card wire (30 core, 250mm).
6. Connect the coaxial cable to the connector (CN1) onthe DC-110A board.
7. Connect the harness that is removed from the connector(CN3) of the DCP-43 board to the connector (CN1) onthe EX-776 board. Connect the harness of the EX-776board to the connector (CN3) on the DCP-43 board.nThe harness may be left unconnected to the connector(CN4) of the DCP-43 board.
8. Slant the DCP board assembly in the direction ofarrow A and connect it to the connector (CN104) onthe EX-784 board.
CN1(DC-110A board)
CN1(DR-614 board)
EX-784 board
CN105(DCP-43 board)
CN3(DCP-43 board)
CN1(EX-776 board)
Coaxial cable(Orange)
Flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)
CN104(MB-1096 board)
DCP board assembly
CN104(EX-784 board)
A
1-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-5. Extending the DVP Board Assembly
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
Required tool : DCP-DVP extension assembly
1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Remove the DVP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-2.)4. Connect the connector (CN1) on the DCP-DVP extension as-
sembly to the connector (CN103) on the MB-1096 board.5. Connect the removed DVP board assembly to the con-
nector (CN2) on the DCP-DVP extension assembly.
6. Connect coaxial cable and flexible card wire of theconnectors (CN101 and CN202) that are removedfrom in step 3, to the connectors (CN9 and CN13) onthe DCP-DVP extension assembly.
7. Connect the flexible card wire of the DCP-DVPextension assembly to CN101 on the EQ-88G board ofthe DVP board assembly.
8. Connect CN14 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN201 on the TX-78 board of the DVP boardassembly with the coaxial cable supplied with theDCP-DVP extension assembly.
9. Attach the DCP board assembly that is removed instep 2, and connect the two harnesses, the flexible cardwire and the coaxial cable, respectively.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
CN2
DVP board assembly
DCP-DVPextension assembly
CN103
CN1
MB-1096 board
CN101
CN13
CN9
CN14
CN201
EQ-88G board
TX-78 board
DCP-DVPextension assembly
Flexible card wire
Coaxial cable
Coaxial cable(Brown)
1-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-6. Extending the DVP Board Assembly(When you want to check the B sideor a part of A side of the SS-92Gboard)
Required tools : EX-785 board, EX-784 board,flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm/45 core,250 mm) (DCP-DVP extension assembly)
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the DCP board assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)3. Remove the DVP board assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)4. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-
tion cover.5. Remove the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN4) on the MDR-14G board and connect theoptional flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm) to theconnector CN4) on the MDR-14G board.
6. Extend the DCP board assembly with the use of theEX-784 board, flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)and EX-776 board (DR extension assembly).(Refer to steps 3 to 8 of Section 1-15-4.)
7. Connect the EX-785 board to the connector (CN103)on the MB-1096 board.
8. Connect the coaxial cable to the connector (CN201) onthe TX-78 board.
9. Connect the other end of the flexible card wire (45P,250 mm) that is connected in step 5, to the connector(CN101) on the EQ-88G board.
10. Slant the DVP board assembly in the direction ofarrow A and connect it to the connector (CN103) onthe EX-785 board.
PSW2 x 5
Dust protection cover
CN4(MDR-14G board)
CN4(MDR-14G board)
Flexible card wire(45 core, 250 mm)
Flexible card wire
CN201(TX-78 board)EX-785 boardCN103
(MB-1096 board) CN101(EQ-88G board)
Flexible card wire(45 core, 250 mm)
Coaxial cable
DVP board assembly
CN103(EX-785 board)
DCP board assembly
A
1-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-7. Extending the EQ-88G Board
Required tools : DCP-DVP extension assembly,100P-EXT assembly
m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
. Do not bend the coaxial cable strongly or do not damagethe coaxial cable by hooking it on the frame.
1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of “1-15-5. Extending the DVPBoard Assembly”.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the EQ-88Gboard.
3. Connect the connector (CN102) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN100) on the EQ-88Gboard.
4. Connect the connector (CN100) of the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN102) on the DVP-41board.
5. Connect the coaxial cable (CN201) that is removed, tothe connector (CN13) on the DCP-DVP extensionassembly.
6. Connect CN14 on the DCP-DVP extension assemblyto CN201 on the TX-78 board with the coaxial cablesupplied with DCP-DVP extension assembly.
7. Connect the DCP board assembly that is removed instep 1, and connect the two harnesses, the flexible cardwire and the coaxial cable respectively.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
EQ-88G board
P3 x 4
P3 x 4
DVP board assembly
EQ-88G board
100P-EXT assemblyCN100
CN102
100P-EXT assembly
DCP-DVPextension assembly
DVP-41 board
TX-78 board
EQ-88G board
CN100
CN9
CN14
CN13
CN201
CN101
CN102
Flexible card wire
Flexible card wire
Coaxial cables
Coaxial cables (Brown)
1-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-8. Extending the HKDW-703(MY-99 Board)
Required tools : DCP-DVP extension assembly,100P-EXT assembly
1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of “1-15-5. Extending the DVPBoard Assembly”.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the MY-99 board.
3. Connect the connector (CN102) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN101) on the MY-99board.
4. Connect the connector (CN100) on the 100P-EXTassembly to the connector (CN101) on the DVP-41board.
5. Perform steps 6 to 9 of “1-15-5. Extending the DVPBoard Assembly”.
MY-99 board
PWH1.4 x 3.5 PWH1.4 x 3.5
DVP board assembly
DVP-41 board
MY-99 board
100P-EXT assembly
100P-EXT assembly
CN101
CN102
CN101
CN100
Step 3
1-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-9. Extending the SS-92G Board
Required tools : SS-EXT assembly,Flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm)(4 wires)
nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened ifit is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible cardwire.
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the DCP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
3. Remove the DVP board assembly.(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)
4. Remove the harness clamp.5. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-
tion cover.6. Remove the flexible card wires from the connectors
(CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92G board.
7. Remove the screw and remove the SS PC board retainer.8. Remove the SS-92G board from the MB-1096 board.9. Remove the flexible card wires from the connectors
(CN201 and CN202) on the MDC-13G board.
10. Connect the four optional flexible card wires (45 core)to the connectors (CN101, CN102, CN201, CN202) onthe SS-EXT assembly.
CN201
CN202
SS-92G board
Flexible card wires
PSW2 x 5
Dust protection cover
Harness clamp
SS-EXT assembly
CN101
CN102
CN202
CN201Flexible card wires(45 core)
Flexible card wires(45 core)
CN201
CN202
SS-92G board
MDC-13G board
Flexible card wires
MB-1096 board
SS PC board retainer
PSW2 x 5
1-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11. Connect the connector (CN1) on the SS-EXT assem-bly to the connector (CN102) on the MB-1096 board.
12. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the connectors (CN101 and CN102) on the SS-EXT assembly, to the connectors (CN201 and CN202)on the MDC-13G board.
13. Connect the connector (CN102) on the SS-92G boardto the connector (CN1) on the SS-EXT assembly.
14. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the connectors (CN201 and CN202) on the SS-EXT assembly, to the connectors (CN201 and CN202)on the SS-92G board.
1-15-10. Extending the RP-131 Board(When you want to check the B sideor the A side of the PA-340 board)
Required tool : RP extension assembly
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Remove the three screws and remove the RP-131board.
3. Connect the RP extension assembly to the RP-131board and to the PA-340 board as shown in theillustration.
CN202
CN102
CN1
CN101
CN102
CN201
SS-EXT assembly
MB-1096 board
Flexible card wires(45 core)
MDC-13G board
CN201
CN201
CN202
CN202CN1
SS-92G board
SS-EXT assembly
SS-EXT assembly
CN102
Flexible card wires(45 core)
RP-131 board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
RP extension assembly
RP extension assembly
PA-340 board
RP-131 board
CN1
CN1
CN1
CN1
1-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-15-11. Extending the CCD Unit
Required tools : DR extension assembly(EX-776 board, EX-831 board,EX-832 board),Flexible card wire (30 core, 250 mm)
m. Use the flexible card wire (30 core) that is supplied with
the DCP-DVP extension assembly.. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened
if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexiblecard wire.
1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN3) on
the DCP-43 board.4. Disconnect the harnesses and the flexible card wires
from the connectors (CN1, CN8, and CN9) on the DR-614 board.
5. Remove the screw (PSW2 x 5), and remove the CHBstay from the DCP holder (F).
6. Remove the four screws (B3 x 10) and remove theCCD unit in the direction of the arrow.
7. Disconnect the two harnesses from the connector(CN502, CN503) of the IFA-19G board.
8. Connect the harnesses that are removed the DR-614board, to the connectors (CN3 and CN5) on the EX-831 board and to the EX-832 board. Connect theharnesses on the EX-831 board and the EX-832 boardto the connectors (CN8 and CN9) of the DR-614 board.
CN8
CN1
CN9
CN3
CCD unit
Flexible cardwire
DR-614 board
DCP-43 board
B3 x 10
B3 x 10
PSW 2x5
PSW 2x5DCP holder (F)
CHB stay
CN503
CN502
IFA-19G board
DR-614 board
EX-831 board
EX-832 board
CN9
CN8
CN3
CN5
1-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9. Connect the harness that is removed the DCP-43board, to the connector (CN1) on the EX-776 board.Connect the harnesses of the EX-776 board to theconnector (CN3) on the DCP-43 board.
10. Connect the flexible card wire (30 core) to the connec-tor (CN1) on the DR-614 board and to the connector(CN105) on the DCP-43 board.
1-15-12. Extending the Mechanical DeckAssembly
Required tools : EX-764 board (3 boards),Flexible card wire (45 core, 250 mm) (6 wires)
nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if itis folded. Be very careful not to fold the flexible card wire.
1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Remove the DCP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)4. Remove the DVP board assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-2.)5. Remove the harness clamp.6. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-
tion cover.7. Remove the flexible card wires from the connector
(CN101) on the MB-1096 board, the connectors(CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92G board and theconnector (CN4) on the MDR-14G board.
DR-614 board
EX-776 board
DCP-43 board
CN1
CN1
CN3
CN105
Flexible card wires(30 core)
CN201CN202
SS-92G board
MB-1096 board
MDR-14G board
Flexible card wire
Flexible card wires
CN101
CN4
PSW2 x 5
Dust protectioncover
Harness clamp
1-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Remove the FL-283 printed wiring board from theconnector (CN1) on the CCM-45G board.
9. While removing the cable retainer 2, remove the FL-283 printed wiring board.nLife of FL-283 printed wiring board will be signifi-cantly shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not tofold the FL-283 printed wiring board.
10. Loosen the five screws (with drop-safe) and move themechanical deck assembly as shown in the illustrationand remove it in the direction of the arrow.
11. Prepare the three EX-764 boards and the six flexiblecard wires (45 core). Assemble them as shown in theillustration.
12. Connect the flexible card wires (45 core) that comefrom the respective extension board, to the connector(CN101) on MDC-13G board and to the connectors(CN201 and CN202) on the MDC-13G board respec-tively.nWhen extending the mechanical deck assembly, placea protection sheet underneath the mechanical deckassembly beforehand and extend it.
CCM-45G board
CN1 Cable retainer 2
Notch
FL-283 printed wiring board
Screw(with drop-safe)
Screw(with drop-safe)
Screws(with drop-safe)
Mechanical deck assembly
Mechanical deckassembly
MDC-13G board Protection sheet
EX-764 board
EX-764 boards
CN101
CN201
CN202
1-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
13. Connect the flexible card wires of the EX-764 board tothe connector (CN101) on the MB-1096 board and tothe connectors (CN201 and CN202) on the SS-92Gboard respectively.
1-16. Description on Cassette Mechanism
Cassette tape has the record inhibit plug and tabs fordetecting various settings on the rear surface.
HDCAM cassette
1 Tape thickness detecting hole234 Cassette type detecting tabs5 Cleaning cassette detecting tab6 S-cassette record inhibition plug
SS-92G board MB-1096 board
Flexible card wires of the EX-764 board
Flexible card wire on the EX-764 board
To CN202 onthe MDC-13G board
CN201
CN101
CN202
To CN201 onthe MDC-13Gboard
To CN101 onthe MDC-13G board
632 41 5
Small cassette (S cassette)
1-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
On the Record Inhibition Plug
On the Various Detecting Tabs
HDCAM cassette
No. Used for Equipped with tab (closed) Not equipped with tab (open)
1 For detecting tape thickness Tape thickness is 13.5 um
5 For detection of the cleaning Normal cassette tape Cleaning cassette tape|cassette tape
234 For detection of cassette On the HDCAM Cassette, only tab 4 is removed. (open)types The cassette tapes are indicated by the combination of the three tabs.
(See the table below.)
Tabs for detection of cassette types (OOOOO : Close, : Open)
Tab status 243 Type of cassette tape Remarks
HDCAM
Betacam/Betacam SP This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.
Betacam SX This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.
Digital Betacam This type of cassette cannot be used in this unit.
, , , Others than the above These types of cassette cannot be used in this unit.
<Recording possible> <Recording impossible>
Rear surface of cassette
Plug is raised to the same surface as the rear surface
Plug is pushed down
1-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-17. Adjustments/Setting Items WhenBoards Are Replaced
When the following boards are replaced, implement thespecified adjustments and checks referring to “8. Mechani-cal Alignment”, “9. Electrical Alignment of CameraSystem” and “10. Electrical Alignment of VTR System”.The boards that are specified below do not require adjust-ments and checks when they are replaced.Refer to “1-1-1. Circuit Configuration and Locations of thePrinted Wiring Boards” for the board used in each model.
Board name Section to be referred to
CCM-45G board 1-17-12. CCM-45G Board
CN-2871 board 1-17-2. CN-2871 Board
DC-110A board 1-17-14. DC-110A Board(HKDW-702)
DCP-43 board 1-17-7. DCP-43 Board
DR-614 board 1-17-1. DR-614 Board
EQ-88G board 1-17-11. EQ-88G Board
FP-152 board 1-17-10. FP-152 Board
IFA-19G board 1-17-13. IFA-19G Board
MDC-13G board 1-17-8. MDC-13G Board
MDR-14G board 1-17-9. MDR-14G Board
PA-340 board 1-17-3. PA-340 Board
RP-131 board 1-17-4. RP-131 Board
TG-256 board 1-17-5. TG-256 Board
CCD unit 1-17-6. CCD Unit
1-17-1. DR-614 Board
EEPROM replacement
The EEPROM (IC31) is installed in the DR-614 board.When the DR-614 board is replaced, remove IC31 fromthe former board and reinstall it to the new replacementDR-614 board.nThe initial data for this model cannot be written into thenew EEPROM (IC31) outside the factory.When IC31 needs to be replaced due to defective IC,contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment
1-17-2. CN-2871 Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment
1-17-3. PA-340 Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment
1-17-4. RP-131 Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment
NV-RAM Adjustment Item
NV-RAM (IC19) is installed in the RP-131 board.When the RP-131 board is replaced, perform the followingNV-RAM adjustments.
1. Set the switch S1-4/RP-131 board to ON and then setthe switch S1-2/AT-172 board to ON.
2. Turn on the power.3. Set the switch S1-4/RP-131 board to OFF. After 10
seconds have elapsed, set the switch S1-2/AT-172board to OFF.
4. Turn off the power once then back ON. Doing thisreset the data.
5. Keep pressing the AUTO W/B BAL switch (frontblock) in the BLK position for an extended time.nWhen the AUTO W/B BAL switch is kept pressed inthe BLK position, the display changes as follows.[BLACK SET] → [BLACK BAL] → [BLACK SET].Keep pressing the switch until the second [BLACKSET] is displayed.
1-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-17-5. TG-256 Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-7. VSUB Adjustment9-8. PA Gain Adjustment
1-17-6. CCD Unit
Adjustment Items when CCD Unit is Replaced
8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment
1-17-7. DCP-43 Board
The EEPROM (IC611) and FRAM (IC51) are installed inthe DCP-43 board.When these ICs are replaced, implement the followingadjustments.
Adjustment Items when board or EEPROM orFRAM is Replaced
FRAM reset and black balance adjustment.(Refer to Section 1-10-1.)nAfter the board replacement or the FRAM replacement, besure to perform the FRAM reset and black balance adjust-ment before the adjustments as shown below.
9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment9-5. VA Gain Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment9-11. Black Shading Adjustment9-12. White Shading Adjustment9-13. Flare Adjustment
1-17-8. MDC-13G Board
The EEPROM (IC403) is installed in the MDC-13G board.Implement the following adjustments when this IC isreplaced, too.nBe sure to implement the setting which enables to save thecontents of the EEPROM to the backup RAM beforereplacing the MDC-13G board.(Refer to Section 11-3-8.)When this setting is performed, the contents of the backupRAM are restored into EEPROM at the first power-on afterthe MDC-13G board is replaced.
Setting Items before Staring to Replace the Boardor EEPROM
Saving the backup data of EEPROM contents11-3-8. MDC-13 Board Change
Adjustment Items when Board or EEPROM isReplaced
Initialization of servo adjustment data10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment Data Initialization
Servo system alignment10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment10-5-3. Capstan Add-On Recording Adjustment10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment
CUE audio system alignment10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias Preset Adjustment10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-110-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2
1-17-9. MDR-14G Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
Servo system alignment10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment
1-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-17-10. FP-152 Board
Adjustment Items when Board is Replaced
System control adjustment and settingSetting the data and time of internal watch(For the setting procedure, refer to “ 4-8. TIME/DATEDisplay”.)10-4-1. Voltage Correction Adjustment
Audio system alignment10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control (Inside Panel)
Adjustment10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-110-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2
1-17-11. EQ-88G Board
The EEPROM (IC1104) is installed in the EQ-88G board.Implement the following adjustments when this IC isreplaced.
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
RF System Adjustment10-6-1. RF System Continuous Automatic Adjustment10-6-2. Saving the RF System Adjustment Data10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check
1-17-12. CCM-45G Board
Adjustment Item when the Board is Replaced
10-4-2. Antenna Tuning Frequency Adjustment
1-17-13. IFA-19G Board
EEPROM replacement
The EEPROM (IC202) is installed in the IFA-19G board.When the IFA-19G board is replaced, remove IC202 fromthe former board and reinstall it to the new replacementIFA-19G board.nThe initial data for this model cannot be written into thenew EEPROM (IC202) outside the factory.When IC202 needs to be replaced due to defective IC,contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
1-17-14. DC-110A Board (HKDW-702)
Check if it performs correctly after replacing the DC-110Aboard. (Refer to Section 1 of the HKDW-702 InstallationManual.)
1-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-18. Contents of the EEPROM, NV-RAM and FRAM Data
The data that is stored in the EEPROM, NV-RAM and FRAM on the respective boards, is shown below.nPart numbers of the following ICs are shown in Vol. 2 Section “1. Spare Parts” of the separate Mainte-nance Manual are the ICs before saving the data contents.
Board Ref.No. EEPROM/ Contents of the saved data Adjustment/setup(address) NV-RAM/FRAM upon replacement of
EEPROM/NV-RAM/FRAM
DCP-43 IC611 EEPROM DCP board factory set value *1(D-3/B side) Black Set adjustment value
IC51 FRAM All of the setup data of the setup menu(A-2/B side) AWB/ABB data
DR-614 IC31 EEPROM CCD block factory set value *4(D-2/B side) Temperature measurement data
Mired value of filtersND offset factory set value
IFA-19G IC202 EEPROM Model name, Serial No., OEM code *2(A-2/A side) Model code, Device ID
DC-110A IC15 EEPROM Level adjustment value of the respective 9-29. SD VCO(HKDW-702) (C-2/B side) down-converter outputs Adjustment
9-30. SD Y LevelAdjustment
9-31. SD ZEBRAClamp LevelAdjustment
9-32. SD ZEBRA Y LevelAdjustment
MDC-13G IC403 EEPROM Servo system adjustment value, Refer to Section 1-17-8.(G-2/A side) Hours meter
FP-152 IC816 RAM inside CPU Hours meter *3(E-2/B side)
IC-819 EEPROM Audio adjustment data 10-2-1. Audio A/D Error(E-3/B side) Adjustment
10-2-2. Audio D/A ErrorAdjustment
10-2-3. AUDIO LEVELVolume Control(Inside Panel)Adjustment
EQ-88G IC1104 EEPROM RF system adjustment value Refer to Section(B-1/A side) 1-17-11.
RP-131 IC19 NV-RAM Unique data of CCD block Refer to Section(C-3/A side) 1-17-4.
*1 : Users’ unique data is saved in IC611 and IC51 of the DCP-43 board. When these ICs are replaced on the occasion of boardreplacement or IC replacement, the users’ unique data will be lost and the data is returned to the default data when the unit isshipped from the factory. For the menu setting, refer to Section 4 and re-set the data. For the adjustment items that are required inaccordance with the replacement, refer to Section 1-17-7.
*2 : Because data cannot be set again, IC202 of the IFA-19G board cannot be exchanged.When the IFA-19G board is replaced, remove IC202 from the former board and reinstall it to the new replacement IFA-19G board.When IC202 needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
*3 : Data cannot be saved in IC816 on the FP-152 board.When IC needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
*4 : Because data cannot be set again, IC31 of the DR-614 substrate cannot be exchanged.When the DR-614 board is replaced, remove IC31 from the former board and reinstall it to the new replacement DR-614 board.When IC31 needs to be replaced due to defective IC, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
1-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-19. Description on the CCD Block Number
All of the CCD units have the unique ID number. The ID number is called CCD block number thatindicates the type and serial number of the CCD block.The label on which the CCD block number is printed, is pasted inside each CCD unit.
Example)
Aplicable Model (Serial No.) Type of the CCD Bock
HDW-F900R (10001- ) MLA
For the replacement procedure of the CCD unit, refer to “6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement”.
MLA xxxxx Serial number of the CCD unit Type of the CCD block
1-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-20. Filter Knob Position Adjustment
nProcedure of the filter knob position adjustment is differentdepending on the type of the incorporated filter.
1. Move the mount lever in the direction of the arrow andremove the mount cap.nBe very careful not to touch the filter surface when themount cap is removed.
2. Rotate the knob shaft (thick) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.
3. Align the file (CC) knob number “B” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two stop screws (A).
4. Rotate the knob shaft (thin) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.
5. Align the file (ND) knob number “1” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two stop screws (B).
nStandard tightening torque :WP2 x 3 : 20 to 25 x 10-2 N.m (2 to 2.5 kgf.cm)WP3 x 3 : 53 x 10-2 N.m (5.3 kgf.cm)
Mount cap
Mount lever
1
2
Stop screws (B)WP2 x 3
Stop screws (B) WP2 x 3
Stop screw (A)WP2 x 3
Stop screw (A) WP2 x 3
Filter (CC) knob
Filter (ND) knob
Filter (ND) knob Inside panel assembly
Knob shaft (thin) Knob shaft (thick)
1
Mark
B
1-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-21. Memory Backup Battery
wThe lithium battery is critical part to safe operation.Replace the component with Sony part whose part numberappears in the manual published by Sony. If the componentis replaced by any part other than the specified ones, thismay cause a fire or electric shock.
cWhen replacing the lithium battery, ensure that the batteryis installed with “+” and “_” poles connected to thecorrect terminals.An improper connection may cause an explosion orleakage of fluid result in physical damage in the surround-ing materials.
The BP-33 board is equipped with the data backup battery(BT101). When replacing it, be sure to use the specifiedpart.
Replacement part : BT101 (on the BP-33 board)Part name : CR-2450 (lithium battery)Part No. : ! 1-528-229-41Recommended replacement period : Every five years
The memory IC stores the data such as date and time. If thebackup memory battery is dead or replaced, these data areall cleared.Refer to “4-8-6. Setting Date and Time of Internal Watch”in the Operation Manual to re-set the cleared data.
1-22. Fuse and IC Link Replacement
wThe fuse and IC link are critical parts to safe operation.Replace the components with Sony parts whose partnumber appear in the manual published by Sony. If thecomponents are replaced by any parts other than thespecified ones, this may cause a fire or electric shock.
cIf a fuse or IC link is replaced while the main power is kepton, this may cause electric shock.Before replacing fuse or IC link, not only turn off thePOWER switch but also remove the power cable that isconnected to the DC IN connector.
The EQ-88G board is equipped with fuse. The SS-92Gboard is equipped with IC link.Any an excessive current flow due to abnormality insidethe equipment, the fuse and IC link blow. If a fuse or IClink blows, turn off the main power of the equipment onceand inspect inside of the equipment and remove the causeof excessive current. After that, replace the fuse and/or IClink.
Board Ref. No. Description Part No.
EQ-88G F101, 102, 103 Fuse !1-576-270-21(4 A/125 V)
SS-92G PS201, 202 IC link 0.6 A !1-576-259-11
1-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-23. Circuit Protection Element
The CNB-23 board of this unit is equipped with thepositive characteristics thermister (power thermister) as thecircuit protection element. The positive characteristicsthermister limits the electric current flowing through thecircuit as the internal resistance increases when an exces-sive current flows or when the ambient temperatureincreases. If the positive characteristics thermister works,turn off the main power of the unit and inspect the internalcircuit of this unit. After the cause of the trouble is re-moved, turn on the main power back again. The unit worksnormally. It takes about one minute to cool down thepositive characteristics thermister after the main power isturned off.
Board Ref. No. Address Protection circuit/equipment
CNB-23 THP1 A8 Internal circuit of the board
1-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version
nDo not downgrade the ROM version. It may cause amalfunction of the system.
The AT-172 board, EQ-88G board, FP-152 board and SS-92G board of this unit are equipped with ROMs.
Board Ref.No. Address Section to bereferred to
AT-172 IC38 A-2/B side 1-24-2, 1-24-3*1
EQ-88G IC1101 D-1/B side *2
FP-152 IC816 E-2/B side 1-24-2
SS-92G IC8 C-3/A side 1-24-2
*1 : When the ROM of the AT-172 board is replaced with the new one, aMemory Stick cannot be used for upgrading. In such a case, use theROM-28 board.
*2 : ROM on the EQ-88G board does not need upgrading.
1-24-1. Confirming the ROM Version
nFor the basic operations of the setup menu, refer to Section4-1-1.
1. Turn on the main power and set the MENU ON/OFFswitch to ON.
2. Let the display show the ROM VERSION submenu ofthe DIAGNOSIS menu.
3. Confirm the ROM version.
1-24-2. When a Memory Stick is Used forVersion Upgrading(AT-172 Board, FP-152 Board, SS-92G Board)
m. When the ROM of the AT-172 board is replaced with the
new one, a Memory Stick cannot be used for upgrading.In such a case, use the ROM-28 board.
. The upgrading program must have already been saved ina Memory Stick before.(For details of saving the upgrading program, contactyour local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.)
. For the basic operations of the setup menu, refer toSection 4-1-1.
. The following display is the sample when upgradingROM from Ver.1.00 to Ver.1.01.
1. Turn on the main power and set the MENU ON/OFFswitch to ON.
2. Let the display show the ROM VERSION submenu ofthe DIAGNOSIS menu.
3. Insert the Memory Stick in which the upgradingprogram is already saved. Press the rotary encoder fora few seconds with the cursor on the left being “?”shape until the system enters the version upgrademode.The message “MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appearson display. (If a Memory Stick is not inserted, themessage “NO MEMORY STICK” appears.)nDo not remove the Memory Stick while message“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears on display.
? 03OROM VERSION MEMORY STICK ACCESS AT : Ver 1.00 SS : Ver 1.00 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00
? 03OROM VERSION AT : Ver x.xx SS : Ver x.xx FP : Ver x.xx AU DSP: Ver x.xx EQ : Ver x.xx
1-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Select the desired ROM that you want to upgrade the version. Then press the rotary encoder. Thefollowing confirmation message appears as follows.When a newer version than the current version is read : VERSION UP OK?When the same version as the current version is read : SAME VERSION OK?When an older version than the current version is read : VERSION DOWN OK?
5. Selecting YES and pressing the rotary encoder starts upgrading of the selected ROM version.6. In the case of the ROM on the AT-172 board:(1) The following displays to execute the version upgrade appear.
nNever remove a Memory Stick or never turn off the main power until the message “COMPLETE”appears.
(2) Within several seconds, the following message appears.
(3) Within five seconds, the following message appears.
03OROM VERSION VERSION UP OK? YES NO AT : Ver 1.00 1.01 SS : Ver 1.00 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00
→→
" Initializing... " " Checking... " "Reading ROM data ..."
AT version up! The dislay is switched in an instance.
↓
↓
FlashingThe dislay is switched in about five seconds.
←
↓" 3 / 4 "
" 4 / 4 "
Writing...1.01 001 1 / 4
Flashing← -------Complete------- * Power off *
1-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
In the case of ROM on the FP-152 board and SS-92G board:(1) Check to see that the message “COMPLETE !”
appears indicating that the version indication haschanged.
7. Turn off the main power and then back on to start theunit for upgrading of the ROM to take place.
1-24-3. When the ROM-28 Board is Used forVersion Upgrading (AT-172 Board)
Required tool : ROM-28 board(Sony part No. : A-8326-017-A)
nThe upgrading program must have already been saved inthe ROMs (IC2 and IC3) on the ROM-28 board before.(For details of saving the upgrading program, contact yourlocal Sony Sales Office/Service Center.)
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Insert CN1 of the ROM-28 board to CN6 on the AT-172 board.
3. Set the switch S1 on the ROM-28 board as shown inthe illustration.
4. Turn on the main power. Then the data stored in theROM-28 board are transferred to the ROM on the AT-172 board in 10 and a few seconds.
5. Turn off the main power and remove the ROM-28board.
6. Close the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
7. Turn on the main power to start the unit for upgradingof the ROM to take place.
03OROM VERSION COMPLETE ! AT : Ver 1.00 SS : Ver 1.01 FP : Ver 1.00 AU DSP: Ver 1.00 EQ : Ver 1.00
→
ROM-28 board
CN1
AT-172 board (CN6)
S1
Switch knob
1-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-24-4. When the FL-272 Board is Used forVersion Upgrading (SS-92G Board)
Required tool : FL-272 board(Sony part No. : J-6531-280-A)SYSCON/SERVO ROM(Sony part No. : J-6531-320-A)
1. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the plug-in board assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7.)3. Remove the dust protection cover.
(Refer to Section 1-15-9.)4. Insert the SYSCON/SERVO ROMs to the IC sockets
(IC8, IC9) on side A of the FL-272 board.nThe IC numbers printed on the ROM label shouldmatch with the IC numbers printed on the circuitboard.
5. Set the switch No.1 only of the DIP switch (S1) on theFL-272 board to the ON position. (See Fig. 1.)
6. Short-circuit the solder slit (SL1) on side B of the FL-272 board.
7. Turn off the power. Insert CN1 of the FL-272 board toCN3 of the SS-92G board.
8. Turn on the power. Erasing the software starts. (After the diode D6 turns on, the diodes flash in theorder of D8→D4→D7.)After that, writing the software starts.(After the diode D2 turns on, the diodes flash in theorder of D8→D4→D7.)
9. When you confirm that the diode D5 on the FL-272board lights, turn off the power.
10. Remove the FL-272 board from the SS-92G board.11. Turn on the power and confirm that the system
initialization has ended with success and the systemstarts up normally.
12. Upgrade the software version using Memory Stick.(Refer to Section 1-24-2.)
OPEN
No.1 pin
DIP switch (S1)
SL1
J/CAM
STUDIO
FL-272 boardCN1
CN3
SS-92G board
Fig.1
Fig.2
B side(Soldering side)
IC9
IC8
SYSCON/SERVOROM
1-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-25. How to Replace the Photo Sensorson the MDC-13G Board
The four photo sensors (PH301 to PH304) are installed onthe MDC-13G board of this unit.To replace these photo sensors, the accurate positionsetting of the sensors is required with the use of the DIF-110 sensor mount tool.
Required tool : DIF-110 sensor mount tool(Part No. J-6531-100-A)
nIf the sensors are not mounted in the correct positions, thecam gear position will not be correctly detected, which thatcauses malfunction of the unit.
MDC-13G board (B side)
1. Remove soldering from the photo sensor that you wantto replace and remove the photo sensor.
2. Place a new photo sensor on a solder land tentatively.Be careful to place a new photo sensor in the correctdirection. (Refer to the illustration below.)
3. Align the two projections of the sensor mount toolwith the holes of the board.
4. Solder the two leads of a photo sensor tentatively.
5. Remove the sensor mount tool and solder the fourleads of the photo sensor.
H G
F E D
C
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
PH301PH303
PH304
PH302
Photo sensor
White line on the photo sensor Silk screen on the
board (Thick line)
Sensor mount tool
Projection
Hole
Hole
Projection
Hole of the sensormount tool
Hole of the sensor mount tool
Solderings (two leads tentatively)
Photo sensor
Solderings
Solderings
1-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26. Circuit Description
1-26-1. CCD Block (TG-256 Board, DR-614Board, BI-199/200/201 Board, andPA-340 Board)
TG-256 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the horizontal drive pulseis sent to the BI-199/200/201 board through the DR-614board, and the sampling pulse that samples the CCD outputsignal is output to the PA-340 board. The drive pulses aregenerated in synchronism with the H_PHASE that is inputfrom the DCP-43 board. The respective drive pulses aregenerated from the VCO clock signal (X1 : 74.1758 MHzand X2 : 74.25 MHz) on this board. The clock signal forthe digital circuit of this unit is also output via the LVDSdriver (IC17).
DR-614 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the vertical drive pulse isgenerated in this board and is converted by IC19 such thatthe vertical drive pulse can drive the CCD directly. Theconverted pulse is sent to the CCD through the BI-199/200/201 board. The drive pulses are output in synchronismwith the H_PHASE and FRM_RST signals that are inputfrom the DCP-43 board. At the same time, the data such asthe V-sub voltage of the CCD are stored in the EEPROM(IC31) of the DR-614 board. The DR-614 board has aninterface circuit with the optical filter.
BI-199/200/201 boardAmong the CCD driving pulses, the horizontal drive pulseis converted by this board so that it can drive the CCDdirectly. The CCD unit is mounted on the BI-199/200/201board to which the horizontal and vertical drive pulses andthe control voltage are applied to the CCD. The outputsignal from the CCD is supplied by the two output signallines to which the entire bandwidth of the CCD outputsignal is divided into the two signal lines equally. Theseoutput signals are sent to the PA-340 board via source-followers.
PA-340 boardThe two output signals (the bandwidth is half of theoriginal Hi-vision signal) from the CCD imager that aresupplied from the BI-199/200/201 board are sent to thecorrelation double-sampling circuit (IC100 for R-ch, IC200for G-ch, and IC300 for B-ch) where the video signal istaken out. These two outputs are synthesized to the originalbandwidth of the Hi-vision signal by multiplexing them(IC405 for R-ch, IC505 for G-ch, and IC605 for B-ch). Theoutput signal is sent to the DCP-43 board.
1-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26-2. Camera System (DCP-43 Board)
DCP-43 boardThe DCP-43 board contains the circuit that performs thecamera signal processing, and consists of the followingfour blocks.1) VA block2) Digital signal processing block3) Output analog circuit block4) SG block
1) VA blockFor the RGB analog video signal output from the PA-340 board, the multiplication operation of the blackshading signal is performed in IC112/217/312 in thisblock. Also, IC119, 219, and 319 amplify signal level(white control, master gain settings), multiply whiteshading, add flare, and perform the Preknee processingso that the dynamic range of the signal matches that ofthe A/D converter circuit. Other than these processes,these ICs mix the analog test signal, and correct theblack level offset. Finally the bandwidth of the signalis limited to 37 MHz in the Prefilter and the outputsignal is sent to the digital signal process block.
2) Digital signal processing blockThe analog signal that is supplied from the VA blockis sent to the A/D converter (IC129/229/329) wherethe analog signal is converted to the digital signal of12-bit 74 MHz.The A/D converted video signal receives the additionprocessing of the digital pixels at the adder IC(IC1017) and is sent to the main digital processor IC(IC1019).The digital video signal receives bit expansion in orderto receive non-linear processing to the 10-bit 74 MHzsignal. Then the following processes are performed.
. Various level detections (level detections for Iris,AWB/ABB, DCC, Trueye, Flare, Area Matrix andothers)
. Linear matrix processing
. Knee (DCC, Tureye) processing
. Gamma processing
. Generation and addition of DTL and APT signals
. White clip and black clip
. Color bar signal generation
The video signal that has received the above digitalprocesses, is converted to the 10-bit 74 MHz Y-signaland the decoded color difference signals with whichthe title signal is mixed at IC2008.Then the 10-bit 74 MHz Y-signal and the decodedcolor difference signals are sent to the VTR block andto the camera output block. IC2008 acts as a bilateralinterface with the VTR in order to support the play-back operation of the VTR.
In addition to the above-described functions, IC2008performs the following processes.
. Signal detection processing
. Sync signal generation (for the DC-110A boardand character IC)
. Mixing and selection of the marker
. Digital Audio Delay (for the DC-110A board)
The following four digital signals are prepared as thecamera output signal and are D/A converted by IC201,IC206, IC211, IC212 and then sent to the outputanalog circuit block.
. Y (10-bit 74 MHz)
. R-Y (10-bit 37 MHz)
. B-Y (10-bit 37 MHz)
. VF DTL (8-bit 74 MHz)
3) Output analog circuit blockThe D/A converted signal passes through the postfilter, is added by the sync signal at IC859, IC861 andIC862, and is divided into the three outputs of compo-nent output, TEST OUT and VF output.Either the SD signal (down-converted standard signal)supplied from the DC-110A board or the TEST OUT/VF signal is selected by IC809 and IC810.The zebra signal and marker are added to the VFsignal at the circuit of Q804 to Q813, Q816, Q819 toQ821, IC827 and IC828 before the VF signal is outputto VF.This block also contains the zebra level detectioncircuit for HD and SD respectively.
4) SG blockThe SG block generates the sync signal to generate theHD signal and the various clamp and blanking pulsesto be used in the sync and analog circuit. These signalsare generated from the 74 MHz clock signal that issupplied from the CCD block.The SG block has the sync separators for the HD andSD respectively in order to establish GENLOCK. TheSG block can be locked by automatic HD/SD detec-tion.
1-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26-3. Video Signal System (DVP-41 Board)
. Signal processing during recordingThe 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and the PbPr signal that aresupplied from the camera circuit of the DCP-43 board tothe DVP-41 board, are passed through the DF.F (IC140 toIC142) and then input to the REGALO (IC160) rateconverter circuit. The 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and thePbPr signal are down-sampled by the rate converter circuitto the 46 MHz 20-bit multiplexed Y/PbPr signal. At thesame time, the signal is sampled by every other pixel. Theoutput signal from the rate converter circuit is sent to thebit rate reduction circuit of the MICKY-A (IC300) andMICKY-B (IC350) via the BUS SWITCH (IC302). In thebit rate reduction circuit, the Y-signal is grouped into thesignal unit of 8 pixels (H) x 8 pixels (V) and the PbPrsignal is grouped into the signal unit of 4 pixels (H) x 8pixels (V), to which shuffling processing (i.e., the adjacentblocks are assigned to the six segments) is implemented.After the shuffling processing, the DCT coefficient iscalculated from the data of the respective blocks so that thequantization and VLC (Variable Length Coding) process-ing are performed. The compression rate here is 1/4.4.Combining the compression rate of 1/1.6 for down sam-pling at FIL (IC160), the total compression rate is about 1/7. The compressed video data passes through DF.F (IC403and IC404) and is sent to NECCY (IC400) that is the errorcorrection encoder circuit. In the error correction encodercircuit, the compressed picture data receives the followingprocesses.
. Generation of the outer parity and inner parity
. Addition of the SYNC/ID code
. Generation of SYNC block
At the same time, the serial audio data that is suppliedfrom the audio circuit of the FP-152 board passes throughthe SEL (IC406) and is input to the error correctionencoder circuit in ECC (IC400). In the error correctionencoder circuit, the serial audio data receives the processesof generating the outer parity and inner parity, addition ofthe SYNC/ID code and the SYNC block is generated.After the serial audio data is multiplexed with the picturedata, the multiplexed signal is sent to the RF system circuitin the EQ-88G board as two-channel serial data.
. Signal processing during playbackThe playback data that is supplied from the RF systemcircuit of the EQ-88G board to the DVP-41 board, passesthrough the BUS SWITCH (IC501), and is input to theerror correction decoder circuit of the ADAM-HS (IC500).
In the error correction decoder circuit, the errors that areoccured during the recording and playback processes arecorrected. An error flag is added to the errors that couldnot be corrected by the error correction decoder circuit sothat error concealment can be performed by the errorconcealment circuit of the CNC (IC700). At the same time,the audio data is separated in the error correction decodercircuit, and the separated audio data is sent to the audiocircuit of the FP-152 board as the playback serial audiodata.The playback video data that is supplied from the errorcorrection decoder circuit, passes through the BUSSWITCH (IC506 and IC507) and is sent to the bit ratereduction decoder circuit that consists of MINNY-A(IC600) and MINNY-B (IC650). In the bit rate reductiondecoder circuit, the reverse processing of the bit ratereduction circuit is performed. The 46 MHz 20-bit Y/PbPrsignal is generated by the bit rate reduction decoder circuit,and is sent to the error concealment circuit of CNC(IC700). In the error concealment circuit, the correct datais judged for error data for which the error flag is set, fromthe peripheral pixels and the data of the previous frame,and the error concealment is performed. After the errorconcealment, the data passes through the BUS SWITCH(IC161) and is input to the rate converter circuit of REGA-LO (IC160). In the rate converter circuit, the 46 MHz 20-bit Y/PbPr signal is up-sampled to the 74 MHz 20-bit Y-signal and to the PbPr signal, which are then sent to thecamera system circuit in the DCP-43 board.
. Clock signal and timing reference signal processingTwo types of clock signals (74 MHz and 46 MHz) are usedin the video system circuit of the DVP-41 board.The 74 MHz clock is supplied from the camera systemcircuit of the DCP-43 board to the DVP-41 board where itis phase-compensated by the 74M CLOCK DRIVE(IC101), and is then distributed to the respective ICs. The46 MHz clock is generated by TG (IC200) of the DVP-41board as the clock that is synchronous with the frame pulsesupplied from the camera system circuit of the DCP-43board. The 46 MHz clock is phase-compensated by the46M CLOCK DRIVE (IC203) and is then distributed tothe respective ICs.The timing reference signals are generated by TG (IC200)of the DVP-41 board for the respective ICs, from the framepulse and the HD pulse that are supplied from the camerasystem circuit of the DCP-43 board. However, the timingreference signal of the playback video data RAGALO(IC160) is supplied from the camera system circuit of theDCP-43 board.
1-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Fig.1 Audio system, frame diagram
1-26-4. Audio System(FP-152 Board, IFA-19G Board, APR-59AG Board, AL-43 Board,and AXM-33 Board)
The audio system consists of the following blocks:. Front microphone amp: IFA-19G board. Input signal selector: FP-152 board. A/D circuit (CH1&2): FP-152 board. A/D circuit (CH3&4): FP-152 board. D/A circuit: FP-152 board. AES/EBU audio signal processing block: FP-152 board. Monitor amp: APR-59AG board. Final amp: AL-43 board. Rear input: AXM-33 board
AXM-33
CNB-23
KY-475G
AL-43
MB-1096RX-54G
CN403
CN401
CN117SW-1309 CN1
CN117
CN401
CN109
CN109
CN402
CN207 CN205
CN205
CN204
CN204
STBY/SAVEOFF/ON-PAGELOW/M/HIGHPRST/ITEMPRESET A/BDCC-BRA
CN203
CN203
CN202
CN202
CN206
CN301
CN301CN302
CN207
CN107
CN107
CN208
CN106
CN106
CN105
CN105CN120
CN504
CN503
LENS
CN502
CN501
CN501
OUT
CN120
CN201
CN201
TEST
FP-152
HP-104
PCF8574PCF8574
SPEAKER
3
3
I2C
I2C
I2C
I2C
MIC
IN
IN
IFA-19G
TURBO_GAIN_SWASSIGNABLE_SW1ASSIGNABLE_SW2
APR-59AG
DCP-43DVP-41
PCF8574
HP-103
MS
FAN
ENC-61
SW-1038
VTR STARTAUTO W/B BALSHUTTER
MIC CONT
PSW
SW-1031
MA-103
+48V/OFF (CH1)+48V/OFF (CH2)
CN1
1-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
FP CPU (IC816: flash RAM) on the FP-152 board carries outaudio control according to the audio mode informationreceived from SS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board.The IFA-19G board has a front microphone amp (10dB/20dB/30dB) gain switch circuit.The APR-59AG board is composed of monitor amps (IC106,IC109, etc).The AL-43 board is composed of final amps (IC101, IC201)and connects to the CNB-23 board. The CH1 and CH2output signals are output from the 5-pin connector (CN301)on the AXM-33 board.The AXM-33 board is composed of LINE-IN/AES/EBU-IN/MIC-IN switch (S101, S201), microphone amp (20dB/30dB)gain switch circuit and AES/EBU digital audio signalreceiver block (IC500). The LINE IN input level settings canbe switched between +4dBu, 0dBu, and _3dBu with theslide switch (S202) on the AXM-33 board.The SW-1309 board is the ON/OFF switch (S1, S2) for +48V.
After turning the power to the unit on, FP CPU (IC816) onthe FP-152 board, each port is initialized, and the PLL circuitlock information for TG (IC321) on the DVP-41 board fromSS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board is received. Then, resetfor audio control IC (IC404) on the FP-152 board is released,program download and register data settings are performed,and then MUTE is released. (EE sound can be monitored)
Front microphone signal passes through the MA-103 board,IFA-19G board, and MB-1096 board before entering theinput signal selector (IC5 to IC8) of the FP-152 board.Rear input signal passes through the AXM-33 board, CNB-23 board, and MB-1096 board before entering the inputsignal selector (IC5 to IC8) of the FP-152 board.While switching LINE SELECT (IC16), FP CPU (IC816) onthe FP-152 reads the 2-bit signal for each switch (S1 to S4).With this information, the board switches between FRONT/REAR/WIRELESS switch information received by the inputsignal selectors (IC5 to IC8) and selects the audio signal.
The CH1 or CH2 signal selected by the input signal selector(IC5, IC6) on the FP-152 board is input into the differentialamp (IC1: switches between balanced/unbalanced). Thesignal then passes through the 9dB attenuated circuit. Thenthe signal is input into the A/D balance/unbalance conversionamp (IC101, IC104), and after being increased about 1dB, isinput into the A/D converter IC (IC103: 24-bit).At the same time, the CH3 or CH4 signal selected by theinput signal selector (IC7, IC8) on the FP-152 board is inputinto the differential amp (IC2: switches between balanced/unbalanced). The signal then passes through the 9dB attenu-ated circuit. Then the signal is input into the A/D balance/unbalance conversion amp (IC302, IC304), and after beingincreased about 1dB, is input into the A/D converter IC(IC301: 24-bit).
The serial digital audio signal input from the AES/EBUINPUT connector passes the receiver block on the AXM-33board, and is decoded in the decoder (IC200) on the FP-152board.Then the sampling rate conversion in synchronous with therecorded video signal takes place in the sampling rateconverter (IC201, IC202).
The 24-bit (64fs) 2CH digital audio signal from each A/Dconverter output, each decoded 2CH digital audio signalfrom AES/EBU input that underwent sampling rate conver-sion, and the digital audio signal from the CA adapter are allinput to the FPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 board. Then thesignals are switched and converted into 128fs serial 4CH.
The front volume and side volume are connected to the A/Dterminal of FP CPU (IC816) on the FP-152 board. Thevolume voltage is digitalized with a built-in 10-bit A/D, andafter changing the DSP multiplier, sends the signal to audioDSP (IC404) on the FP-152 board. After digital conversion,the combination of front volume and side volume, go throughmultiplication processing in FP CPU (IC816) and are sent tothe audio DSP (IC404) for the FP-152 board.
The digital audio signal made into 128fs serial 4CH withFPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 board is input into audio DSP(IC404). There, the signal undergoes processes from theaudio DSP high-speed calculation, such as gain processingduring manual control, AGC processing, LIMITER process-ing, LPF-ON when using the front microphone, recordingEMPHASIS processing, headroom level switch, delayprocessing for internal SG and VIDEO/AUDIO phasematching, and audio level detection. Then, the signal is madeinto 64fs parallel (CH1&CH2, CH3&CH4) with FPGA(IC401) on the FP-152 board. It then passes through the MB-1096 board before being input into the DVP-41 board.
The D/A parallel signal (64fs) for playback passes throughDVP-41 board and MB-1096 board. Then the signal is madeinto 128fs serial with FPGA (IC401) on the FP-152 boardand is input into audio DSP (IC404). The signal goes throughprocesses such as playback DE-EMPHASIS processing,headroom level switch, and output LIMITER processing.Then, the signal is made 64fs parallel in FPGA (IC401) onthe FP-152 board while CH1&CH2 and CH3&CH4 areselected. The FPGA (IC401) output playback digital audiosignal is then input into the 24-bit D/A converter (IC521).The D/A converter output passes through the differential amp(IC504, IC505), the T-shaped twin filter, the ATT unbalance/balance conversion amp (IC514, IC517), MB-1096 board,CNB-23 board, final amp (IC101, IC201) on the AL-43board. Then the signal is output from the 5-pin XLR connec-tor on the AXM-33 board. The audio signal for the monitorundergoes volume control in the APR-59AG board, thenpasses through the amp (IC106) on the APR-59AG boardbefore being output.
1-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Fig
. 2 A
ud
io d
ata
form
at
CH
1 or
MIX
or
CH
2C
UE
D/A
to A
NA
LOG
OU
T
A/D
A/D
FP
GA
(INP
UT
)
CH
3/4
CH
1/2
CA
CH
3/4
CA
CH
1/2
AN
A C
H4
AN
A C
H3
AN
A C
H2
AN
A C
H1
CA
/SD
I
MO
NIT
OR
RE
C
FP
GA
(PB
)
PB
CH
1/2
64F
S
64F
S
64F
S
64F
S
128F
SC
H1/
2/3/
4
PB
CH
3/4
128F
SC
H1/
2/3/
4
CH
1/2
or C
H3/
4D
/A
SE
L
MO
N C
H3/
4
MO
N C
H1/
2
RE
C C
H3/
4
RE
C C
H1/
2
FP
GA
(SD
I)
FP
GA
(MO
N)
FP
GA
(RE
C)
128F
SC
H1/
2/3/
4
128F
SC
H1/
2/3/
4
128F
SC
H1/
2/3/
4
24bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
CA
/SD
I CH
1/2
to C
A/S
DI
CA
CH
E R
EC
CH
1/2
CU
E (
CH
1 or
MIX
or
CH
2)
to C
UE
RE
C
CA
/SD
I CH
3/4
FS
230
CH
1C
H3
MS
B
CH
2C
H4
FS
23 -
0
CH
1MS
B
CH
2
23 -
023
- 0
23 -
0
CH
3C
H4
16bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
RIG
HT
Jus
tifie
d
24(2
0)bi
t LS
B fi
rst,
RIG
HT
Jus
tifie
d
32bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
24bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
24(2
0)bi
t LS
B fi
rst,
RIG
HT
Jus
tifie
d
24bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
FS
310
CH
1MS
B
CH
2
310
310
310
CH
3C
H4
FS
230
CH
1C
H3
MS
B
CH
2C
H4
FS
150
CH
1C
H3MS
B
CH
2C
H4
16bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
RIG
HT
Jus
tifie
d
DS
P
16bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
24bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
RIG
HT
Jus
tifie
d
FS
150
CH
1C
H3MS
B
CH
2C
H4
FP
GA
(M
UX
)F
PG
A (
DE
MU
X)
64F
S
64F
S
64F
S
64F
S
RE
C
PB
FS
150
CH
1M
IXC
H2MS
B
SE
LC
H1
MIX
CH
2
SE
L
DE
C&
SR
CC
H3/
464
FS
CH
1/2
64F
S
AE
S C
H3/
4
AE
S C
H1/
2
FS
230
CH
1C
H3
MS
B
CH
2C
H4
FS
23
-0
CH
1MS
B
CH
2
23
-0
23
-0
23
-0
CH
3C
H4
FS
230
CH
1C
H3
MS
B
CH
2C
H4
32bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
32bi
t MS
B fi
rst,
LEF
T J
ustif
ied
--
--
1-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Audio DSP Operation Processing. DIGITAL AGC ProcessingThree to five types of characteristics can be selected fromthe menu depending on the headroom.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU AGC
SPEC ”: _6dB/_9dB/_12dB/_15dB/_17dB_6dB: Linear operation until approx. _8dBFS. Approx.
_6dBFS at Max._9dB: Linear operation until approx. _11dBFS. Approx.
_9dBFS at Max._12dB: Linear operation until approx. _14dBFS. Approx.
_12dBFS at Max._15dB: Linear operation until approx. _17dBFS. Approx.
_15dBFS at Max._17dB: Linear operation until approx. _20dBFS. Approx.
_17dBFS at Max.
Fig.3 AGC features (Headroom 20dB)
. DIGITAL INPUT LIMITER characteristics (only duringmanual control)
Turn the LIMITER ON/OFF from the menu. Three to fivetypes of characteristics can be selected from the menudepending on the headroom.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU LIMITERMODE”: OFF/_6dB/_9dB/_12dB/_15dB/_17dBOFF: LIMITER OFF_6dB: Linear operation until approx. _8dBFS. Approx.
_6dBFS at Max._9dB: Linear operation until approx. _11dBFS. Approx.
_9dBFS at Max._12dB: Linear operation until approx. _14dBFS. Approx.
_12dBFS at Max._15dB: Linear operation until approx. _17dBFS. Approx.
_15dBFS at Max.
_17dB: Linear operation until approx. _20dBFS. Approx._17dBFS at Max.
. DIGITAL OUTPUT LIMITER characteristicsPerforms LIMITER processing on the EE and PB outputsignal. Turn the LIMITER ON/OFF from the menu.* MAINTENANCE menu AUDIO-2 page “AU OUTLIMITER”: ON/OFFON: Linear until approx. _13dBFS. Approx. _11dBFS
at Max.OFF: LIMITER OFF
. Gain control during manual controlThe A/D converted volume value is converted into a DSPmultiplication value at FP CPU (IC816) and handed overto DSP. The maximum variable for volume is approx.+12dB. (_∞ to +12 dB)
. Recording error correctionFor error correction on the A/D converter for audio, themultiplication value is corrected in the range +0 to _2dB.Adjustment is carried out from the menu with the standardsignal level applied. (fully automatic)
. Playback error correctionFor error correction on the D/A converter for audio, themultiplication value is corrected in the range +0 to _2dB.During adjustment, internal SG is used as the standardsignal, and the inside panel for each LEVEL volume isturned and fine-tuned. (semi-automatic)
. LPFRuns automatically during front microphone selection.
. Internal SGGenerates a _20dBFS (1kHz) fixed level signal and lateradjusts the gain depending on the SG level settings in themenu.
. EMPHASIS, DE-EMPHASISPerforms recording EMPHASIS processing depending on themenu settings. Also performs playback DE-EMPHASISprocessing.
. Headroom level switchPerforms headroom level switch during recording andplayback depending on the menu settings.
. Delay processingPerforms delay processing to match the VIDEO andAUDIO phases of each CH.
HEADROOM 20dB0
RE
C L
EV
EL
[dB
FS
]
LINE INPUT LEVEL [dBu]
-1-28
191494
-24
-20
-16
-12
-8
-4
24
AGC OFF
AGC max. -6dBFS (CLIP 0dBFS)
AGC max.-9dBFS (CLIP 0dBFS)
AGC max. -12dBFS (CLIP -2dBFS)
AGC max. -15dBFS (CLIP -5dBFS)
AGC max. -17dBFS (CLIP -7dBFS)
1-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26-5. System Control (FP-152 Board andSS-92G Board)
FP-152 boardThe FP-152 board has the FP CPU (IC816 : with built-inflash RAM) as the sub system control for VTR.The FP CPU (IC816) performs the following processes.
. Communication with the VTR main CPU (IC1 : SSCPU) on the SS-92G board
The FP-152 board and the SS-92G board are connected viathe MB-1096 board. The FP CPU (IC816) and the SS CPU(IC1) on the SS-92G board are connected by the clock signalsynchronous-type serial communication once in every field atthe frequency of about 1 MHz. The clock signal is a fixedlength of 57 bytes. The SS CPU (IC1) is used as the masterclock generator.
. Audio mode controlAudio control is performed by receiving the audio modeinformation and the menu setup information from the SSCPU (IC1) on the SS-92G board. The port of the FP CPU(IC816) is used as the input port and the switch informa-tion that is required for the audio mode control is input tothis port. The control output is output from the I/O EX-PANDER IC (IC823) of the FP-152 board.
. Audio control ICThe following processes are performed by establishingparallel communication with the audio control IC (IC404)of the FP-152 board.
. AGC/LIMITER processing
. Gain control during manual control
. Recording/playback error correction
. LPF
. EMPHASIS/DE-EMPHASIS
. Head room level switch
. Level detection
. Internal SG ON/OFF control
. Audio delay controlThe block has a circuit configuration that can isolate thebus to enable the FP CPU (IC816) to operate even whenthe main power is turned off.
. AUDIO level indicationThe audio level information is supplied from the audiocontrol IC (IC404) of the FP-152 board, and is sent to theSS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. It has the data size of16 bits x 4CH. The SS CPU (IC1) performs soft process-ing such as peak detection of the 16-bit data and creates theaudio level indication data that is sent to the FP CPU(IC816). The FP CPU (IC816) displays the audio level onthe LCD at every serial communication event.
. CTL/TC/UBIT displayThe ON/OFF information of the switches that are connect-ed to the port is scanned and sent to the SS CPU (IC1) ofthe SS-92G board. The SS CPU (IC1) changes the displaydata in accordance with the setting conditions, and thedisplay data is sent to the FP CPU (IC816). The FP CPU(IC816) displays the received data at every serial commu-nication event.The FP CPU (IC816) only sends the switch information tothe SS CPU (IC1), and does not create the display data.
. Watch IC controlThe watch data is read from the watch IC (IC831) of theFP-152 board, and is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. The SS CPU (IC1) sends also the time data tothe camera CPU (IC27) of the AT-172 board. The view-finder uses the time data for displaying the time. When thetime of the watch is set with the use of the menu, a set ofdata, a year, month, day, time and minute, is sent to the FPCPU (IC816) in the reverse route. At the same time, thetime setting request is issued from the SS CPU (IC1). TheFP CPU (IC816) sets the time to the watch IC (IC831) andconfirms the data.
. WARNING LED control and alarm tone controlThe WARNING information is supplied from the SS CPU(IC1) of the SS-92G board that is used to turn on and offthe WARNING LED (D819) on the FP-152 board. The 1kHz square wave output from the PWM generator circuitinside the FP CPU (IC816), is used as the alarm tone and isoutput from the FP CPU (IC816 : pin-44).
. Connection circuit with the wireless receiver (optionalequipment)
The RS-232C TRANSCEIVER (IC809) on the FP-152board acts as the interface circuit for connection with thewireless receiver. The FP CPU (IC816) performs the serialcommunication when the optional wireless receiver isinstalled, and reads the reception RF sensitivity and mutinginformation. This data is sent to the camera CPU (IC27) ofthe AT-172 board via the SS CPU (IC1) on the SS-92Gboard so that it can be viewed on the viewfinder.
. Software download functionThe FP CPU (IC816) is a CPU with built-in flash memorythat enables rewriting of software.To rewrite the software, the software that is saved in amemory stick is read by the camera microprocessor and ison the SS-92G board transferred to the FP CPU (IC816)via the SS CPU (IC1) for rewriting. The FP CPU (IC816 :pin-4) goes “H” during rewriting to release the WRITEINHIBIT.
The FP-152 board contain the power supply control circuit.
1-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
. Power supply voltage measuring circuitThe power supply voltage measuring circuit (IC805) usesthe DA output data from the FP CPU (IC816). The twotypes of DC signal are output from the DA of the FP CPU(IC816), and are used to change the voltage at IC805 (pin-1) of the FP-152 board so that the voltage measurementranges are switched between the range of +9 V to +14 V,and the range of +12 V to +17 V. The result of the voltagemeasurement is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) in the form of avoltage value where the remaining amount of battery andremaining data for display are calculated by the SS CPU(IC1) on the SS-92G board. The created data is sent backto the FP CPU (IC816). The FP CPU (IC816) shows theremaining data at every serial communication event.
. PWM power supply circuit for FAN/FP circuitThe PWM control loop (Q808: Open Loop) preciselycontrols the supply voltages by using the switching powersupply circuit. Because the voltage input at the primarycircuit of the power supply circuit is supplied from battery,the input voltage changes significantly. Because of thesignificant change of input power voltage, the cycle of thePWM signal is changed in accordance with the result ofbattery voltage measurement so that the FAN powersupply voltage is kept constant. The camera CPU (IC27) ofthe AT-172 board that measures the CCD temperature alsodetermines the FAN control voltage. It sends the com-mands through the SS CPU (IC1).The switching circuit of the PWM circuit is shared so thatit can act as a power supply circuit for the FP microproces-sor (so that the FP CPU (IC816) can work during power-off) and the power supply circuit for the peripheral circuits.The consumption current is reduced so that the +6 Vpower is first generated by the PWM circuit. After that, theseries regulator circuit is activated. When the main poweris turned on, the +5 V power from MB-1096 is sent to theinput circuit of IC806 to IC808 of the FP-152 board. Whenthe main power is turned off, +6 V power is input. Theoutput signal from IC808 and the diode D810 are connect-ed as an OR gate so that the power supply of +5 V-2 issupplied all the time.The output signal from CN107 (pin-38) of the FP-152board is used to drive the fan. The FP CPU (IC816) canoperate during power-off from the power supplied fromCN107 (pin-39, pin-40) of the FP-152 board.
. Soft control circuit at power-offThe FP CPU (IC816) detects the switch information. Onlywhen the FP CPU (IC816) and the SS CPU (IC1) of theSS-92G board become ready to turn off, the main powercan be turned off. The FP CPU (IC816: pin-90) accepts theinput signal from the POWER switch. The FP CPU(IC816: pin-91) supplies the output signal for power-off.Only when this signal and the H_POWER_HOLD (IC816:pin-91) signal goes “L”, the main power can be turned off.However, the main power can be turned on simply byturning the POWER switch ON.
. FP CPU backup circuitThe FP CPU (IC816) is connected to a coin battery so thatthe data in the internal RAM is kept saved even after thepower is turned off. By saving the system data, the FPCPU (IC816) can start up very quickly when the power isturned on.IC813, IC810 and IC812 on the FP-152 board are identical+2.5 V threshold voltage detector ICs. Because IC813 hasresistors R845 and R846, the detection voltage is +3.05 V.Since IC810 has the delay circuit consisting of R838 andC829, detection by IC810 is delayed after IC812.The delay of detection is used as follows. A drop in thevoltage that is supplied to the CPU is detected by IC813first and the processing to enter the STANDBY modefinishes. Next, IC812 creates the hardware STANDBYstate (clock signal stops). Lastly, the FP CPU (IC816)enters the reset state by IC810 waiting for the next power-on. When the power is turned on, the STANDBY isreleased, the clock signal oscillation starts and then reset isreleased.
. Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuitThe FP CPU (IC816) measures the output voltage of thebackup lithium battery BT101 (BP-33 board). When thebattery-end is detected, the low-voltage information is sentto the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board. Because thisbattery is used as the backup power for the watch IC(IC831) of the FP-152 board, measurement is performed atthe low rate of once every minute to reduce batteryconsumption together with the FET switch (Q814).
. Independent operation of FP CPU (IC816)The power supply circuits are grouped so that the FP CPU(IC816) can be operated even after the power is turned off.+3 V, +3.2 V, +5 V-2, +5.3 V, and +12 V are supplied tothe FP-152 board even after the power is turned off. +12 V-2 or +5 V is not supplied.
. Audio adjustment data storageWhen performing automatic adjustment of audio, theadjustment value is written to EEPROM (IC819). With thepower on, FP CPU (IC816) reads the adjustment valuefrom EEPROM (IC819) and uses it to correct relatedaudio.
1-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2) Connection with EQ-88G board and CCM-45G board(IC1 : 278_SIN3, 279_SOUT3, and 280_SCK3)The REC/PB control is supported by the communica-tion with the EQ-88G board. The Read/Write controlof the FL-283 printed wiring board (TeleFile) issupported by the communication with the CCM-45Gboard. Selection of communication is performed byCN102 (pin-14 and pin-125). In addition, this serialcommunication line is used also to write the Configdata of FPGA (IC13) at power-on.
. KY-475G board controlThe VTR operation switches (S1 to S5) and the displayLEDs on the KY-475G board are connected directly withthe SS CPU (IC1 : 65_PB15 and 73_PB22) by parallelconnection.
. TimecodeThe timecode reader/generator that is built inside the SSCPU (IC1) is used. The recording LTC from the generatoris delayed by two frames by IC13 of the SS-92G board,passes through IC23 of the SS-92G board and is sent to therecord amplifier (IC610, Q617, and Q618) of the MDC-13G board. The audio FS signal that is supplied from theDVP-41 board is used as the reference clock of the delay inIC13.IC15 of the SS-92G board is the selector that selects eitherthe direct output from the generator or the delayed signalfrom the MY-99 board (LOOP REC).IC32 of the SS-92G board is the selector switch that selectswhether the PB timecode from the MDC-13G board isinput to the TC reader of the SS CPU (IC1), or the delayedREC timecode during LOOP recording is input to the TCreader. The switch IC32 is used to generate the VITCsignal during LOOP recording.IC16, IC17 and IC14 of the SS-92G board receive theexternal timecode that is input to the TC IN connectorfrom an external source and waveform-shapes it beforesending it to the SS CPU (IC1).IC19 on the SS-92G board is the output circuit of thetimecode OUT signal (REC TC and PB TC) that is sup-plied from the SS CPU (IC1) to feed the timecode signal tothe TC OUT connector.
SS-92G boardIC1 is SS CPU, and the ROM (IC8 : FLASH MEMORY)program is developed to the SDRAM (IC6 and IC33) and thefollowing processes are executed on a RAM basis.At the same time, the system control can be started from theexternal ROM through CN3.
. Connection with EEPROMThe EEPROM (IC403) on the MDC-13G board is connected tothe SS CPU (IC1 : 28_SITXO to 30_SICKO) using synchro-nous serial communication. Various hours meter data and servoadjustment values are saved in the EEPROM (IC403).
. Connection with the DVP-41 Board (Video Processor Control)The DVP-41 board is controlled mainly by the address busand the data bus that are shared with the ROM (IC8) andSDRAM (IC6 and IC33).Selection of the respective IC chips is performed by decodingthe address of A2 to A8. Data to the respective ICs is sent withthe common use of 8-bits of D0 to D7. The communicationmethod is the clock synchronous type and the clock signal isoutput from the SS CPU (IC1 : 31_HCLK) via IC10. IC11 andIC12 are used for the communication timing signal and for thePIO control. In addition to the above signals, the followingsignals are used for connecting the SS-92G board with theDVP-41 board.
. Input and Reference of the frame signal : CN102 pin-49
. Input and Reference of the color framing signal :CN102 pin-48
. Output and Frame pulse for ADAM-HS : CN102 pin-40
. Output and Frame pulse for ADAM-HS : CN102 pin-39
. Asynchronous serial communicationThe SS CPU (IC1) has two asynchronous serial connectionchannels.
. PC debug monitor connection :(25_TXD0 and 27_RXD0)
. Remote control connection : (32_TXD3 and 33_RXD3)The remote controller is connected to the 8-pin REMOTE ter-minal and is sent to the SS-92G board via the AT-172 board.
. Synchronous serial communicationThe SS-92G board has two groups of synchronous serialcommunication that are used to establish communicationwith the total five blocks.1) Connection with AT-172 board and FP-152 board (IC1 :
214_SIN1, 215_SOUT1, 216_SCK1)Connection with the camera block is performed throughthe AT-172 board. Connection of the audio data, theLCD display data, and the POWER ON/OFF relateddata, is performed through the FP-152 board. Selectionof communication is performed by CN102 (pin-28 andpin-101) of the SS-92G board. The following signals aresupported by connection with the FP-152 board afterpassing through CN102.. Output, Reference of frame signal : pin-103. Output, SS RESET signal : pin-104. Output, For rewriting the FP CPU ROM : pin-107
1-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26-6. Servo Control System(SS-92G Board, MDC-13G Board,MDR-14G Board, and SE-613 Board)
Servo control is accomplished by the SS CPU (IC1) on theSS-92G board.The MDC-13G board, MDR-14G board and SE-613 boardhave the motor drive circuit and sensor system circuits.
The SS-92G board and the MDC-13G board are connectedby two flexible card wires (each 45 pins).The signals of the MDR-14G board are connected with theSS-92G board via the MDC-13G board.The MDR-14G board is connected with the drum motor andfunctions as a relay circuit board to transmit the signals comingfrom the drum motor and SS-92G board to the EQ-88G board.The SE-613 board is also connected to the SS-92G board viathe MDC-13G board.
SS-92G boardThe respective servo circuits are controlled by the SS CPU(IC1) that performs the system control and the servo controlof the VTR.The SS CPU (IC1) contains the FG detection, PPG, PWM,PIO, ADC modules that are required for the VTR servocontrol. Using these functions, the servo control and thecreation of the output control signals are performed.The drive voltages that drive the drum motor and the capstanmotor are controlled by the PWM control circuit. The PWMoutput signals are converted to analog voltages and are sent tothe MDC-13G board and to the MDR-14G board.The FG and PG signals that are waveform-shaped in theMDC-13G board and the MDR-14G board are sent to the SSCPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board where the respective motorsare controlled.The capstan FG wave amplifier in the SS-92G board is usedfor the STOP servo circuit.The CTL signal that is waveform-shaped for the capstan phaseservo in the MDC-13G board is input to the SS CPU (IC1).The loading motor is controlled by the three control signallines (two lines of SS_LOADING_CONT and aSS_L_LOADING_SLOW) that detect the 4-bit positioninformation data (MDC_FCAM) from the MDC-13G board.In addition to the above signals, information from the varioussensors is input to the SS CPU (IC1) and is used for variouscontrols.
On the other hand, the various IC control signals are createdspecifically for the respective applications and supplied to theEQ-88G board and DVP-41 board.The SS CPU (IC1) and the servo adjustment data storageEEPROM (IC403 : MDC-13G board) are connected by serialcommunication.
MDC-13G boardThe MDC-13G board consists of the capstan FG waveformshaping circuit, capstan drive PWM driver amplifier, mecha-nism drive motor driver, CTL record/playback amplifier, LTCrecord/playback amplifier, CUE record/playback amplifier,full erase circuit, mechanism position sensor, cassette locksensor, HUMID sensor circuit, and cassette ID switch.The capstan FG waveform shaping circuit amplifies theoutput signal from the MR sensor of the capstan motor withthe operational amplifier (IC201), adds an offset voltage at thecomparator (IC202 and IC203), and then shapes its waveformto a rectangular wave.The waveform shaping processing is performed by thecomparator IC204 (1/4 and 2/4) to generate the 4 times FGsignal that is used inside the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92Gboard.The capstan drive PWM driver amplifier consists of thePWM amplifier (PWM module IC (IC101) and switchingFET (Q102)) and 3-phase motor driver (IC102).The capstan drive PWM signal that is output from the SSCPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board is amplified by the driver anddrives the capstan motor.The CTL record/playback amplifier consists of the CTLamplifier (Q615 and Q616) for recording and the CTLplayback amplifier (IC616 and IC617). During recording, theCTL signal that is generated by the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board is amplified to control the recording currentflowing through the CTL head so that the CTL signal isrecorded on tape. During playback, the CTL signal that ispicked up from the playback amplifier is converted to arectangular wave that is used for the capstan playback servosystem that is controlled by the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92Gboard.The mechanism position sensors are used to monitor thestatus of the VTR mechanism. The SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board judges the status of the mechanism position. Thecam gear motor is controlled by the mechanism drive motordriver that consists of IC402. Thus the mechanism is con-trolled as described above.
The cassette lock sensor consists of the optical sensor of PH307that sends the status of the cassette compartment as the mecha-nism information to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.The cassette ID switch consists of six push-switches (S301 toS305, and S308). Output information of the cassette ID switchis sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board as the cassettetape ID and other cassette information.The HUMID sensor circuit consists of the HUMID sensorand the comparator (IC303). This HUMID information is sentto the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.
1-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-26-7. RF System (EQ-88G Board)
. During record modeThe two channel standard-drum-diameter recording data inwhich ECC is added in the DVP-41 board, are converted to8-channel data for the small diameter drum at the RING(IC201) and modulated into BI-PHASE signal at the RECdriver (IC302 and IC410). The output of the REC driver issent to the head drum.At the same time the CPU controls such as the recordcurrent control for the REC amplifier/PB amplifier insidethe drum. The RF alarm detection is also performed bydetecting the playback RF level.The control signals for the drum are prepared as MPXdata/clock signals by the MPX ENCODER (IC101), andare sent via the MDR-14G board to the drum board (UDR-32 board), where they are decoded by the MPX DECOD-ER (IC3) and are supplied to the respective REC amplifiersand the PB amplifiers.
. During playback modeThe 8-channel playback RF signal is amplified and A/D-converted by the Read Channel (IC501, IC601, IC701,IC801, IC1501, IC1601, IC1701 and IC1801), and isoutput as 6-bit data.After that, the 8-channel playback RF signal receivesViterbi decoding, sync signal detection, inner error correc-tion and descramble at the EDEN (IC901 and IC1001).Then the data is output to the DVP-41 board.
. Setting and adjusting dataThe RING (IC201) data, the Read Channel (IC501, IC601,IC701, IC801, IC1501, IC1601, IC1701 and IC1801) dataand the EDEN (IC901 and IC1001) data are set by the EQCPU (IC1101) that enables the complete automaticadjustment of the record RF system and the playback RFsystem.
MDR-14G boardThe MDR-14G board consists of the drum drive PWMamplifier, the drum PG waveform shaping circuit and theFG waveform shaping circuit.The drum motor drive PWM driver amplifier consists ofthe PWM amplifier (PWM module IC (IC2) and switchingFET (Q1)) and the 3-phase motor driver (IC1). The drummotor drive PWM signal is supplied from the SS CPU(IC1) of the SS-92G board, amplified by this driver anddrives the head drum motor.The drum PG/FG amplifier consists of the PG/FG amplifi-er module IC (IC4). The FG/PG analog signal output fromthe drum motor is amplified by IC4, waveform-shaped to arectangular wave and is sent to the SS CPU (IC1) of theSS-92G board that performs the servo control of the drummotor.
SE-613 boardThe SE-613 board consists of the cassette-in sensor switchand the REC INHIBIT sensor switch. The switch informa-tion from these two switches is sent to the SS-92G boardvia the MDC-13G board.
1-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
. Excess current detectionThe output circuit of the UNREG +12 V from the CNB-23board has excess current detection resistors R142, R143and R147. A voltage drop at the resistors is detected by theFET CONTROLLER (IC109). When the voltage drop atthe resistors exceeds 200 mV, the power supply circuitenters the SHUT DOWN state.Another SHUT DOWN signal is the H SHUT DOWNsignal that is supplied from the RE-187B board. If any oneof the DC-DC converter outputs is shorted, the powersupply circuit enters the SHUT DOWN state except UNSW +12 V.Since the FET CONTROLLER (IC109) on the CNB-23board has a latch function, the power supply does notrestore automatically. The main power of the unit needs tobe turned off once and back on.
. Protection against input power connection of reversepolarity
If the input power is connected in reverse polarity, FET(Q101) is turned off so that the GND lines of the controlsystem circuits are disconnected. Thus the control circuitsare protected and supply of +12 V power to the respectivecircuits is stopped.
DC-DC converterThe DC-DC converter consists of two circuit boards, theRE-186 board and RE-187B board. Neither of these twoboards can be operated independently.
. PWM clock signalThe PWM POWER CONTROL (IC202) on the RE-186board generates the master clock signal (100 k ±10 kHz)for all of the controller ICs (IC101, IC202, and IC301 onthe RE-186 board and IC102 and IC103 on the RE-187Bboard) and distributes it.
. Input voltage monitoring circuitThe RE-187B board has the input power voltage monitor-ing circuit (IC105). When the input power voltage stayswithin the specified range, the powers are supplied to therespective controller ICs (IC101, IC202, and IC301 on theRE-186 board and, IC102 and IC103 on the RE-187Bboard).The power supply circuit starts up when the input powervoltage is within the range of +10.4 V to +18.8 V. Oncethe power supply circuit has started up, it keeps operatinguntil the input power voltage decreases below the lowerlimit (+9.5 V).
1-26-8. Power Supply Systems (CNB-23 Board,RE-186 Board, and RE-187B Board)
CNB-23 boardThis controls distribution of the input +12 V power to therespective circuit boards.
. Power ON/OFF ControlThe L PWR SW ON signal enters IC107 of the CNB-23board via the IFA-19G board and the MB-1096 board thatturns on Q107. As Q107 is turned on, the battery +12 V orthe EXT DC IN +12 V is supplied to the respectivecircuits.IC107 of this unit receives at the same time the H POWERHOLD signal from the FP-152 board after the main powerof this unit is turned on. Therefore, Q107 is kept on even ifthe L PWR SW ON (L) signal is set to OFF (H).In order to turn off the main power of this unit, the HPOWER HOLD signal must be opened and goes to “L”.When the FP CPU (IC816) of the FP-152 board detects thePOWER SW OFF, it waits for completion of the VTRoperations if any VTR operations are in progress, and setsthe POWER HOLD signal to “L” to turn off the mainpower of this unit.
. Protection from Excess Input VoltageThe VOLTAGE DETECT (IC101) monitors UN SW +12V through D105. If the UN SW +12 V exceeds approxi-mately +18 V, it outputs the PROTECT signal (L) from itspin-4 to turn off the +12 V power. (Except UN SW +12 Vfor the FP-152 board.)This circuit does not have a latch function so that thepower will be recovered immediately after the input powervoltage returns to +18 V or less.
. Battery/EXT DC selectionThe connector insert detection switch that is fitted with theEXT DC IN connector (XLR 4-pins) is used to selecteither battery or EXT DC input.The output signal from this switch passes through IC103 toIC105 and is sent to the FET CONTROLLER (IC109) thatfinally selects ON/OFF of the FETs (Q110 to Q112 andQ114 to Q116 : ON when battery is in use, Q120 to Q125 :ON when EXT DC power is in use).In this IC109, a step-up circuit (Vcc +8.5 V) that drivesthe N-CH MOS FET gate is employed.
1-77HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
. Protection circuit when output circuit is shortedA diode or transistor is connected to the respective outputcircuits. They are reverse-biased during normal operationof the unit so that they are turned off.However, if any single output circuit is shorted, or if theoutput power is not supplied due to any abnormality, theabove diode or transistor and Q132 on the RE-187B boardare turned on so that Q133 outputs the H SHUT DOWNsignal.The H SHUT DOWN signal stops sending the clock signalto the respective ICs and all of the power outputs arestopped.The H SHUT DOWN signal is also sent to the FETCONTROLLER (IC109) on the CNB-23 board wheresupply source of the UNREG +12 V power is stopped.
. Voltage control circuitThe power supply circuits of +1.5 V, +1.8 V, +2.5 V,+3.3 V, +5 V and +9.3 V are step-down type choppercircuits.The power supply circuits of _5 V and _8.5 V are invertedtype chopper circuits. The power supply circuit of +46 Vis a step-up type chopper circuit.The power supply circuits of +15.5 V and +28 V aredescribed as follows.The primary winding of the transformer T101 of the RE-187B board not only functions as the coil (L) of the _8.5 Vinverted type chopper, but is also used to step up itsdriving current by transformer coupling, and the stepped-up voltage is half-wave rectified to generate the abovepower voltage.The output voltage is again DC-biased by +9.3 V togenerate the powers of +15.5 V and +28 V.The output power voltages of the above-described twopower supply systems are not controlled by the controllerIC, so the output voltages are stabilized by a series regula-tor consisting of Q128, Q129 and IC106.
1-26-9. Option Board (DC-110A Board, MY-99 Board)
Down converter board(DC-110A board : HKDW-702)The down converter board DC-110A performs the follow-ing signal processing.The 1125 HD signal (10-bit parallel component Y/Csignal) that is input from the DCP-43 board is converted tothe D1 parallel signal (component Y/C digital parallel SDsignal) by IC23 so that the SD VBS, the SDI is output.The parallel HD signal is down-converted to the D1parallel signal (4 : 2 : 2) and so that the composite signal isoutput via the encoder (IC202).At the same time, the signal is multiplexed with the digitalaudio signal by IC403 and the multiplexed signal is outputas the SDI signal.The composite signal is not only output to the TEST OUTconnector via the character mix circuit on the DCP-43board, but also output to the VIDEO OUT connector viathe 75 Z driver on the DC-110A board.The VIDEO OUT connector can also output the SDIsignal. Selection of whether the composite signal or theSDI signal will be output is determined by using the menu.(OPERATION menu, OUTPUT SEL display : SD REARBNC OUT)(For more details, refer to “4-4. Operation Menu”.)
1-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Picture cache board (MY-99 board : HKDW-703)The circuit board MY-99 implements the LOOP REC andperforms the following processes.The signal format of the compressed video data and theaudio data that are supplied from the video system circuitof the DVP-41 board during the LOOP REC mode or theINTERVAL REC mode, is converted at the LOOP MEM-ORY (IC201) to be suitable for storage in the SDRAM.The video data is then written sequentially in the SDRAM(IC301 to IC308) and the audio data is written in theMEMORY (IC309 and IC310). The stored data is readfrom the memory in accordance with the specified timingand returned to the original signal format by the LOOPMEMORY (IC201) again. Then the video data passesthrough the BUS SWITCH (IC202 and IC204) and theaudio data passes through the SEL (IC207) respectively,and are sent to the video system circuit of the DVP-41board. The TC data is handled in the same manner as theaudio data and is stored in the MEMORY (IC309 andIC310).Control of the read/write timings of the SDRAM isperformed by commands supplied from the I/O EXPAND-ER (IC103). These are controlled by the system controlcircuit of the SS CPU (IC1) of the SS-92G board.
Regarding the clock signal for the SDRAM, the SDRAM(IC301 to IC308) for video data receives the 46.360 MHzclock coming from the video system circuit of the DVP-41board after it is phase-compensated by the CLOCKDRIVER (IC141) of the MY-99 board. The MEMORY(IC309 and IC310) for audio data receives the clock fromthe LOOP MEMORY (IC201).
1-79HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1-27. Unleaded Solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with alead free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not comeprinted with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK
m. Be sure to use the unleaded solder for the printed circuit
board printed with the lead free mark.. The unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 dC
higher than the ordinary solder, therefore, it is recom-mended to use the soldering iron having a temperatureregulator.
. The ordinary soldering iron can be used but the iron tiphas to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longertime. The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away ifthe heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful.
1-28. Notes on Repair Parts
1. Safety Related Components WarningwComponents marked ! are critical to safe operation.Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case ofreplacement.
2. Standardization of PartsSome repair parts supplied by Sony differ from thoseused for the unit. These are because of parts common-ality and improvement.Parts list has the present standardized repair parts.
3. Stock of PartsParts marked with “o” at SP (Supply Code) column ofthe spare parts list may not be stocked. Therefore, thedelivery date will be delayed.
4. HarnessHarnesses with no part number are not registered asspare parts.
1-29. Precautions for use ofCondensation Sensor
Due to the foreign substances adhering to the condensationsensor chip (see figure below), the sensor fails to measurethe correct value of residence to humidity. This preventsthe unit from functioning properly. If any foreign sub-stance gets adhered to the chip, replace the condensationsensor with a new one.
m. Do not touch the chip with bare hands.. Do not clean the chip with alcohol or other similar
agents.
Connector
1 pin
LeadsCondensationsensor chip
Bracket
Solders
2-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 2Periodic Maintenance and Inspection
2-1. Cleaning
To make the most of the functions, fully realize the performance of this unit and lengthen the life of theunit and tape, implement cleaning as a daily maintenance.
2-1-1. General Information for Cleaning
1. IndexThis section describes methods of cleaning the blocks that are shown in the illustration below.
S2 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
S4 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
S3 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
Cleaning blade (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
S5 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
FE head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)
CTL head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)
S plate assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-6.)
T plate assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-6.)Upper drum
(Refer to Section 2-1-2.)
S1 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
Capstan (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
Lower drum (Refer to Section 2-1-3.)
T5 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
T4 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
T3 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
Pinch roller assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
T1 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
T2 tape guide (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
CUE/TC head (Refer to Section 2-1-4.)
2-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. NoteswNever touch the drum while it is rotating.Touching the drum rotating at a high speed with hands or screwdriver tip, they may be flipped offwith a strong force result in physical damage.Be sure confirm that the drum has come to complete stop before starting cleaning and part replace-ment.. Be sure to turn off the main power before cleaning.. The mechanical blocks of the mechanism deck consist of the precision parts and are adjusted
precisely. Be careful not to damage the parts and not to apply any excessive force during cleaning.. Do not touch the greased portions during cleaning. If grease attaches to the cleaning cloth, replace
the cleaning cloth by new one. If the cleaning cloth smeared with grease used, grease may attach tothe places where it should not.
. Do not insert a cassette tape before cleaning fluid completely evaporates.
3. Preparation before cleaning(1) Turn off the main power.(2) Remove the front lid and the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
2-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-1-2. Cleaning the Upper Drum Tape Running Surface and Video Heads
nThe upper drum and video heads are the parts that can damage easily. Take care not to damage the upperdrum and rotary heads during cleaning.
Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
nNever use a cotton swab.
Procedure1. Press a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid slightly against the video heads and rotate the
upper drum slowly counter-clockwise.2. Press a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid slightly against the tape running surface of the
upper drum(shaded portion) as shown in the figure.nBe sure to rotate the upper drum counter-clockwise. Be sure to clean the rotary heads along thecircumference.Do not clean the video heads in the vertical direction. Doing this may damage them.
3. After cleaning, wipe the rotary heads using a dry cleaning cloth.
Cleaning cloth Video headsVideo heads
Upper drum tape running surface
2-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Skewer
Cleaning cloth
Rabbet guide Rabbet guideEdges Lower drum tape running surface
2-1-3. Cleaning the Lower Drum Tape Running Surface and Rabbet Guide
nTake care not to damage the lower drum (specially the rabbet guide surface) during cleaning. Take care toclean the edges above the lower drum because it is near the video head.
Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01. Skewer or an equivalent (Do not use a metallic skewer.)
Procedure1. Put a skewer (or an equivalent) along the drum rabbet guide and remove magnetic powder as shown
in the figure.m. Do not use a metallic skew instead of a skewer. This may damage the tape running surface.. If the magnetic powder is accumulated in the drum rabbet guide, the tape-to-head tracking may
badly influence. Remove the magnetic powder completely.
2. Clean the tape running surface of the lower drum and the rabbet guide surface (shaded portion) asshown in the figure.
3. After cleaning, be sure to wipe the lower drum and the rabbet guide surface using a dry cleaningcloth.
2-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-1-4. Cleaning the Stationary Heads
cThe FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with barehands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during cleaning.
nTake care not to damage the surfaces of the stationary heads when cleaning.
Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Procedure1. Clean the tape running surfaces of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads in the vertical direction using a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.nIf the magnetic powder is accumulated in the head gap of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads, a play-back error may occur during recording/playback. Remove the magnetic powder completely.
2. After cleaning, be sure to wipe the tape running surfaces of the FE, CTL and CUE/TC heads using adry cleaning cloth.nNever touch the cleaning blade of the FE head with bare hands.
CUE/TC head
FE head
CTL head
Cleaning blade
2-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
S5 tape guide
S3 tape guideS4 tape guide
S1 tape guide
T1 tape guide
T2 tape guide
S2 tape guide
Pinch roller
T3 tape guide
T4 tape guide
T5 tape guide
Capstan
Cleaning blade
2-1-5. Cleaning the Tape Running Path and Cleaning Blade
cThe cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with barehands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during cleaning.
Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Procedure1. Clean the tape running surface (shaded portion) of the following guides and the cleaning blade
edge as shown in the figure using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.(S1 to S5 guides, T1 to T5 guide, capstan, pinch roller, cleaning blade)
2. After cleaning, be sure to wipe them using a dry cleaning cloth.
2-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
T plate assembly
Manual eject gear (A)
S plate assembly
S slider assemblyT slider assembly
Two front feet
Two front feet
Two rear feet Two rear feet
Paper
PaperFig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Paper
Paper
2-1-6. Cleaning the S/T Plate Assemblies and S/T Slider Assemblies
nThe S1, S2 and T1, T2 tape guides are adjusted precisely. Be careful not to add any excessive forceduring cleaning.
Tools. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Procedure1. Clean the top surface (shaded portions in the illustration where slider passes over) of the S/T plate
assemblies using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.2. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise until the S/T sliders come to the position as
shown in the illustration.3. Insert a piece of paper that is as thick as the paper of this manual between the front feet (2 locations)
of the S/T sliders and the rail. (Raising the slider slightly facilitates this work.) (Fig. 1)4. While pressing the S1 and T1 tape guides lightly on their top, remove a piece of paper that is inserted
in step 3. When a piece of paper is removed, stain and dirt adhere to the paper. Then insert a newpaper and remove it for cleaning. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until paper is no more stained. (Fig. 2)
5. Insert a piece of paper between the rear feet (2 locations) of the S/T sliders and the rail.6. While pressing the S2 and T2 tape guides lightly on their top, remove a piece of paper. When a piece
of paper is removed, stain and dirt adhere to the paper. Then insert a new paper and remove it forcleaning. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until paper is no more stained. (Fig. 2)
7. Rotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise to return to the unthreaded-end position.
2-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-1-7. Cares after Using under Special Environment
Checking the followings is recommended when returned from the news gathering at seaside, at the dustylocations, at hot spring, or if the unit is heavily splashed with water or water leaks in the unit in the roughweather or the like.
1. Carefully clean off sand and dust that entered the unit with airbrush or the like.2. If salt contained in seawater or sulfur contained in hot spring attaches to the non-painted surface of
outer cabinet, the cabinet may corrode in white. If it attaches, wipe it off immediately with alcohol.3. If water leaks inside the unit, dry the unit with hair-dryer. Check especially that water does not
remain in the CCD block or the power supply block.nIf the unit is not taken care of appropriately, corrosion may occur inside that may cause fire andelectric shock.
4. Clean the upper drum, lower drum and stationary heads.5. Clean the tape running surface (tape guides, capstan shaft, pinch roller and others).6. Clean out the contacting surface of connectors.7. Perform the general operational check and confirm that no abnormal sound is heard from inside the
unit or the unit operates correctly without any abnormality.
2-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-2. Periodic Inspection
To make the most of the functions, fully realize performance of the unit and to length the life of the unitand tape, a periodic check is recommended.
2-2-1. Hours Meter
The hours meter values can be displayed on the viewfinder. An hours meter can be reset as desired.The periodic inspection is recommended to be carried out with these hours meters as a reference.
1. Display method(1) Press the MENU ON/OFF switch on the side panel to the ON position.(2) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to DIAGNOSIS.(3) Press the rotary encoder once.(4) Press the MENU ON/OFF switch on the side panel to the OFF position to exit the hours meter
display.
2. Reset by customerThe hours meters of “5. DRUM RUNNING-2”, “6. TAPE RUNNING-2”, “7. OPERATION-2” and“8. THREADING-2” can be reset as requested by customer.(1) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the at mark (@) in front of EXEC of RESET METER.
The message RESET METER: @EXEC appears(2) Press the rotary encoder.(3) Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to the desired hours meter.(4) Press the rotary encoder. The desired hours meter is reset.
3. Contents of display
Viewfinder display Contents
The following contents are displayed.
DRUM RUNNING XXXXXH 1. Accumulated drum rotation hours (in units of hour)
TAPE RUNNING XXXXXH 2. Accumulated tape running hours (in units of hour)
OPERATION XXXXXH 3. Accumulated power-on hours (in units of hour)
THREADING XXXXX 4. Accumulated times of threading (Times of actual threadingand unthreading)
DRUM RUNNING-2 XXXXH 5. Drum rotation hours (Customer-resetable)
TAPE RUNNING-2 XXXXH 6. Tape running hours (Customer-resetable)
OPERATION-2 XXXXH 7. Power-on hours (Customer-resetable)
THREADING-2 XXXX 8. Times of threading (Customer-resetable)
2-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
61
!=
2 53
48
7
9
0
!-
R : It indicates the timing of part replacement.*1 : It indicates the timing of applying oil. (Refer to Section 2-2-3.)*2 : It indicates the timing of applying grease. (Refer to Section 2-2-4.)
No. Inspection item Mode Inspection hours Replacement parts
2000 4000 6000 Part name Part No.
1 Upper drum assembly A R _ R Upper drum assembly (DJR-27-R) A-8326-897-B
2 Slip ring assembly A R _ R Slip ring assembly (RP) A-8326-899-B
3 Brush assembly A R _ R Brush assembly (RP) A-8326-898-B
4 Drum assembly A _ R _ Drum assembly (DJR-27A-R) A-8327-237-B
5 AHC roller assembly A R R R AHC roller assembly X-3949-109-1
6 CR spacer A R R R CR spacer (POM) 3-182-765-02
7 Timing belt B _ R _ Timing belt 3-629-223-01
8 S-Tension regulator band assembly B R R R S-Tension regulator band assembly X-3605-986-2
9 T-Tension regulator band assembly B R R R T-Tension regulator band assembly X-3605-994-3
!/ Pinch roller assembly B R R R Pinch roller assembly X-3678-926-1
!- Reel drive gear assembly A *1 *1 R Reel drive assembly A-8279-476-N
!= S tension regulator arm assembly A *2 *2 *2 _ _
2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List
Period of parts replacement that are indicated in the list below are not the guarantee term of the parts. Usethis list as guidelines for maintenance and inspection. Period of parts replacement varies depending on theoperation environment and conditions of the units.nThe parts marked by 1, 2 and 3 must be replaced at the same time when the drum assembly 4 isreplaced.
Mode A: DRUM RUNNING HOUR Mode B: TAPE RUNNING HOUR
2-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-2-3. Applying Oil to Reel Drive Gear Assembly
Inspection timingRefer to Section 2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List.
ToolsOil : 7-661-018-18
Preparation1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
Applying oil1. Rotate the S/T one-way gear in the direction of the arrow until the square holes showing the letter S
or T become visible.2. Apply a drop of oil to the square holes respectively.
nBe sure to wipe off the oil that oozes to the surface of the S/T one-way gear, with gauze or cloth.
nRefer to Section 7-1-5 for using oil.
S
S
T
T
T-one-way gear
S-one-way gear
Square hole
Square hole
Square holeSquare hole
Reel drive gear assembly
2-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-2-4. Applying Grease to S Tension Regulator Assembly
Inspection timingRefer to Section 2-2-2. Periodic Inspection List.
nThe stop washer is used to assemble the S tension regulator assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when reassembling the S tension regulator assembly.
Tools. Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10. Stop washer insertion tool : J-6323-530-A. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Preparation1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading end state.5. Remove the S tension regulator assembly. (Refer to Section 7-21.)
Applying grease and assembling1. Remove the spring. Then remove the stop washer and remove the S tension regulator arm and plate
spring.n. Be careful not to lose the plate spring because the plate spring will drop at the same time when the
S tension regulator arm is removed.. Take note of the original position where the spring is hooked.
2. Wipe off the grease that adheres to the plate spring and to the shaft of the S tension regulator armwith gauze or cloth.
3. Clean the plate spring and the shaft of the S tension regulator arm with cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nNever apply a strong force to the bent portion of the plate spring.
4. Apply grease to the hatched ( ) portion of the boss.nRefer to Section 7-1-5 for the method of applying grease.
5. Install the plate spring to the boss of the S tension regulator arm.nInstall the plate spring in the direction as shown in Fig. 1.
6. Install the shaft of the S tension regulator arm to which the plate spring is attached, into the hole ofthe bearing holder and secure it with the new stop washer.nCheck that the S tension regulator arm can move smoothly by rotating it. If it does not rotate smooth-ly, check that the plate spring does not drop from boss of the S tension regulator arm and check thatthe plate spring does not override on top of the rib of the bearing holder. (See Fig. 2)
2-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Install the spring that is removed in step 1 to the original position that is taken note.nInstall the spring in the direction as shown in Fig. 3.
8. Install the S tension regulator assembly. (Refer to Section 7-21.)
S tension regulator arm
S tension regulator arm
S tension regulator arm
Stop washer
Spring
Spring
Apply here grease after cleaning
Illustration when viewed from the rear
Plate spring
Plate spring
Shaft block
Boss
Hole of bearing holder
Bearing holder
Rib of bearing holder
Rib of bearing holder
Bearing holder Bearing holderPlate spring
Boss
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Shaft
2-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-2-5. Notes on Repair Parts
1. Safety Related Components WarningwComponents marked ! are critical to safe operation.Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case ofreplacement.
2. Standardization of PartsSome repair parts supplied by Sony differ from thoseused for the unit. These are because of parts common-ality and improvement.Parts list has the present standardized repair parts.
3. Stock of PartsParts marked with “o” at SP (Supply Code) column ofthe spare parts list may not be stocked. Therefore, thedelivery date will be delayed.
4. HarnessHarnesses with no part number are not registered asspare parts.
2-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
14
12
13
15
11
No. Part No. SP Description
11 X-3605-994-3 s BAND ASSY, TENSION REGULATOR (T)12 X-3605-986-2 s BAND (S) ASSY,TEN-REGI13 X-3949-109-1 s ROLLER ASSY,AHC14 X-3678-926-1 s PINCH ROLLER ASSY15 3-182-765-02 s SPACER, CR
2-2-6. Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts
Mechanical block-1
2-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
101
104
106
105
103
102
No. Part No. SP Description
101 A-8326-897-B s DJR-27-R102 A-8326-898-B s BRUSH ASSY (RP)103 A-8326-899-B s RING ASSY (RP),SLIP104 A-8327-237-B s DJH-27A-R105 3-629-223-01 s BELT, TIMMING
106 A-8279-476-N o GEAR ASSY, REEL DRIVE
Mechanical block-2
2-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2-2-7. Recommended Replacement Parts
The parts are recommended to be replaced as needed.
No. Part name Sony part No. Remarks
1 Filter unit, Optical 1-758-483-11 For HDW-F900R series (Note 2)
2 Drop protection (ME) 3-629-424-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
3 Screen (ST), Wind 3-709-606-02 (Note 1)
4 Cap, Remote 3-629-427-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
5 Eye cup KIT (RP) A-8319-943-B Part made of rubber (Note 1)
6 Cap BNC 3-604-795-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
7 Cap, DC out 3-609-573-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
8 Stopper, Ornamental panel 3-742-035-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
9 Foot, Rubber (SI-RBR) 3-723-097-01 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
0 Pad assembly, Shoulder A-8286-119-A Part made of rubber (Note 1)
!- Ring, Mount (AL) 3-992-340-01 Replace every five years.(Note 3)
!= Cover, BNC 3-868-956-03 Part made of rubber (Note 1)
_ Battery, Lithium (CR-2450) 1-528-229-41 Replace every five years.(on the BP-33 board) (Note 4)
Note 1 : Check for deformation and deterioration from time to time. Replace it as necessary.Note 2 : The optical filter unit can become nebulous (intransparent and whitened) with elapse of time. Then it will not satisfy the required
characteristics. Replace it as needed.Note 3 : There can be a case that the lens cannot be securely fixed due to abrasion after long hours of use. Check deformation and
deterioration, and replace it as necessary.Note 4 : For detail, refer to Section 1-21.
2-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2
4
3
5
7
!=
1
!-
!/
9
8
6
6
3-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 3Error Diagnostics
OVER EMPH OVERDIAG PB VITC NDF EXT-LK HOLD
VH
TAPE
BATT
21 PEAK dB
E B
E F
RF SERVO HUMID SLACK
H MIN SEC FRM
0
20
10
30
•40
Error code
Warning display
Display window
The HDW-F900R has a built-in error diagnostics function for internal abnormalities.Among the various functions of these error diagnostics, this section describes only the error codes. Theyare displayed when an abnormality occurs in the tape run system and the self-diagnostics function whichdisplays the communication status of the devices on the various circuit boards.In addition to the above error codes and self-diagnostics function, the HDW-F900R has various warningsystems such as a warning indicator in the display window and a warning sound. For details of thesewarning systems that are not described in this section, refer to the Operation Manual of the HDW-F900R.
3-1. When Does the Error Code Appear?
The warning indicator in the display window turns on when an abnormality occurs immediately after thepower is turned on or an abnormality occurs during normal operation. Note that when the “SLACK”indicator turns on, which indicates a tape run system abnormality, or when a communication error isdetected, the corresponding error code is displayed in the time code area of the display window.
nThe contents of the respective warning indicators are shown below for reference.RF : Turns on when a video head is clogged or the recording current is distorted.SERVO : Turns on when a servo system malfunctions.HUMID : Turns on when condensation occurs.SLACK : Turns on when an abnormality occurs in the tape run system.
3-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
3-1-1. Description of Error Codes
The structure and the list of error codes are as follows.Details of the error codes (with detecting conditions and suspected causes) are described in Section 3-1-2in numerical order of the error codes.
Error list
Code Contents Page
Drum system 10 Drum drive voltage is abnormal. 3-4
11 Drum FG signal is abnormal. 3-4
12 Drum PG signal is abnormal. 3-4
Capstan system 20 Capstan drive voltage is abnormal. 3-4
21 Capstan FG signal is abnormal. 3-4
23 Direction of capstan rotation is abnormal. 3-5
24 Capstan speed is abnormal. 3-5
Reel system 32 S-reel FG signal is abnormal. 3-5
42 T-reel FG signal is abnormal. 3-5
Function cam system 61 Function cam forward rotation time-over 3-5
62 Function cam reverse rotation time-over 3-6
Sensor system 63 Tape top sensor time-over 3-6
65 Tape end sensor time-over 3-6
Communication system 70 Servo EEPROM communication is abnormal. 3-6
71 System control initialization command is abnormal. 3-6
Others 80 Communication error between SS and EQ 3-7
81 EQ switching pulse error 3-7
82 Communication error between SS and AT 3-7
83 SS-92G/IC13 program load error 3-7
86 FORMAT difference error 3-7
E-X XX
Drum drive voltage is abnormal.
Drum FG signal is abnormal.
Drum PG signal is abnormal.
Capstan drive voltage is abnormal.
Capstan FG signal is abnormal.
Direction of capstan rotation is abnormal.
Capstan speed is abnormal.
S-reel FG signal is abnormal.
T-reel FG signal is abnormal.
Function cam forward rotation time-over
Function cam reverse rotation time-over
Tape top sensor time-over
Tape end sensor time-over
Servo EEPROM communication is abnormal.
System control initialization command is abnormal.
Command when the error occurs
0 :
1 :
2 :
3 :
4 :
5 :
8 :
9 :
A :
b :
C :
E :
F :
Cause of the error
10 :
11 :
12 :
20 :
21 :
23 :
24 :
32 :
42 :
61 :
62 :
63 :
65 :
70 :
71 :
Communication error between SS and EQ
EQ switching pulse error
Communication error between SS and AT
SS-92G/IC13 program load error
FORMAT difference error
EEPROM writing error
FORMAT setting switch error
RE-TAKE error
DVP TG IC LOCK error
VTR System control microprocessor
abnormal
Cause of the error
80 :
81 :
82 :
83 :
86 :
88 :
89 :
91 :
92 :
95 :
POWER ON
REC
REC PAUSE
THREAD
UNTHREAD
STOP
PLAY
FF
REW
REC REVIEW
Rewinding to tape top
FF search
REW search
3-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Error list (continued from the previous page)
Code Contents Page
Others 88 EEPROM writing error 3-7
89 FORMAT setting switch error 3-7
91 RE-TAKE error 3-8
92 DVP TG IC LOCK error 3-8
95 VTR System control microprocessor abnormal 3-8
Protection operation when SLACK is detectedWhen SLACK is detected, the tape run system stops automatically.
Tape eject operation when SLACK is detectedEven when SLACK is detected, the EJECT button can be accepted but the tape is unthreaded interrupted-ly as described below. (Emergency EJECT)1) When the EJECT button is pressed, the tape is unthreaded for a certain period of time and after that
tape stops.2) When the EJECT button is kept pressed, unthreading and pausing are repeated until the tape is
completely ejected.The moment the EJECT button is released, the tape remains in the stop state.nWhen an error that may damage the tape is detected, the EJECT command is not accepted. When theEJECT command is not accepted, the viewfinder displays “Power OFF & Manual Eject”. Take outthe cassette tape manually by referring to Section “1-11. How to Eject a Cassette Tape Manually”.
When the Emergency EJECT is activatedWhen the Emergency EJECT is activated, there are cases that the tape is rewound.If you continue recording from the point of Emergency EJECT, the previously recorded information willbe possibly overwritten. To avoid this trouble, be sure to check the tape position whenever you haveactivated Emergency EJECT.
3-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
3-1-2. Details of Error Codes
E-x10
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum drive voltage.Detecting conditions : The specified time has elapsed with the drum drive voltage exceeding its rated
voltage.Suspected cause : . Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.
. Drum motor drive circuit (MDR-14G board) is defective.
. Drive voltage detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Drum motor is defective.
E-x11
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum FG signal.Detecting conditions : . The drum FG counter does not start counting within the specified time.
. The drum does not lock within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.
. Drum motor drive circuit (MDR-14G board) is defective.
. Drum FG detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Synchronization (DVP-41 board) with the reference signal (DVP_REF_FRM/CF) is faulty.
. Drum motor is defective.
E-x12
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the drum PG signal.Detecting conditions : The drum PG signal cannot be detected even when the drum makes more than one
complete revolution.Suspected cause : . Drum PG detector circuit (MDR-14G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Drum motor is defective.
. Tape tension is so high that the drum motor cannot rotate.
E-x20Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan drive voltage.Detecting conditions : The specified time has elapsed with the capstan drive voltage exceeding its rated
voltage.Suspected cause: . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot
rotate. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Drive voltage detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.
E-x21
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan FG signal.Detecting conditions : The capstan FG counter does not start counting. (Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot
rotate. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.
3-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
E-x23
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the rotating direction of capstan.Detecting conditions : Direction command of the capstan rotation does not match with the detected
direction of capstan rotation for the specified period of time.Suspected cause : . Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.
. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Capstan motor is defective.
E-x24
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the capstan speed.Detecting conditions : The measured capstan speed does not reach the specified speed even when the
specified time has elapsed. (Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the capstan motor is so high that the capstan motor cannot
reach the specified speed. (Mechanical reason). Capstan motor drive circuit (MDC-13G board) is defective.. Capstan FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Capstan motor is defective.. CTL pitch of the playing tape is faulty.
E-x32
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the S-reel FG signal.Detecting conditions : The S-reel FG counter does not count up nor down while the tape is running. (Only
in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Pressure force of the pinch arm is insufficient.
. Mechanical driving force is not transmitted to the S-reel. (Mechanical reason)
. S-reel FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Tape is being broken.
. Tape tension is so high that the tape cannot run.
E-x42
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the T-reel FG signal.Detecting conditions : (1) The T-reel FG counter does not count up nor down during unthreading.
(2) The FWD tape movement at the end of threading cannot be completed.(3) The reel tightening operation during cassette-in and cassette-out cannot be
completed.(4) The T-reel FG counter does not count up nor down while the tape is running.
(Only in the x1 speed or more)Suspected cause : . Cassette tape is not inserted. (Cassette-in sensor is defective.)
. Pressure force of the pinch arm is insufficient.
. Mechanical driving force is not transmitted to the T-reel. (Mechanical reason)
. T-reel FG detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Tape is being broken.
. Tape tension is so high that the tape cannot run.
. The tape is slack in the cassette when the cassette is inserted.
3-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
E-x61
Contents : Time-over of the function cam forward rotation is detected.Detecting conditions : The function cam cannot complete its forward rotation within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the gear block is so high that it cannot drive the function
cam. (Mechanical reason). Reflection seal for detecting the cam position is dirty.. Loading motor is defective.. Loading motor drive circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Cam position detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
E-x62
Contents : Time-over of the function cam reverse rotation is detected.Detecting conditions : The function cam cannot complete its reverse rotation within the specified time.Suspected cause : . Mechanical load to the gear block is so high that it cannot drive the function
cam. (Mechanical reason). Reflection seal for detecting the cam position is dirty.. Loading motor is defective.. Loading motor drive circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.. Cam position detector circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
E-x63
Contents : Time-over of the tape top sensor is detected.Detecting conditions : The tape top sensor is reacting even when the tape is wound up after tape top
detection.Suspected cause : . Tape position detector sensor circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Tape top sensor is defective.
E-x65
Contents : Time-over of the tape end sensor is detected.Detecting conditions : The tape end sensor is reacting even when the tape is wound up after tape end
detection.Suspected cause : . Tape position detector sensor circuit (MDC-13G, SS-92G boards) is defective.
. Tape end sensor is defective.
E-x70
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the servo EEPROM communication.Detecting conditions : (1) The error in the communication with the servo EEPROM is detected.
(2) The checksum does not match.Suspected cause : . IC403 on the MDC-13G board is defective.
. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G board is defective.
3-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
E-x71
Contents : Abnormality is detected in the system control initialization command.Detecting conditions : The initialization command is not completed within the specified time at the event
of power-on with a cassette being inserted.Suspected cause : . Signal path between the FP-152 board and the SS-92G board is defective.
E-x80
Contents : Communication error between SS and EQDetecting conditions : Communication cannot be established between the SS-92G board and the EQ-88G
board.Suspected cause : The EQ board is defective.
E-x81
Contents : EQ switching pulse errorDetecting conditions : None of the switching pulses in the EQ-88G board changes from “H”.Suspected cause : Connection among the MDC-13G board, MDR-14G board, and EQ-88G board is
faulty.
E-x82
Contents : Communication error between SS and ATDetecting conditions : Communication failure with AT exceeds three seconds, or the checksum of the
data sent from AT does not match for three seconds or more.Suspected cause : . Connection of the connectors on the SS-92G board, AT-172 board, and DCP-43
board is faulty.. The SS-92G board or the AT-172 board is defective.
E-x83
Contents : SS-92G/IC13 program load errorDetecting conditions : Loading of a program to the SS-92G board IC13 is not complete.Suspected cause : The SS-92G board IC13 is defective.
E-x86
Contents : FORMAT difference errorDetecting conditions : FORMAT of the camera and FORMAT of the VTR are different.Suspected cause : Connection between AT and SS is faulty.
E-x88
Contents : EEPROM writing errorDetecting conditions : Writing error has occurred in the servo EEPROM.Suspected cause : . The MDC-13G board IC403 is defective.
. Signal path between the SS-92G board and the MDC-13G board is faulty.
3-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
E-x89
Contents : FORMAT setting switch errorDetecting conditions : NO. 5 of the SS-92G board S101 is set to ON (forcible mode).Suspected cause : Initial setup at board replacement is wrong.
E-x91
Contents : RE-TAKE errorDetecting conditions : When the cue-up operation has failed at RE-TAKE, VF shows “Retake Search
failed”.Suspected cause : Playback of the TIMECODE record is faulty.
E-x92
Contents : DVP TG IC LOCK errorDetecting conditions : The DVP-41 board TG IC (IC200) cannot PLL-LOCKED.Suspected cause : . GENLOCK IN signal is defective.
. The DVP-41 board IC219, IC242 and IC243 is faulty.
E-x95
Contents : VTR System control microprocessor abnormalDetecting conditions : The camera block microprocessor or the microprocessor on the FP-152 board
cannot communicate with the VTR system control microprocessor.Suspected cause : VTR system control microprocessor has hung up. (Turn off the power and turn it
on again to recover.)
3-2. Device Check
The HDW-F900R has the self-diagnostics function to check the communication function of the respectivedevices.Result of the self-diagnostics is displayed on the [DEV STATUS display] of the DIAGNOSIS menu.(For more details, refer to Section “4. Setup Menu”.)
4-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 4Setup Menu
4-1. Setup Menus
The HDW-F900R has setup menus for making various settings and adjustments. The setup menus of thisunit include the USER menu, MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, ALL menu, OPERATION menu, PAINTmenu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu, DIAGNOSIS menu and SERVICE menu.The setup menus are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit.
4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus
Identifying switches
MENU ON/OFF switchUse this switch to display the setup menu. When the lid is closed, the switch is set to the OFF position.ON : Displays the setup menu.OFF : Exits the setup menu.
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switchUse this switch to cancel the setup of the items that are selected by the setup menu, or return to the initialsetup when the MENU ON/OFF switch is in the ON position.CANCEL/PRST : Cancels the executed setup or returns to the initial (PRST) setup.ESCAPE : Returns to the display of one layer higher in the menu hierarchy.
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switchUse this switch to show or to clear the setup displays in order to confirm various settings and statuseswhen the MENU ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position.ON/SEL : Shows the various settings and status check displays for about 10 seconds. Each press of this
switch turns over the display page.OFF : Clears the display that is selected by ON/SEL.
Rotary encoderWhen rotated : Moves to the other pages or items, or changes the setup value.When pressed : Enters the page set mode or the setup value modification mode.
Rotary encoder
CANCEL/PRSTOFF
ONESCAPE
MENU
ON/SEL
OFFSTATUS
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch
MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
4-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Operating procedure1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.2. To move to another page, rotate the rotary encoder. (Press the rotary encoder to set it.)3. To move to another item, rotate the rotary encoder.
nPressing the rotary encoder enters the setup value modification mode.
4. To modify a setup value, rotate the rotary encoder.5. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to exit the setup menu.
4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu
Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position to display the SERVICE menu.
4-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-2. TOP Menu
While pressing the rotary encoder, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Then the TOP menu appears.However, the TOP menu is not displayed when the switch S3 (TOP MENU DISABLE)/AT-172 board isin the ON position.
TOP MENU Display
Menu Function
USER Use the USER menu to set the functions that are used for daily routine operationssuch as MONITOR OUT setting.(This menu appears when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON normally.)
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE Use this menu to add or delete the pages that are required for the USER menu to suitoperators’ needs depending on applications.(For more details, refer to “5-1-3. Editing the USER Menu” of Operation Manual.)
ALL The ALL menu contains all pages of each category of the “USER 1” to “USER 19”pages edited by “USER MENU COSTOMIZE”, “ASSIGN ITEM SEL” page, OPERA-TION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE and DIAGNOSIS. It means that you can move toany page from the ALL menu without returning to the TOP menu.
OPERATION Usually, the camera operator is expected to use the OPERATION menu to set orchange the preference setups to suit the shooting conditions of each object.
PAINT Use this menu to implement fine adjustment of pictures by monitoring the cameraoutput waveform on a waveform monitor etc.
MAINTENANCE This is the camera maintenance menu. Use this menu to set the PAINT items of loweroperating frequency or to alter the system configuration.
FILE This is the file operation menu. Use this menu to save data in the REFERENCE fileetc.
DIAGNOSIS Use this menu to check the VTR status or to diagnose the circuit boards that aresuspected to have an error.
SERVICE Use this menu for service and maintenance.(This menu is enabled when the switch S1-1/AT-172 board is set to ON.)
S <TOP MENU>
USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS SERVICE
→
.
.
.
.
.
4-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-3. USER Menu
A user can select the desired menus that the user uses frequently in daily operation and can store them inthe USER menu.The USER menu contains the following menu items as the default when the unit was shipped from thefactory.Add or delete the menu items as desired with the use of the MENU CUTOMIZE menu.
Name of page Name of category
OUTPUT SEL OPERATION
FUNCTION1 OPERATION
VF DISP1 OPERATION
VF DISP2 OPERATION
‘!’ LED OPERATION
MARKER1 OPERATION
GAIN SW OPERATION
VF SETTING OPERATION
AUTO IRIS OPERATION
SHOT ID OPERATION
SHOT DISP OPERATION
SET STATUS OPERATION
USER FILE FILE
LENS FILE OPERATION
4-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-4. OPERATION Menu
nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
OUTPUT SEL Display (Setting the Output Signal)
Item Setting Function
HD SDI OUT OFF/ON Sets the output signal from the HD SDI OUTterminal.*1
SD REAR BNC OUT OFF/VBS/SDI Selects the output signal from the VBS/SDIOUT terminal.*1, *2, *3, *5
VBS : VBS signalSDI : SDI signalOFF : No output signal
TEST OUT SELECT HD/SD Selects the output signal from the TEST OUTterminal.*6
DOWN CON MODE SQEZE/LETTR/CROP Selects aspect ratio at down-conversion.*2, *4, *5
SQEZE : SqueezeThe HD video signal is converted tothe SD signal with the aspect ratioof 16 : 9 as it is. (16 : 9)
LETTR : LetterboxThe HD video signal having aspectratio of 16:9 is inserted into thepicture frame of 4 : 3 as it is and isconverted to the SD signal. (4 : 3)The black level bars are inserted inthe top and bottom of the SD outputvideo signal.
CROP : Edge cropThe video signal area occupying theaspect ratio of 4 : 3 is cut out fromthe HD video signal and isconverted to the SD signal. (4 : 3)
*1 : The HD-SDI OUT terminal on the side of HDW-F900R can be used as the VBS/SDI output when the HKDW-702 is installed.*2 : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.*3 : If a value other than Y (R, G, B) is selected for the “OUTPUT SELECT” item, a single-channel monochrome signal is output even
when VBS or SDI is selected for “SD REAR BNC OUT”.*4 : MARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when CROP is selected for TEST OUT SELECT: SD.*5 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.*6 : The SD output is not possible if the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed.
(When the SD output is selected, the output turns OFF.)
? 01OOUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT : ON
SD REAR BNC OUT : OFF TEST OUT SELECT : HD DOWN CON MODE : CROP
4-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
FUNCTION 1 Display (Setting the various functions)
Item Setting Function
ASSIGN SW <1> OFF : No function is assigned to this position. Selects the functions of the
F.MIC : Sets the input of FRONT MIC. ASSIGN1 switch.
CACHE : CACHE REC function ON/OFF switch(Refer to Operation Manual
CHARA : Character mix to the TEST OUT terminalfor details.)
MARKR :Marker superimposition ON/OFF switch
RTAKE : Executes RE-TAKE when pressed togetherwith the RET switch at the same time.
ATW : ATW (Automatic Tracking White-balance)function ON/OFF switch
RET.V : Displays the return video signal on VF.
RET : The same function as a Return switch of a lens.
REC : VTR S/S (Start/Stop) switch
TURBO : TURBO GAIN switch
TMARK : TELE FILE MARK recording switch
ZEBRA : Zebra display ON/OFF switch
5600K : Turns ON/OFF the function that electricallyapplies a 5600K color temperature filter.
UA01 to 10 : The items added in ASSIGN EDIT in USERMENU CUSTOMIZE can be selected.
ASSIGN SW <2> OFF : No function is assigned to this position. Selects the functions of the
F.MIC : Sets the input of FRONT MIC ASSIGN2 switch.
CACHE : CACHE REC function ON/OFF switch(Refer to Operation Manual
CHARA : Character mix to the TEST OUT terminalfor details.)
MARKR :Marker superimposition ON/OFF switch
ZEBRA : Zebra display ON/OFF switch
UA01 to 10 : (Same as ASSIGN SW <1>)
TURBO SW The items that can be set are the same as for “ASSIGN SW <1>”.
FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO Sets the FRONT MIC.
DF/NDF DF/NDF Sets DF/NDF.*1
END SEARCH OFF/ON END SEARCH function ON/OFF
CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF/CACHE/A.INT/M.INT Sets the CACHE RECfunction.*2
(Refer to the next page fordetails.)OFF : Not usedCACHE : CACHE RECA.INT : Auto INTerval
recordingM.INT : Manual INTerval
recording
*1 : Displayed only when the format is 59.94i/29.97PsF.*2 : Turns OFF by turning the power OFF and back ON when A.INT/M.INT is selected.
? 02OFUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1> : 5600K ASSIGN SW <2> : F.MIC TURBO SW : TURBO FRONT MIC SELECT: STREO DF/NDF : DF END SEARCH : OFF
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF Displays are switched in accordance with the setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC.
4-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
When CACHE is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
Item Setting Function
CACHE REC TIME 0SEC/1SEC/2SEC/3SEC/4SEC/ Sets the time of CACHE REC. (SEC: second.)5SEC/6SEC/7SEC* (When 0 sec is set, Just REC is selected.)
Displayed only when CACHE is selected in theabove CACHE/INTVAL REC.
* : 7SEC when the format is 59.94i/29.97PsF.8SEC when the format is 50i/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.
When A.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
Item Setting Function
TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/ Sets the total recording time of the Auto30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H/2H/3H/ Interval REC. (MIN: minutes, H: hours)4H/5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/30H/40H/ Displayed only when A.INT is selected in the50H/70H/100H above CACHE/INTVAL REC.
REC TIME 5SEC/10SEC/15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/ Sets the actual recording time of the Auto40SEC/50SEC/ Interval REC. (SEC: seconds, MIN: minutes)1MIN to 40MIN (59.94i) (29.97PsF) / Displayed only when A.INT is selected in the1MIN to 48MIN (50i) (25PsF) / above CACHE/INTVAL REC.1MIN to 50MIN (24PsF) (23.98PsF)
PRE-LIGHTING OFF/2SEC/5SEC/10SEC Sets the function of turning on the lightautomatically during the Auto Interval REC.This is the function to set the timing how manyseconds before starting recording, the lightturns on.Displayed when A.INT or M.INT is selected inthe above CACHE/INTVAL REC, andTRIGGER INTERVAL is other than M.INT.
CACHE/INTVAL REC: CACHE CACHE REC TIME : 0SEC
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT TAKE TOTAL TIME : 5MIN REC TIME : 5SEC PRE-LIGHTING : OFF
4-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
When M.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
Item Setting Function
NUMBER OF FRAME 1/2/4/8 Sets the number of picture frames that arerecorded in one recording in the ManualInterval REC.Displayed only when M.INT is selected in theabove CACHE/INTVAL REC.
TRIGGER INTERVAL M/1SEC/2SEC/3SEC/4SEC/5SEC/ Sets the interval time.6SEC/7SEC/8SEC/9SEC/10SEC/ When “M” is set, the number of frames that15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/50SEC/ are specified are recorded at the moment of1MIN/2MIN/3MIN/4MIN/5MIN/6MIN/ pressing the REC switch manually.7MIN/8MIN/9MIN/10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/ When any specific time is set, numbers of the30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/ specified frames are recorded as a trigger the12H/24H REC switch.
PRE-LIGHTING OFF/2SEC/5SEC/10SEC Sets the function of turning on the lightautomatically during the Manual Interval REC.This is the function to set the timing how manyseconds before starting recording, the lightturns on.This item is displayed only when theA.INT is selected in the aforementionedCACHE/INTVAL REC, or when the M. INT isselected and the TRIGGER INTERVAL isother than “M”.
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT NUMBER OF FRAME : 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL: 5MIN PRE-LIGHTING : OFF
4-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 03OFUNCTION 2 5600K : OFF WHITE SWITCH <B>: MEM SHOCKLESS WHITE : 1 ATW SPEED : 4 LOW LIGHT : OFF LOW LIGHT LEVEL : 0 VF BATT WARNING : 10% PB VIDEO : ALL ABS (VF MENU) : OFF
FUNCTION 2 Display (Setting the various functions)
Item Setting Function
5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a 5600K colortemperature filter.
WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM/ATW Sets the following modes when the WHITE BAL switch is setto the B (B-CH) position.ATW : Auto Tracking White-balanceMEM : Automatic white balance
SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3 Turns ON/OFF the function that smooths out the transition ofwhite balance when the WHITE BAL switch is operated. It alsosets the transition time of white balance. 1 (Fast) ↔ 3 (Slow)
ATW SPEED 1/2/3/4/5 Switches the tracking speed of ATW.1 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)
LOW LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the LOW LIGHT message display function in VF.(It displays the warning message on screen when the averagepicture level decreases below a specific level.)
LOW LIGHT LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the video level to start displaying the LOW LIGHTmessage when the above LOW LIGHT message displayfunction is ON.Reference : When a menu is being displayed on screen,
the character “L” is displayed instead of themessage “LOW LIGHT”.(Example) LOW LIGHT LEVEL: L 0
VF BATT WARNING 10%/20% Sets the percentage below which the display blinks when theremaining battery level is displayed in % on the VF DISP.
PB VIDEO ALL/HD SDI Can output camera images by limiting output destinations ofplayback images at the time of PB.ALL : Outputs PB VIDEO to VF, TEST OUT, REAR BNC, and
HD SDI.HDSDI : Outputs PB VIDEO to the HD SDI terminal only.
ABS (VF MENU) OFF/ON Displays the menu items that are displayed in relative values indefinite values.(The values of the applicable items are inverted.)
4-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VF DISP 1 Display (Setting the VF displays)
Item Setting Function
VF DISP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the VF display items other than menu.
VF DISPLAY MODE 1/2/3 Sets the display mode.*1
DISP EXTENDER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the extender display.
DISP FILTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the filter display.
DISP WHITE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white balance memory display.
DISP 5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the 5600K display.
DISP GAIN OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gain setup value display.
DISP SHUTTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the shutter speed display.
DISP AUDIO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio level display.
DISP TAPE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the remaining amount of tape display.
*1 : Regarding the messages that indicate the contents of setup change and the messages that indicate progress/result of adjustments,only a part of the display items can be selected or no display at all can also be selected by setting the display mode.
Correspondence between the conditions of the unit when the message is displayed and the display modes are shown as follows.O : Message is displayed.X : Message is not displayed.
The conditions that necessitate Message Display modeshowing of the message setting
1 2 3
When FILTER selection is changed. FILTER : n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) X X O
When GAIN setting is changed. GAIN : n (n = _3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, X X O12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB, 30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB)
When the WHITE BAL switch setting WHITE : n (n = A CH, B CH, PRESET) X X Ois changed. or ATW (Auto Tracking White-balance)
: RUN
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is DCC : ON (or OFF) X O Oset to DCC ON or DCC OFF.
When the shutter speed/shutter : SS : 1/100 (or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, X O Omode setting is changed.*2 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS, EVS)
When BLACK balance/WHITE balance example : WHITE : OK X O Oadjustment is in progress.
*2 : It is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
? 04OVF DISP 1 VF DISP : ON VF DISPLAY MODE : 3 DISP EXTENDER : ON DISP FILTER : ON DISP WHITE : ON DISP 5600K : ON DISP GAIN : ON DISP SHUTTER : ON DISP AUDIO : ON DISP TAPE : ON
4-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VF DISP 2 Display (Setting the VF displays)
Item Setting Function
DISP IRIS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the lens iris value display.
DISP ZOOM OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the zoom display.
DISP COLOR TEMP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the color temperature display.
DISP BATT REMAIN INT/VOLT/AUTO Selects the mode for the remaining battery (or DC IN) voltage display.
DISP DC IN OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the “DC IN” display on the VF when the setting is DC IN.
DISP WRR RF LVL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the wireless receiver RF level display.
DISP TIME CODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the time-code display.
‘!’ LED Display (Selecting the conditions to turn on the ‘!’ indicator on VF)
Item Setting Function
GAIN <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the GAIN value is other than the GAIN<!> setting
in '!'LED STD.
SHUTTER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the SHUTTER setting is other than the
SHUTTER<!> setting in '!'LED STD.
WHITE BAL <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the WHITE BAL setting is other than the WHITE
BAL<!> setting in '!'LED STD.
5600K <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the 5600K setting is other than the 5600K<!>
setting in '!'LED STD.
ATW <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the ATW setting is other than the ATW<!> setting
in '!'LED STD.
EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the EXTENDER setting is other than the
EXTENDER<!> setting in '!'LED STD.
FILTER <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the FILTER setting is other than the FILTER
ND<!> and FILTER CC<!> settings in '!'LED STD.
OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is other than the
OVERRIDE<!> setting in '!'LED STD.
FORMAT <!> OFF/ON OFF : Does not turn on.ON : Turns on when the FORMAT setting is other than the FORMAT
setting in '!'LED STD.
? 05OVF DISP 2 DISP IRIS : ON DISP ZOOM : ON DISP COLOR TEMP : OFF DISP BATT REMAIN: INT DISP DC IN : OFF DISP WRR RF LVL : OFF
DISP TIME CODE : OFF
? 06O'!'LED GAIN <!> : ON SHUTTER <!> : ON WHITE BAL <!> : ON 5600K <!> : ON ATW <!> : ON EXTENDER <!> : ON FILTER <!> : OFF OVERRIDE <!> : ON FORMAT <!> : OFF
4-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 07O'!'LED STD GAIN <!> : 0dB SHUTTER <!> : OFF WHITE BAL <!> : AB 5600K <!> : OFF ATW <!> : ON EXTENDER <!> : ON FILTER ND <!> : 1 FILTER CC <!> : B OVERRIDE <!> : ON FORMAT <!> : 23.98
‘!’ LED STD Display (The ‘!’ indicator on VF)
Item Setting Function
GAIN <!> 0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH Sets the reference value of GAIN<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
SHUTTER <!> OFF/ECS/SLS/ Sets the reference value of SHUTTER<!>.each FORMAT (Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)SHUTTER SPEED*
WHITE BAL <!> P/A/B/PA/PB/AB Sets the reference value of WHITE BAL<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
5600K <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of 5600K<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
ATW <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of ATW<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of EXTENDER<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
FILTER ND <!> 1/2/3/4 Sets the reference value of FILTER ND<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
FILTER CC <!> A/B/C/D Sets the reference value of FILTER CC<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of OVERRIDE<!>.(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
FORMAT <!> 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF/ Sets the reference value of FORMAT<!>.24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF (Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
* : The selectable shutter speeds are different for each format. (Refer to Operation Manual for details.)
4-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
MARKER 1 Display (Setting the MARKER)
Item Setting Function
MARKER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the MARKER display functions.
CENTER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the CENTER MARKER display.
CENTER MARK 1/2/3/4 Selects the types of CENTER MARKER when theabove CENTER MARKER display is ON.*1
SAFETY ZONE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKERdisplay.
SAFETY AREA 80/90/92.5/95% Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONEMARKER display.
ASPECT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ASPECT MARKER display.
ASPECT SELECT 14 : 9/13 : 9/4 : 3/1.85/2.35 Selects the aspect ratio1.85 : 1.85 : 12.35 : 2.35 : 1
ASPECT MASK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to darken the outsideof the specified aspect.nThis setting is effective in the VF output only.
ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 8 Selects the darkness level of the outside of thespecified aspect when ASPECT MASK is ON.nThis setting is effective in the VF output only.
100% MARKER OFF/ON/SD*2 Selects the 100% (effective picture elements)MARKER display.
*1 : The CENTER MARKER is displayed as shown below.
*2 : 100% MARKER : SD is displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed. OFF : 100% marker OFF.ON : HD 100% marker displaySD : SD 100% marker display
nMARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when “TEST OUT SELECT” is set to SDand “DOWN CON MODE” to CROP on the OUTPUT SEL screen.
? 08OMARKER 1 MARKER : OFF CENTER : OFF CENTER MARK : 3 SAFETY ZONE : OFF SAFETY AREA : 90% ASPECT : OFF ASPECT SELECT : 4:3 ASPECT MASK : OFF ASPECT MASK LVL : 0 100% MARKER : OFF
Setting 1 2 3 4
VFscreen
4-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
MARKER 2 Display (Setting the MARKER-related items)
Item Setting Function
USER BOX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the BOX cursor display.
USER BOX WIDTH 1 to 479 Sets the horizontal width of the BOX cursor.
USER BOX HEIGHT 1 to 269 Sets the vertical width of the BOX cursor.
USER BOX H POS. _480 to 479* Sets the BOX cursor position (horizontal position).
USER BOX V POS. _270 to 269* Sets the BOX cursor position (vertical position).
CENTER H POS. _479 to 479 Sets the CENTER MARKER position (horizontal position).
CENTER V POS. _268 to 268 Sets the CENTER MARKER position (vertical position).
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display withrespect to the ASPECT MARKER.
ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE MARKER displaywith respect to the ASPECT MARKER.
* : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above USER BOX WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
GAIN SW Display (Setting GAIN)
Item Setting Function
GAIN LOW _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “L” position.
GAIN MID _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “M” position.
GAIN HIGH _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set tothe “H” position.
GAIN TURBO _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value of the TURBO GAIN switch.
TURBO SW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that disables L/M/H ofthe GAIN switch while the TURBO GAIN is beingselected.
? 09OMARKER 2 USER BOX : OFF USER BOX WIDTH : 240 USER BOX HEIGHT : 135 USER BOX H POS. : 0 USER BOX V POS. : 0 CENTER H POS. : 0 CENTER V POS. : 0
ASPECT SAFE ZONE : OFF ASPECT SAFE AREA : 90%
? 10OGAIN SW GAIN LOW : 0dB GAIN MID : 6dB GAIN HIGH : 12dB GAIN TURBO : 42dB
TURBO SW IND. : OFF
4-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VF SETTING display (Setting VF)
Item Setting Function
ZEBRA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the zebra display.
ZEBRA SELECT 1/2/BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type.
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL (50% to 105%) Sets the ZEBRA1 display level (center value).
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL (95% to 105%) Sets the ZEBRA2 display level (center value).
ASPECT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all the ASPECT marker display.
VF DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)
VF DTL H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the H. details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)
VF DTL V LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the V. details of the VF picture.(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged.)
? 11OVF SETTING ZEBRA : OFF ZEBRA SELECT : 1 ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL: 70% ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL: 100% ASPECT : OFF
VF DETAIL LEVEL : 0 VF DTL H LEVEL : 0 VF DTL V LEVEL : 0
4-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
AUTO IRIS Display (Setting AUTO IRIS)
Item Setting Function
IRIS OVERRIDE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE function.When set to ON, the reference value of the AUTO IRIS can bechanged by the rotary encoder. (5 steps: _1, _1/2, 0, +1/2, +1)
IRIS SPEED 0/1/2/3/4/5 Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed. 0 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRISdetection level to 100% when the video signal of higher than100% is input.
IRIS WINDOW 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range).*1
When VAR is selected, the iris window can be set by theIRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS as describedbelow.
IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that checks the iris window withthe box cursor.
IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in theabove IRIS WINDOW.
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected inthe above IRIS WINDOW.
IRIS VAR H POS _460 to 460*2 Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris windowwhen VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW.
IRIS VAR V POS _249 to 249*2 Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris windowwhen VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW.
*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.
*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
? 12OAUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE : OFF IRIS SPEED : 3 CLIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF IRIS WINDOW : 1 IRIS WINDOW IND.: OFF IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240 IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135 IRIS VAR H POS : 0 IRIS VAR V POS : 0
Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6
VF screen
Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame
4-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SHOT ID Display (Setting SHOT ID)
Item Setting Function
ID-1 12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces) Setting SHOT ID-1
ID-2 12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces) Setting SHOT ID-2
ID-3 12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces) Setting SHOT ID-3
ID-4 12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces) Setting SHOT ID-4
SHOT DISP Display (Selecting the shot data to be superimposed on color bar)
Item Setting Function
SHOT DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the date display.
SHOT TIME OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the time display.
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the model name display of this unit.
SHOT SERIAL NO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the serial number display of this unit.
SHOT ID SEL OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ID-4 Displays the SHOT ID number that is selected by theSHOT ID page.
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the blinking of the asterisk “*” on thecolor bar.
? 13OSHOT ID ID-1 : ID-2 : ID-3 : ID-4 :
? 14OSHOT DISP SHOT DATE : OFF SHOT TIME : OFF SHOT MODEL NAME : OFF SHOT SERIAL NO : OFF SHOT ID SEL : OFF SHOT BLINK CHARA: OFF
4-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SET STATUS Display (Selecting the status check display page that appears when theSTATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch is operated*****)
Item Setting Function
STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ABNORMAL <!> screen display.
STATUS FUNCTION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the FUNCTION screen display.
STATUS AUDIO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the AUDIO STATUS screen display.
* : The status display screens are shown as follows.
ABNORMAL <!> display (Indicating the conditions to turn on the Abnormal LED <!> thatis set by the <!> LED display)
FUNCTION display (Indicating the setup status of the various functions that are set bythe FUNCTION display)
Item Setting Function
FORMAT Indicating the present format.
POWER OFF>ON TO 50i Display only Indication requesting to turn off the main power once when theFORMAT is switched.This indication appears only when the FORMAT is switched.
ASSIGN <1> Displays the function that is assigned to the ASSIGN1 switch.
ASSIGN <2> Displays the function that is assigned to the ASSIGN2 switch.
ASSIGN <T> Displays the function that is assigned to the TURBO switch.
CACHE REC Displays the ON/OFF status of the CACHE REC function.(only when the CACHE REC board is installed)
<Actual State> Displays the output status of the various BNC connectors.SD REAR BNCTEST OUTHD SDI
? 15OSET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL : ON STATUS FUNCTION : ON STATUS AUDIO : ON
ABNORMAL<!> !GAIN : ON 12dB!SHUTTER : ON ECS 5600K : ON OFF WHITE BAL : ON W:B ATW : ON OFF EXTENDER : ON OFF!FILTER : OFF 2B OVERRIDE : ON 0 FORMAT : OFF 59.94
FUNCTION FORMAT : 59.94iPOWER OFF>ON TO 50iASSIGN <1> : 5600KASSIGN <2> : F.MICASSIGN <T> : TURBOCACHE REC : OFF : 1SEC- Actual State --------- SD REAR BNC : VBS TEST OUT : HD HD SDI : OFF
4-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
TEST OUT Display (Setting on TEST OUT and return video)
Item Setting Function
TEST OUT MARKER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the VF marker to theTEST OUT terminal.
TEST OUT VFDISP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the characters thatappear on VF, to the TEST OUT terminal when the VF’sDISPLAY switch is set to ON.
TEST OUT MENU OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the menus that appearon VF, to the TEST OUT terminal when the MENU ON/OFFswitch is set to ON.
TEST OUT ZEBRA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to output the zebra pattern to theTEST OUT terminal.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT andthe VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
nMARKER or ZEBRA is not output to the TEST OUT terminal when “TEST OUT SELECT” is set to SDand “DOWN CON MODE” to CROP on the OUTPUT SEL screen.
? 16OTEST OUT
TEST OUT MARKER : OFF TEST OUT VFDISP : OFF TEST OUT MENU : OFF TEST OUT ZEBRA : OFF
OUTPUT SELECT : Y
AUDIO STATUS Display (Indicating the setup status on audio)
Item Function
EMPHASIS Displays the EMPHASIS, DF/NDF, and FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO setting.
CH1 Displays the input signals of CH1 to CH4.CH2CH3CH4
CH1 Displays the input signal level of CH1 to CH4. (When the input signal overflows,CH2 OV is displayed.)CH3CH4
AUDIO STATUS EMPHASIS:OFF NDF STEREO
CH1:FRONT CH3:WIRELESCH2:REAR CH4:WIRELES
∞ 40 30 20 10 0CH1: CH2:CH3:CH4:
OV
4-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
OFFSET WHT Display (Setting on the offset white function)
Item Setting Function
OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the offset white function. (A-CH)Note : If the white balance auto adjustment is not performed,
the following settings are not reflected.
WARM-COOL <A> Displays the color Sets the offset value. (A-CH)temperature(Guideline)
WARM-COOL BAL <A> (_99 to 99) Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment. (A-CH)
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the offset white function. (B-CH)Note : If the white balance auto adjustment is not performed,
the following settings are not reflected.
WARM-COOL <B> Displays the color Sets the offset value. (B-CH)temperature(Guideline)
WARM-COOL BAL <B> (_99 to 99) Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment. (B-CH)
? 17OOFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A>: OFF WARM-COOL <A>: 3200 WARM-COOL BAL<A>: 0
OFFSET WHITE <B>: OFF WARM-COOL <B>: 3200 WARM-COOL BAL<B>: 0
4-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 18OSHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS : ON SHUTTER 1/100 : ON SHUTTER 1/125 : ON SHUTTER 1/250 : ON SHUTTER 1/500 : ON SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
SHT ENABLE Display (Setting the shutter mode/speed that can be selected by theSHUTTER switch etc)
Item Setting Function
SHUTTER ECS OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/32*1 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/33*2 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/40*3 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/50*4 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/60*5 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/96*1 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/100*6 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/120*3 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/125 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/250 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/500 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/1000 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
SHUTTER 1/2000 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit.
*1 : Displayed only in FORMAT 24PsF or 23.98PsF.*2 : Displayed only in FORMAT 25PsF.*3 : Displayed only in FORMAT 29.97PsF.*4 : Displayed only in FORMAT 24PsF, 23.98PsF or 25PsF.*5 : Displayed in formats other than FORMAT 59.94i.*6 : Displayed only in FORMAT 59.94i or 25PsF.
4-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
LENS FILE Display (Operating the LENS file)
Item Setting Function
LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 Selects the LENS file.
F.ID Display only Displays the file ID of the LENS file that is selected by theabove LENS FILE SELECT.
L.ID* Display only Displays the LENS-specific ID.
L.MF* Display only Displays the name of the LENS manufacturer.
* : When a lens other than a serial lens is attached, (Unknown) is displayed.
UMID SET Display (Setting the UMID)
Item Setting Function
EX-OWNERSHIP REC OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF user information recording
COUNTRY CODE 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the country code.
ORGANIZATION 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the organization code.
USER CODE 4 characters (alphanumeric characters) Setting the user code.
INSTANCE NO RND/GEN Selecting the method of generating thenumber to be used for identifying the originalvideo signal.RND : Random numberGEN : Generation
TIME ZONE Press the rotary encoder to move to Setting TIME ZONE (time difference)the TIME ZONE selection display.
MACHINE Display only The ID number indicating the equipmentunique number is displayed.
? 19OLENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT : 1
F.ID: <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)
? 20OUMID SET EX-OWNERSHIP REC: OFF
COUNTRY CODE : ORGANIZATION : USER CODE : INSTANCE NO : RND
TIME ZONE:00:+00:00
MACHINE:080046
4-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-5. PAINT Menu
nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
SW STATUS Display (Turns ON/OFF the PAINT related functions)
Item Setting Function
GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function.
BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function.
MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the linear matrix correction functions.
KNEE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function.
WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white clip correction function.
DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that adds the detail signal to thevideo signal to improve resolution power.
APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function.
FLARE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the flare correction function.
EVS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the super EVS (enhanced vertical resolution)mode.
TEST SAW OFF/ANALOG/ Turns ON/OFF the function that outputs the TEST signal forciblyDIGITAL to the video signal system, and selects the type of TEST signal.
(Invalid when the BARS signal is selected.)
? 01OSW STATUS GAMMA : ON BLACK GAMMA : OFF MATRIX : OFF KNEE : ON WHITE CLIP : ON DETAIL : ON APERTURE : ON FLARE : ON EVS : OFF TEST SAW : OFF
4-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
WHITE Display (Setting color temperature at WHITE A/B)
Item Setting Function
COLOR TEMP.<A> Displays the color temperature Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of(Guideline) your preference. <A ch>
(The displayed value is a guideline.)Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also
change accordingly at the same time.When data of the color temperaturedisplay is more than 100000K, ******appears.
C TEMP BAL <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimumcolor cannot be obtained by the above COLORTEMP. <A ch>Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also
change accordingly at the same time.
R GAIN <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the R GAIN. <A ch>
B GAIN <A> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the B GAIN. <A ch>
5600K <A> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a5600K color temperature filter. <A ch>
COLOR TEMP.<B> Displays the color temperature Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of(Guideline) your preference. <B ch>
(The displayed value is a guideline.)Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also
change accordingly at the same time.When data of the color temperaturedisplay is more than 100000K, ******appears.
C TEMP BAL <B> (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimumcolor cannot be obtained by the above COLORTEMP. <B ch>Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also
change accordingly at the same time.
R GAIN <B> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the R GAIN. <B ch>
B GAIN <B> (_99 to 99) Uses this item when you want to adjust the colortemperature by changing the B GAIN. <B ch>
5600K <B> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that electrically applies a5600K color temperature filter. <B ch>
? 02OWHITE COLOR TEMP. <A>: 3200 C TEMP BAL <A>: 0 R GAIN <A>: 0 B GAIN <A>: 0 5600K <A>: OFF COLOR TEMP. <B>: 3200 C TEMP BAL <B>: 0 R GAIN <B>: 0 B GAIN <B>: 0 5600K <B>: OFF
4-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
BLACK/FLARE Display (Adjusting black/flare)
Item Setting Function
MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and Bblack levels are adjusted.)
R BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R black level.
B BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B black level.
MASTER FLARE (0 to 199) Adjusts the master flare compensation level. (All ofthe R, G and B flare compensation levels areadjusted.)
R FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R flare compensation level.
G FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G flare compensation level.
B FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B flare compensation level.
FLARE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the flare compensation function.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 03OBLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK : 0 R BLACK : 0 B BLACK : 0 MASTER FLARE : 0 R FLARE : 0 G FLARE : 0 B FLARE : 0 FLARE : ON
OUTPUT SELECT : Y
4-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
GAMMA Display (Adjusting gamma)
Item Setting Function
GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function.
STEP GAMMA 0.35 to 0.90 Sets the master gamma correction curve for each(0.05 STEP) step.
MASTER GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master gamma correction curve.
R GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R gamma correction curve.
G GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G gamma correction curve.
B GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B gamma correction curve.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*1 Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
GAMMA SELECT STD/HG/USER Selects the major classifications of gamma.STD : StandardHG: Hyper gamma*2
USER : User gammaBy executing USER GAMMA LOAD, thegamma table loaded from the memory stickcan be selected.
GAM SEL (STD) / (HG) / (USER) 1 to 4 (STD/HG) Selects the gamma curve.1 to 5 (USER) Display is switched by selecting the aforementioned
GAMMA SELECT.
*1 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
*2 :
? 04OGAMMA GAMMA : ON STEP GAMMA : 0.45 MASTER GAMMA : 0 R GAMMA : 0 G GAMMA : 0 B GAMMA : 0 OUTPUT SELECT : Y GAMMA SELECT : STD GAM SEL (STD) : 3
With 100% white clip With 109% white clip
Effective for expressing the Hyper gamma 1 Hyper gamma 3tone for low luminance.(The -3 dB gain can be usedfor reducing more noise.)
Effective for expressing a wide Hyper gamma 2 Hyper gamma 4range of contrast from low tohigh luminance.(The -3 dB gain cannot be used.)
4-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
BLK GAMMA Display (Adjusting black gamma)
Item Setting Function
BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function.
BLK GAMMA RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/HIGH Sets the range in which the black gamma correction iseffective.LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
MASTER BLK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black gamma correction curve.(All of the R, G and B black gamma are adjusted.)
R BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R black gamma correction curve.
G BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G black gamma correction curve.
B BLACK GAMMA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B black gamma correction curve.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 05OBLK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA : OFF BLK GAMMA RANGE : HIGH
MASTER BLK GAMMA: 0 R BLACK GAMMA : 0 G BLACK GAMMA : 0 B BLACK GAMMA : 0
OUTPUT SELECT : Y
4-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
KNEE 1 Display (Adjusting knee 1)
Item Setting Function
KNEE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function.
KNEE POINT (M) 50 to 109 (%) Adjusts the master knee point level during the manualknee adjustment.
KNEE SLOPE (M) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master knee slope level during the manualknee adjustment.
KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee saturation function.
KNEE SAT LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the knee saturation level.
WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white clip function. (used during thevideo signal adjustment)Note : The video level that is higher than 109% is not
output even if this setting is set to OFF.
WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100.0 to 109.5 (%) Set the master white clip level.
KNEE 2 Display (Adjusting knee 2)
Item Setting Function
KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns OFF/ON the knee saturation function.
KNEE POINT (R) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the R knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.
KNEE SLOPE (R) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.
KNEE POINT (G) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the G knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.
KNEE SLOPE (G) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.
KNEE POINT (B) _45.0 to 14.0 Adjusts the B knee offset from the master knee point level(0.1 STEP) when the KNEE SATURATION function is OFF.
KNEE SLOPE (B) (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B knee slope level when the KNEESATURATION function is OFF.
? 06OKNEE 1 KNEE : ON KNEE POINT (M) : 95.0 KNEE SLOPE (M) : 0
KNEE SATURATION : OFF KNEE SAT LEVEL : 0
WHITE CLIP : ON WHITE CLIP LEVEL: 108.0
? 07OKNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION : OFF
KNEE POINT(R) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(R) : 0 KNEE POINT(G) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(G) : 0 KNEE POINT(B) : 0.0 KNEE SLOPE(B) : 0
4-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 08ODETAIL 1 DETAIL : ON APERTURE : ON DETAIL LEVEL : 0 APERTURE LEVEL : 0 DETAIL H/V RATIO: 0 CRISPENING : 0 LEVEL DEPEND : ON LEVEL DEPEND LVL: 0 DETAIL FREQ. : 0
DETAIL 1 Display (Adjusting DETAIL 1)
Item Setting Function
DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the detail signal.
APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function.
DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the overall detail signal level.
APERTURE LEVEL (0 to 15) Sets the aperture correction level.
DETAIL H/V RATIO (_99 to 99) Sets the V. detail signal level only.
CRISPENING (_99 to 99) Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which thedetail signal is crispening.
LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the level depend function. (This functiondecreases the amount of detail signal when the videosignal amplitude is small.)
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (_99 to 99) Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressedby the level depend.
DETAIL FREQ. (_99 to 99) Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. detail signal.
DETAIL 2 Display (Adjusting DETAIL 2)
Item Setting Function
KNEE APERTURE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the knee aperture function. (This functioncontrols the amount of the detail signal that is added tothe highlight signal higher than the knee point.)
KNEE APT LEVEL (0 to 199) Adjusts the amount of the detail signal that is added to thehighlight signal higher than the knee point.
DETAIL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the white peak of the detail signal.
DETAIL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the detail signal.
DETAIL V-BLK LMT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the V. detail signal.
H/V CONTROL MODE V/ H/V Selects an operation mode of DETAIL H/V RATIO on theDETAIL 1 page.H/V : Controls the ratio of H and V.V : Controls V.
? 09ODETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE : OFF KNEE APT LEVEL : 0
DETAIL WHT LIMIT: 0 DETAIL BLK LIMIT: 0 DETAIL V-BLK LMT: 0
H/V CONTROL MODE: V
4-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SD DETAIL Display (Adjusting DETAIL of DOWN CON OUT)*****
* : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.
Item Setting Function
SD DETAIL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the detail signal.*1
SD DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the overall detail signal level.*1
SD CRISPENING (0 to 15) Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which thedetail signal is crispening.*1
SD DTL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the white peak of the detail signal.*1
SD DTL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Limits the black peak of the detail signal.*1
SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the level depend function. (This functiondecreases the amount of detail signal when the videosignal amplitude is small.)*1
SD LV.DEPEND LVL (0 to 15) Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressedby the level depend.*1
SD DTL FREQ. (0 to 3) Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. detail signal.*1
SD DTL H/V RATIO (0 to 7) Sets the V. detail signal level only.*1
SD CROSS COLOR (0 to 15) Sets the cross-color suppression level.*1, *2
*1 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.*2 : Displayed only when the format is set to 59.94i/29.97PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed.
? 10OSD DETAIL SD DETAIL : ON SD DETAIL LEVEL : 0 SD CRISPENING : 0 SD DTL WHT LIMIT: 0 SD DTL BLK LIMIT: 0 SD LEVEL DEPEND : ON SD LV.DEPEND LVL: 0 SD DTL FREQ. : 0 SD DTL H/V RATIO: 0 SD CROSS COLOR : 0
4-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SKIN DETAIL Display (Controlling DETAIL of specific color such as skin tone)
Item Setting Function
SKIN DETAIL ALL* OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the skin detail function.
SKIN DETECT Press the rotary encoder to Automatic color detection function.execute this menu item Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the
rotary encoder. Then the SKIN DTL SAT. and the SKINDTL HUE will be set automatically.
SKIN AREA IND OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the zebra display to the target area.
SKIN DTL SELECT* 1/2/3 Selects the skin detail BANK.(When BANK is switched, the lower 5 lines of display areswitched at the same time.)
SKIN DETAIL* OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the skin detail function.ON/OFF can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.
SKIN DETAIL LVL (_99 to 99) Sets the skin detail signal level.(Increasing this value increases the skin detail signalamplitude.)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.
SKIN DTL SAT. (_99 to 99) Sets the range of (saturation) of chroma signal in whichthe skin detail signal is effective.This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.
SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 Sets the center phase of the chroma phase (HUE) inwhich the skin detail functions (Unit: Degrees)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.
SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 Sets the width of the chroma phase (HUE) in which theskin detail functions (Unit: Degrees)This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) ofthe above SKIN DTL SELECT.
* : Setting of the SKIN DTL SELECT is effective when both the SKIN DETAIL ALL and SKIN DETAIL are set to ON.
? 11OSKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL: OFF SKIN DETECT : EXEC SKIN AREA IND : OFF
SKIN DTL SELECT: 1 SKIN DETAIL : ON SKIN DETAIL LVL: 0 SKIN DTL SAT. : 0 SKIN DTL HUE : 0 SKIN DTL WIDTH : 40
4-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
MTX LINEAR Display (Setting linear matrix)
Item Setting Function
MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and multi matrix functions.
MATRIX (USER) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix function.
MATRIX (PRESET) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the preset matrix function.
MATRIX (PRST) SEL 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects the preset matrix.1 : equivalent to SMPTE 240M 2 : equivalent to ITU-7093 : equivalent to SMPTE WIDE 4 : equivalent to NTSC5 : equivalent to EBU 6 : equivalent to ITU-609
MATRIX (USER) R-G (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MATRIX (USER) R-B (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MATRIX (USER) G-R (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MATRIX (USER) G-B (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MATRIX (USER) B-R (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MATRIX (USER) B-G (_99 to 99) Sets the matrix coefficients.
MTX MULTI Display (Setting multi matrix)
Item Setting Function
MATRIX OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and multi matrixcorrection functions.
MATRIX (MULTI) OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the multi matrix function.
MTRIX AREA IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that shows the zebrapattern indicating the detecting region of the multimatrix correction, inside VF.
MTRIX COLOR DET Press the rotary encoder Automatic color detection function.to execute this menu item. Move the cursor to the desired object color and press
the rotary encoder. Then the MTX (MULTI) AXIS willbe set automatically.
MULTI MTX PRESET Press the rotary encoder Presets the HUE/SAT settings of all AXIS.to execute this menu item.
MTX (MULTI) AXIS B/B+/MG_/MG/MG+/ Selects the chroma phase to correct.R/R+/YL_/YL+/G_/G/G+/CY/CY+/B_
MTX (MULTI) HUE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the chroma phase (HUE) of the multi matrix correction.
MTX (MULTI) SAT (_99 to 99) Adjusts the saturation (SAT) of the multi matrix correction.
? 12OMTX LINEAR MATRIX : OFF MATRIX (USER) : OFF MATRIX (PRESET) : OFF MATRIX (PRST)SEL : 2 MATRIX(USER) R-G : 0 MATRIX(USER) R-B : 0 MATRIX(USER) G-R : 0 MATRIX(USER) G-B : 0 MATRIX(USER) B-R : 0 MATRIX(USER) B-G : 0
? 13OMTX MULTI
MATRIX : OFF MATRIX (MULTI) : OFF
MATRIX AREA IND.: OFF MATRIX COLOR DET: EXEC MULTI MTX PRESET: EXEC
MTX(MULTI) AXIS : B MTX(MULTI) HUE : 0 MTX(MULTI) SAT : 0
4-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
V MODULATION Display (Adjusting Temporary WHITE V SAW SHADING for LENS)
Item Setting Function
VMOD OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the V. modulation function.
MASTER VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the master V. modulation correction.(All of the R, G and B V. modulation corrections arecontrolled.)
R VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the R V. modulation correction.
G VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the G V. modulation correction.
B VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts amount of the B V. modulation correction.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
nIn the MASTER VMOD and R/G/B VMOD, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-endof the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON
? 14OV MODULATION
VMOD : ON
MASTER VMOD EX: 0 R VMOD EX: 0 G VMOD EX: 0 B VMOD EX: 0
OUTPUT SELECT : Y
4-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SATURATION Display (Setting the saturation)
Item Setting Function
SATURATION OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the saturation function.
SAT. LEVEL _99 to 0 Sets the saturation level.
LOW KEY SAT. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the low key saturation function.
L.KEY SAT.LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the saturation level in the darker video signal.
L.KEY SAT.RANGE LOW/L.MID/ Sets the range of video signal in which the low keyH.MID/HIGH saturation correction is effective.
LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
Y BLK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the Y black gamma correction function.
Y BLK GAM LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Y black gamma correction curve.
Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/ Sets the range of video signal in which the Y blackH.MID/HIGH gamma correction is effective.
LOW : 0 to 3.6 %L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
? 15OSATURATION
SATURATION : OFF SAT. LEVEL : 0
LOW KEY SAT. : OFF L.KEY SAT.LEVEL : 0 L.KEY SAT.RANGE : HIGH
Y BLK GAMMA : OFF Y BLK GAM LEVEL : 0 Y BLK GAM RANGE : HIGH
4-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)
Item Setting Function
1 to 5 / RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE file.Selects whether to read the SCENE file from the inside ofthe main unit or not to read.
: Not reading (CANCEL) : Reading (RECALL)
STANDARD / Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to thestandard setting or not to return to.When pressing the rotary encoder during the display, thestandard setting is canceled and returns to the originalsetting.
SCENE RECALL Press the rotary encoder to Calls the SCENE file from the main unit.move to the file selection Or read the SCENE file from a Memory Stick.display.*
SCENE STORE Press the rotary encoder to Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick.move to the file selectiondisplay.*
F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID. (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID(alphanumeric characters, is saved.)symbols and spaces)
* : Refer to “4-7. FILE Menu” for the file selection display.
? 16OSCENE FILE
1 2 3 4 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
4-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-6. MAINTENANCE Menu
nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
WHT SHADING Display (Adjusting white shading)
Item Setting Function
SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST*1 Selects the channel of shading correction.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*2 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.
R/G/B WHT H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B WHT H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B WHT V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B WHT V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the white shading menu items of R/G/B,H/V and SAW/PARA corrections.
*1 : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with OUTPUT SELECT.*2 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
nIn the R/G/B WHITE H SAW/PARA and R/G/B WHITE V SAW/PARA, the lens extender position isdisplayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON
? 01OWHT SHADING
SHADING CH SEL : TEST OUTPUT SELECT : Y R WHT H SAW : 0 R WHT H PARA : 0 R WHT V SAW : 0 R WHT V PARA : 0
WHITE SAW/PARA : ON
4-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
BLK SHADING Display (Adjusting black shading)
Item Setting Function
SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST*1 Selects the channel of black shading correction.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*2 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.
R/G/B BLK H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B BLK H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B BLK V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.SAW correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
R/G/B BLK V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V.PARA correction.The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with thechannel selection implemented by the above SHADING CHSEL.
BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF all of the black shading menu items of R/G/B,H/V and SAW/PARA corrections.
MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and B signalblack levels are adjusted.)
MASTER GAIN (TMP) _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/ Sets the temporary master gain.30/36/42 dB
*1 : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with OUTPUT SELECT.*2 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 02OBLK SHADING
SHADING CH SEL : R OUTPUT SELECT : Y R BLK H SAW : 0 R BLK H PARA : 0 R BLK V SAW : 0 R BLK V PARA : 0
BLACK SAW/PARA : ON MASTER BLACK : 0 MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
4-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
LEVEL ADJ Display (Adjusting output signal level)
Item Setting Function
Y LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Y signal output level.
SYNC LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the sync signal output level.
Pr LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Pr signal output level.
Pb LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjust the Pb signal output level.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TESTOUT and the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (Invalid whenthe BARS signal is selected.)(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUTSEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD isselected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The outputsignal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
SD LEVEL ADJ Display (Adjusting the down converter (SD OUT) output level)*****1
(Require an optional HKDW-702.)
Item Setting Function
SD VBS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the VBS signal output level.*2
SD VBS SETUP LVL 0%/7.5% Selects the setup level.*2
0% : Normal7.5% : When an additional setup is required.
*1 : Displayed only when the HKDW-702 is installed.*2 : If the format is set to 24PsF/23.98PsF when the HKDW-702 is installed, the setting is displayed as “_ _”.
? 03OLEVEL ADJ
Y LEVEL : 0 SYNC LEVEL : 0 Pr LEVEL : 0 Pb LEVEL : 0
OUTPUT SELECT : Y
? 04OSD LEVEL ADJ
SD VBS LEVEL : 0 SD VBS SETUP LVL: 0%
4-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 05OBATTERY
<Sony Info> BEFORE END 1 : 5% END 1 : 0% <Sony> BEFORE END 2 : 11.3V END 2 : 11.0V <Others,EXT DC> BEFORE END 3 : 11.8V END 3 : 11.0V
BATTERY Display (Setting the battery-related items)
Item Setting Function
BEFORE END 1 5% to 100% (5% steps) When a SONY-made battery pack such as BP-GL65/
END 1 0/1/2/3/4/5%GL95 is used, sets the battery-before-end capacity andthe battery-end capacity.
BEFORE END 2 11.0 to 17.0 V (0.1 V steps) When a SONY-made battery pack such as BL-L60S is
END 2 10.5 to 11.5 V (0.1 V steps) used, sets the battery-before-end voltage and thebattery-end voltage.
BEFORE END 3 11.0 to 17.0 V (0.1 V steps) When any battery pack other what are listed above or
END 3 10.5 to 11.5 V (0.1 V steps) DC IN terminal is used, sets the battery-before-endvoltage and the battery-end voltage.
4-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 06OAUDIO-1
AUDIO OUT (F/R) : CUE REC AUDIO OUT : EE CAMERA ADAPTER : ENABL AUDIO CH3/4 MODE: SW
FRONT MIC REF : -50dB REAR MIC REF : -60dB REAR MIC +48V : ENABL
AUDIO-1 Display (Setting-1 on audio)
Item Setting Function
AUDIO OUT (F/R) CUE/EE Selects the audio output signal during FF/REW.
REC AUDIO OUT EE/SAVE Selects the audio output signal during recording.EE : EE outputSAVE : No output
CAMERA ADAPTER ENABL/DSABL Selects whether the AUDIO IN CH3, CH4 of thecamera adapter is enabled to use or not enabledwhen camera adapter is installed.ENABL : Camera adapter can be used.DSABL : Camera adapter cannot be used.
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE CH1/2/SW Selects the input signal to be recorded on CH3/4.CH1/2 : Same signals as CH1 and CH2.SW : The input signals that are selected by the
AUDIO IN CH3, CH4 switches on the insidepanel.
FRONT MIC REF _60 dB/_50 dB/_40 dB Sets the reference input level of the front microphone.
REAR MIC REF _60 dB/_50 dB/_40 dB Sets the reference input level of AUDIO IN at therear.
REAR MIC +48V ENABL/DSABL Selects whether or not to enable the 48V power inputmicrophone from AUDIO IN.ENABLE: Can be used.DSABL: Cannot be used.
4-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
AUDIO-2 Display (Setting-2 on audio)
Item Setting Function
AU REC EMPHASIS OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio emphasis during recording.
CUE REC OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to record the CUE AUDIO tothe tape.
AU REF LEVEL _18 dB/_20 dB Sets the AUDIO reference input level.
AU REF OUT 0 dB/+4 dB/_3 dB Sets the output level with respect to the REF. level.
AU CH12 AGC MODE STREO/MONO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on theinput level of the analog audio signals to be recorded onCH1/CH2 separately for each channel, or in the stereomode.
AU CH34 AGC MODE STREO/MONO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on theinput level of the analog audio signals to be recorded onCH3/CH4 separately for each channel, or in the stereomode, or to turn it off.
AU AGC SPEC _6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/ Sets the AGC characteristics. (saturation level)_15 dB/_17 dB
AU LIMITER MODE OFF/_6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/ Sets the limiter characteristics (saturation level) for large_15 dB/_17 dB input signals during the manual adjustment of the audio
input level.
AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the audio output limiter.
? 07OAUDIO-2
AU REC EMPHASIS : OFF CUE REC : ON AU REF LEVEL : -20dB AU REF OUT : 0dB AU CH12 AGC MODE: MONO AU CH34 AGC MODE: MONO AU AGC SPEC : -6dB AU LIMITER MODE : OFF AU OUT LIMITER : ON
4-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
AUDIO-3 Display (Setting-3 on audio)
Item Setting Function
AU SG (1 KHz) ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output the 1 kHz test tone during the Color BARmode or not.ON : 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color BAR mode.OFF : 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color BAR
mode.AUTO : 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH1 AUDIO
SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTOposition.
MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/F+S1 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone L-CH.SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on
the side panel.FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S1 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(left side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)
MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/F+S2 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone R-CH.SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on
the side panel.FRONT: Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S2 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)
REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/F+S1 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that isconnected to the wireless microphone and what is connected tothe AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on
the side panel.FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S1 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(left side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)
REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/F+S2 Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that isconnected to the wireless microphone and what is connected tothe AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on
the side panel.FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel.F + S2 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob. (Two knobs areinterlocked each other.)
AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO/MANU Sets whether to adjust the audio recording level of audiochannel 3 automatically or manually.
AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO/MANU Sets whether to adjust the audio recording level of audiochannel 4 automatically or manually.
LVL CONTROL CH3 0 to 100 Sets the audio recording level of audio channel 3 at the timeof manual adjustment
LVL CONTROL CH4 0 to 100 Sets the audio recording level of audio channel 4 at the timeof manual adjustment
? 08OAUDIO-3
AU SG (1KHz) : OFF MIC CH1 LEVEL : FRONT MIC CH2 LEVEL : FRONT REAR1/WRR LEVEL : SIDE1 REAR2/WRR LEVEL : SIDE2
AUDIO SELECT CH3: AUTO AUDIO SELECT CH4: AUTO LVL CONTROL CH3: 70 LVL CONTROL CH4: 70
4-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
TIME CORD Display (Setting-1 on VTR)
Item Setting Function
TC OUT AUTO/GENE Sets the time-code signal output.AUTO : Outputs the time-code generator during
recording and outputs the time-code readerduring playback.
GENE : Outputs the time-code generator duringrecording and playback.
DF/NDF DF/NDF Sets DF/NDF.DF : Drop frame modeNDF : Non drop frame mode
EXT-LK UBIT INT/EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to INTor EXT source when the time-code is locked to anexternal source.INT : Internal lockEXT : External lock
LTC UBIT FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.FIX : Records the data that is set by user.TIME : Records the present time.
VITC UBIT FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC.FIX : Records the data that is set by user.TIME : Records the present time.
WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to match the built-in watchwith the actual time data contained in the UBIT ofexternal time code data.
UBIT GROUP ID 000/101 Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.
? 09OTIME CODE
TC OUT : AUTO DF/NDF : DF EXT-LK UBIT : INT LTC UBIT : FIX VITC UBIT : FIX WATCH AUTO ADJ : ON UBIT GROUP ID : 000
4-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VTR MODE Display (Setting-2 on VTR)
Item Setting Function
REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the tally blinking at the event of BATTERYBEFORE END/TAPE BEFORE END.
REC START BEEP OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the beep sound at REC START/STOP.
LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER/OFF/CONT Sets the time counter display on the LCD after the powersupply is turned off.TIMER : Display is terminated after the elapse of time which
is specified in the item LCD HOLD TIMER below.OFF : No displayedCONT : Displayed
LCD HOLD TIMER 1H/3H/8H Specifies the time to terminate the display of time counter afterthe power-off, when TIMER was set in the above DISPLAYHOLD (H : hour) .
SHOT TIME DISP MD : HM/DM : HM/D : HMS Sets the format of the time to be displayed on the LCD.MD : HM : Month, day, hour, minuteDM : HM : Day, month, hour, minuteD : HMS : Day, hour, minute, second
VIDEO OUT (F/R) EE/PB Selects the video single during FF/REW.EE : Input signal.PB : Playback signal.
STBY OFF TIMER OFF/5MIN/10MIN/ When the SAVE/STBY switch is set to STBY, sets the time to30MIN/60MIN release the STBY state automatically.
STOP KEY FREEZE OFF/FRAME/FIELD Sets whether to freeze picture by pressing the STOP buttonduring playback.
? 10OVTR MODE
REC TALLY BLINK : ON REC START BEEP : OFF LCD DISPLAY HOLD: TIMER LCD HOLD TIMER : 1H SHOT TIME DISP : MD:HM VIDEO OUT (F/R) : EE STBY OFF TIMER : 60MIN STOP KEY FREEZE : OFF
4-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SHOT MAKER Display (Setting-3 on VTR)
Item Setting Function
LTC UB-MARKER SET/ALL/OFF Sets whether to write down the marker in UBIT of LTC, or not.SET : Write the marker only of the items that are set to ON among the REC START MARK
or SHOT MARKER1 or SHOT MARKER2 respectively describes shown below.ALL : All markers are written.OFF : All markers are not written.nWhen ALL or OFF is selected, the setting of among the REC MARK or SHOT MARKER1 orSHOT MARKER2 becomes invalid.
REC START MARK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the REC START MARK.
SHOT MARKER 1 OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the SHOT MARKER 1.
SHOT MARKER 2 OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to write the SHOT MARKER 2.
PRESET WHT Display (WHITE BAL switch: The function to adjust the white balance gain that isassigned to PRST)
Item Setting Function
COLOR TEMP. <P> Displays the color Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of your referencetemperature using the displayed value as the guideline.(Guideline) Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at
the same time.
C TEMP BAL <P> (_99 to 99) Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot beobtained by the above COLOR TEMP.Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at
the same time.
R GAIN <P> (_99 to 99) Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE presetvalue, by adjusting R GAIN.
B GAIN <P> (_99 to 99) Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE presetvalue, by adjusting B GAIN.
5600K OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the electrically applies 5600K color temperature filter(WHITE PRESET)
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the white balance adjustment valueas the preset value when the white balance automatic adjustment isexecuted with the WHITE BAL switch being set in PRST.
? 11OSHOT MARKER
LTC UB-MARKER : SET REC START MARK : OFF SHOT MARKER 1 : OFF SHOT MARKER 2 : OFF
? 12OPRESET WHT
COLOR TEMP. <P>: 3200 C TEMP BAL <P>: 0 R GAIN <P>: 0 B GAIN <P>: 0 5600K <P>: OFF
AWB ENABLE <P>: OFF
4-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
DCC ADJUST Display (Setting the DCC function)
Item Setting Function
DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC/FIX Selects the DCC function modes when the DCCswitch is ON.DCC : Normal modeFIX : The knee correction is performed with the
dynamic range fixed to 600%.
DCC D RANGE 400/450/500/550/600 (%) Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch isset to ON.
DCC POINT (_99 to 99) Sets the minimum knee point when the DCC switch isset to ON.
DCC GAIN (_99 to 99) Sets the knee slope when the DCC switch is set to ON.
DCC DELAY TIME (_99 to 99) Sets the response speed of DCC. (Increasing the dataslows down the response speed.)
PREKNEE POINT AUTO/FIX Selects the mode of preknee.AUTO : Has the dedicated preknee point when the
DCC switch is set to OFF.FIX : Even when the DCC switch is set to OFF, the
preknee point is the same as when the DCCswitch is set to ON.
? 13ODCC ADJUST
DCC FUNCTION SEL: DCC
DCC D RANGE : 600% DCC POINT : 0 DCC GAIN : 0
DCC DELAY TIME : 0
PREKNEE POINT : AUTO
4-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
AUTO IRIS 2 Display (Setting AUTO IRIS)
Item Setting Function
IRIS WINDOW 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range).*1
When VAR is selected, the iris window can be setby the IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS asdescribed below.
IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that checks the iriswindow that is being selected, with the box cursor.
IRIS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the auto iris convergence level.
IRIS APL RATIO (_99 to 99) Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peakvalue and average value.
IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 Sets width of the iris window when VAR isselected in the above IRIS WINDOW.
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 Sets height of the iris window when VAR isselected in the above IRIS WINDOW.
IRIS VAR H POS _460 to 460*2 Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iriswindow when VAR is selected in the above IRISWINDOW.
IRIS VAR V POS _249 to 249*2 Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iriswindow when VAR is selected in the above IRISWINDOW.
IRIS SPEED 0/1/2/3/4/5 Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed.0 (Fast) ↔ 5 (Slow)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRISdetection level to 100% when the video signal ofhigher than 100% is input.
*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
? 14OAUTO IRIS 2
IRIS WINDOW : 1 IRIS WINDOW IND.: OFF IRIS LEVEL : 0 IRIS APL RATIO : 0 IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240 IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135 IRIS VAR H POS : 0 IRIS VAR V POS : 0 IRIS SPEED : 3 CRIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF
Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6
VF screen
Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame
4-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
FUNCTION 3 Display (Setting various functions)
Item Setting Function
WHT FILTER INH OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that maintains the white balancevalue without regard to the CC filter position.
COLOR BAR SEL SMPTE/100 %/75 %/ Selects the internal color bar signal.4 : 3-1 (SMPTE) /4 : 3-2 (100%) /4 : 3-3 (75%)
SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG Selects whether to display shutter speeds in second or degree.SEC : Displays in second.DEG : Displays in degree.
RM COMMON MEMORY OFF/ON Sets the setup values that are connected in the event ofconnecting a remote control unit (such as RM-B150, MSU) .OFF : An independent value that is effective only when
the remote control is connected, is set. (Whenthe remote control is disconnected, the value returnsto the original setup before connecting the remotecontrol.)
ON : The setup value that is common to both connectionswhen a remote control is connected and when aremote control is not connected. (When the remotecontrol is disconnected, the adjusted setup valueremains unchanged.)
(For more details, refer to Operation Manual.)
VTR START/STOP RM/CAM/PARA Selects whether to perform the recording operation on theremote control unit or on the camera when the remote controlunit is connected.RM : Enables starting or stopping recording only on the
remote control unit.CAM : Enables starting or stopping recording only on the
camera.PARA : Enables starting or stopping recording on both the
remote control unit and the camera.
FAN OFF/ON/AUTO Selects a fan operation when the temperature exceeds thesetting value.OFF : Does not activate the fan.ON : Activates the fan.AUTO : Turns off the fan while recording.
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that prohibits to display thecategories from OPERATION to DIAGNOSIS on the TOPmenu.
HDSDI REMOTE I/F OFF/CHARA/G-TLY/ Performs settings when performing synchronous recording withR-TLY multiple HDW-250/S280 units by adding the trigger signal to
the output signal from the HD-SDI OUT terminal.Three types of display for indicating that the REC triggersignal is output from the HD-SDI OUT terminal can beselected. (When HDW-250/S280 appears to be performinga recording operation)OFF : Does not record synchronously.CHARA : Displays REC2 on the view finder display.G-TLY : Green tally in the view finder lights.R-TLY : REC tally in the view finder lights.(When R-TRY is selected, the REC tally lights even without acassette tape in the unit.)
SD ASPECT PULSE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that mixes the 16:9 (SQUEEZE)selection control signal with the SD VBS/SDI output when theextension board HKDW-702 is installed. (This is thespecification only for the NTSC signal. The control signal isnot mixed with the PAL signal.)
? 15OFUNCTION 3
WHT FILTER INH : OFF COLOR BAR SEL : 100% SHT DISP MODE : SEC RM COMMON MEMORY: ON VTR START/STOP : RM FAN : ON USER&ALL ONLY : OFF
HDSDI REMOTE I/F: OFF SD ASPECT PULSE : OFF
4-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
GENLOCK Display (Setting on GENLOLCK input terminal)
Item Setting Function
GENLOCK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that synchronizes theinternal reference signal with the video signal that isconnected to the GENLOCK terminal.
RETURN VIDEO OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to display the camerareturn signal on VF when the RET button on the lensis pressed.
GL H PHASE COASE (_99 to 99) GENLOCK phase adjustment (coarse adjustment)
GL H PHASE FINE (_99 to 99) GENLOCK phase adjustment (fine adjustment)
ND COMP Display (ND OFFSET compensation)
nWhen only a single filter is used, this menu is not displayed.
Item Setting Function
ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the ND OFFSET adjustment mode.
CLEAR ND OFFSET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the ND OFFSET value to the default valueexecute this menu item. when manufactured in the production plant.
ND ADJUST MODE _ ND OFFSET message display areaND1 to 4 Display only OK : The filter on which the white balance automatic
adjustment is already completed.YET : The filter on which the white balance automatic
adjustment is not completed yet.(When the main power is turned off or then the aboveCLEAR ND OFFSET is performed, all displayschange to YET.)This item is displayed when above ND OFFSETADJUST is set to ON.
? 17OND COMP
ND OFFSET ADJUST: OFF CLEAR ND OFFSET : EXEC
****ND ADJUST MODE**** ND1:YET ND2:YET ND3:YET ND4:OK
? 16OGENLOCK
GENLOCK : ON RETURN VIDEO : OFF
GL H PHASE COASE: 0 GL H PHASE FINE : 0
4-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
FORMAT Display (Switching the video format)
Item Setting Function
CURRENT Display only Displays the present format.
NEXT 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF/ Sets the format when the power is turned on next24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF time.
VANC RX Display (Setting the UMID LINE)
Item Setting Function
UMID LINE1 0, 9 to 20 When a tape recorded by Camcorder is played backby VTR, the line number in which the UMID data iscontained in the HD SDI output signal can beselected. (1st field)
UMID LINE2 0, 564 to 593 When a tape recorded by Camcorder is played backby VTR, the line number in which the UMID data iscontained in the HD SDI output signal can beselected. (2nd field)
? 18OFORMAT TOP
CURRENT : 59.94 NEXT : 23.98
59.94i 24PsF 50i 25PsF 23.98PsF 29.97PsF
PLEASE POWER OFF->ON TO CHANGE FORMAT
This message is displayed only when the current format and the format that is set by NEXT are different.At the same time, the tally lamp blinks.
The item selected for NEXT is highlighted.
? 19OVANC RX UMID LINE1 : 0UMID LINE2 : 0
4-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-7. FILE Menu
For details of the file structure and the method to save the files, refer to “Section 5. File System.”nWhen the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is therelative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
USER FILE Display (Operating the USER files)
Item Setting Function
USER FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to move Reads the USER file from a Memory Stick.to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display,
refer to the following descriptions.)
USER FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to move Saves the USER file to a Memory Stick.to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display,
refer to the following descriptions.)
F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric characters, Sets the file ID.(When the USER FILE SAVE issymbols and spaces) executed, this ID is saved.)
USER PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns all the items of the USER menu to theto execute this menu item. standard setup.
File selection display
Item Setting Function
MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick orduring saving data in a Memory Stick or during readingdata from a Memory Stick.
DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATA/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying the following file.ALL : File ID and date are displayed.
( 00/JAN/00)F. ID : File ID is displayed.
( )DATA : Date and time of saving the file are displayed.
(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)MODEL: Model name and format are displayed.
(HDW-F900R 59.94i )
001 to 005 Press the rotary encoder When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE is displayed.to execute this menu item. Select the target read file from which data is read or select
the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.
? 01OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD : EXEC USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID
USER PRESET : EXEC
P00 USER LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
P00 USER SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE
4-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER FILE 2 Display (Operating the USER file)
Item Setting Function
STORE USR PRESET Press the rotary encoder Saves the data that is set by the USER menu, in theto execute this menu item. PRESET layer and uses it as the standard setup.
CLEAR USR PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns the USER menu setup to the default settingto execute this menu item. when shipped from the factory.
CUSTOMIZE RESET Press the rotary encoder Returns the items that are edited by the MENUto execute this menu item. CUSTOMIZE menu, to the original setting.
LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data fromMemory Stick that are set on the MENU CUSTOMIZEmenu during execution of USER FILE LOAD.
LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data fromMemory Stick that are not contained in the presentUSER menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD.
BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function not to save the USERFILE page and the subsequent pages of the USERmenu, in Memory Stick during execution of USERFILE SAVE.ON: Not to save.
USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the whitebalance data from Memory Stick that are saved inUSER FILE during execution of USER FILE LOAD.
? 02OUSER FILE 2
STORE USR PRESET: EXEC CLEAR USR PRESET: EXEC CUSTOMIZE RESET : EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM DATA: OFF LOAD OUT OF USER: OFF BEFORE FILE PAGE: OFF USER LOAD WHITE : OFF
4-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
ALL FILE Display (Operating the ALL file)
Item Setting Function
ALL FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to Reads the ALL file from a Memory Stick.move to the file selection (For the description of the file selection display,display. see below.)
ALL FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to Saves the ALL file in a Memory Stick.move to the file selection (For the description of the file selection display,display. see below.)
F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID.(alphanumeric numbers, (When ALL FILE SAVE is execute, this name issymbols and space) saved.)
ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Returns all the data of all menu items to the standardexecute this menu item. settings.
STORE ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Saves all the data that are set by all of the menuexecute this menu item. items, in the PRESET layer and uses them as the
standard setups.
CLEAR ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the settings of all menu items to the defaultexecute this menu item. setting when shipped from the factory.
3SEC CLR PRESET OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that returns the data in thePRESET layer to its factory-set value when the MENUCANCEL/PRST switch is pressed for 3seconds. (It returns to OFF at power-on even whenhaving been turned ON.)
File selection display
ALL FILE LOAD ALL FILE SAVE
Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the USERFILE display.For details, refer to the corresponding item of the USER FILE display.
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
P00 ALL LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
P00 ALL SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
4-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)
Item Setting Function
1 to 5 / RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE file.Selects whether to read the SCENE file from the inside ofthe main unit or not to read.
: Not reading (CANCEL) : Reading (RECALL)
STANDARD / Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to thestandard setting or not to return to.When pressing the rotary encoder during the display, thestandard setting is canceled and returns to the original setting.
SCENE RECALL Press the rotary encoder Calls the SCENE file from the main unit, or read the SCENEto move to the file file from a Memory Stick.selection display. (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)
SCENE STORE Press the rotary encoder Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick.to move to the file (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)selection display.
F.ID 16 characters Sets the file ID.(alphanumeric characters, (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID is saved.)symbols and space)
File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file tothe inside of the unit)
SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE
Item Setting Function
DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying a file stored in aMemory Stick.For a file stored in the main unit, the file ID is displayedwhen ALL/F.ID/DATE is selected. When MODEL isselected, the format when the file was saved is displayed.
MEM (1) to (5) Press the rotary encoder Select the target read file from which data is read orto execute this menu item. select the target storage file to which the data is going to
be stored.When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE isdisplayed.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.
? 04OSCENE FILE
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
P00 SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NO FILE
P00 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NEW FILE
4-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to aMemory Stick)
↓ page moves to ↓ page moves to
SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE
Item Setting Function
MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only The display appears when inserting a Memory Stickor during saving data in a Memory Stick or duringreading data from a Memory Stick.
DISPLAY MODE ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying the followingfile.ALL : File ID and date are displayed.
( 00/JAN/00)F. ID : File ID is displayed.
( )DATE : Date and time of saving the file are displayed.
(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)MODEL: Model name and format are displayed.
(HDW-F900R 59.94i)
001 to 005 Press the rotary encoder to When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE isexecute this menu item. displayed.
Select the target read file from which data is read orselect the target storage file to which the data is goingto be stored.When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE.
5FILE LOAD Press the rotary encoder to Reads the 5 files that are being displayed onexecute this menu item. screen, into MEM1-5 inside the main unit.
5FILE SAVE Press the rotary encoder to Saves the contents of MEM1-5 of the main unit thatexecute this menu item. are being displayed on screen, into 5 files.
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE ***.5FILE LOAD MEM 1-5→
P01 SCENE STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE ***.5FILE SAVE MEM 1-5←
P00 SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NO FILE
P00 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NEW FILE
4-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
REFERENCE Display (Operating the REFERENCE file)
Item Setting Function
REFERENCE STORE Press the rotary encoder and Saves the REFERENCE file in the main unit.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.
REFERENCE CLEAR Press the rotary encoder and Returns the setting of the REFERENCE file to theselect YES for the confirmation standard setting.message to execute this menu item.
REFERENCE LOAD Press the rotary encoder and Reads the REFERENCE file from a Memory Stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.
REFERENCE SAVE Press the rotary encoder and Saves the REFERENCE file in a Memory Stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.
F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric Sets the file ID.numbers, symbols and space) (When REFERENCE STORE of REFERENCE
SAVE is executed, this ID is saved.)
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the whitebalance data that are saved in SCENE file duringexecution of SCENE RECALL.
USER GAMMA Display (Operating the USER GAMMA)
Item Setting Function
USER GAMMA LOAD Press the rotary encoder and Loads the user gamma from the memory stick.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.
USER GAMMA RESET Press the rotary encoder and Returns the user gamma stored in the internalselect YES for the confirmation memory to the factory default settings.message to execute this menu item.
F.ID Display only Displays the file ID.
F.ID* Display only Displays the file ID of the user gamma stored inthe memory stick.
DATE* Display only Displays the date on which the user gamma inthe memory stick was saved.
* : Displayed only when user gamma is stored in the inserted memory stick.
? 05OREFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 06OUSER GAMMA
USER GAMMA LOAD : EXEC USER GAMMA RESET: EXEC
F.ID :
F.ID : DATE : SEP/19/05
4-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
LENS FILE 1 Display (Operating the LENS file)
Item Setting Function
LENS FILE RECALL Press the rotary encoder to Calls the LENS file from the main unit, or read the LENS file from amove to the file selection display. Memory Stick.
(For the description of the file selection display, see below.)
LENS FILE STORE Press the rotary encoder to Save the LENS file to the main unit or Memory Stick.move to the file selection display. (For the description of the file selection display, see below.)
F.ID 16 characters (alphanumeric Sets the file ID. (When the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the file ID ischaracters, symbols and spaces) saved.)
SOURCE Display only Displays the memory number of the LENS file from which the data is read.
LENS NO OFFSET Press the rotary encoder to Returns the LENS file setting to the standard setting.execute this menu item.
LENS AUTO RECALL OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the auto recall function when a serial lens is attached.
L.ID* Display only Displays the unique ID of the lens (when a serial lens is attached).
L.MF* Display only Displays the manufacturer name of the lens (when a serial lens is attached).
* : When a lens other than a serial lens is attached, (Unknown) is displayed.
nWhen the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the stored memory number is displayed. When the LENS NO OFFSET isexecuted, the message NO OFFSET is displayed.
File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file to the inside of the unit)
LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE
File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to a Memory Stick)
LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE
Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the SCENE FILE display.For details, refer to the corresponding item of the SCENE FILE display.
? 07OLENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC LENS FILE STORE : EXEC F.ID : SOURCE : MEMORY 1 LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC
LENS AUTO RECALL: ON <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)
LENS RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NEW FILE
LENS STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):NEW FILE
P07 LENS RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
P07 LENS STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
4-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
LENS FILE 2 Display (Various adjustments-1 for LENS file)
Item Setting Function
LENS M VMOD (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master V. modulation correction value.
LENS CENTER H _480 to 479 Sets the center marker position. (Horizontal direction)
LENS CENTER V _270 to 269 Sets the center marker position. (Vertical direction)
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SELdisplay (of the OPERATION menu) and SD is selected inthe TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signal returns to theY-signal without fail at power-on.
LENS R FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R flare compensation level.
LENS G FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the G flare compensation level.
LENS B FLARE (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B flare compensation level.
LENS W-R OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R white gain offset value.
LENS W-B OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B white gain offset value.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
nIn the LENS M VMOD, LENS CENTER H, LENS CENTER V, LENS R/G/B FLARE and LENS W-R/W-B OFST, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON
? 08OLENS FILE 2
LENS M VMOD : 0 LENS CENTER H : 0 LENS CENTER V : 0
OUTPUT SELECT : Y LENS R FLARE : 0 LENS G FLARE : 0 LENS B FLARE : 0 LENS W-R OFST : 0 LENS W-B OFST : 0
4-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 10OMEMORY STICK
M.S.FORMAT : EXEC M.S.IN > JUMP TO: OFF
LENS FILE 3 Display (Various adjustments-2 on LENS file)
Item Setting Function
SHADING CH SEL Y/R/G/B/TEST Selects the channel of shading adjustment.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUTof the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATION menu) andSD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signalreturns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
LENS R/G/B H SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H SAW correction value.
LENS R/G/B H PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the H PARA correction value.
LENS R/G/B V SAW (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V SAW correction value.
LENS R/G/B V PARA (_99 to 99) Adjusts the V PARA correction value.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
nIn the LENS R/G/B V/H SAW and LENS R/G/B V/H PARA, the lens extender position is displayed inthe rightmost-end of the menu items.Blank : Extender OFFEX : Extender ON
MEMORY STICK Display (Function on Memory Stick)
Item Setting Function
M. S. FORMAT Press the rotary encoder Implements formatting of a Memory Stick.to execute this menu item. (All of the data is erased.)
M. S. IN > JUNP TO OFF/USER/ALL/SCENE/ Sets the function that opens the file setup pageLENS/REFER/USER1 automatically as a Memory Stick is inserted when this
menu is set to ON. (This function is disabled when the file-related page isopened already.)
? 09OLENS FILE 3
SHADING CH SEL : R OUTPUT SELECT : Y
LENS R H SAW : 0 LENS R H PARA : 0 LENS R V SAW : 0 LENS R V PARA : 0
4-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
TELE FILE Display (Confirming the TELE FILE information and clearing it)
Item Setting Function
TELE FILE CLEAR Press the rotary encoder and Clears the CUE point information inside the TELE FILE.select YES for the confirmationmessage to execute this menu item.
TELE FILE MARK OK/NG/KP Selects any of the following three judgment marks(TELE FILE MARK) that are the rating of the imagesrecorded immediately before, when a tape with memorylabel is used and the ASSIGN 1 switch is assigned toTMARK.OK: Place this mark when you decide the recorded
images are good.NG: Place this mark when you decide the recorded
images are not good.KP: Place this mark when it is hard to decide whether
or not the recorded images are good immediatelyafter recording, or when you want to insert a markin between multiple shots.
nYou can select the judgment marks (TELE FILE MARK)if you press the ASSIGN 1 switch continuouslyregardless of the selected judgment marks (TELE FILEMARK).
ID Display only Memory label ID (20 characters)
SIZE Display only Memory label capacity
REMAIN Display only Memory label free capacity
STATUS Display only Displays the memory label status.STANDBY : Write enabledNO LABEL : Memory label is not attached.WRITE PROTECT : Over-write is prohibited.UNKNOWN FORMAT : Information of the different
models is already written.(Write disabled)
NO CASSETTE : Cassette is not inserted.UNFORMAT : The media is not formatted yet.MEMORY FULL : The media does not have a
free memory capacity.NEAR FULL : The free memory capacity of
media is less than 5%.
? 11OTELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR : EXEC TELE FILE MARK : OK ID :SIZE : 0000KBYTEREMAIN : 00%STATUS : STANDBY
4-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-8. DIAGNOSIS Menu
HOURS METER Display (Confirming and resetting hours meter)
Item Setting Function
RESET METER Press the rotary encoder to Resets the hours meters. (For the description of themove to the RESET METER RESET METER display, refer to the followingdisplay. description.)
DRUM RUNNING Display only Accumulated drum rotation hours
TAPE RUNNING Display only Accumulated tape running hours
OPERATION Display only Accumulated power-on hours
THREADING Display only Accumulated number of threading
DRUM RUNNING-2 Display only Accumulated drum rotation hours (resettable)
TAPE RUNNING-2 Display only Accumulated tape running hours (resettable)
OPERATION-2 Display only Accumulated power-on hours (resettable)
THREADING-2 Display only Accumulated number of threading (resettable)
RESET METER display (Selecting the meter to reset)
Select a meter that you want to reset and press the rotary encoder.
? 01OHOURS METER RESET METER : EXEC
DRUM RUNNING : 000000H TAPE RUNNING : 000000H OPERATION : 000000H THREADING : 000000 DRUM RUNNING-2: 000000H TAPE RUNNING-2: 000000H OPERATION-2 : 000000H THREADING-2 : 000000
RESET METER ESC
RESET DRUM RUNNING-2 RESET TAPE RUNNING-2 RESET OPERATION-2 RESET THREADING-2
→ ←←←←
Drum rotation hoursTape running hoursPower-on hoursThreading hours
4-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
TIME/DATE Display (Confirming and setting date and hour)
Item Setting Function
ADJUST Press the rotary encoder. Sets date and time. (For more details, refer toThen theTIME ADJUST “5-3-6. Setting the Date/Time of Internal Clock”display appears. of Operation Manual.)
HOUR Display only Hour
MIN Display only Minute
SEC Display only Second
YEAR Display only Year
MONTH Display only Month
DAY Display only Day
ROM VERSION Display (Displaying the ROM version)
Item Setting Function
AT Display only For IC89,90/AT-172 board
SS Display only For IC8/SS-92G board
FP Display only For IC816/FP-152 board
AU DSP Display only For IC404/FP-152 board
EQ Display only For IC1101/EQ-88G board
nFor the version upgrade procedure of ROM, refer to “1-24. Upgrading the ROM Version”.
? 02OTIME/DATE ADJUST : EXEC HOUR : 12 MIN : 55 SEC : 58
YEAR : 00 MONTH : 06 DAY : 24
? 03OROM VERSION AT : Ver x.xx SS : Ver x.xx FP : Ver x.xx AU DSP: Ver x.xx EQ : Ver x.xx
4-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
DEV STATUS Display (Checking the communication function of each device)
Item Setting Function
I/O _ I/O checkOK/NG/__ message is displayed.OK : NormalNG : Abnormal__ : The state is not defined.
IFA1 OK/NG/__ IC201/IFA-19G board
IFA2 OK/NG/__ IC204/IFA-19G board
DR OK/NG/__ IC33 or DR-614 board
VF1 OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF
VF2 OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF
FP1 OK/NG/__ IC704/FP-152 board
FP2 OK/NG/__ IC705/FP-152 board
RP OK/NG/__ IC3/RP-131 board
EEPROM _ EEPROM check
IFA OK/NG/__ IC202/IFA-19G board
VF OK/NG/__ IC inside the VF
DCP OK/NG/__ IC611/DCP-43 board
DR OK/NG/__ IC31/DR-614 board
LSI _ LSI check
SCVP OK/NG/__ IC1019/DCP-43 board
SG OK/NG/__ IC614/DCP-43 board
DCON OK/NG/__ IC23/DC-110A board
SCI _ SCI check
SS OK/NG/__ Communication with the SS microprocessor
RM OK/NG/__ Communication with the equipment that is connectedto the 8-pin remote connector.
BATT OK/NG/__ Communication with the Info Type Battery
NVRAM _ NVRAM check
DCP OK/NG/__ IC51/DCP-43 board
? 04ODEV STATUS I/O EEPROM LSIIFA1:OK IFA :OK SCVP:OKIFA2:0K VF :OK SG :OKDR :OK DCP :OK DCON:OKVF1 :OK DR :OK VF2 :OK FP1 :OK NVRAM SCIFP2 :OK DCP :OK SS :OKRP :OK RM :OK BATT:OK
4-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
OPTION BOARD Display (Displaying use or not use of optional boards)
Item Setting Function
DOWN CONVERTER Display only Use or not use of the Down Converter board isdisplayed.*
O : Used_ : Not used
PICTURE CACHE Display only Use or not use of the PICTURE CACHE board isdisplayed.*
O : Used_ : Not used
SLOW SHUTTER Display only Use or not use of the SLOW SHUTTER board isdisplayed.*
O : Used_ : Not used
* : This display is not reflected to the screen when the power is turned on after the optional board is installed or removed. When theoptional board is installed or removed, perform setting after turning the power OFF 8 ON (wait for 10 seconds or more) 8 OFF 8ON.
? 05OOPTION BOARD
O DOWN CONVERTER- PICTURE CACHE- SLOW SHUTTER
4-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4-9. SERVICE Menu
m. To enable use of the SERVICE menu, set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to ON.. When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the
relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manualdepending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
MENU SET Display (Special settings related to the menu)
Item Setting Function
RE ROTATION REV OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to invert the rotatingdirection of rotary encoder.
RE SPEED 1/2/3/4/5 Sets the response speed of rotary encoder.1 (slow) ↔ 5 (fast)
DIRECT VALUE OFF/ON ON : The set value is displayed as it is.OFF : The set value is displayed after converted
(in the range of _99 to 99.)(It is returned to OFF when the main power isturned on.)
SERVICE RESET Press the rotary encoder Resets the data in the SERVICE hierarchy.to execute this menu item. Refer to “5-2. Data Structure” for details of the
hierarchical structure.
FACTORY PRESET Press the rotary encoder Returns all of the settings to the default setting whento execute this menu item. shipped from the factory.
(Excluding the black balance automatic adjustmentvalue.)
? 01OMENU SET RE ROTATION REV : OFF RE SPEED : 3 DIRECT VALUE : OFF
SERVICE RESET : EXEC
FACTORY PRESET : EXEC
4-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
SP FUNC Display (Setting the special functions)
Item Setting Function
COMP OUT ENABLE OFF/ON Sets this menu item to ON when the component signalunit is connected.
CHARA 4 : 3 MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that adjusts the width ofcharacter into the cut-out width of the 4 : 3 aspect ratio.
VF ZEBRA FORM 1/2/3 Switches the ZEBRA pattern to be displayed in VF.
BATT REMAIN DISP 1/2/3* Switches the mode for indicating the remaining power ofbattery.“Sony” indicates the item that corresponds to <Sony Info> or<Sony> in “Maintenance: Battery Page”. “Others” indicates theitem that corresponds to <Others, EXT DC>.
GAIN DISP MODE* dB/ISO Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the GAIN value in theISO indication.ISO : ISO indicationdB : Decibel (dB) indicationnCorrespondence between the ISO indication and decibel (dB)indication in 59.94i/50i is shown below.Values in parenthesis ( ) indicates the decibel (dB) indication.440 (_3) /630 (0) /880 (3) /1250 (6) /1770 (9) /2500 (12) /5000 (18) /10000 (24) /20000 (30) /40000 (36) /80000 (42)In 23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF, the sensitivity isreduced in half, so the values on each ISO indication alsobecome half.
* : Detected by the DC voltage.
? 02OSP FUNC COMP OUT ENABLE : OFF CHARA 4:3 MODE : OFF VF ZEBRA FORM : 1 BATT REMAIN DISP: 1 GAIN DISP MODE : dB
1 2 3
Sony Info/voltage % ← ←approximate
Others Tester display Voltage % ←approximate
Remaining power Info Sony only ← ←indication to VF (%) communication
Other than Info Others only ← Sony/Otherscommunication*
Remaining powerindication on theLCD DISPLAY PANEL
4-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VA ADJUST Display (Adjusting the video amplifier system)
Item Setting Function
R AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the R-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.
G AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the G-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.
B AD LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts gain of the B-channel video signal that is input toA/D converter.
PREKNEE ADJ MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to adjust preknee.
P PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the R-channel video signal.
G PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the G-channel video signal.
B PRE KNEE*2 (_99 to 99) Adjusts preknee of the B-channel video signal.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB*1 Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS isselected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SELdisplay (of the OPERATION menu) and SD is selected inthe TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signal returns to theY-signal without fail at power-on.
TEST SAW OFF/ANALOG/DIGITAL Turns ON/OFF the function that outputs the TEST signalforcibly to the video signal system, and selects the type ofTEST signal. (Invalid when the BARS signal is selected.)
TEST SAW H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the amplitude of the rectangular signal that islocated in the right of the TEST SAW.
*1 : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.*2 : “DCC OFF” and “DCC ON” have their own preknee level adjustment values. When the adjustment value of “DCC ON” is activated,
“DCC” is displayed on the right-most side of the menu item.
? 03OVA ADJUST R AD LEVEL : 0 G AD LEVEL : 0 B AD LEVEL : 0 PREKNEE ADJ MODE: OFF R PRE KNEE : 0 G PRE KNEE : 0 B PRE KNEE : 0 OUTPUT SELECT : Y TEST SAW : OFF TEST SAW H LEVEL: 0
4-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
CCD ADJUST Display (Adjusting CCD block)
Item Setting Function
R VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel.
G VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.
B VSUB 9.4 V to 19.5 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.
R VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel. (This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)
G VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)
B VSUB OFST 500 _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when shutter speed ishigher than 1/500.)
R VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the R-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)
G VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the G-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)
B VSUB (P) _5.0 V to 5.0 V Sets the V. substrate voltage value of the B-channel.(This is the adjustment for offset when the format is29.97PsF/25PsF/24PsF/23.98PsF.)
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNCOUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATIONmenu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) Theoutput signal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 04OCCD ADJUST R VSUB : 14.4V G VSUB : 14.4V B VSUB : 14.4V R VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V G VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V B VSUB OFST 500 : +0.0V R VSUB(P) : +0.0V G VSUB(P) : +0.0V B VSUB(P) : +0.0V OUTPUT SELECT : Y
4-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
DCP ADJUST Display (Adjusting the DCP-43 board)
Item Setting Function
VF Y DC LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the black level of the signal that is output to VF.
VCO CONT (_99 to 99) Adjusts the oscillating frequency.*
RGB OUT R LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the R-signal level when the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB.
RGB OUT B LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the B-signal level when the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB.
Reference : When the OUTPUT SELECT is set to RGB uponcompletion of the Y/Pb/Pr signal level adjustment, theoffset values are adjusted by the RGB OUT R/B LEVEL.Because the digital output code of Pr/Pb is larger thanthe digital output code of R/G/B, a slight level differenceis generated between the above two signals when thesame output signal amplitude of 700 mV is desired at theanalog OUT connector.
DETAIL BALANCE (_8 to 8) Adjusts the right-side and the left-side balance on screen of the detailsignal.
VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET (_99 to 99) Adjusts the reference value of ZEBRA1 of VF SETTING in theOperation menu. Adjusts the standard level for the reference voltageinput to AT.
VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET (_99 to 99) Adjusts the reference value of ZEBRA2 of VF SETTING in theOperation menu.
AT AD REF LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the standard level for the reference voltage input to AT.
* : This has two different adjustment values depending on the 59.94i/24.97PsF/23.98PsF or 50i/25PsF/24PsF format.
? 05ODCP ADJUST VF Y DC LEVEL : 0 VCO CONT : 0 RGB OUT R LEVEL : 0 RGB OUT B LEVEL : 0 DETAIL BALANCE : 0
VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET: 0 VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET: 0
AT AD REF LEVEL : 0
4-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
RP DC OFFSET Display (Adjusting the DC value of the RP-131 board)
Item Setting Function
R DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) R DC 0 phase adjustment
R DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) R DC p phase adjustment
G DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) G DC 0 phase adjustment
G DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) G DC p phase adjustment
B DC OFFSET 0 (_99 to 99) B DC 0 phase adjustment
B DC OFFSET 180 (_99 to 99) B DC p phase adjustment
DC ADJ MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF of the DC ADJ MODE. How to adjust the DCADJ, refer to “9-6. Black Offset Adjustment” of this manual.
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUTand the VBS/SDI OUT terminal. (The Y-signal becomes theVBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUTof the OUTPUT SEL display (of the OPERATION menu) andSD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT.) The output signalreturns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 06ORP DC OFFSET R DC OFFSET 0 : 0 R DC OFFSET 180 : 0 G DC OFFSET 0 : 0 G DC OFFSET 180 : 0 B DC OFFSET 0 : 0 B DC OFFSET 180 : 0
DC ADJ MODE : OFF OUTPUT SELECT : Y
4-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
MANUAL RPN Display (Adjusting the DC value of the RP-131 board)
Item Setting Function
OUTPUT SELECT Y/R/G/B/RGB* Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT andthe VBS/SDI OUT terminal.(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selectedin the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display (ofthe OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUTSELECT.) The output signal returns to the Y-signal without failat power-on.
RPN CURSOR OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the cursor for RPN.
TEST OUT MENU OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function to mix the menu display in theoutput signal of the TEST OUT terminal.
CURSOR H POS. _480 to 479 Sets the position of the RPN cursor. (Horizontal direction)
CURSOR V POS. _270 to 269 Sets the position of the RPN cursor. (Vertical direction)
CURSOR JUMP PREV/CURR/NEXT Has the cursor jump to the place where the RPN data isregistered.PREV : Jumps to the RPN data before the current position.CURR : Current displayNEXT : Jumps to the RPN data after the current position.
RECORD RPN Press the rotary encoder Registers the RPN data of the current cursor position.to execute this menu item.
DELETE RPN Press the rotary encoder Deletes the RPN data of the current cursor position.to execute this menu item.
FIELD/FRAME FIELD/FRAME Sets the CCD read-out system.FIELD : Field reading-out (normal readout)FRAME : Frame reading-out
(This position is used to obtain the highervertical resolution power.)
Reference : When the super EVS (high vertical resolution)mode is set to ON, FIELD is selected forcibly.
* : RGB can be selected only when the Camcorder is used in the service mode.
? 07OMANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT : Y RPN CURSOR : OFF TEST OUT MENU : ON CURSOR H POS. : 0 CURSOR V POS. : 0 CURSOR JUMP : CURR RECORD RPN : EXEC DELETE RPN : EXEC FIELD/FRAME : FIELD
4-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 09OSD ADJUST SD SDI LOCK/FREE: LOCK SD SDI VCO FREQ.: 0
SD VBS LEVEL : 0
SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL: 0 SD ZEBRA Y OFST : 0
RPN MANAGE Display
Item Setting Function
CONC.(APR) RESET Press the rotary encoder Clears the RPN data registered by ABB or AUTO CONCEAL.to execute this menu item.
RPN ALL PRESET Press the rotary encoder Initializes all the RPN data.to execute this menu item. (The data manually registered is also cleared.)
AUTO CONCEAL Press the rotary encoder Executes auto RPN concealment.to execute this menu item. (The Black Level adjustment is not executed.)
SD ADJUST Display (down converter out adjustment (Valid only when the downconverter board is installed))
Item Setting Function
SD SDI LOCK/FREE LOCK/FREE Sets the oscillator in a free-running state when FREE is selected.
SD SDI VCO FREQ. (_99 to 99) Adjusts the free-running frequency of SD SDI.
SD VBS LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the VBS OUT signal level.
SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL (_99 to 99) Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA mixed here to be equivalent to thelevel of the ZEBRA mixed to VF when SD is selected for TESTOUT SELECT.
SD ZEBRA Y OFST (_99 to 99) Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA mixed here to be equivalent to thelevel of the ZEBRA mixed to VF when SD is selected for TESTOUT SELECT.
? 08ORPN MANAGE CONC.(APR) RESET: EXEC
RPN ALL PRESET EXEC
AUTO CONCEAL EXEC
4-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VTR MODE-7 Display (Setting-7 on VTR)
Item Setting Function
FAN MODE AUTO/FIX Sets the fan mode.Use the fan in the AUTO position normally.AUTO : Temperature increase inside the unit is detected
and the fan is automatically controlled.FIX : The fan is controlled with the fixed voltage (8 V).
(For the operation check of the fan)
VF DETAIL Display (Setting the VF details)
Item Setting Function
VF DETAIL LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)
VF DTL H LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF H detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)
VF DTL V LEVEL (_99 to 99) Sets the amount of the VF V detail signal.(Amount of the detail signal of the main line video signalremains unchanged.)
VF DTL WHT LIMIT (_99 to 99) Sets the white peak of the white limiter of the VF detailsignal.(It does not affect the amount of the detail signal of themain line video signal.)
VF DTL BLK LIMIT (_99 to 99) Sets the black peak of the black limiter of the VF detailsignal.(It does not affect the amount of the detail signal of themain line video signal.)
? 10OVTR MODE-7
FAN MODE : AUTO
? 11OVF DETAIL
VF DETAIL LEVEL : 0
VF DTL H LEVEL : 0 VF DTL V LEVEL : 0 VF DTL WHT LIMIT: 0 VF DTL BLK LIMIT: 0
4-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
MEASURE Display (Setting the measurement mode)
Item Setting Function
MEASUREMENT MODE OFF/S/N/MODU/RESO/ Selects the measurement mode.SENS/REGI S/N : S/N ratio measurement mode
MODU : Modulation measurement modeRESO : Resolution measurement modeSENS : Sensitivity measurement modeREGI : Registration measurement mode
MASTER BLACK (_99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. (All of the R, G and Bsignal black levels are adjusted.)
MASTER GAIN (TMP) _3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/ Sets the temporary gain value.36/42 dB
? 12OMEASURE
MEASUREMENT MODE: OFF
MASTER BLACK : 0 MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
4-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
VTR MAINTE Display (VTR maintenance)
Item Setting Function
C0 : SERVO CHECK When the rotary encoder is Diagnoses the servo system.pressed, the SERVO CHECK (For details, refer to “11-3-1. Servo System Self-diagnosisMENU display appears. Mode”.)
C1 : RF CHECK When the rotary encoder is Checks the error rate during recording and playbackpressed, the RF CHECK mode.MENU display appears. (For details, refer to “11-3-2. RF System Self-diagnosis
Mode”.)
C2 : AUDIO CHECK When the rotary encoder is Checks the audio system.pressed, the AUDIO CHECK (For details, refer to “11-3-2. RF System Self-diagnosisMENU display appears. Mode”.)
A0 : SERVO ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the servo system.pressed, the SERVO ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-4. Servo System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)
A1 : RF ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the RF system.pressed, the RF ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-5. RF System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)
A2 : AUDIO ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the audio system.pressed, the AUDIO ADJUST (For details, refer to “11-3-5. RF System AdjustmentMENU display appears. Mode.”)
A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Adjusts the mechanism.pressed, the MECHANISM (For details, refer to “11-3-7. Mechanism AdjustmentADJUST MENU display Mode.”)appears.
A9 : OTHERS ADJUST When the rotary encoder is Compensates for the voltage drop by the internalpressed, the OTHERS circuit and adjustment when the MDC-13G board isADJUST MENU display replaced.appears. (For details, refer to “11-3-8. Other Adjustments”.)
? 13OVTR MAINTE
C0 : SERVO CHECK C1 : RF CHECK C2 : AUDIO CHECK A0 : SERVO ADJUST A1 : RF ADJUST A2 : AUDIO ADJUST A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A9 : OTHERS ADJUST
4-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
FILTER CTEMP Display (Setting of color temperature)
Item Setting Function
FILTER CTEMP A 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter A.
FILTER CTEMP B 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter B.
FILTER CTEMP C 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter C.
FILTER CTEMP D 2000 to 10000 Sets the color temperature of the color temperature filter D.
BATTERY INFO Display (Information when connecting the Battery)
Item Setting Function
TYPE Display only Indicating the battery types.
MFD DATA D/M/Y Display only Date of shipment from factory.
CYCLE COUNT Display only Number of times of charge/discharge.
CAPACITY Display only Indicating the capacity when battery is fully charged.
VOLTAGE Display only Indicating the battery output voltage.
CURRENT Display only Indicating the battery output current.
REMAINING % Display only Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of %.
REMAINING MIN Display only Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of time (minute)(estimate).
MODE Display only Battery operating mode is displayed.
STATUS Display only Battery status is displayed.
? 15OBATTERY INFO TOP
TYPE : NIMH MFD DATE D/M/Y:05062002 CYCLE COUNT : 500 CAPACITY : 3700mAh VOLTAGE : 13.5V CURRENT : 3000mA REMAINING(%) : 87% REMAINING(MIN): 120M MODE : 6080 STATUS : 000C
When the battery (BP-M50/M100, BP-GL65/GL95/IL75 etc.)
supporting Info is used.
? 15 BATTERY TOP
TYPE : ----- MFD DATE D/M/Y:-------- CYCLE COUNT : --- CAPACITY : ----mAh VOLTAGE : ----V CURRENT : ----mA REMAINING(%) : --% REMAINING(MIN): ---M MODE : ---- STATUS : ----
When other types of battery are used.
? 14OFILTER CTEMP
FILTER CTEMP A : 5600 FILTER CTEMP B : 3200 FILTER CTEMP C : 4300 FILTER CTEMP D : 6300
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-77
4-10. Setup Menu List
The data that is set by the Setup menu can be saved in files. (Refer to Section 5 for the details of the filesystem.)This section shows the list covering all the items of the setup menu. The following list shows the respec-tive default settings when the unit was shipped from the factory and the destination files to which therespective menu items can be saved.F-SET : Indicates the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory.C-SET : (Expected to write down the customers’ setup conditions.)ALL : Indicates the items that can be saved when the ALL FILE SAVE is executed. The items are
indicated by the symbols.PRESET : Indicates the items that can be preset when the ALL PRESET is executed. The items are
indicated by the symbols.SCENE : Indicates the items that can be saved in the SCENE file when the SCENE STORE is
executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.REFER : Indicates the items that can be saved in the REFERENCE file when the REFERENCE
SAVE/STORE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.LENS : Indicates the items that can be saved in the LENS file when the LENS FILE STORE is
executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.STD : The items that are returned to the standard setup (PRESET value) when the STANDARD
submenu is clicked.Power OFF : Indicates the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the
factory at power-off.
Symbols : Can be saved. (The menu display value remains as it is even after saving.)
O : Can be saved. (The menu display value becomes 0 when it is saved.)X : Cannot be saved.
: Special saving items. (Refer to “5-8. Special Saving Items”.) : Special saving items. (When an absolute value switch exists, the switch value has priority (Refer to
“5-8. Special Saving Items”.))
nThe items that have the crossing mark X (cannot be saved) in their ALL and PRESET columns, can bethe target of the USER file and USER PRESET if the items are located in the USER menu. However, theitems that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory at power-OFF, areexcluded from the target.
4-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
1. OPERATION Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 OUTPUT SEL HD SDI OUT ON X X X X _
SD REAR BNC OUT VBS X X X X _
TEST OUT SELECT HD X X X X _
DOWN CON MODE CROP X X X X _
02 FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1> 5600K X X X X _
ASSIGN SW <2> F.MIC X X X X _
TURBO SW TURBO X X X X _
FRONT MIC SELECT STREO X X X X _
DF/NDF DF X X X X _
END SEARCH OFF X X X X _
CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF X X X X It is set toOFF when A.INT/M. INT isselected.
CACHE REC TIME 0SEC X X X X _
TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN X X X X _
REC TIME 5SEC X X X X _
PRE-LIGHTING OFF X X X X _
NUMBER OF FRAME 1 X X X X _
TRIGGER INTERVAL 5MIN X X X X _
PRE-LIGHTING OFF X X X X _
03 FUNCTION 2 5600K OFF X X O _
WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM X X X X _
SHOCKLESS WHITE 1 X X X X _
ATW SPEED 4 X X X X _
LOW LIGHT OFF X X X X _
LOW LIGHT LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF BATTERY WARNING10% X X X X _
PB VIDEO ALL X X X X _
ABS (VF MANU) OFF X X X X X O OFF
04 VF DISP 1 VF DISP ON X* X X X X X Depends onthe VF switchsetting.
VF DISPLAY MODE 3 X X X X _
DISP EXTENDER ON X X X X _
DISP FILTER ON X X X X _
DISP WHITE ON X X X X _
DISP 5600K ON X X X X _
DISP GAIN ON X X X X _
DISP SHUTTER ON X X X X _
DISP AUDIO ON X X X X _
DISP TAPE ON X X X X _
* : It is not saved even in the USER FILE.
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-79
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
05 VF DISP 2 DISP IRIS ON X X X X _
DISP ZOOM ON X X X X _
DISP COLOR TEMP OFF X X X X _
DISP BATT REMAIN OFF X X X X _
DISP DC IN OFF X X X X _
DISP WRR RF LVL OFF X X X X _
DISP TIME CODE OFF X X X X _
06 ‘!’ LED GAIN <!> ON X X X X _
SHUTTER <!> ON X X X X _
WHITE BAL <!> ON X X X X _
5600K <!> ON X X X X _
ATW <!> ON X X X X _
EXTENDER <!> ON X X X X _
FILTER <!> OFF X X X X _
OVERRIDE <!> ON X X X X _
FORMAT <!> OFF X X X X _
07 ‘!’ LED STD GAIN <!> 0dB X X X X _
SHUTTER <!> OFF X X X X _
WHITE BAL <!> AB X X X X _
5600K <!> OFF X X X X _
ATW <!> OFF X X X X _
EXTENDER <!> OFF X X X X _
FILTER ND <!> 1 X X X X _
FILTER CC <!> B X X X X _
OVERRIDE <!> OFF X X X X _
FORMAT <!> 23.98 X X X X _ ‘
08 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF X X X X _
CENTER OFF X X X X _
CENTER MARK 3 X X X X _
SAFETY ZONE OFF X X X X _
SAFETY AREA 90% X X X X _
ASPECT OFF X X X X _
ASPECT SELECT 4 : 3 X X X X _
ASPECT MASK OFF X X X X _
ASPECT MASK LVL 0 X X X X _
100% MARKER OFF X X X X _
09 MARKER 2 USER BOX OFF X X X X _
USER BOX WIDTH 240 X X X X _
USER BOX HEIGHT 135 X X X X _
USER BOX H POS. 0 X X X X _
USER BOX V POS. 0 X X X X _
CENTER H POS. 0 X X X X _
CENTER V POS. 0 X X X X _
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF X X X X _
ASPECT SAFE AREA 90% X X X X _
4-80 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
10 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 0dB X X X X _
GAIN MID 6dB X X X X _
GAIN HIGH 12dB X X X X _
GAIN TURBO 42dB X X X X _
TURBO SW IND. OFF X X X X _
11 VF SETTING ZEBRA OFF X* X X X X X Depends on theVF ZEBRAswitch setting.
ZEBRA SELECT 1 X X X X _
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL 70% X X X X _
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL 100% X X X X _
ASPECT OFF X X X X _
VF DETAIL LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF DTL H LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF DTL V LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
12 AUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE OFF X X X X _
IRIS SPEED 3 X X O _
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF X X O _
IRIS WINDOW 1 X X O _
IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF X X X X X O OFF
IRIS VAR WIDTH 240 X X O _
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 135 X X O _
IRIS VAR H POS 0 X X O _
IRIS VAR V POS 0 X X O _
13 SHOT ID ID-1 _ X X X X X _
ID-2 _ X X X X X _
ID-3 _ X X X X X _
ID-4 _ X X X X X _
14 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF X X X X _
SHOT TIME OFF X X X X _
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF X X X X _
SHOT SERIAL NO OFF X X X X _
SHOT ID SEL OFF X X X X _
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF X X X X _
15 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL ON X X X X _
STATUS FUNTION ON X X X X _
STATUS AUDIO ON X X X X _
16 TEST OUT TEST OUT MARKER OFF X X X X _
TEST OUT VFDISP OFF X X X X _
TEST OUT MENU OFF X X X X _
TEST OUT ZEBRA OFF X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
* : It is not saved even in the USER FILE.
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-81
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
17 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF X X X X _
WARM-COOL <A> 3200 X X X X _
WARM-COOL BAL <A> 0 X X X X _
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF X X X X _
WARM-COOL <B> 3200 X X X X _
WARM-COOL BAL <B> 0 X X X X _
18 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/32 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/33 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/40 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/50 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/60 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/96 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/100 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/120 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/125 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/250 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/500 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/1000 ON X X X X _
SHUTTER 1/2000 ON X X X X _
19 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1 X X X X X X _
F. ID NO OFFSET X X X X X _
<LENS INFORMATION> _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
L. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.
L. MF _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.
20 UMID SET EX-OWNERSHIP REC OFF X X X X _
COUNTRY CODE _ X X X X X _
ORGANIZATION _ X X X X X _
USER CODE _ X X X X X _
INSTANCE NO RND X X X X _
TIME ZONE 00 X X X X _
MACHINE Fixed value X X X X X X _
4-82 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. PAINT Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 SW STATUS GAMMA ON X X O _
BLACK GAMMA OFF X O _
MATRIX OFF X O _
KNEE ON X O _
WHITE CLIP ON X X O _
DETAIL ON X X O _
APERTURE ON X X O _
FLARE ON X X O _
EVS OFF X O _
TEST SAW OFF X X X O _
02 WHITE COLOR TEMP. <A> 3200 X _
C TEMP BAL <A> 0 X _
R GAIN <A> 0 X _
B GAIN <A> 0 X _
5600K <A> OFF X X _
COLOR TEMP. <B> 3200 X _
C TEMP BAL <B> 0 X _
R GAIN <B> 0 X _
B GAIN <B> 0 X _
5600K <B> OFF X X _
03 BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK 0 O O X O _
R BLACK 0 O X X O _
B BLACK 0 O X X O _
MASTER FLARE 0 O O X O _
R FLARE 0 O O X O _
G FLARE 0 O O X O _
B FLARE 0 O O X O _
FLARE ON X X O _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
04 GAMMA GAMMA ON X X O _
STEP GAMMA 0.45 X O _
MASTER GAMMA 0 O O X O _
R GAMMA 0 O O X O _
G GAMMA 0 O O X O _
B GAMMA 0 O O X O _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
GAMMA SELECT STD X O _
GAM SEL (STD) 3 X O _
GAM SEL (HG) 4 X O _
GAM SEL (USER) 1 X O _
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-83
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
05 BLK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF X O _
BLK GAMMA RANGE HIGH X O _
MASTER BLK 0 O O X O _GAMMA
R BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _
G BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _
B BLACK GAMMA 0 O O X O _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
06 KNEE 1 KNEE ON X O _
KNEE POINT (M) 95. 0 O X O _
KNEE SLOPE (M) 0 O O X O _
KNEE SATURATION OFF X O _
KNEE SAT LEVEL 0 O O X O _
WHITE CLIP ON X X O _
WHITE CLIP LEVEL 108. 0 X O _
07 KNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION OFF X O _
KNEE POINT (R) 0. 0 X O _
KNEE SLOPE (R) 0 O O X O _
KNEE POINT (G) 0. 0 X O _
KNEE SLOPE (G) 0 O O X O _
KNEE POINT (B) 0. 0 X O _
KNEE SLOPE (B) 0 O O X O _
08 DETAIL 1 DETAIL ON X X O _
APERTURE ON X X O _
DETAIL LEVEL 0 O O X O _
APERTURE LEVEL 0 O O X O _
DETAIL H/V RATIO 0 O O X O _
CRISPENING 0 O O X O _
LEVEL DEPEND ON X O _
LEVEL DEPEND LVL 0 O O X O _
DETAIL FREQ. 0 O O X O _
09 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF X O _
KNEE APT LEVEL 0 O O X O _
DETAIL WHT LIMIT 0 O O X O _
DETAIL BLK LIMIT 0 O O X O _
DETAIL V-BLK LMT 0 O O X O _
H/V CONTROL MODE V X O _
10 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL ON X O _
SD DETAIL LEVEL 0 O O X O _
SD CRISPENING 0 O O X O _
SD DTL WHT LIMIT 0 O O X O _
SD DTL BLK LIMIT 0 O O X O _
SD LEVEL DEPEND ON X O _
SD LV.DEPEND LVL 0 O O X O _
SD DTL FREQ. 0 O O X O _
SD DTL H/V RATIO 0 O O X O _
SD CROSS COLOR 0 O O X O _
4-84 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
11 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF X O _
SKIN DETECT EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SKIN AREA IND OFF X X X X X O OFF
SKIN DTL SELECT 1 X X X X X O 1
SKIN DETAIL ON X O _
SKIN DETAIL LVL 0 O O X O _
SKIN DTL SAT. 0 O O X O _
SKIN DTL HUE 0 X O _
SKIN DTL WIDTH 40 X O _
12 MTX LINEAR MATRIX OFF X O _
MATRIX (USER) OFF X O _
MATRIX (PRESET) OFF X O _
MATRIX (PRST) SEL 2 X O _
MATRIX (USER) R-G 0 O O X O _
MATRIX (USER) R-B 0 O O X O _
MATRIX (USER) G-R 0 O O X O _
MATRIX (USER) G-B 0 O O X O _
MATRIX (USER) B-R 0 O O X O _
MATRIX (USER) B-G 0 O O X O _
13 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF X O _
MATRIX (MULTI) OFF X O _
MATRIX AREA IND. OFF X X X X X O OFF
MATRIX COLOR DET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MULTI MTX PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MTX (MULTI) AXIS B X X X X X O B
MTX (MULTI) HUE 0 O O X O _
MTX (MULTI) SAT 0 O O X O _
14 V MODULATION VMOD ON X X X O _
MASTER VMOD 0 O X X O _
R VMOD 0 O X X O _
G VMOD 0 O X X O _
B VMOD 0 O X X O _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
15 SATURATION. SATURATION OFF X O _
SAT.LEVEL 0 O O X O _
LOW KEY SAT. OFF X O _
L. KEY SAT. LEVEL 0 O O X O _
L. KEY SAT. RANGE HIGH X O _
Y BLK GAMMA OFF X O _
Y BLK GAM LEVEL 0 O O X O _
Y BLK GAM RANGE HIGH X O _
16 SCENE FILE [] 1 to 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
[] STANDARD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCENE RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCENE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F.ID _ X X X X X _
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-85
3. MAINTENANCE Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 WHT SHADING SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
R/G/B WHT H SAW 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B WHT H PARA 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B WHT V SAW 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B WHT V PARA 0 X O X X X X _
WHITE SAW/PARA ON X X X X X O ON
02 BLK SHADING SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
R/G/B BLK H SAW 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B BLK H PARA 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B BLK V SAW 0 X O X X X X _
R/G/B BLK V PARA 0 X O X X X X _
BLACK SAW/PARA ON X X X X X O ON
MASTER BLACK 0 O X O _
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on the X X X Depends on theswitch setting. GAIN switch
setting.
03 LEVEL ADJ Y LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
SYNC LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
Pr LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
Pb LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
04 SD LEVEL ADJ SD VBS LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
SD VBS SETUP LVL 0 % X X X X _
05 BATTERY <Sony Info>
BEFORE END 1 5 % X X X X _
END 1 0 % X X X X _
<Sony>
BEFOR END 2 11.3V X X X X _
END 2 11.0V X X X X _
<Others, EXT DC>
BEFORE END 3 11.8V X X X X _
END 3 11.0V X X X X _
06 AUDIO-1 AUDIO OUT(F/R) CUE X X X X _
REC AUDIO OUT EE X X X X _
CAMERA ADAPTER ENABL X X X X _
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE SW X X X X _
FRONT MIC REF _50dB X X X X _
REAR MIC REF _60dB X X X X _
REAR MIC +48V ENABL X X X X _
4-86 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
07 AUDIO- 2 AU REC EMPHASIS OFF X X X X _
CUE REC ON X X X X _
AU REF LEVEL _20dB X X X X _
AU REF OUT 0dB X X X X _
AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO X X X X _
AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO X X X X _
AU AGC SPEC _6dB X X X X _
AU LIMITER MODE OFF X X X X _
AU OUT LIMITER ON X X X X _
08 AUDIO-3 AU SG (1KHz) OFF X X X X _
MIC CH1 LEVEL FRONT X X X X _
MIC CH2 LEVEL FRONT X X X X _
REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1 X X X X _
REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2 X X X X _
AUDIO SELECT CH3 AUTO X X X X _
AUDIO SELECT CH4 AUTO X X X X _
LVL CONTROL CH3 70 X X X X _
LVL CONTROL CH4 70 X X X X _
09 TIME MODE TC OUT AUTO X X X X _
DF/NDF DF X X X X _
EXT-LK UBIT INT X X X X _
LTC UBIT FIX X X X X _
VITC UBIT FIX X X X X _
WATCH ATUO ADJ ON X X X X _
UBIT GROUP ID 000 X X X X _
10 VTR MODE REC TALLY BLINK ON X X X X _
REC START BEEP OFF X X X X _
LCD DISPLAY HOLD TIMER X X X X _
LCD HOLD TIMER 1H X X X X _
SHOT TIME DISP MD : HM X X X X _
VIDEO OUT (F/R) EE X X X X _
STBY OFF TIMER 60MIN X X X X _
STOP KEY FREEZE OFF X X X X _
11 SHOT MARKER LTC UB-MARKER SET X X X X _
REC START MARK OFF X X X X _
SHOT MARKER 1 OFF X X X X _
SHOT MARKER 2 OFF X X X X _
12 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP. <P> 3200 X X X X _
C TEMP BAL <P> 0 X X X X _
R GAIN <P> 0 O X X X X _
B GAIN <P> 0 O X X X X _
5600K <P> OFF X X X X O _
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF X X X X X O OFF
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-87
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
13 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC X O _
DCC D RANGE 600% X O _
DCC POINT 0 O O O X O _
DCC GAIN 0 O O O X O _
DCC DELAY TIME 0 O O O X O _
PREKNEE POINT AUTO X X X X _
14 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW 1 X X O _
IRIS WINDOW IND. OFF X X X X X X OFF
IRIS LEVEL 0 O O X O _
IRIS APL RATIO 0 O O X O _
IRIS VAR WIDTH 240 X X O _
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 135 X X O _
IRIS VAR H POS 0 X X O _
IRIS VAR V POS 0 X X O _
IRIS SPEED 3 X X O _
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF X X O _
15 FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH OFF X X X X _
COLOR BAR SEL 100% X X X X _
SHT DISP MODE SEC X X X X _
RM COMMON ON X X X X _MEMORY
VTR START/STOP RM X X X X _
FAN ON X X X X _
USER & ALL ONLY OFF X X X X _
HDSDI REMOTE I/F OFF X X X X _
SD ASPECT PULSE OFF X X X X _
16 GENLOCK GENLOCK ON X X X X _
RETURN VIDEO OFF X X X X _
GL H PHASE COASE 0 X O X X X X _
GL H PHASE FINE 0 X O X X X X _
17 ND COMP ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF X X X X X X OFF
CLEAR ND OFFSET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
18 FORMAT CURRENT 23. 98 X X X X X X Setting valueof NEXT
NEXT 23. 98 X X X X X X _
19 VANC RX UMID LINE1 0 X X X X _
UMID LINE2 0 X X X X _
4-88 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. FILE Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
USER FILE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID _ X X X X X X _
USER PREST EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
02 USER FILE 2 STORE USR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _PRESET
CLEAR USR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _PRESET
CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
LOAD CUSTOM OFF X X X X _DATA
LOAD OUT OF USER OFF X X X X _
BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF X X X X _
USER LOAD WHITE OFF X X X X _
03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
ALL FILE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID _ X X X X X _
ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
STORE ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
3SEC CLR PRESET OFF X X X X X O OFF
04 SCENE FILE [] 1 to 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
[] STANDARD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCENE RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCENE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F.ID _ X X X X X _
05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REFERENCE LOAD EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REFERENCE SAVE EXEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID _ X X X X X _
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF X X X X _
06 USER GAMMA USER GAMMA LOAD _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
USER GAMMA RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID _ X X X X X X _
↓ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DATA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-89
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
07 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILR RECALL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
LENS FILE STORE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
F. ID NO OFFSET X X X X X _
SOURCE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
LENS NO OFFSET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
LENS AUTO RECALL ON X X X X _
<LENS INFORMATION>
L. ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.
L. MF _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Depends onthe Lens.
08 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD 0 X X X X X _
LENS CENTER H 0 X X X X X _
LENS CENTER V 0 X X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
LENS R FLARE 0 X X X X X _
LENS G FLARE 0 X X X X X _
LENS B FLARE 0 X X X X X _
LENS W-R OFST 0 X X X X X _
LENS W-B OFST 0 X X X X X _
09 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL TEST X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
LENS R/G/B H SAW 0 X X X X X _
LENS R/G/B H PARA 0 X X X X X _
LENS R/G/B V SAW 0 X X X X X _
LENS R/G/B V PARA 0 X X X X X _
10 MEMORY STICK M. S. FORMAT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
M. S. IN > JUMP TO OFF X X X X _
11 TELE FILE TELE FILE CLEAR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
TELE FILE MARK OK X X X X _
ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SIZE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REMAIN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
STATUS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
4-90 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. DIAGNOSIS Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 HOURS METER RESET METER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DRUM RUNNING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
TAPE RUNNING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
THREADING _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DRUM RUNNING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
TAPE RUNNING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
OPERATION-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
THREADING-2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
02 TIME/DATE ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
HOUR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MIN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SEC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
YEAR _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MONTH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DAY _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
03 ROM VERSION AT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
AU DSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
EQ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
04 DEV STATUS I/O _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
IFA1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
IFA2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DR OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
VF1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
VF2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FP1 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FP2 OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
RP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
EEPROM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
IFA OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
VF OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DCP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DR OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
NVRAM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DCP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
LSI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCVP OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SG OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DCON OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SCI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SS OK _ _ _ _ _ _ _
RM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
BATT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
05 OPTION BOARD DOWN CONVERTER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
PICTURE CACHE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
SLOW SHUTTER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-91
6. SERVICE Menu
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
01 MENU SET RE ROTATION REV OFF X X X X X X _
RE SPEED 3 X X X X X X _
DIRECT VALUE OFF X X X X X X OFF
SERVICE RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FACTORY PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
02 SP FUNC COMP OUT ENABLE OFF X X X X X X _
CHARA 4 : 3 MODE OFF X X X X X X _
VF ZEBRA FORM 1 X X X X X X _
BATT REMAIN DISP 1 X X X X X X _
GAIN DISP MODE dB X X X X X X _
03 VA ADJUST R AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
G AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
B AD LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
PREKNEE ADJ OFF X X X X X O OFFMODE
R PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _
G PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _
B PRE KNEE 0 X X X X X X _
OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
TEST SAW OFF X X X O _
TEST SAW H LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
04 CCD ADJUST R VSUB _ X X X X X X _
G VSUB _ X X X X X X _
B VSUB _ X X X X X X _
R VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _
G VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _
B VSUB OFST 500 _ X X X X X X _
R VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _
G VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _
B VSUB (P) _ X X X X X X _
OUPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
05 DCP ADJUST VF Y DC LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
VCD CONT 0 X X X X X X _
RGB OUT R LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
RGB OUT B LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
DETAIL BALANCE 0 X X X X X X _
VF ZEBRA1 OFFSET 0 X X X X X X _
VF ZEBRA2 OFFSET 0 X X X X X X _
AT AD REF LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
4-92 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
06 RP DC OFFSET R DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _
R DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _
G DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _
G DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _
B DC OFFSET 0 0 X X X X X X _
B DC OFFSET 180 0 X X X X X X _
DC ADJ MODE OFF X X X X X X OFF
OUPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
07 MANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT Y X X X X X O Y
RPN CURSOR OFF X X X X X O OFF
TEST OUT MENU OFF X X X X _
CURSOR H POS. 0 X X X X X X _
CURSOR V POS. 0 X X X X X X _
CURSOR JUMP CURR X X X X X X CURR
RECORD RPN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DELETE RPN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FIELD/FRAME FIELD X X X X X O FIELD
08 RPN MANAGE CONC. (APR) RESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
RPN ALL PRESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
AUTO CONCEAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
09 SD ADJUST SD SDI LOCK/FREE LOCK X X X X X O LOCK
SD SDI VCO FREQ. 0 X X X X X X _
SD VBS LEVEL 0 X O X X X X _
SD ZEBRA Y LEVEL 0 X X X X X X _
SD ZEBRA Y OFST 0 X X X X X X _
10 VTR MODE 2 FAN MODE AUTO X X X X X O AUTO
11 VF DETAIL VF DETAIL LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF DTL H LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF DTL V LEVEL 0 O X X X X _
VF DTL WHT LIMIT 0 X X X X X X _
VF DTL BLK LIMIT 0 X X X X X X _
12 MEASURE MEASUREMENT OFF X X X X X X OFFMODE
MASTER BLACK 0 O O X O _
MASTER GAIN (TMP) Depends on the X X X Depends on theswitch setting. GAIN switch
setting.
13 VTR MAINTE C0 : SERVO CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
C1 : RF CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
C2 : AUDIO CHECK _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A0 : SERVO ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A1 : RF ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A2 : AUDIO ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A4 : MECHANISM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ADJUST
A9 : OTHERS ADJUST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
HDW-F900R/V1 (E) 4-93
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
14 FILTER CTEMP FILTER CTEMP A 5600 X X X X X X _
FILTER CTEMP B 3200 X X X X X X _
FILTER CTEMP C 4300 X X X X X X _
FILTER CTEMP D 6300 X X X X X X _
15 BATTERY INFO TYPE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MFD DATE D/M/Y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CYCLE COUNT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CAPACITY _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
VOLTAGE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CURRENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REMAINING (%) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
REMAINING (MIN) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
MODE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
STATUS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
4-94 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. OthersFor more detail, refer to “5-8. Special Saving Items”.
No. Page Setup Item F-SET C-SET ALL PRSET SCENE REFER LENS STD Power OFF
_ _ WHITE R Gain 0 X _
_ _ WHITE B Gain 0 X _
_ _ MASTER GAIN _ X X X It becomes theGAIN switchsetting.
_ _ SHUTTER _ X X X It becomes theSHUTTERswitch setting.
_ _ DCC (Auto knee) _ X X X It becomes theDCC switchsetting.
_ _ SHUTTER SEL _ X X X
_ _ SHUTTER ECS FREQ _ X X X
5-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 5File System
5-1. Structure of File System
The HDW-F900R can save data modifications made using the setup menu, as files in the main unit itself andin a Memory Stick. The file system consists of the USER file, ALL file, SCENE file, REFERENCE file andLENS file. For details of the respective files, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.
USER fileThe USER file contains data set using the USER menu. The data can also be saved in a Memory Stick.When this file is saved in a Memory Stick, the USER category can be set in the user preference setupimmediately by reading USER file data from the Memory Stick next time.The USER category itself can also be customized so that items can be added or deleted. Therefore, theUSER file can be used as a SCENE file or an ALL file as appropriate.
ALL fileThe ALL file contains the setups of all categories. The ALL file can be saved in a Memory Stick.When the ALL file is saved in a Memory Stick after adjusting the first camera, the user can set the secondand subsequent cameras to have the same adjustment setup as the first camera immediately by reading theALL file data from a Memory Stick.
SCENE fileThe SCENE file contains data that has been painted in accordance with the shooting scene.When an operator saves the setup data that is optimized for a specific scene during rehearsal, the operatorcan establish exactly the same setup for the actual take as in the rehearsal by calling the saved setup data.Up to 5 SCENE files can be saved in the main unit and 100 SCENE files can be saved in a Memory Stick.(For details of the hierarchical layer structure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)The SCENE file data are maintained until the new data are set and stored.
REFERENCE fileThe REFERENCE file contains the standard setup data.When the STANDARD operation is performed, the setup stored in the REFERENCE file is called out.A single REFERENCE file can be saved in the PRESET layer of the PAINT category of main unit, and asingle REFERENCE file can also be saved in a Memory Stick. (For details of the hierarchical layerstructure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)If the REFERENCE file is not registered, the default setup data when shipped from the factory is used asthe reference values.The REFERENCE file data are maintained until the new data are set and stored.
LENS fileThe LENS file contains data of unique characteristics (flare, white shading, center marker position andextender white correction values) for each lens.Up to 32 LENS files can be saved in the main unit and 100 LENS files can be saved in a Memory Stick.(For details of the hierarchical layer structure, refer to Section 5-2, “Data Structure”.)
5-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
PAINT FILEOPERA
TIONMAINTENANCE
SERVICEData structure
Category
ALL
5-2. Data Structure
Each menu item is classified into categories such as USER, OPERATION, PAINT, and MAINTENANCE. The setup dataof each item has a layered structure that includes the USER layer (not the USER category), the PRESET layer, the SER-VICE layer, and the FACTORY layer, each of which contains data.
USER layer : Data that can be changed by menu operation. This layer is used mainly by users.PRESET layer : Data to be registered as the standard setup. This layer is mainly set up by video engineer.SERVICE layer*1 : Data that can be changed by service engineer after entering the SERVICE mode.
For users, this layer is identical to the factory default setup.FACTORY layer : Factory-adjusted values and fixed values.
*1 : To change data in the SERVICE layer, be sure to set the switch S1-1 on the AT-172 board to ON.
Relationship between the values set in the unit and the data layersThe data of each item is stored in absolute values in each layer. The USER layer data, which is at the top, serves as theactual setup data, but in the SERVICE mode, the SERVICE layer data serves as the actual setup data. Note that the setupdone in the lower layer is not reflected to the upper layer. For example, if you want to reflect the data set in the SERVICEmode to the USER mode, you need to perform CLEAR ALL PRESET, and then copy the SERVICE layer data to theUSER layer.As an exception, for items such as WHITE SHADING and R/G/B FLARE, which require adjustments in a service whenreplacing a board, the setup values in the SERVICE layer are added to the setup values in the USER layer. Theseitems are listed below:
. PAINT categoryBLACK/FLARE page
R/G/B FLAREGAMMA page
R/G/B GAMMADETAIL1 page
DETAIL LEVEL. MAINTENANCE category
WHT SHADING pageR/G/B WHT H SAW, R/G/B WHT H PARA, R/G/B WHT V SAW, R/G/B WHT V PARA
BLK SHADING pageR/G/B BLK H SAW, R/G/B BLK H PARA, R/G/B BLK V SAW, R/G/B BLK V PARA
LEVEL ADJ pageY LEVEL, SYNC LEVEL
Data display on the menuEach menu item is classified as the one that displays the difference from the standard setup data (relative value display),and the one that displays the actual value of the data stored in that layer (absolute value display).Most of the volume-related items display relative values, and the switch-related items, MASTER GAMMA, KNEE POINTand other similar items display absolute values.The items that display relative values usually perform adjustments by modifying the values between –99 and 99, makingthe setup data become “0” after the PRESET or STORE operation.
5-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
Data structure
Category
USER PRESET
? 01OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD : EXEC USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID
USER PRESET : EXEC
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
Data structure
Category
STORE USER PRESET
? 02OUSER FILE 2
STORE USR PRESET: EXEC CLEAR USR PRESET: EXEC CUSTOMIZE RESET : EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM DATA: OFF LOAD OUT OF USER: OFF BEFORE FILE PAGE: OFF USER LOAD WHITE : OFF
5-3. Operating the USER File
Calling the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select USER PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
Modifying and Registering the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the standard setup of your preference by setting the items on each page of the USER menu.
(Refer to Section 4 “Setup Menu”.)3. Let the USER FILE 2 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select STORE USR PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
5-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
Data structure
Category
CLEAR USER PRESET
? 02OUSER FILE 2
STORE USR PRESET: EXEC CLEAR USR PRESET: EXEC CUSTOMIZE RESET : EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM DATA: OFF LOAD OUT OF USER: OFF BEFORE FILE PAGE: OFF USER LOAD WHITE : OFF
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
Data structure
Category
Memory Stick
USER FILE SAVE
? 01OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD : EXEC USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID
USER PRESET : EXEC
How to Return the Standard Setup to the Default Setup When Shipped from the Factory
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the USER FILE 2 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select CLEAR USR PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
Saving the Setup Contents to a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select F.ID and set the file ID. (For details, refer to Section 6-1. “Saving and Loading User Files” ofthe Operation Manual.)
5. Select USER FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
5-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
P00 USER SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
Data structure
Category
USER FILE LOAD
Memory Stick
P00 USER LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
? 01OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD : EXEC USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID
USER PRESET : EXEC
6. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file isgoing to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)
7. Confirm that the screen returns to the USER FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.
How to Read the Saved File from a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the USER FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select USER FILE LOAD and press the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the desired file that you want to read
and press the rotary encoder.
6. Confirm that the screen returns to the USER FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.
5-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE
FILEData structure
Category
ALL PRESET
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE
FILEData structure
Category
STORE ALL PRESET
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
5-4. Operating the ALL File
Calling the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
Modifying and Registering the Standard Setup
nBefore starting to create the standard setup of your preference, be sure to execute the first topic “Callingthe standard setup (ALL PRESET)”. If any other setup item is modified accidentally from the standardsetup, and if ALL PRESET is not executed, the modified setup is set as the standard setup when theSTORE ALL PRESET is executed.
1. Perform the steps 1 through 3 of “Calling the standard setup” as described above.2. Create the standard setup of your preference by setting the items on each page of the USER menu.
(Refer to Section 4 “Setup Menu”.)3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select STORE ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
5-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE
FILEData structure
Category
CLEAR ALL PRESET
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
How to Return the Standard Setup to the Default Setup when Shipped from the Factory
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select CLEAR ALL PRESET and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.
5-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE
FILEMENU
CUSTOMIZEData structure
Category
ALL FILE SAVEMemory Stick
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
P00 ALL SAVE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
Saving the Setup Contents to a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select F.ID and set the file ID. (For details, refer to Section 6-1. “Saving and Loading User Files” ofthe Operation Manual.)
5. Select ALL FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.6. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is
going to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)
7. Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.nWhen the user sets the desired standard setup by adjusting the first HDW-F900R (to be executed upto STORE ALL PRESET), and the data is saved in a Memory Stick by the ALL FILE SAVE, theuser can set the second and subsequent cameras to have the same adjustment setup as the first cameraimmediately by reading the ALL file data from a Memory Stick.
5-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
USER
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
PAINTOPERATIONMAINTENANCE
FILEMENU
CUSTOMIZEData structure
Category
ALL FILE LOADMemory Stick
? 03OALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
P00 ALL LOAD ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
How to Read the Saved File from a Memory Stick
nThe ALL FILE LOAD reads the standard setup and saves in the main unit. If it reads the ALL file thatcontains the modified standard setup data, the standard setup will be modified.
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the ALL FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
4. Select ALL FILE LOAD and press the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the desired file that you want to read
and press the rotary encoder.
6. Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.
5-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 04OSCENE FILE
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):
5-5. Operating the SCENE File
Saving in the Main Unit
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum scene data by painting and other adjustments using the setup menu.
(For details of the respective file items of the SCENE file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.)3. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file
ID.
4. Select SCENE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is
going to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)
6. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.
5-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 04OSCENE FILE
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1): MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):
? 04OSCENE FILE
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
Calling from the Main Unit
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select the SCENE RECALL and press the rotary encoder.4. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the file that you want to call and press
the rotary encoder.
nTo call the SCENE FILE using the SCENE RECALL/CANCEL function of the SCENE FILE display,follow the steps as shown below.1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select the desired file from the files 1 through 5.4. Press the rotary encoder to change the “ ” display to “ ”.
(When the rotary encoder is pressed while “ ” is being displayed, calling the file is canceled andthe display returns to the original display before calling.)
5-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
P00 SCENE STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE ***.5FILE SAVE MEM1-5←
P00 SCENE RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE ***.5FILE LOAD MEM1-5→
? 04OSCENE FILE
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : STANDARD SCENE RECALL : EXEC SCENE STORE : EXEC F.ID
Saving in a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick and perform the steps 1 to 5 of “Saving in the Main Unit” as described above.When you want to save 5 SCENE files in the Memory Stick at the same time, select 5 FILE SAVEand press the rotary encoder.
2. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.
How to Read the Saved Data from a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Perform the steps 1 to 4 of “Calling from the Main Unit” as described above.
When you want to call 5 SCENE files from the Memory Stick at the same time, select 5 FILE LOADand press the rotary encoder.
3. Confirm that the screen returns to the SCENE FILE display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.
How to Return to the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the SCENE FILE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the rotary encoder.
3. Select STANDARD. Press the rotary encoder to change the “ ” display to “ ”.(When the rotary encoder is pressed while “ ” is being displayed, calling the file is canceled andthe display returns to the original display before calling.)
5-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 05OREFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 05OREFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 05OREFERENCE SAVE DATA OK? YES NO REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
→
5-6. Operating the REFERENCE File
Saving in the Main Unit
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum reference file data by various adjustments using the setup menu.
(For details of the respective file items of the REFERENCE file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup MenuList”.)
3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the fileID.
4. Select REFERENCE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. A message appears prompting your confirmation. Select YES and press the rotary encoder.
Saving in a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file
ID.
4. Select REFERENCE SAVE and press the rotary encoder. The message [SAVE DATA OK?] appears.
5-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 05OREFERENCE MEMORY STICK ACCESS REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 05OREFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 05OREFERENCE LOAD DATA OK? YES NO REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
→
5. Select YES and press the rotary encoder. The message [MEMORY STICK ACCESS] appears.
nThe following messages appear depending on the conditions.. When a Memory Stick is not inserted : NO MEMORY STICK!. When a Memory Stick is write-protected : MEMORY STICK LOCKED
6. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears indicating that the reading is complete.
How to Read the Saved File from a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.3. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen.
4. Select REFERENCE LOAD and press the rotary encoder. The message [LOAD DATA OK?]appears.
5-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. Select YES and press the rotary encoder. The message [MEMORY STICK ACCESS] appears.
nThe following messages appear depending on the conditions.. When a Memory Stick is not inserted : NO MEMORY STICK!. When an error occurs : FILE ERROR
6. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears indicating that the reading is complete.
How to Return to the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the REFERENCE display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select REFERENCE CLEAR
and press the rotary encoder.
3. A message appears prompting your confirmation. Select YES and press the rotary encoder.
? 05OREFERENCE MEMORY STICK ACCESS REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
? 05OREFERENCE
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
5-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
? 07OLENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC LENS FILE STORE : EXEC F.ID : SOURCE : MEMORY 1 LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC
LENS AUTO RECALL: OFF <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)
P00 LENS STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):NO OFFSET MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):
? 07OLENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC LENS FILE STORE : EXEC F.ID : SOURCE : MEMORY 1 LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC
LENS AUTO RECALL: OFF <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)
5-7. Operating the LENS File
Saving in the Main Unit
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Create the optimum lens file data by performing the various adjustments using the setup menu.
(For details of the respective file items of the LENS file, refer to Section 4-10, “Setup Menu List”.)3. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen and select F.ID to set the file ID.
4. Select LENS FILE STORE and execute it by pressing the rotary encoder.5. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is
going to be saved and press the rotary encoder. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)
Calling from the Main Unit
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select LENS FILE RECALL
and press the rotary encoder.
3. When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the file that you want to call and pressthe rotary encoder.
P00 LENS RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):NO OFFSET MEM(2): MEM(3): MEM(4): MEM(5):
5-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
P00 LENS STORE ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NEW FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
P00 LENS RECALL ESC MEMORY STICK ACCESS DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001. 00/000/00 002. 00/000/00 003. 00/000/00 004. 00/000/00 005.NO FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
? 07OLENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC LENS FILE STORE : EXEC F.ID : SOURCE : MEMORY 1 LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC
LENS AUTO RECALL: OFF <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID : (unknown) L.MF : (unknown)
Saving in a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick and perform the steps 1 to 5 of “Saving in the Main Unit” as described above.To save 32 files at once, select [M.S. 001_032 MEM1-32] or [M.S. 051_082 MEM1_32], andpress the rotary encoder.
2. Confirm that the screen returns to the LENS FILE 1 display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the saving is complete.
How to Read the Saved File from a Memory Stick
1. Insert a Memory Stick. Perform the steps 1 to 3 of “Calling from the Main Unit” as described above.To read 32 files at once, select [M.S. 001_032 MEM1_32] or [M.S. 051_082 MEM1_32], andpress the rotary encoder.
2. Confirm that the screen returns to the LENS FILE 1 display and the message [COMPLETE!] appearsindicating that the reading is complete.
How to Return to the Standard Setup
1. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.2. Let the LENS FILE 1 display of the FILE menu appear on the screen. Select LENS NO OFFFSET
and press the rotary encoder.
3. Confirm that the message [COMPLETE!] appears and [F.ID] changes to [NO OFFSET] indicatingthat the screen returns to the standard setup.
5-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5-8. Special Saving Items
5-8-1. White Gain
Using the ALL file
Executing item Status after execution
ALL FILE SAVE All the values of the white gain are saved in the ALL FILE. (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
ALL FILE LOAD All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of ALL FILE.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page) (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)
STORE ALL PRESET The value of the preset white gain specified on the MAINTENANCE menu/PRESET WHT page(FILE menu/ALL page) is saved as the value of the PRESET layer (identical to the value of the REFERENCE FILE).
CLEAR ALL PRESET All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the factory default value.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page) (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)
The PRESET WHITE R/B GAIN is also changed to the factory default value.
ALL PRESET All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of PRESET layer.(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
Using the REFERENCE file
Executing item Status after execution
REFERENCE STORE (FILE menu/REFERENCE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.(When the WHITE BAL switch is in A, the value of A is saved. When it is in B,the value of B is stored. When it is in PRST, the value of PRST is stored.)The white gain value that is assigned by the [PRESET WHT] display with theWHITE BAL switch being set in PRST, is saved.
REFERENCE CLEAR (FILE menu/REFERENCE page) Both R/B GAIN values are set to 0 (3200K).
PRESET of the setup value The value returns to the REFERENCE file value.(FILE menu/REFERENCE page)
Using the SCENE file. When “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to ON using the [REFERENCE] display
Executing item Status after execution
SCENE STORE (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.(When the WHITE BAL switch is in A, the value of A is saved. When it is in B,the value of B is stored. When it is in PRST, the value of PRST is stored.)The white gain value that is assigned by the [PRESET WHT] display with theWHITE BAL switch being set in PRST, is saved.
SCENE RECALL (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are replaced by the SCENE filevalues. However, when “RECALL” is executed with the WHITE BAL switchbeing in the PRST position, the values are not replaced.
SCENE STANDARD (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution become the REFERENCE file values.
. When “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to OFF using the [REFERENCE] display
Executing item Status after execution
SCENE STORE (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values during execution are saved.
SCENE RECALL (FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) The white gain values are not rewritten.
SCENE STANDARD/CANCEL The PRESET value and the white gain values during execution are not(FILE menu/SCENE FILE page) replaced.
5-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5-8-2. Master Gain
The Master Gain value can be saved in the REFERENCE file and in the SCENE file.However, the Master Gain value is not controlled and the present value is maintained even though theMaster Gain value is read from the files.(The Master Gain value is determined by the hardware switch.)If the remote control devices that do not have the GAIN hardware switches such as MSU, the value ischanged to what is read from the file.
5-8-3. Shutter
The SHUTTER ON/OFF data, ECS frequency data and SHUTTER SEL value can be saved in theREFERENCE file and in the SCENE file.The ECS frequency data and SHUTTER SEL value are controlled by the setup data that are read from thefiles, but the SHUTTER ON/OFF is determined by the hardware switch.If the remote control devices that do not have the SHUTTER hardware switches such as MSU, the valueis changed to what is read from the file.
6-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 6Parts Replacement
6-1. CCD Unit and its Components PartsReplacement Procedure
6-1-1. CCD Unit Replacement
Overview
Removing the Front AssemblyRemoving the Filter KnobRemoving the CCD UnitInstalling the CCD UnitInstalling the Filter KnobAttaching the Front Assembly
Adjustment after Replacement
8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment9-6. Black Offset Adjustment
Removal
1. Removing the front assembly(1) Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-4.)(2) Open the inside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-5.)(3) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN3) on
the DCP-43 board.(4) Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from the
connectors (CN1, CN9, CN10) on the DR-614 board.(5) Remove the one screw (PSW2 x 5) and disconnect the
DCP holder (F) from the CHB stay.(6) Remove the four screws (B3 x 10). While removing
the front assembly, disconnect harness from theconnector (CN502, CN503) on the IFA-19G board.
CN10
CN1
CN503CN9
CN3
CN502
Front assembly
Flexible card wire
DR-614 board
DCP-43 board
IFA-19G board
B3 x 10
B3 x 10
PSW 2x5
DCP holder (F)
CHB stay
6-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Removing the filter knob(1) Loosen the two set screws, and remove the filter (ND)
knob.(2) Loosen the two set screws, and remove the filter (CC)
knob.Tool : L shaped hex wrench (d = 0.89 mm)
3. Removing the CCD unitRemove the four stainless bolts (M3 x 8) and the fourwashers (SW3). Then remove the CCD unit from the frontframe sub assembly.Tool : L shaped hex wrench (d = 2.5 mm)
CCD unit
Filter (CC) knob
Filter (ND) knob
Set screwsWP2 x 3
Stainless bolts (M3 x 8)
SW3
SW3
Front frame assembly
6-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Installing the CCD unit(1) Clean the areas (the shaded portion shown in
illustration) that are contacting with the front frame asshown in the illustration.
(2) Install the CCD unit to the front frame sub assemblywith the four stainless bolts (M3 x 8) and the fourwashers (SW3).Standard tightening torque :110 x 10_2 N.m (11 kgf.cm)
5. Installing the filter knob(1) Rotate the knob shaft (thick) until the filter of the
thinnest color is visible from the front.(2) Align the filter (CC) knob number “B” with the mark
on the inside panel assembly and attach it with the useof the two set screws (A).
(3) Rotate the knob shaft (thin) until the filter of thethinnest color is visible from the front.
(4) Align the filter (ND) knob number “1” with the mark onthe inside panel assembly and attach it with the use ofthe two set screws (B).Standard tightening torque :20 to 25 x 10_2 N.m (2 to 2.5 kgf.cm)
Cleaning
CCD unit
Mount cap
Removal
Installation
Mount lever
Set screw (B)WP2 x 3
Set screw (B)WP2 x 3
Set screw (A)WP2 x 3
Set screw (A)WP2 x 3
Filter (CC) knob
Filter (ND) knob
Inside panel assembly
Knob shaft (thin)
Knob shaft (thick)
1
Mark
B
6-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Attaching the front assembly(1) Connect the harnesses that are removed in steps (3),
(4) and (5) of Removal, to the IFA-19G board(CN502, 503), DR-614 board (CN9, CN10) and DCP-43 board (CN3). Connect the flexible card wire that isremoved in step (4) of Removal, to the DR-614 board(CN1) securely.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
(2) Attach the front assembly with the four screws (B3 x10).Standard tightening torque :80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)
(3) Tighten the CHB Stay and the DCP holder (F) with thescrew of one (PSW2 x 5).
(4) Close the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
(5) Reinstall the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
7. Routing the harnessesnBe sure that the flexible card wire connecting the BI-199board and the CN-2871 board does not touch harness B(gray) connecting the BI-199/200/201 board and the PA-340 board. Otherwise, the black level drops.
(1) Fix harness B to harness A with UL tape. Be sure tofix it at the root of harness A close to the filter unit.UL tape: UL tape equivalent product
(2) When installing the front assembly, pass harness B bythe right side of the threaded base as shown in thefigure.
Adjustment after Replacement
8. Tape Path Running Adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
9. VCO Frequency Adjustment(Refer to Section 9-2.)
CN10
CN1
CN503CN9
CN3
CN502
Front assembly
Flexible card wire
DR-614 board
DCP-43 board
IFA-19G board
B3 x 10
B3 x 10
PSW 2x5
DCP holder (F)
CHB stay
Wrap the UL tape.
CN3Flexible card wire
Harness A
DR-614 board
CN-2871 board
BI-199 board
BI-200 board
PA-340 board
Harnesses B
Harnesses B
Threaded base
6-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-2. Filter Disk Unit Replacement
nReplace the filter disk unit in the place such as clean roomthat is free from dust.
Removal
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the CCD unit. (Refer to 6-1-1.)4. Remove the two screws and disconnect the harness
from the connector (CN3) on the DR-614 board andtake the filter disk unit out gently.
Installation
1. Install the new filter disk unit by reversing step 4 ofremoval.nWhen installing the filter disk unit, be careful nottouch the surface of the filter disk unit with hand.
2. Install the CCD unit. (Refer to Section 6-1-1.)
Adjustment after Replacement
Adjustment after Replace of the Filter Disk Unit(Refer to Section 9-28.)
K3 x 6
Filter disk unit
CN3
DR-614 board
CCD unit
6-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-3. Replacement of the Circuit Boardsinside the CCD Unit
1. Remove the outside panel assembly. (Refer toSection 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly (Refer toSection 1-5.)
3. Remove the front assembly. (Refer to Section6-1.)
4. Removing the DR-614 board(1) Remove the connector (CN3) on the DR-614 board.(2) Remove soldering connected to the CCD ground sheet
(IN).(3) Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) and the board
spacer.(4) Remove the connector (CN1) on the CN-2871 board
and the connector (CN1) on the TG-256 board, andremove the DR-614 board.
5. Removing the TG-256 boardRemove the connector (CN104) on the PA-340 board andthe connector (CN2) on the TG-256 board, and remove theTG-256 board.
6. Removing the RP-131 boardRemove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), remove the connec-tor (CN1) on the PA-340 board and the connector (CN1)on the RP-131 board, and remove the RP-131 board.
7. Removing the PA-340 board(1) Remove the two solderings connected to the CCD
ground sheet (OUT).(2) Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), remove the PA-
340 board from the CHB assembly, and disconnect theharnesses from the connectors (CN101, CN102,CN103) on the PA-340 board.
6-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Removing the CN-2871 board(1) Remove the four screws (P2 x 4) and remove the CHB
assembly.(2) Remove the BI flexible protection sheet.(3) Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors
(CN2, CN3, CN4) on the CN-2871 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
(4) Remove the two solderings with the CCD ground sheet(IN).
(5) Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theCN-2871 board.
9. AttachingAttach the boards by reversing the step 1 to 8.
CN103
CN102
CN101CN1
CN2
CN3
CN2
CN3
CN1
CN4
CN1
CN1
4. DR-614 board
BI flexible protection sheet
CHB stay
8. CN-2871 board
CCD ground sheet (IN)
CCD ground sheet (OUT)
5. TG-256 board
6. RP-131 board
7. PA-340 board
Board spacers
Flexible card wire
Flexible card wires
CN104
PSW 2 x 5PSW 2 x 5
PSW 2 x 5
PSW 2 x 5
PSW 2 x 5P2 x 4
P2 x 4
Connected by soldering
Connected by soldering
Connected by soldering
Connected by soldering
Connected by soldering
PSW 2 x 5
PSW 2 x 5
6-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-4. Shutter, AUTO W/B BAL Switch andAUDIO Volume ControlsReplacement
1. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1.)
2. Loosen the two screws fixing the harness (lens) andremove the three screws from the front SW coverassembly.
3. While removing the groove of the SW-1031 boardfrom the front assembly, remove the front SW coverassembly.
4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SW-1031 board.
5. Remove the two screws and remove the SW-1031board from the front SW cover assembly.nThe VTR START switch is equipped with the cushion.Be careful not to lose the cushion.
6. Remove the soldering. Remove the shutter switch,AUTO W/B BAL switch and AUDIO volume con-trols.
Front SW cover assembly
Groove on the SW-1031 board
Front assembly
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Harness (lens)
SW-1031 board
Shutter switch
AUTO W/B BAL switch
Audio volumecontrol
VR (audio) knob
PTP2.6 x 8CN1
Shield plate (FR)
Front SW cover assembly
Cushion
VTR start switch
6-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Install the new shutter switch, AUTO W/B BALswitch and AUDIO volume controls by reversing thesteps of removal.nWhen installing the SW-1031 board, be careful thatthe hole of the shield plate (FR) is located on the rearof the SW-1031 board.
SW-1031 board
S2
Hole
Shield plate (FR)
6-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-5. MIC IN Connector Replacement
1. Remove the three precision screws. While removingthe MIC connector box assembly in the direction ofA, disconnect the harness from the connector (CN501)on the MA-103 board.
2. Remove the two precision screws and remove the MA-103 board from the MIC connector box in the directionof A.
3. Remove the soldering and remove the MIC IN connec-tor from the MA-103 board.
4. Install the new MIC IN connector by reversing thesteps of removal.nWhen installing the MIC connector box assembly tothe main unit, be careful not to damage the harness.
MA-103 board
CN501
A
MIC connector box assembly
Precision screwP2.6 x 5
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
MA-103 board
MIC connector box
Precision screws2.6 x 5
MIC IN connector
A
6-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-6. Rotary Encoder Replacement
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN204)on the SW-1038 board.
3. Remove the two screws and remove the SW-1038board.
4. Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip between therotary encoder knob and the inside panel assembly.Push the rotary encoder knob out and then remove thesleeve (ENC2).
5. Remove the ENC-61 board from the inside panelassembly, then remove the sleeve (ENC1) and theearth plate.
6. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe ENC-61 board.
7. Remove the soldering and remove the rotary encoderfrom the ENC-61 board.
PSW2 x 5 SW-1038 board
CN204
ENC-61 board
Rotary encoder
RE knobFlat head (_) screwdriver tip
Inside panel assembly
Sleeve (ENC1)
Sleeve (ENC2)
CN203
Earth plate
6-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Install the new rotary encoder by reversing the steps ofremoval.m. When installing the ENC-61 board to the inside
panel assembly, assemble the sleeve (ENC1) and theearth plate as shown in Fig. 1.
. Insert the protruded portion of the rotary encoderinto the square hole of the sleeve (ENC1) and at thesame time, align the protruded portion of the sleeve(ENC1) with the groove the of inside panel assem-bly.
ENC-61 board
Rotary encoder
Protruded portion
Protruded portion
Protruded portion
Protruded portion
Square hole
Earth plate
Square holeSquare hole
Groove
Sleeve (ENC1)
Sleeve (ENC1)
Earth plate
Earth plate
Fig.1
6-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-7. Connector Box Board Replacement
6-7-1. Removing the Connector BoxAssembly
1. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)
6-7-2. Removing the CNB-23 Board and AL-43 Board
1. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN401) on the CNB-23 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
2. Remove the insulating sheet.
3. Remove the three screws. While removing the CNB-23 board, disconnect the harnesses from the connectors(CN102, CN104, CN105).
CNB-23 board
CN104
CN102CN105
CN401
Connector box
PSW2 x 5
Flexible card wire
Insulating sheet
CNB-23 board
AL-43 board
CN403
CN402
PTP2.6 x 8
PTP2.6 x 8
IO-202 board CN105
4. Remove the AL-43 board from the connectors(CN402, CN403) that are connected to the CNB-23board.
6-7-3. Removing the IO-202 Board
1. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN105)on the IO-202 board.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the IO-202 boardin the direction of the arrow.
6-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-7-5. Removing the SW-1309 Board and theAXM-33 Board
1. Remove the two screws (M2 x 4), and remove theSW-1309 board and the SW bracket.
2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SW-1309 board.
3. Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theSW-1309 board from the SW bracket.
4. Remove the one screw (PSW2 x 5) and remove theCNB bracket.
5. Remove the six precision screws (P2.6 x 5), andremove the AXM-33 board in the direction of arrow B.nWhen removing the AXM-33 board, push down thePUSH levers of the two AUDIO IN connectorssimultaneously in the direction of arrow A, andremove the board in the direction of arrow B.
6-7-4. Removing the RM-201 Board
1. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe RM-201 board.
2. Remove the two precision screws, and remove theRM-201 board.
nWhen attaching the AXM-33 board to the connector box,push down the PUSH levers of the two AUDIO IN connec-tors simultaneously, and pass it through the hole of theconnector box.
PUSH lever
AXM-33 board
AXM-33 board
CN1
SW-1309 board,SW bracket
Connector box
AUDIO IN connector
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
M2x 4
Side view
CNB bracket
A
B
B
SW bracket
SW-1309 board
PUSH lever
TweezersAXM-33 board
Connector box
Hole
RM-201 board
CN1
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
6-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-7-6. Removing the DC IN Connector
1. Remove the two precision screws and remove the DCIN connector.
6-7-7. Removing the DC OUT/HD SDI OUTConnectors
1. Remove the cap BNC and DC out cap. Remove thethree precision screws and remove the DC OUT/HDSDI OUT connector assembly in the direction of thearrow.
2. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the BNC coaxialcable hold washer.
3. Remove the coaxial cable, nut, and BNC coaxial cablehold washer, and remove the HDSDI OUT connectorfrom the DC OUT bracket.
4. Remove the nut and washer. Remove the coaxialconnector converter from the OUT bracket.
DC IN connector
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
DC OUT/HD SDI OUT connector assembly
BNC cap
DC OUT cap
DC OUT connector
DC OUT bracket
HDSDI OUT connector
NutWasher
Nut
Coaxial cable hold washer
Coaxial cable
Coaxial cable hold washer
Coaxial cable
5. Attach the new boards and the connectors by reversingthe steps of removal.
6-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-8. DC-DC Converter Replacement
nThe DC-DC converter consists of the two circuit boardsthat are the RE-186 board and RE-187B board. Replacethem simultaneously.
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the screw and remove the RE retainer (2).3. Remove the RE-186 board and RE-187B board in the
direction of the arrow, from the connectors that areconnected to the MB-1096 board.
4. Remove the two circuit boards of the RE-186 boardand RE-187B board together in the direction of thearrow as shown.
RE-187B board
MB-1096 board
RE-186 board
PSW2 x 5
RE retainer (2)
RE-186 board
RE-187B board
MB-1096 board
6-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. Install the new RE-186 board and RE-187B board byreversing the steps of removal.m. When connecting the RE-187B board to the connec-
tor, confirm that the projection of the board issecurely inserted into the slot on the outside of theunit.
. When connecting the RE-186 board to the connec-tor, confirm that the top of the board is securelyinserted into the cut-out on the outside of the unit.
nWhen fixing the RE-187B board and RE-186 board withthe RE retainer (2), confirm the following points.1. Confirm that the portions A (two locations) of each
circuit board are pressed by the flat surface of the REretainer (2).
2. Confirm that the portions B (two locations) of eachcircuit board have entered into the holes of the REretainer (2).
3. Confirm that the connectors are securely inserted.
RE-187B board
RE-186 board Cut out Outside of the unit
RE-186 board
RE-187Bboard
Slot
Projection in the bottom
Corner at the top
IF PC board retainer
Outside of the unit
Protruded portion
RE retainer (2)
RE-187B board
RE-186 board
Hole
Hole
A
B
Flat surface
6-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-9. Fan Replacement
nThis unit has the two DC fans.
6-9-1. Replacing the Fan on the Inside PanelAssembly
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN206)on the FP-152 board.
3. Remove the four screws and remove the fan bracket.Then remove the D.C. fan.
4. Install the new D.C. fan by reversing the steps ofremoval.m. When installing the D.C. fan, plate the D.C. fan in
the direction as shown in Fig. 1.. When installing the fan bracket, plate the fan bracket
in the direction as shown in Fig. 2.
Fig.1 : Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the
direction of arrow A.
Fig.2 : Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the
direction of arrow B.
D.C. fan
Inside panel assembly
Fan bracket
Step small screws
FP-152 board(CN206)
B(See Fig.2)A
(See Fig.1)
SEPA
Fan bracket
Low
Frame
High
6-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-9-2. Replacing the Fan in the Unit
1. Open the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the DC-DC converter. (Refer to Section 6-8.)4. Remove the DCP-43 board. (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the DVP-41 board. (Refer to Section 1-7.)6. Remove the CCM-45G board. (Refer to Section 6-17.)7. Remove the PS-595 board. (Refer to Section 6-18.)8. Remove the IF-794G/RX-54G board. (Refer to Section
6-19.)9. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)10. Remove the one screw (precision P2 x 3) and remove
the FFC card.11 Disconnect the harnesses and flexible card wire from
the connectors (CN116, CN117, CN201) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of the flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
12. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the MB-1096 board.
13. Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5), and remove theD.C. fan and the rear rail bracket together as anassembled part from the two unit frame dowels.
14. Remove the D.C. fan harness from the clamp attachedto the rear rail bracket.
15. Remove the two precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5), andremove the D.C. fan from the rear rail bracket.
16. Install the new D.C. fan by reversing the steps ofremoval.nWhen installing the D.C. fan, place the D.C. fan in theorientation shown in the figure.
FFC guard
Flexible card wire
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
harnesses
Two dowels
D.C. fan,Rear rail bracket
D.C. fan
D.C. fan harnessesClamp
P1.4 x 3.5
A(See the above figure.)
Rear rail bracket
D.C. fan
Side withoutlabel
Direction of the D.C. fan when viewed from the direction of arrow A.
MB-1096 board
CN201
CN116
CN1CN2
CN117
Precision screwsP2 x 3
Coaxial cable
6-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-10. Camera SW Ornamental Plate (3)Replacement
nThe camera SW ornamental plate (3) is attached to theinside panel assembly with a both-sided adhesive tape.
1. Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip between thecamera SW ornamental plate (3) and the inside panelassembly. Remove the plate carefully starting with theedge.
2. Clean the surface (the shaded portion shown inillustration) from which the camera SW ornamentalplate (3) is peeled off.
3. Peel the protection sheet off the new camera SWornamental plate (3) and attach it to the inside panelassembly.
Camera SW ornamental plate (3)
Inside panel assembly
Flat head (_) screwdriver tip
Cleaning
6-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-11. 50P Fitting Bracket AssemblyReplacement
Removal1. Remove the three screws (P2 x 4) and remove the
spacer.2. Loosen the precision screw (with drop-safe) and
remove the connector cover assembly.
3. Remove the three screws (B3 x 8) and remove the Vmounted assembly.
4. Remove the five precision screws (P2.6 x 5). Whileremoving the 50P fitting bracket assembly, disconnectthe flexible card wires from the connectors (CN601,CN602) on the CI-32G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
Installation
5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors(CN601, CN602) on the CI-32G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
6. Align the position-setting hole of the new 50P fittingbracket assembly with the position-setting pin of theframe. Install it with the five precision screws (P2.6 x 5).Standard tightening torque :53 x 10_2 N.m (5.3 kgf.cm)
7. Align the position-setting hole of the V mountedassembly with the position-setting pin of the frame.Install it with the three screws (B3 x 8).Standard tightening torque :80 x 10_2 N.m (8 kgf.cm)
8. Install the connector cover assembly and spacer byreversing the steps of removal.
Connector cover assembly
Spacer
P2 x 4
Precision screw (with drop-safe)
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
V mounted assembly
Position-setting pins of the V mounted assembly
Position-setting hole
Position-setting holes
CI-32G board
B3 x 850P fitting bracket assembly
Position-setting pin of the 50P fitting bracket assembly
Flexible card wires
CN601
CN602
6-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-12. MS Lid Assembly Replacement
1. Open the SW door of the inside panel assembly in thedirection of the arrow and remove the two VR knobs(2).
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the screw and the FR flexible cable retainer.
4. Remove the three precision screws and remove theshield plate.
5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors(CN105 to CN107) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
6. Disengage the hinge from the two hooks and removethe inside panel assembly from the unit.
VR knobs (2)
SW door
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Shield plate
MB-1096 board
Hinge
Hinge
Flexible card wires
Inside panel assembly
CN105CN106
CN107
Hook
Hook
FR flexible cable retainer
6-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Disconnect the harness and the flexible card wire fromthe connectors (CN105 to CN107, CN201 to CN207,CN303) on the FP-152 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
8. Remove the eight screws and remove the FP-152board.
9. Release the lock by pressing the MS knob (open) asshown in the illustration on the front of the insidepanel assembly. Remove the MS lid assembly in thedirection of the arrow.
MS lid assembly
MS knob (open)
FP-152 board
FP-152 board
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
CN107
CN205
CN106CN105CN303
CN204
CN203
CN202
CN201CN207
CN206
PSW2 x 5
Flexible card wires
Flexible card wires
6-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10. Remove the two screws. While removing the MS lidassembly in the direction of the arrow, disconnect theflexible card wire from through the hole.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
11. When installing the new MS lid assembly into theinside panel assembly, insert the flexible card wire intothe hole first. Then, while pressing the protrudedportion of the MS lid assembly against the sponge onthe back of the MS knob (open), insert it into theinside panel assembly.
P1.7 x 2.5
MS lid assembly
Flexible card wire
Hole
MS lid assemblyFlexible card wire
Hole
Sponge
Inside panel assembly
Protruded portion
MS knob (open)
6-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
12. Install the new MS lid assembly by reversing the stepsof removal.
Note on installationWhen the FR flexible cable retainer is available, secure theflexible card wire with is as shown.
6-13. VF Connector Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1-1.)
4. Remove the handle assembly.(Refer to Section 6-22.)
5. Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) and remove theDCP holder (F).
6. Disconnect the harness from the coating lead pin.7. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN4) on
the DCP-43 board.8. Remove the two precision screws (P2.6 x 5) and
remove the VF connector.9. Open the claws of the sleeve ferrite clamp by pressing
them, that are attached to the harness, and remove thesleeve ferrite clamp.
Chassis sideInside panel assembly FP-152 board
FR flexiblecable retainer
Flexible card wires
Precision screwsP2 x 4
Shield plate
CN4
DCP-43 board
Coating lead pinSleeve ferrite clamp
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Direction when the VF connector is installed.
VF connector
PSW2 x 5
DCP holder (F)
Harness
Claw
10. Install the new VF connector by reversing the steps ofremoval.
6-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-14. POWER Switch Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1-1.)
4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN504)on the IFA-19G board.
5. Remove the nut and remove the POWER switch.
6. Install the new POWER switch by reversing the stepsof removal.nWhen the POWER switch is installed, direction of thePOWER switch must be set as shown in the illustra-tion.
CN504
IFA-19G board
POWER switch Nut
POWER switch
To the front panel
Top view
RED
GRAY
6-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-15. IFA-19G Board Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the front assembly.(Refer to Section 6-1-1.)
4. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from theconnectors (CN120, CN501, CN504) on the IFA-19Gboard.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
5. Remove the nylon rivet and remove the IFA-19Gboard.
6. When installing the new IFA-19G board to the frame,insert the protruded portion in the right to the half-round hole and insert the protruded portion in the leftinto the groove. Then install the IFA-19G boardbetween the upper and lower protruded portions.nUpon completion of the IFA-19G board replacement,remove EEPROM (IC202) from the former board andinstall it to the new board.
7. Install it by reversing the steps of removal.
CN120IFA-19G board
CN501
CN504
Nylon rivet
Flexible card wire
IFA-19G board
Upper protruded portion
Lower protruded portion
Half-round hole
Protruded portion in the right
Protruded portion in the left Groove
Frame
6-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-16. Battery Connector Assembly(DC-111 Board) Replacement
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the plug-in boards.(Refer to Section 1-7.)
3. Remove the connector box assembly.(Refer to Section 1-6.)
4. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN115)on the MB-1096 board.
5. Remove the four precision screws. While removing theshield finger (BATT) and battery connector assembly,pull the two harnesses out of the hole.nBe careful not to damage the harness as it is caught bythe frame.
6. Install the new battery connector assembly by revers-ing the steps of removal.Standard tightening torque :40 x 10_2 N.m (4 kgf.cm)
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Precision screwsP2.6 x 5
Battery connector assembly
Shield finger (BATT)
MB-1096 board
CN115
Hole
6-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-17. CCM-45G Board Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the CCM-45G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
3. Loosen the precision screw A and remove the protrud-ed portion of the IF retainer from the recessed portionof the frame.
4. Remove the precision screw B and remove the CCM-45G board.
5. Install the new CCM-45G board by reversing the stepsof removal.
nWhen install the IF PC board retainer to the RE-187Bboard, insert the cut-out portion of the IF PC board secure-ly into the RE-187B board.
Adjustment after Replacement
Antenna Tuning Frequency Adjustment(Refer to Section 10-4-2.)
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
CCM-45G board
CN1
CN2
Flexible card wires
IF PC board retainer
Projec-tion
Recessed portion of the frame.
A
B
PSW2 x 5
CCM-45G board
RE-187B boardIF PC board retainer
Cut out
6-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-18. PS-595 Board Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Remove the CCM-45G board.(Refer to Section 6-17.)
3. Remove the two precision screws. While removing thePS-595 board, disconnect the harness from the connec-tor (CN101, CN102).
4. Install the new PS-595 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.
PSW2 x 5
PS-595 board
CN101
CN102
6-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-19. IF-794G Board, HN-277G Boardand RX-54G Board Replacement
1. Remove the outside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-4.)
2. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
3. Remove the DC-DC converter.(Refer to Section 6-8.)
4. Remove the CI-32G board.(Refer to Section 6-11.)
5. Remove the CCM-45G board.(Refer to Section 6-17.)
6. Remove the PS-595 board.(Refer to Section 6-18.)
7. Remove the four precision screws fixing the IF-794Gboard and remove the connector connecting the IF-794G board with the HN-277G board.
IF-794G board
HN-277G board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 2.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 2.5
On the side of the inside panelassembly
6-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Remove the IF-794G board in the direction of thearrow.nThe flexible card wire is used in the IF-794G board.Life of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
9. Remove the connector connecting the MB-1096 boardwith the HN-277G board. Remove the HN-277G boardin the direction of the arrow.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
IF-794G board
Flexible card wires
HN-277G board
MB-1096 board
Flexible card wire
6-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN117) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
11. Remove the two precision screws. Remove the hole ofthe WRR guide from the pin and remove the WRRguide in the direction of the arrow.
Precision screwsP2 x 3
On the side of the outside panel assembly
Holes
Pins
WRR guide
CN117
WRR guide
MB-1096 board
Flexible card wire
RX-54G board
Connector retainer
Precision screwsP2 x 4.5
WRR guide
Flexible card wire
12. Remove the two precision screws and remove the RX-54G board.nBe careful not lose the connector retainer.
13. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector(CN117) on the RX-54G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
14. Install the new IF-794G board, HN-277G board andRX-54G board by reversing the steps of removal.
6-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-20. SS-92G Board Replacement
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the plug-in boards.(Refer to Section 1-7.)
3. Remove the harness clamp.4. Remove the five screws and remove the dust protec-
tion cover.5. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors
(CN201, CN202) on the SS-92G board.nLife of flexible card wires will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
6. Remove the screw and remove the SS PC boardretainer.
7. While loosening the connector (CN102), remove theSS-92G board that is connected to the MB-1096 board.
8. Install the new SS-92G board by reversing the steps ofremoval.nWhen attaching the improved type of the SS PC boardretainer, confirm that the SS PC board retainer ishoused in between the frame and the SS-92G board,and the SS-92G board is firmly fixed.
SS-92G board
MB-1096 board
CN201
CN202
CN102
SS PC board retainer
Flexible card wires
Harness clamp
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Dustprotection cover
SS-92G board
SS PC board retainer
Frame
6-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-21. LP-114 Board Replacement
1. Remove the precision screw (P2.6 x 5) and removethe rear cover assembly in the direction of the arrow.m. Be careful not to lose the washer.. The two drop protections are not fixed. Be careful
not to lose it.
2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN116)on the LP-114 board.
3. Remove the two precision screws (P1.4 x 3.5) andremove the LP shield plate and the LP-114 board.nBe careful not to lose the LP shield plate.
4. Install the new LP-114 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.
Precision screwP2.6 x 5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Washer
Rear cover assembly
LP shield plate
LP-114 board
CN116
Drop protection (SW) (washer)
Dropprotection (TALLY)
6-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-22. SW-1312 Board Replacement
1. Remove the LP-114 board.(Refer to Section 6-21.)
2. Rotate the lock lever in the direction of arrow A tounlock it.
3. Rotate the lock lever in the direction of arrow B tounlock it. Slide the VF slide assembly in the directionof the arrow C.
4. Remove the four screws and remove the handleassembly in the direction of arrow D.
5. Disconnect the harnesses from the connectors (CN1,CN21) on the SW-1312 board.
6. Remove the two precision screws (PSW2 x 5) andremove the SW-1312 board assembly in the directionof the arrow.nBe careful not to lose the drop protection (LIGHT).
7. Remove the precision screw (P1.4 x 3.5) and nut.Remove the SW-1312 board from the light switchholder.nBe careful not to lose the drop protection.
8. Install the new SW-1312 board by reversing the stepsof removal.
B3 x 8
B3 x 8
Handle assembly
Lock lever
Lock knob
VF slide assembly
A
C
B
D
SW-1312 board
SW-1312 board
Light switch holder
CN121
CN121
CN1
CN1
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5 PSW
2 x 5
Nut
Drop protection (LIGHT)
Drop protection
New Tape Old Tape
6-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-23. MB-1096 Board Replacement
1. Open the inside panel assembly.(Refer to Section 1-5.)
2. Remove the connector box. (Refer to Section 1-6.)3. Remove the plug-in boards. (Refer to Section 1-7.)4. Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 6-1.)5. Remove the DC-DC converter. (Refer to Section 6-8.)6. Remove the inside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 6-12.)7. Remove the HN-277G board. (Refer to Section 6-19.)8. Remove the SS-92G board. (Refer to Section 6-20.)9. Remove the LP-114 board. (Refer to Section 6-21.)10. Remove the handle assembly. (Refer to Section 6-22.)11. Remove the one screw (precision P2 x 3) and remove
the FFC card.12. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from the
connectors (CN116, CN117, CN201) on the MB-1096board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
13. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the connectors(CN1, CN2) on the MB-1096 board.
14. Remove the three screws and remove the rear railbracket.
15. Remove the two screws and remove the DCP holder(F).
16. Disconnect the flexible card wire from the PC boardholder (F).
17. Remove the two screws and remove the PC boardholder (F).
18. Disconnect the harness and flexible card wire from theconnectors (CN101, CN114, CN115, CN118 toCN121) on the MB-1096 board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
19. Disconnect the two harnesses from the four claws ofthe harness cover. Then remove the toothed smallscrew A and remove the harness cover.
20. Remove the three screws (PSW2 x 5) and remove theMB-1096 board.
21. Install the new MB-1096 board by reversing the stepsof removal.
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Flexible card wire
PC board holder (F)
DCP holder (F)
Rear rail bracket
Precision screwP2 x 3
FFC guard
MB-1096 board
CN201
CN116
CN1CN2
CN117Coaxial cable
Flexible card wire
Cover harness
Claws
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Flexible card wireA
MB-1096 board
MB-1096 board
CN121
CN119
CN120
CN101
CN118 CN115
CN114
harnesses
6-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-24. Mechanical Deck AssemblyBoards Replacement
6-24-1. MDR-13G Board Replacement
nFor replacement of the MDC-13G board, refer to “7-36.MDC-13G Board Replacement”.
6-24-2. MDR-14G Board Replacement
1. Open the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-5.)2. Remove the plug-in board. (Refer to Section 1-6.)3. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors
(CN3, CN4) on the MDR-14G board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantly short-ened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold theflexible card wire.
4. Remove the one precision screw (P1.4 x 4.5) and theone step screw (step screw 2), and remove the FGmagnet cover.
5. Remove the screws (two step screws and one precisionscrew P1.4 x 3.5).While disconnecting the connector from the drumassembly, remove the MDR-14G board.
6. Install the new MDR-14G board by reversing the stepsof removal.nWhen installing the new MDR-14G board, use aprecision screw for the position A.
Adjustment after Replacement
Drum Phase Adjustment (Refer to Section 10-5-4.)
A
Precision screwP1.4 x 4.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Step screws
Step screw 2
Connectors of drum assembly
Flexible card wires
FG magnet coverMDR-14G board
CN3CN4
6-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6-24-3. SE-613 Board Replacement
1. Remove the mechanical deck assembly. (Refer toSection 1-15-12.)nWhen the mechanical deck assembly is going to beremoved for maintenance, place a protection sheetunderneath the mechanical deck assembly beforehand.
2. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) onthe SE-613 board.
3. Remove the two precision screws and remove the SE-613 board.
4. Install the new SE-613 board by reversing the steps ofremoval.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
SE-613 board
CN1
Protection sheet
7-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 7Part Replacement of Mechanical Deck Assembly
7-1. General Information on Mechanical Part Replacement
nThe mechanical parts that are shown in this Section can be removed and replaced directly from themechanical deck assembly unless otherwise specified. The mechanical frame is omitted and not shown inthe illustrations in this Section
7-1-1. Index
No. Part name Section
1 Upper Drum Assembly 7-2
2 Drum Assembly 7-3
3 Brush assembly for Slip Ring 7-4
4 Slip Ring Assembly 7-5
5 AHC Roller Assembly for Video Head 7-6
6 Pinch Roller Assembly 7-7
7 S-tension Regulator Band Assembly 7-8
8 T-tension Regulator Band Assembly 7-9
9 Timing Belt 7-10
10 S/T Idler Assembly 7-11
11 CTL Head 7-12
12 FE Head 7-13
13 Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) 7-14
14 End Sensor Assembly 7-15
15 Full Top Sensor Assembly 7-16
16 S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide 7-17
17 (S) Soft Brake Assembly 7-18
18 T Soft Brake 7-19
No. Part name Section
19 Manual Eject Assembly 7-20
20 S-Tension Regulator Assembly 7-21
21 T-Tension Regulator Assembly 7-22
22 Cassette Stopper 7-23
23 Gear Block Assembly 7-24
24 S/T Reel Table Assembly 7-25
25 Reel Drive Gear Assembly 7-26
26 Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) 7-27
27 Top Sensor Assembly 7-28
28 Pinch Arm Assembly 7-29
29 Threading Arm Assembly 7-30
30 CUE/TC Head Assembly 7-31
31 S ldler Assembly 7-32
32 T S ldler Assembly 7-33
33 Cam Gear Assembly 7-34
34 Capstan Motor 7-37
Mechanical Deck Assembly 7-35
MDC-13G Board 7-36
41
2
3
5
67
8
9
0 0
![
!]
!,
!.
@/
@-@=
@[
@] @]
@\@;
@'
@,
!-
!=
!\!; !; !;
!'
@.
#/
#-
#=
#[
#]
7-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-1-2. Notes
1. Notes on tape cleanerwThe tape cleaner located at the input head block has a cleaning blade which is sharpand can cut your hands. Never touch the cleaning blade with bare hands, and becareful not to cut your hands when cleaning, replacing parts nearby and makingadjustments.
2. Cleaning the tools and fixturesBe sure to clean the surface of tools and fixtures before using them.. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Handle tools and fixtures carefully so as not to scratch them.Correct adjustments cannot be made with damaged tools and fixtures.
Cleaning blade
7-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-1-3. Threading-End State and Unthreading-End State
1. Threading-end stateThreading-end state means the mechanical state in which the S slider assembly andT slider assembly have moved to both sides of the drum so that they reached andstopped at the pins of the S plate assembly and the T plate assembly respectively.
(1) How to establish the threading-end state using a cassette tape(a) Insert a cassette tape into the cassette compartment.(b) Close the front lid.
(2) How to establish the threading-end state without using a cassette tape(a) Move the cassette compartment to its down position.
(If a cassette compartment is not installed, insert a piece of black paper intothe photo interrupter of the cassette compartment lock switch on the MDC-13G board to disable the photo interrupter.)
(b) Set the SLACK MUTE to ON on the adjustment mode menu A40 : PATHMODE SEL. (Refer to Section 11-3-7.)
(c) When the above state is established, press the CASSETTE IN switch forabout 1 second.
(3) How to establish the threading-end state manuallyRotate the manual eject assembly manually by hand. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)
S plate assembly
S slider assembly
Pin Pin
T plate assembly
T slider assembly
Photo interrupter (Cassette compartment lock switch)
CASSETTE IN switch
A piece of black paper
7-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Unthreading-end stateUnthreading-end state means the mechanical state in which the S slider assemblyand T slider assembly have moved from the S plate assembly and the T plateassembly toward the reel tables respectively, and have come to a complete stop.This is also called the STANDBY state.(1) How to establish the unthreading-end state
Press the EJECT button.(2) How to establish the unthreading-end state manually
Rotate the manual eject assembly manually by hand. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)nFor the procedure to establish the unthreading-end state with a cassette tapeinserted, refer to Section 1-11.
7-1-4. How To Eject a Cassette Tape Manually
The threading-end state and the unthreading-end state can be established by rotatingthe manual eject gear (A) or the worm wheel of the manual eject assembly by handeven when the main power is turned off.
m. Do not rotate the respective gears excessively more than required, otherwise the
parts of the unit may be damaged.. Use an Phillips screwdriver for size M3 to rotate the worm wheel.
Phillips screwdriver (for M3) : 7-700-749-04
nThe worm wheel is provided to allow the engineer to fix problems in case of tapeslack, etc.
Manual eject gear (A)
Worm wheel
7-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Threading-endThe mechanism can be driven in the threading mode manually until it reaches the threading-end state byrotating it counter-clockwise while pressing down the manual eject gear (A). Alternatively, rotate theworm wheel clockwise manually by using the Phillips screwdriver.
Stop rotating the mechanism manually when the intermittent gear stops rotating and both the S gearassembly and the T gear assembly have opened the spaces shown by the arrow in the illustration.nIf the mechanism is rotated further, the parts of the unit may be damaged.
Unthreading-endThe mechanism can be driven in the unthreading mode manually until it reaches the unthreading-end stateby rotating it clockwise while pressing down the manual eject gear (A). Alternatively, rotate the wormwheel clockwise manually by using the Phillips screwdriver.
When the cassette compartment has moved to the up state.When the cassette compartment is not installed.When the intermittent gear stops rotating and both the S slider assembly and T slider assembly havereached the specified positions as shown in the illustration.nIf the mechanism is rotated further, the parts of the unit may be damaged.
S slider assembly T slider assembly
T gear assembly
Intermittent gear (White gear visible through opening of the T rail)S gear assembly
Opens Opens
Intermittent gear (White gear visible through opening of the T rail)S slider assembly T slider assembly
7-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-1-5. About Oil and Grease
Be sure to use the specified oil and grease.If the different oil or grease used, major malfunction may cause due to the differenc-es in viscosity and ingredients.If the oil and grease used which mixed with dust, major malfunction may cause.Be sure to use the following oil and grease.
Oil: 7-661-018-18Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10Grease (SGL-801) : 7-651-000-11
. A drop of oil defines as follows: About the amount will adhere to the end of astick (2 mm in diameter) as shown in the figure.
. Apply grease to the surface of the part like a thin film.If grease applied spread from the specified areas, be sure to wipe using a gauze orsoft cloth.
. Apart from the specified areas never use the oil and grease.
2 mm
Oil
7-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-1-6. Screw Tightening Torque and Washer
1. About screwdriver and screw tightening torqueThis unit uses the screws of the two types.Be sure to use the specified tools when loosening and tightening.Be sure to use the torque screwdriver when tightening the screws, and tighten in thespecified torque reading.
Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-ATorque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-AHexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-ATorque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Tightening torqueFor M1.4 (+) screw : 10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)For M2 (+) screw : 20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)For hexagon screw : 30 x 10_2 N.m (3.0 kgf.cm)
nThis unit uses the small size screws. When removing or attaching, the screw mayfall in the unit. To prevent from the falling, it recommends that the bit of the screw-driver magnetizes.
2. About stop washerNever re-use the pre-used stop washers.When attaching the part, be sure to use the new stop washer.
Stop washer : 3-559-408-11
How to remove stop washer(a) Remove the stop washer using a pair of small nippers or tweezers.
m. Take care not to fall in the unit.. Take care not to touch the tool against the other parts (especially the drum).
How to install stop washerWhen attaching, it recommends to use the
following tool.Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
(a) Put the stop washer to the top of the stopwasher fastening tool.
(b) Put the top of the tool on the top of the shaftin an upright position.
(c) Press down the tool and attach the stopwasher to the shaft.
Stop washer
Stop washer
Stop washer fastening tool
7-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-2. Upper Drum Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving connector from brush assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the drum assemblyInstalling the drum assembly to drum install plateRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyRemoving the slip ring assemblyRemoving the upper drum assemblyCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the upper drum assemblyInstalling the upper drum eccentricity adjustment toolAdjusting Upper drum eccentricityRemoving the upper drum eccentricity adjustment toolInstalling the slip ring assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverRemoving the drum assembly from drum install plateCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the drum assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyConnecting the connector to brush assemblyCleaning the cleaning assembly and tape running surface
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentDrum phase adjustment
NoteIf rotary heads are worn out or broke, replace the entire upper drum assembly. Thehead chip cannot be replaced independently.
Basic Information
Apart from the periodic replacement time, the upper drum assembly needs to bereplaced in the following cases.. If a correct RF waveform cannot be obtained after the tracking adjustment.
7-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Preparations
Preparation on unit’s side1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end
state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel
assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
Preparation on tool’s sideRemove the two screws that are supplied with thedrum install plate. (Fig. 1)Install the drum install plate to the boss of theflatness check tool with the two screws removed.(Fig. 2)
nThe upper drum assembly can be replaced whenthe cassette compartment attaches to the unit.
Supplied screws(B2 x 8)
Supplied screws(B2 x 8)
Drum install plate
Drum install plate
Flatness check tool
Flatness check tool
Boss
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Hexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (3) : J-6001-820-A
. Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (2) : J-6001-830-A
. Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (6) : J-6325-530-A
. Flatness check tool : J-6325-360-A
. Drum install plate : J-6531-110-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Skewer
m(1) When attaching the upper drum assembly to
the flange, tighten the screws with two stepsof different torques as described below.. First, tighten the screws with 10 x 10_2
N.m (1 kgf.cm).. Second, tighten the screws with 25 x 10_2
N.m (2.5 kgf.cm) finally. To tighten thescrews to the above torque reading, attachthe hexagon bit to the torque screwdriverand set the torque to 9.8 x 10_2 N.m (1kgf.cm).
(2) Assemble the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tools as shown.
Removal
1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode :Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.
(1) Remove the precision screw and hold thespecified position of the cleaning assembly asshown in the illustration, and raise it upexceeding the top of the manual eject gear(A).
(2) Remove the AHC roller assembly of thecleaning assembly between the drum supportand main frame.nWhen removing the cleaning assembly, becareful not to touch the upper drum assemblyand drum assembly.
Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (3)
Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (2)
Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (6)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Drum support
Main frame
AHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Manual eject gear (A)
7-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Removing connector from brushassembly
Remove the connector from the brush assembly.
3. Removing the full top sensorassembly
Remove the precision screw. While removing theconnector on the MDC-13G board, remove thefull top sensor assembly.nWhen removing the full top sensor assembly, bevery careful not to touch the drum.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
MDC-13G board connector
Brush assembly (RP)
Full top sensor assembly
4. Removing the drum assemblynThe drum assembly is fixed by the two screws.The drum assembly is connected with the MDR-14G board on the rear of the mechanical deckwith connector. Due to these connections, do notput excessive force to the drum assembly evenafter the two screws are removed.
nWhen removing the drum assembly, be carefulnot to touch the CTL head, CUE head and nearbytape guides.
Remove the two screws. Hold the upper part ofthe brush support. While loosening the connectoron the MDR-14G board, remove the drumassembly.
Connectors on the MDR-14G board
Drum assembly
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
7-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. Installing the drum assembly to druminstall plate
Install the drum assembly to the boss of the druminstall plate with the screws that are removed inpreparation step.
Precision screwsP2 x 2
Brush cover
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Drum assembly
Boss Drum install plate
6. Removing the brush coverRemove the two precision screws and remove thebrush cover in the direction of the arrow.
7-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Removing the brush assembly(1) Among the two screws that are fixing the
brush base, remove the screw that is shown as1 by the illustration.
(2) Loosen the screw 2 and move the brushbase in the direction of the arrow.
(3) Remove the screw 2 and remove the brushassembly.
Brush assembly
Brush base
1PSW2 x 5
2PSW2 x 5
8. Removing the slip ring assembly(1) Remove the two screws fixing the slip ring
assembly.(2) While removing the connector on the UDR-
32 board, remove the slip ring assemblytogether.
UDR-32 board
Connector
B2 x 4
Slip ring assembly
7-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9. Removing the upper drum assembly(1) Remove the four hexagon cap screws secur-
ing the upper drum assembly.(2) Remove the upper drum assembly in the
direction of the arrow.nAfter the upper drum assembly is removed,be careful not to touch the upper edge of thelower drum.
Hexagon cap screws
Upper drum assembly
Edge of the lower drum
Installation
10. Cleaning the drum contact surface(1) Clean the following places using a cleaning
cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Flange of the lower drum assembly (Upper
drum mount surface). Tape running surface and rabbet guide of
the lower drum assembly. Mount surface on the rear of the new upper
drum assembly
(2) Wipe the 20 round patterns of the LDR-28board in the lower drum with dry cloth.nNever clean the round patterns with anythingmoistened with cleaning cloth.
LDR-28 board
Upper drum assembly (rear)
Mount surface (cleaning)
Lower drum assembly
Flange (cleaning)
Round patterns
Rabbet guide (cleaning) Tape running surface (cleaning)
7-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11. Installing the upper drum assembly(1) Hold the top of the new upper drum assembly
with hand. Align the phasing hole of theupper drum assembly with the phasing pin ofthe lower drum.
(2) Insert the phasing hole and the drum shafthole of the upper drum assembly into thephasing pin of the drum shaft of the lowerdrum very gently and carefully. Place theupper drum assembly on the flange surfacethe lower drum without any slant angle.nWhen installing the upper drum assembly, becareful not to touch the video head againstbrush support and other mechanism.
1
2
34
Hexagon cap screws
Hexagon cap screws
Lower drum assembly
Drum shaft hole
Upper drum assembly
Phasing pin
Phasing hole
Drum shaft
Flange surface
(3) Insert the four hexagon cap screws into themount holes that are removed when removingthe upper drum assembly with a pair oftweezers.
(4) Tighten the hexagon cap screws tentativelywith hexagon bit, one bolt after another in theorder as shown in the illustration so that theyare tightened with equal strength.
7-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
12. Installing the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tool
(1) Attach the upper drum eccentricity adjust-ment tool that is assembled at the beginningof this Section (see n of Tools), to theflatness check tool.
(2) Adjust the upper drum eccentricity adjust-ment tool so that the probe at the top of theupper drum eccentricity adjustment tool (6) ispositioned between the 2nd and the 3rdgrooves from the bottom of the outsidesurface on the upper drum assembly.nBe careful not to touch the measurementprobe against the video head.
Measurement probe
Measurement probe
3rd groove2nd groove
Upper drum assembly
Flatness check tool
Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool
13. Adjusting upper drum eccentricity(1) Slowly rotate the upper drum assembly
counter-clockwise. Check that the eccentrici-ty gauge reading meets the following specifi-cation of the gauge pointer deflectionthroughout the one full rotation of the upperdrum assembly.Specification : Within 3 um
If the specification does not meet, repeat thefollowing three steps of (a) to (c) and adjustuntil the specification meets.(a) Slowly rotate the upper drum assembly
counter-clockwise and check the maxi-mum and minimum values of the gaugepointer deflection.
(b) Then rotate the upper drum to theposition that gives the minimum deflec-tion of the gauge pointer reading.
(c) Press the point that is 180 degree oppo-site of the measurement probe, of theupper drum in the direction of the arrowso that the gauge pointer reading is halfway (1/2) between the maximum andminimum values of deflection.
nIf the gauge pointer reading does not moveeven when the upper drum is pressed byfinger, loosen the four hexagon cap screwsslightly that secure the upper drum.If the gauge pointer reading moves too easily whenpressed, tighten the hexagon cap screws a little.
7-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
(2) Insert the torque screwdriver that is set to 10x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm), in the four holes onthe board of the upper drum and tighten thefour hexagon cap screws one bolt afteranother in the order as shown.nWhen tightening the screws just after theeccentricity adjustment, the tighteningtorque value should be 10 x 10_2 N.m (1kgf.cm) .
(3) Set the torque screwdriver to 25 x 10_2 N.m(2.5 kgf.cm).
(4) Tighten the four hexagon cap screws in thesame order as in step 2 with the torquescrewdriver
(5) Re-check that the specification met.
1
23 4
Upper drum eccentricity adjustment tool
Upper drum assembly
B2 x 4Screws coated with screw lock
UDR-32 board
Connector
ConnectorSlip ring assembly
14. Removing the upper drum eccentricityadjustment tool
Remove the upper drum eccentricity adjustmenttool.
15. Installing the slip ring assembly(1) Place the connector of the slip ring assembly
in front of the connector on the UDR-32board of the upper drum assembly. Whileinstalling the slip ring assembly to the drumshaft, connect the connectors.
(2) While pressing the slip ring assembly to theupper drum, install the slip ring assemblytentatively with the two screws that arecoated with the locking compound with equaltorque. Then tighten the screws with torquescrewdriver.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kg.cm)
7-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
16. Installing the brush assembly(1) Install the new brush assembly tentatively to
the brush support with the screw as shown.(2) Move the brush base in the direction of the
arrow. Check that the brush touches againstthe slip ring correctly. Then tighten the otherscrew tentatively.
(3) Push the brush base further in the direction ofarrow A, and tighten the screws that aretentatively tightened in steps (1) and (2).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
(4) Check that the two brushes touch to each ofthe three grooves of the slip ring respectively.
nOnce the above steps (1) to (3) are completed, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure ofbrushes against the slip ring will be automaticallyadjusted.
P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with screw lock
Brush cover
Brush cover
Center
Slip ring shaft
17. Installing the brush cover(1) Adjust the brush cover so that the slip ring
shaft comes to the center of the top of thebrush cover and tighten the two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Coat the two precision screws with lockingcompound.
Fig.1 Fig.2
Brush
Brush assembly
Later, tighten this screw tentatively.
First, tighten this screw tentatively.
Brush base
Top view
Side view
Slip ring
Slip ring
Brush support
A
7-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
18. Removing the drum assembly fromdrum install plate
Remove the two screws and remove the drumassembly from the drum install plate.
19. Cleaning the drum contact surfaceClean the contact surface of the rear of the drumassembly and the contact surface of the framewith a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaningfluid.
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
Drum assembly
Drum install plate
Drum assembly (rear)
Cleaning Cleaning
CleaningCleaning
7-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
20. Installing the drum assembly(1) Hold the brush base with hands as shown in
illustration. Align the connector on thebottom of the drum assembly with theconnector on the MDR-14G board, and alignthe position-setting hole of the drum assem-bly with the position-setting pin of the frame.
PSW2 x 5
Fig.1 Fig.2
Skewers
Flanges
(2) Push down the flange with two skewerperpendicularly, connect the connector (Fig.1) and tighten the two screws. (Fig. 2)The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
nCheck that the brush cover and brush assem-bly are set in the right position.
Position-settingpins of frame
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Connectors on the drumassembly
Drum assembly
Connectors on the MDR-14G board
Flange base
7-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
21. Installing the full top sensor Assembly(1) Connect the connector of the full top sensor
assembly to the connector on the MDC-13Gboard.
(2) Press down the full top sensor in the directionof the arrow until top of the full top sensorassembly touches the lower drum surface andtighten the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Connector on the MDC-13G board
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Full top sensor assembly
Top
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Drum support
Main frameAHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Position-setting hole
Cam cleaning roller (white part)
Cleaning arm (B)
Position-setting pin
Manual eject gear (A)
22. Installing the cleaning assembly(1) Insert the AHC roller assembly at the top of
the cleaning assembly in between the mainframe and drum support.
(2) Place the cleaning assembly under themanual eject gear (A) and move it in thedirection of the arrow.
(3) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin and tighten the precisionscrew.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
7-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
nCheck that top of the cleaning arm (B) is posi-tioned on top of the cam cleaning roller (whitepart).
Cleaning arm (B)
Cleaning assembly
Cam cleaning roller (white part) Top
Operation Check
Rotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.
23. Connecting the connector to brushassembly
Connect the connector that is removed in step 2 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.
24. Cleaning the cleaning assembly andtape running surface
Clean the following places using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum
(Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower
drum(Refer to Section 2-1-3.)
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
7-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after Replacement
25. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
26. Video tracking adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
27. CTL head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
28. CTL head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
29. CUE/TC head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
30. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
31. Drum phase adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-4.)
7-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-3. Drum Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving connector from brush assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the drum assemblyCleaning the drum contact surfaceInstalling the new drum assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyConnecting the connector to brush assemblyCleaning the cleaning assembly and tape running surface
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentDrum phase adjustment
Note
If rotary heads are worn out or broke, replace the entire upper drum assembly. Thehead chip cannot be replaced independently.
Basic Information
Apart from the periodic replacement time, the upper drum assembly needs to bereplaced in the following cases.. If a correct RF waveform cannot be obtained after the tracking adjustment.
Preparations
Preparation on unit’s side1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe upper drum assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attachesto the unit.
7-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit : J-6325-380-A(for M2)
. Torque screwdriver bit : J-6325-110-A(for M1.4)
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Skewer
Removal
1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode:Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.
(1) Remove the precision screw and hold thespecified position of the cleaning assembly asshown in the illustration, and raise it upexceeding the top of the manual eject gear(A).
(2) Remove the AHC roller assembly of thecleaning assembly between the drum supportand main frame.nWhen removing the cleaning assembly, becareful not to touch the upper drum assemblyand drum assembly.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Drum support
Main frameAHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Manual eject gear (A)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Connector on the MDC-13G board
Connector on the brush assembly
Full top sensor assembly
2. Removing connector from brushassembly
Remove the connector from the brush assembly.
3. Removing the full top sensorassembly
Remove the precision screw. While removing theconnector on the MDC-13G board, remove thefull top sensor assembly.nWhen removing the full top sensor assembly, bevery careful not to touch the drum.
7-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Removing the drum assemblynThe drum assembly is fixed by the two screws.The drum assembly is connected with the MDR-14G board on the rear of the mechanical deckwith connector. Due to these connections, do notput excessive force to the drum assembly evenafter it is removed.
nWhen removing the drum assembly, be carefulnot to touch the CTL head, CUE head and nearbytape guides.
Remove the two screws. Hold the upper part ofthe brush support. While loosening the connectoron the MDR-14G board, remove the drumassembly.
Drum assembly (rear)
Cleaning
CleaningCleaning
Cleaning
Connectors onthe MDR-14G board
Drum assembly
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
5. Cleaning the drum contact surfaceClean the drum contact surface on the rear of thenew drum assembly using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.
7-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Installing the new drum assembly(1) Hold the brush base with hands as shown in
the illustration. Align the connector on thebottom of the drum assembly with theconnector on the MDR-14G board, and alignthe position-setting hole of the drum assem-bly with the position-setting pin of the frame.
Position-setting pins of frame
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Connectors on the drum assembly
Drum assembly
Connectors on the MDR-14G board
Flange base
Fig.1 Fig.2
PSW2 x 5Skewers
Flanges
(2) Push down the flange with two skewersperpendicularly, connect the connector (Fig.1) and tighten the two screws. (Fig. 2)The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
nCheck that the brush cover and brush assem-bly are set in the right position.
7-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Installing the full top sensor assembly(1) Connect the connector on the full top sensor
assembly to the connector on the MDC-13Gboard.
(2) Press down the full top sensor in the directionof the arrow until top of the full top sensorassembly touches the lower drum surface andtighten the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Connector on the MDC-13G board
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Full top sensor assembly
Top
Precision screw P1.4 x 3.5
Drum support
Main frameAHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Position-setting hole
Cam cleaning roller (white part)
Cleaning arm (B)
Position-setting pin
Manual eject gear (A)
8. Installing the cleaning assembly(1) Insert the AHC roller assembly at the top of
the cleaning assembly in between the mainframe and drum support.
(2) Place the cleaning assembly under themanual eject gear (A) and move it in thedirection of the arrow.
(3) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin and tighten the precisionscrew.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
7-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
nCheck that top of the cleaning arm (B) is posi-tioned on top of the cam cleaning roller (whitepart).
Cleaning arm (B)
Cleaning assembly
Cam cleaning roller (white part) Top
Operation Check
Rotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.
9. Connecting the connector to brushassembly
Connect the connector that is removed in step 2 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.
10. Cleaning the cleaning assembly andtape running surface
Clean the following places using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum
(Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower
drum (Refer to Section 2-1-3.)
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
7-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after Replacement
11. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
12. Video tracking adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
13. CTL head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
14. CTL head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
15. CUE/TC head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
16. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
17. Drum phase adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-4.)
7-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-4. Replacement of Brush Assembly for Slip Ring
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing connector from brush assemblyRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverConnecting the connector to brush assembly
Notes
. If brushes are worn out, replace the entire brush assembly.
. When the brush assembly installation is completed with the following steps, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure of brushes against the slip ring willbe automatically adjusted. No adjustment is required after replacement.
. Never attach cleaning fluid on the brush surface.
Preparations
Preparation on unit’s side1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe brush assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11
7-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing connector from brushassembly
Remove the connector from the brush assemblyboard.
2. Removing the brush coverRemove the two precision screws and remove thebrush cover in the direction of the arrow.
Connector of Brush assembly board
Precision screwsP2 x 2
Brush cover
2PSW2 x 5
1PSW2 x 5
Slip ring
Brush assembly
Brush base
3. Removing the brush assembly(1) Among the two screws that are fixing the
brush base, remove the screw that is shown as1 by the illustration.
(2) Loosen the screw 2 and move the brushbase in the direction of the arrow.
(3) Remove the screw 2 and remove the brushassembly.
7-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Installing the brush assembly(1) Install the new brush assembly tentatively to
the brush support with the screw as shown.(2) Move the brush base in the direction of the
arrow. Check that the brush touches againstthe slip ring correctly. Then tighten the otherscrew tentatively.
(3) Push the brush base further in the direction ofarrow A, and tighten the screws that aretentatively tightened in steps (1) and (2).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
(4) Check that the two brushes touch to each ofthe three grooves of the slip ring respectively.
nOnce the above steps (1) to (3) are completed, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure ofbrushes against the slip ring will be automaticallyadjusted.
5. Installing the brush cover(1) Adjust the brush cover so that the slip ring
shaft comes to the center of the top of thebrush cover and tighten the two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Coat the two precision screws with lockingcompound.
Fig.1 Fig.2
Brush
Brush assembly
Later, tighten this screw tentatively.
First, tighten this screw tentatively.
Brush base
Top view
Side view
Slip ring
Slip ring
Brush support
A
Brush coverCenter
Slip ring shaft
P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with locking compound
Brush cover
6. Connecting the connector to brushassembly
Connect the connector that is removed in step 1 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.nCheck that the brush assembly has moved out ofthe correct position.
7-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-5. Slip Ring Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing connector from brush assemblyRemoving the brush coverRemoving the brush assemblyRemoving the slip ring assemblyInstalling the slip ring assemblyInstalling the brush assemblyInstalling the brush coverConnecting the connector to brush assembly
Notes
. When the brush assembly installation is completed with the following steps, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure of brushes against the slip ring willbe automatically adjusted. No adjustment is required after replacement.
. Never attach cleaning fluid on the brush surface.
Preparations
Preparation on unit’s side1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe brush assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11
7-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing connector from brushassembly
Remove the connector from the brush assemblyboard.
2. Removing the brush coverRemove the two precision screws and remove thebrush cover in the direction of the arrow.
Connector of brush assembly
Precision screwsP2 x 2
Brush cover
2PSW2 x 5
1PSW2 x 5
Slip ring
Brush assembly
Brush base
3. Removing the brush assembly(1) Among the two screws that are fixing the
brush base, remove the screw that is shown as1 by the illustration.
(2) Loosen the screw 2 and move the brushbase in the direction of the arrow.
(3) Remove the screw 2 and remove the brushassembly.
7-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Removing the slip ring assembly(1) Remove the two screws fixing the slip ring
assembly.(2) While removing the connector on the UDR-
32 board, remove the slip ring assemblytogether.
UDR-32 board
Connector
B2 x 4
Slip ring assembly
B2 x 4Screws coated with locking compound
UDR-32 boardConnectors
Slip ring assembly
Installation
5. Installing the slip ring assemblynWhen the upper drum assembly is not going to bereplaced, remove the locking compound that hasadhered to the two screws that fix the upper drumslip ring assembly.
(1) Place the connector of the new slip ringassembly in front of the connector on theUDR-32 board of the upper drum assembly.While installing the slip ring assembly to thedrum shaft, connect the connectors.
(2) While pressing the slip ring assembly to theupper drum, install the slip ring assemblywith the two screws that are coated with thelocking compound with equal torque. Thentighten the screws with torque screwdriver.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
7-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Installing the brush assembly(1) Install the new brush assembly tentatively to
the brush support with the screw as shown.(2) Move the brush base in the direction of the
arrow. Check that the brush touches againstthe slip ring correctly. Then tighten the otherscrew tentatively.
(3) Push the brush base further in the direction ofarrow A, and tighten the screws that aretentatively tightened in steps (1) and (2).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
(4) Check that the two brushes touch to each ofthe three grooves of the slip ring respectively.
nOnce the above steps (1) to (3) are completed, theheight of the brushes and the contact pressure ofbrushes against the slip ring will be automaticallyadjusted.
Fig.1 Fig.2
Brush assembly
Later, tighten this screw tentatively.
First, tighten this screw tentatively.
Brush base
Top view
Side view
Brush
Slip ring
Slip ring
A
Brush support
Brush coverCenter
Slip ring shaft
Brush cover
P2 x 2Precision screwscoated with locking compound
7. Installing the brush cover(1) Adjust the brush cover so that the slip ring
shaft comes to the center of the top of thebrush cover and tighten the two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Coat the two precision screws with lockingcompound.
8. connecting the connector to brushassembly
Connect the connector that is removed in step 1 tothe connector on the brush assembly board.nCheck that the brush assembly has moved out ofthe correct position.
7-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-6. Replacement of AHC Roller Assembly for Video Head
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyReplacement of AHC roller assembly for video headInstalling the cleaning assemblyOperation check
Note
When replacing the cleaning assembly, be careful not to touch the video head.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nIn order to replace the AHC roller assembly, the new CR spacer is required.Prepare the new CR spacer (3-182-765-02) when replacing the AHC roller assem-bly.
nThe cleaning assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches tothe unit.
7-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the cleaning assemblySetting mode:Enter the unthreading-end state of the unit.
(1) Remove the precision screw and hold thespecified position of the cleaning assembly asshown in the illustration, and raise it upexceeding the top of the manual eject gear(A).
(2) Remove the AHC roller assembly of thecleaning assembly between the drum supportand main frame.nWhen removing the cleaning assembly, becareful not to touch the upper drum assemblyand drum assembly.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Manual eject gear (A)
Drum support
Main frame
AHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Arm
Flat head (_) screwdriver
AHC roller assembly
CR spacer
Narrow
Narrow
AHC roller assembly
CR spacer
Wide
Wide
Pins
2. Replacement of AHC roller assemblyfor video head
(1) Remove the AHC roller assembly and the CRspacer from the arm with flat head (_)screwdriver as shown.
(2) Assemble the new AHC roller assembly andthe new CR spacer as shown in illustration.nNever attach oil on the new AHC rollerassembly.
7-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
3. Installing the cleaning assembly(1) Insert the AHC roller assembly at the top of
the cleaning assembly in between the mainframe and drum support.
(2) Place the cleaning assembly under themanual eject gear (A) and move it in thedirection of the arrow.
(3) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin and tighten the precisionscrew.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Cleaning assembly
Cam cleaning roller (white part) Top
Cleaning arm (B)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Manual eject gear (A)
Drum support
Main frame
AHC roller assembly
Cleaning assembly
Position-setting hole
Cam cleaning roller (white part)
Cleaning arm (B)
Position-setting pin
nCheck that top of the cleaning arm (B) is posi-tioned on top of the cam cleaning roller (whitepart).
4. Operation checkRotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear)clockwise and counter-clockwise several turnsand check that the AHC roller assembly comesinto contact with drum and is then detached.Check that its height also changes at the sametime.
7-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-7. Pinch Roller Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the pinch roller assemblyCleaning the mount shaftInstalling the pinch roller assemblyCleaning the pinch roller assembly
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentCUE/TC head height check
Note
If pinch roller assembly is worn out, replace the pinch roller assembly assembly onlynot as an assembly.Be sure to wear a pair of gloves to for the replacement work.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nPinch roller assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
7-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the pinch roller assembly(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-
clockwise and remove it until the pinch rollerassembly comes out of the rib of the cassettestopper completely. Manual eject
gear (A)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Pinch roller assemblymount shaft (cleaning)
Pinch roller assembly
Rib of cassette stopper
(2) Loosen the precision screw in the center ofpinch roller assembly. Remove the pinchroller assembly by pulling it straight up.nWhen loosening the precision screw, do notpress it excessively with screwdriver. At thesame time, rotate the screwdriver whileholding the pinch roller assembly with hand.
(3) Remove the precision screw from pinch rollerassembly.
7-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the pinch roller assembly mount shaft using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.
3. Installing the pinch roller assemblyInstall the pinch roller assembly to the pinch roller assembly mount shaft. Tightenthe precision screw that is removed in step 1.The standard tightening torque value : 10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
nNever touch the pinch roller assembly surface with bare hands.
nTop and bottom of the pinch roller assembly are identical and cannot be identifiedeach other.
4. Cleaning the pinch roller assemblyClean the surface of the pinch roller assembly using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.Rotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise until the unit returns to the unthreading-end state.
Adjustments after Replacement
5. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
6. CUE/TC head height check (Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
7-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-8. S-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the S-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning S reel tableInstalling the S-tension regulator band assembly
Adjustments after replacementS tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD Back Tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Notes
If felt surface of the S-tension regulator band assembly becomes hardened, or wornout, replace the S-tension regulator band assembly as an entire assembly.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the tension regulator band assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing the tension regulatorband assembly.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly
(1) Remove the stop washer of the S-tensionregulator band assembly and remove it fromthe shaft of link (S) assembly.nWhen removing the stop washer, be carefulnot to apply an excessive force to the S-tension regulator band assembly.
(2) Move the S5 tape guide of the S-tensionregulator arm in the direction of the arrow,and remove the retainer shaft of the S-tensionregulator band assembly from the shaft of S-tension regulator arm.
(3) While moving the (S) soft brake assembly outwith finger, remove the S-tension regulatorband assembly.
Installation
2. Cleaning S reel tableClean the surface that contacts the tensionregulator band, of the S reel table using a cleaningcloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
3. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly
(1) Install the new S-tension regulator bandassembly with its felt-side facing inside, byreversing the steps of removal.m. When installing it, be careful not to bend
the S-tension regulator band assembly thatresults in damage.
. Do not touch the felt surface of the S-tension regulator band assembly hands.Also never attach oil on the felt surface.
. Check that the (S) soft brake assembly ispressing down the regulator band as shown.
(2) Attach the S-tension regulator band assemblyusing a new stop washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the S-tension regulatorband assembly.
Retainer shaft
Stop washer
Surface of felt
S-Tension regulator band assembly
Shaft of link (S) assembly
Shaft of S-tension regulator arm
S5 tape guide
(S) soft brake assembly
(S) soft brakeassembly
S reel table
S reel table
Band
Cleaning
7-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after Replacement
4. S tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)
5. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
6. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-47HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-9. T-Tension Regulator Band Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the T-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning the T reel tableInstalling the T-tension regulator band assembly
Adjustments after replacementT Tension regulator operating position adjustmentREV back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nWhen installing T-tension regulator band assembly, the two stop washers are used.Prepare the two new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-48 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly
(1) Remove the two stop washers.(2) While moving the T soft brake away from the
position with finger, remove the T-tensionregulator band assembly.
Installation2. Cleaning the T reel tableClean the surface that contacts the tensionregulator band, of the T reel table using a clean-ing cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
3. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly
(1) Hold the new T-tension regulator bandassembly with its felt-side facing inside, installthe new T-tension regulator band assembly tothe shaft of eject link assembly (B).
(2) While holding the shaft of eject link assembly(B) from its bottom with a screwdriver,install the new T-tension regulator bandassembly using new washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the T-tension regulatorband assembly.
(3) While pushing the T soft brake away from itsposition with finger, install the hook-2 to theshaft by passing underneath the T-tensionregulator arm.
(4) While pushing up the shaft of the T-tensionregulator arm from its bottom, install the T-tension regulator band assembly using a newstop washer.nWhen installing the stop washer, do not applyexcessive force to the T-tension regulatorband assembly.
m. When installing it, be careful not to bend the T-
tension regulator band assembly that results indamage.
. Do not touch the felt surface of the T-tensionregulator band assembly hands. Also neverattach oil on the felt surface.
. Check that the T soft brake is pressing downthe regulator band as shown.
T-Tension regulator band assembly
Cleaning
T reel table
Stop washer
T-tension regulator arm
Shaft of the T-tension regulator arm
T soft brakeHook-1
Hook-2
Felt surface
Shaft of eject link assembly (B)
T reel tableassembly
Band
T soft brake
7-49HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after replacement
4. T tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(Refer to Section 8-1-6.)
5. REV back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)
6. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-50 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-10. Timing Belt Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltCleaning the pulleyInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet cover
Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Open the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-5.)3. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)4. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)
nTiming belt can be replaced when the mechanical deck assembly attaches to the unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
7-51HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the FG magnet cover(1) Remove the precision screw (P1.4 x 4.5) and the step
screw 2, and then remove the FG magnet cover fromthe mechanical chassis.
2. Removing the timing belt(1) Remove the timing belt from the pulley assembly.(2) Remove the timing belt from pulleys of the capstan
motor and the reel drive gear assembly.
Pulley (capstan motor)
Pulley (reel drive gear assembly)
Pulley assembly
Timing belt
Cleaning
Cleaning
Timing belt
Pulley assembly
Pulley (capstan motor)
Pulley (reel drive gear assembly)
FG magnetcover
Precision screwP1.4 x 4.5
Stepscrew 2
Installation
3. Cleaning the pulleyClean the pulleys and the pulley assemblies of the capstanmotor and the reel drive gear assembly using a cleaningcloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
4. Installing the timing belt(1) Engage the timing belt on the pulleys of the capstan
motor and the reel drive gear assembly.(2) Engage the timing belt on the pulley assembly.
5. Installing the FG magnet cover(1) Install the FG magnet cover with the precision screw
(P1.4 x 4.5) and the step screw 2 to the mechanicalchassis.
(2) Confirm that the FG magnet cover has not come incontact with the capstan motor and the timing belt.
Adjustments after Replacement
6. Timing belt tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-5.)
7. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-52 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-11. S Idler Assembly Replacement and T Idler AssemblyReplacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the S or T idler assemblyCleaning and applying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the S or T idler assembly
Adjustment after replacementCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Note
The S idler assembly and the T idler assembly are the different parts, but the samereplacement procedure apply to both of them.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
nThe stop washer is used to fix the S and T idler assemblies.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing the S and T idler assem-blies.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Oil : 7-661-018-18
7-53HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the S or T idler assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the S or Tidler assembly.nDo not remove the poly-washers that are insertedunder the S or T idler assembly, from the mountshaft.There are cases that the poly-washers are re-moved together with the idler assembly when theidler assembly is removed. Do not lose the poly-washers.
Installation
2. Cleaning and applying oil to themount shaft
(1) Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.
(2) Apply a 1/4 drop of oil to the mount shaft.
3. Installing the S or T idler assembly(1) Hold the new S or T idler assembly with its
white side facing up, and insert it to themount shaft.
(2) Install the new stop washer.
Mount shafts (Apply oil after cleaning)
S idlerassembly Stop washer
Stop washer
Recessed portion
Recessedportion
T idlerassembly
Poly washer
Poly washers (Do not remove it)
White side face
White side face
Adjustment after Replacement
4. Capstan add-on recording Adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-54 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-12. CTL Head Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the FE/CTL head assemblyCTL Head replacementInstalling the FE/CTL head assemblyCleaning FE/CTL head assembly
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCTL head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustment
cThe tape cleaner that is attached to the FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch thecleaning blade with bare hands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during CTLhead replacement and adjustments.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe CTL head can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-55HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Remove the connector CN505 on the MDC-
13G board.(2) Remove the three precision screws and
remove the FE/CTL head assembly from theunit.
nBe careful not to touch the screwdriver againstthe video head, drum, erase head, tape guide andother parts.
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
CN505
MDC-13G board
FE/CTL head assembly
2. CTL head replacement(1) Remove soldering from the two wires that are
connected to the head.(2) Remove the two screws on the rear of the
CTL head and remove the CTL head.(3) Clean the contact surface and install the new
CTL head with two screws.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
(4) Connect the two wires to the printed wiringboard of the CTL head. (Refer to (1) of step 2of “Removal”.)nNever make mistake of colors and connec-tions of the wires when soldering them. Anymistake results in severe troubles of tapeinterchangeability.
PS2 x 5
Red Gray
CTL head
CTL headSoldering
7-56 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
3. Installing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Align the respective position-setting pins
with the reference holes of the FE/CTL headassembly with the mechanical deck assembly,and install the FE/CTL head assembly withthe three precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Connect the harness of the FE/CTL headassembly to the connector CN505 on theMDC-13G board.
4. Cleaning FE/CTL head assemblyClean the CTL head, FE head, tape cleaner andtape guide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
CN505
MDC-13G board
FE/CTL head assembly
Reference hole
Reference hole
Position-setting pin
Position-setting pin
Mechanical deck assembly
Adjustments after Replacement
5. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
6. Video tracking adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
7. CTL head height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
8. CTL head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
9. CUE/TC head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
7-57HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-13. FE Head Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the FE/CTL head assemblyFE head replacementInstalling the FE/CTL head assemblyCleaning FE/CTL head assembly
Adjustment after replacementTape run adjustment
cThe tape cleaner that is attached to the FE head has the cleaning blade.The cleaning blade has the sharp edge that can cut your hands. Never touch thecleaning blade with bare hands. Be careful also not to cut your hands during CTLhead replacement and adjustments.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe FE head can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-58 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) Remove the connector CN505 on the MDC-
13G board.(2) Remove the three precision screws and
remove the FE/CTL head assembly from theunit.
nBe careful not to touch the screwdriver againstthe video head, drum, erase head, tape guide andother parts.
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
CN505
FE/CTL headassembly
MDC-13G board
PS2 x 5
WhiteBlack
FE head
FE head
FE head
Soldering
Head CTL plate assembly
Cleaning
2. FE head replacement(1) Remove soldering from the two wires that are
connected to the FE head.(2) Remove the screw from the rear of the FE
head and remove the FE head.(3) Clean the contact surface. Push the new FE
head toward the Head CTL plate assembly asfor as it can go, and fix it with screw.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
(4) Solder the two wires to the printed wiringboards of the FE head. (Refer to (1) of step 2of “Removal”.)nNever make mistake of colors and connec-tions of the wires when soldering them.
7-59HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
3. Installing the FE/CTL head assembly(1) While aligning the position-setting pins of the
new full FE/CTL head assembly with thereference holes of the mechanical deckassembly respectively, install the FE/CTLhead assembly with three precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Connect the harness of the FE/CTL headassembly to the connector CN505 on theMDC-13G board.
4. Cleaning FE/CTL head assemblyClean the CTL head, FE head, tape cleaner andtape guide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
FE/CTL head assembly
CN505
MDC-13G board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Position-setting pin
Reference hole
Reference hole
Position-setting pin
Mechanical deck assembly
Adjustment after Replacement
5. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7-60 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-14. Holder Assembly Sensor (REC) Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the holder assembly sensor (REC)Installing the holder assembly sensor (REC)Operation check
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
Removal
1. Removing the holder assembly sensor(REC)
While holding down the two claws with a pair oftweezers, remove the holder assembly sensor(REC) by pulling it up.
Holder assembly sensor (REC)
Claw
Claw
7-61HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Installing the holder assembly sensor(REC)
Insert the bosses and claws of the new holderassembly sensor (REC) into four holes of theMDC-13G board and install the new holderassembly sensor (REC).
3. Operation checkCheck that the detection pin moves up and downsmoothly, and returns to the original position.
MDC-13G board
Holder assembly sensor (REC)
Claw
Claw
Boss
Boss
Holes
Holes
7-62 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-15. End Sensor Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the end sensor assemblyInstalling the end sensor assembly
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nEnd sensor assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to theunit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the end sensor assembly(1) Remove the precision screw fixing the end
sensor assembly.(2) While removing the connector CN509 on the
MDC-13G board, remove the end sensorassembly.
Installation
2. Installing the end sensor assembly(1) While aligning the two position-setting pins
on the bottom of the end sensor assemblywith the reference holes of the MD framerespectively, connect the end sensor assemblyconnector CN509 on the MDC-13G board.
(2) Install the new end sensor assembly with theprecision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
MDC-13G board(CN509)
End sensor assembly
Position-setting pins
Position-setting holes
7-63HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-16. Full Top Sensor Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assembly
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe full top sensor assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartmentattaches to the unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the full top sensorassembly
(1) Remove the precision screw that fixes the fulltop sensor assembly.
(2) While removing the connector CN512 on theMDC-13G board, remove the full top sensorassembly.
Installation
2. Installing the full top sensor assembly(1) While aligning the position-setting pin on the
bottom of the new full top sensor assemblywith the slot of the cassette stopper, connectthe connector to CN512 on the MDC-13Gboard.
(2) Push the full top sensor in the direction allowof A until top of the full top sensor holdercontacts the lower drum surface and installthe full top sensor with the precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
MDC-13G board (CN512)
A
TopFull top sensor assembly
Position-setting pin
Slot of the cassette stopper
7-64 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-17. S1, T1, T3 Tape Guide Replacement
Because the T4 tape guide is fixed, it cannot be replaced. Do not rotate the upperflange with excessive force.Replace the following tape guides in units of block.. S2 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-32.). S3/S4 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-30.). S5 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-21.). T2 tape guide (Refer to Section 7-33.). T5 Tape guide (Refer to Section 7-22.)
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the tape guideInstalling the tape guideCleaning of tape guide
Adjustment after Replacement
Tape guide height adjustment
m. The tape guides have the various shape, but the same replacement procedure apply
to all of them.. When two or more tape guides are going to be replaced, replace tape guides one
guide after another and perform adjustment at every replacement. Adjusting thetwo or more tape guides at the same time is extremely difficult.
. The set screws on top of each tape guide must be tightened with the followingtightening torque.The standard tightening torque value : 9 x 10_2 N.m (0.9 kgf.cm)
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
Tools
. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-65HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the tape guide(1) Install the screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment
on top of the upper flange as shown.Loosen the set screw on top of tape guide byrotating it by 1/4 turn counter-clockwise.
(2) Rotate the knob of the screwdriver (Tool) TGadjustment itself counter-clockwise andremove the upper flange.
(3) Remove the tape guide.At this point, the lower flange and thecompression (coil) (ST) spring can beremoved.
Compression (coil) (ST) spring
Lower flange*
Upper flange
Upper flange
Tape guide
Tape guide
Screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment
Set screw
Installation
2. Installing the tape guide(1) Install the compression (coil) (ST) spring to
the guide shaft.(2) Install the lower flange to the guide shaft.(3) Install the tape guide to the guide shaft.(4) Screw-in the upper flange to the guide shaft
as far as it can go.
nWhen the upper flange or the set screw is re-placed, establish the state that the set screwexceeds the top surface of the upper flange by 0.4mm for the S1 and T1 tape guides and 0.6 mm forthe T3 tape guide. Then perform step (4).
3. Cleaning of tape guideClean the tape guide using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
Adjustment after Replacement
4. Tape guide height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
* : The T3 tape guide of the pinch arm assembly doesn't have a lower flange.
7-66 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-18. (S) Soft Brake Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the (S) soft brake assembly replacementInstalling the (S) soft brake assembly replacement
Adjustment after replacementCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Note
If a tape hunts or slackens during the REW mode, replace the (S) soft brake assem-bly.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Removal
1. Removing the (S) soft brake assemblyreplacement
Remove the two precision screws and the (S) softbrake assembly.
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
(S) soft brake assembly
7-67HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Installing the (S) soft brake assembly(1) Align the position-setting pin and the posi-
tion-setting hole of the mechanical deckassembly, and fix it with two screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Mechanical deck assembly
(S) soft brake assembly
Position-setting hole
Position-setting pin
Band
S soft brake
S reel table assembly
nCheck that the S soft brake assembly arm ispressing the band as shown.
Adjustment after Replacement
3. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-68 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-19. T Soft Brake Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the T soft brakeInstalling the T soft brake
Adjustment after replacementCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Note
If a tape hunts or slackens during the REW mode, replace the T soft brake.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe T Soft Brake can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the T soft brake.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Brake spring
T soft brake
Stop washerTools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Removal
1. Removing the T soft brake(1) Remove the extension spring from the T soft
brake.(2) Remove the stop washer and remove the T
soft brake.
7-69HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Installing the T soft brake(1) Install the new T soft brake to the shaft of
mechanical deck assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.
(2) Install the extension spring that is removed instep 1 (1).
Mechanical deck assembly
T soft brake
Stop washer
Brake spring
Shaft
nCheck that the T soft brake is pressing down theband as shown.
T reel tableassembly
Band
T soft brake
Adjustment after Replacement
3. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-70 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-20. Manual Eject Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the manual eject assemblyInstalling the manual eject assemblyOperation check
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nManual eject assembly can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches tothe unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the manual eject assemblyRemove the precision screw and manual ejectassembly in the direction of the arrow.
nThe mount shaft contains the compression (coil)(ST) spring inside. Be careful not to lose it.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Compression (coil) (ST) spring
Manual eject assembly
7-71HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Installing the manual eject assemblyInstall the new compression (coil) (ST) springand the new manual eject assembly into themount shaft and fix it with precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
3. Operation check(1) Check that the manual eject gear (A) returns
when it is pressed once and then depressed.(2) Push in the manual eject gear (A) and then
rotate it. Check that it moves smoothly.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Mount shaft
Manual eject gear (A)
Manual eject assembly
Compression (coil) (ST) spring
7-72 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-21. S-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Moving the S3 tape guideRemoving the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the end sensor assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the end sensor assemblyCleaning of tape guide of S-tension regulator arm (S5)Moving the S3 tape guide
Adjustments after replacementS-Tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
Note
The S-tension regulator assembly has the built-in plate spring and requires periodicapplying grease.Refer to Section 2-2-4 for applying grease to the plate spring.
7-73HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Moving the S3 tape guideRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clock-wise until the S3 tape guide is located at thespecified position as shown.
2. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly
Remove the S-tension regulator band assemblythat is connected to the S-tension regulatorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)
3. Removing the end sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and the end sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-15.)
4. Removing the S-tension regulatorassembly
Remove the two precision screws and S-tensionregulator assembly in the direction of the arrow.nApply grease to the leaf spring of the S-tensionregulator assembly as required.(Refer to Section 2-2-4.)
Precision screwsM1.4 x 3.5
S-tension regulator assembly
S3 tape guide
7-74 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
5. Installing the S-tension regulatorassembly
Insert the bearing holder block of the new S-tension regulator assembly into the reference holeand fix it with the two precision screws in the orderstarting from 1 then 2.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N. m (1.0 kgf.cm)
6. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly
Install the S-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)
7. Installing the end sensor assemblyFix the end sensor assembly with screw.(Refer to Section 7-15.)
8. Cleaning of tape guide of S-tensionregulator arm (S5)
Clean the S-tension regulator arm (S5) tape guideusing a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.After cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaning cloth.
9. Moving the S3 tape guideRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise untilthe S3 tape guide returns to the original position.
Adjustments after Replacement
10. S-tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)
11. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
12. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
13. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
Precision screwsM1.4 x 3.5
Reference hole
S-tension regulator assemblyS5 tape guide (cleaning)
Bearing holder block
S3 tape guide
1
2
7-75HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-22. T-Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the T-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning of tape guide of T-tension regulator arm (T5)
Adjustments after replacementFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the T-tension regulator assembly.Prepare two new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
. Oil : 7-661-018-18
7-76 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly
(1) Remove the extension spring from the T-tension regulator arm.
(2) Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator band assembly passingunderneath the T-tension regulator arm.
2. Removing the T-tension regulatorassembly
(1) Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.m. The release plate comes off at the same
time. Be careful not to lose it.. Depending on the time of production at the
factory, there are sets that have no releaseplate.
T-tensionregulator assembly
Stop washer
Release plate
Stop washer
T-tension regulator arm
Extension spring
T-tension regulatorband assembly
T5 tape guide
7-77HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
3. Installing the T-tension regulatorassembly
(1) Clean the mount shaft.(2) Install the release plate in the new T-tension
regulator assembly as follows.1. Insert the protruded portion of the release
plate into the hole of the T-tensionregulator assembly. Then rotate it in thedirection of A.
2. Align the hole of the release plate with thetop of the shaft. (Fig.1)
(3) Install the new T-tension regulator assemblyto the mount shaft with the new stop washer.
(4) Install the extension spring that is removed instep 1 (1) of “Removal”.
4. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly
Engage the hook of the T-tension regulator bandassembly on the T-tension regulator arm shaftpassing underneath the T-tension regulator arm.
m. When installing the stop washer, do not apply
excessive force to the T-tension regulator arm.. When installing it, be careful not to bend the T-
tension regulator band assembly that results indamage.
. Do not touch the felt surface of the T-tensionregulator band assembly with hands. Alsonever attach oil on the felt surface.
5. Cleaning of tape guide of T-tensionregulator arm (T5)
Clean the T-tension regulator arm (T5) and tapeguide using a cleaning cloth moistened withcleaning fluid.
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
Adjustments after Replacement
6. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
7. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
8. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
A
Fig1
Extension spring
T5 tape guide (cleaning)T-tension regulator
assembly
T-tension regulator assembly
Stop washer
Mount shaft (coat it with oil after cleaning)
Stop washer
Hole of the T-tension regulator arm
Hook
Shaft of the T-tension regulator arm
Release plate
Hole
Hole
Protrusion of therelease plate
T-tension regulatorband assembly
Top of the shaft
7-78 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-23. Cassette Stopper Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the following procedure.)
Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assembly
Note
Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through the replacement work.
Preparations
1. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThe cassette stopper can be replaced when the cassette compartment attaches to the unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
7-79HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the full top sensorassembly
(Refer to Section 7-16.)
2. Removing the cassette stopper(1) Rotate the worm wheel with a phillips
screwdriver clockwise until the screw underthe threading arm assembly becomes visible.
Worm wheel
(2) Remove the two precision screws andremove the cassette stopper.
Threading arm assembly
Cassette stopper
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Installation
3. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
4. Installing the full top sensor assembly(Refer to Section 7-16.) Cassette stopper
Pinch roller assemblyPrecision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
7-80 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-24. Gear Block Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Checking phaseRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyOperation checkInstalling the cleaning assembly
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Checking phase(1) Check that the claw of the gear mount plate
of the gear block (B) is aligned with thetriangle mark of the cam gear assembly.(Fig. 1)
(2) Check that the entire horizontal bar mark ofgear (C) is visible from the gear mount plate(B) of the gear block assembly. (Fig. 2)
Fig 1
Fig 2Gear mount plate (B) of the gear block assembly
Cam gear assembly
Triangle mark of the cam gear assembly
Claw of the gear mount plate of the gear block (B)
Horizontal bar mark of Gear (C)
7-81HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assem-bly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
3. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws. Whileremoving the gear block assembly, disconnect theharness from the connector (CN501) on theMDC-13G board.
Precision screwP1.4 x 5
Precision screwP1.4 x 5
Precision screwP1.4 x 5
Connector (CN501) on the MDC-13G board
Gear block assembly
7-82 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Installing the gear block assembly (1) Check that the claw of the gear mount plate
of the gear block (B) is aligned with thetriangle mark of the cam gear assembly.(Fig. 1)
(2) Check that the hole of the press cam gear isaligned with the hole of the mechanical deckassembly. (Fig. 2)
(3) Check that the round mark of the gear(cleaning) is facing toward the manual ejectgear (A)’s mount shaft. (Fig. 3)
(4) Check that the entire horizontal bar mark ongear (C) is visible from the gear mount plate(B) of the new gear block assembly. (Fig. 4)
(5) Connect the connector of the gear blockassembly to the connector (CN501) on theMDC-13G board and fix the three precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
5. Operation checkRotate the manual eject gear (A) (red gear) andcheck that the threading and the unthreadingoperations are performed smoothly.
nDo not rotate the manual eject gear (A) more thannecessary. If rotated excessively, it results indamage of the unit.
6. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
Precision screwP1.4 x 5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 5
Connector
Connector on the MDC-13G board
Fig.4
Fig.3
Fig.2
Fig.1
Gear mount plate (B) of the gear block assembly
Horizontal bar mark of Gear (C)
Mount shaft of manual eject gear (A) Gear (cleaning)
Hole
Gear block assembly
Hole of press cam gear(This hole must be aligned with the corresponding hole in the mechanical deck assembly underneath.)
Cam gear assembly
Triangle mark of the cam gear assembly Claw of the gear
mount plate of the gear block (B)
Press cam gear
7-83HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-25. S Reel Table Replacement and T Reel Table Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the following procedure.)
Removing the S-tension regulator band assembly (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)Removing the T-tension regulator band assembly (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Removing the reel tableCleaning the reel shaftCleaning the reel tableInstalling the reel table (1)Reel table height adjustmentInstalling the reel table (2)Installing the S-tension regulator band assembly (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)Installing the T-tension regulator band assembly (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Operation check
Adjustments after replacementFWD back tension adjustment (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)REV back tension adjustment (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Tape run adjustmentS tension regulator operating position adjustment (Only when S reel table assembly is replaced)T tension regulator operating position adjustment (Only when T reel table assembly is replaced)Capstan add-on recording adjustment
Note
Height of reel tables becomes the reference of the entire tape running system. When reel table is replaced,be sure to perform the reel table height adjustment.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
m. The stop washer is used to fix the S and T reel tables respectively.
Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing them.. The three poly-washers are used under and above the S and T reel tables. The poly-washer (t 0.13 : 3-
303-961-01) that is attached above a reel table is reserved as the spare poly-washer in case of need afterreel table is replaced. Be careful not to lose or damage the poly-washers.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. Reel table height gauge : J-6324-150-A
. Cassette reference plate : J-7032-610-C
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-84 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly (Only when S reeltable assembly is replaced)
(Refer to Section 7-8.)
2. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly (Only when T reeltable assembly is replaced)
(Refer to Section 7-9.)
3. Removing the reel table(1) Remove the stop washer fixing the reel table
with a pair of tweezers.(2) Remove the poly-washer(s) (1 or 2 washers).(3) While pressing the soft brakes out of their
positions with finger, remove the reel table.
nThere are cases that the poly-washer that is placedunderneath the reel table comes with the reel tablewhen it is removed. In such case, be sure to returnall of the poly-washer to the reel table.
T soft brake
Stop washer
Stop washer
Poly-washer (1 or 2 washers)
Poly-washer (1 or 2 washers)
S reel table assembly
T reel table assembly
S soft brake
7-85HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Cleaning the reel shaftClean the reel shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.
5. Cleaning the reel table(1) Clean the surface of a reel table, that contacts
the tension regulator band assembly using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(2) Wipe the bottom surface of the reel table withdry cloth.
6. Installing the reel table (1)While pressing the soft brake arm out of theirposition with finger, install the reel table to thereel shaft.
7. Reel table height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-1.)
8. Installing the reel table (2)(1) Install the poly-washers that are not used in
step 7 (becoming extra poly-washers), to thereel shaft.
(2) Fix the reel table with the new stop washer.(3) Move the reel table up and down to confirm
that there is a play. If there is no play, removea single piece of poly-washer from the top ofthe reel table.
9. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly (Only when S reel tableassembly is replaced)
(Refer to Section 7-8.)
10. Installing the T-tension regulator bandassembly (Only when T reel tableassembly is replaced)
(Refer to Section 7-9.)
11. Operation checkWhile pressing the soft brake out of their positionwith finger, rotate the reel to confirm that the reeltable and the S/T idler assemblies rotate smooth-ly.
Stop washer
Stop washer
Poly-washer (1 or 2 washers)
Poly-washer (1 or 2 washers)
S reel table assembly
Bottom surface (wipe with dry cloth.)
Contact surface (cleaning). S reel table
assembly
Reel shaft (cleaning)
Reel shaft (cleaning)
S soft brake
Poly-washer
S idler assembly
T idler assemblyT soft brake
Poly-washer
T reel table assembly
7-86 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after replacement
12. FWD back tension adjustment(Only when S reel table assembly isreplaced.)(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
13. REV back tension adjustment(Only when T reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)
14. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
15. S tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(Only when S reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)
16. T tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(Only when T reel table assembly isreplaced)(Refer to sect 8-1-6.)
17. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-87HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-26. Reel Drive Gear Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the reel drive gear assemblyInstalling the reel drive gear assemblyInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet cover
Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)6. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)
nReel drive gear assembly replacement can be performed in the state that mechanicaldeck assembly is being installed in the unit.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
7-88 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the FG magnet cover(Refer to Section 7-10.)
2. Removing the timing belt(Refer to Section 7-10.)
3. Removing the reel drive gearassembly
Remove the three precision screws and removethe reel drive gear assembly.
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Reel drive gear assembly
7-89HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Installing the reel drive gear assemblyInstall the new reel drive gear assembly withthree precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
m. Check that the shaft of the one way base
assembly has entered the slot of the link (S)assembly.
. Check that the shaft of the gear base assemblyhas entered the groove of the mechanical deckassembly. Check also that the pin of themechanical deck assembly has entered the holeof the gear base assembly.
5. Installing the timing belt(Refer to Section 7-10.)
6. Installing the FG magnet cover(Refer to Section 7-10.)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Groove of mechanical deck assembly
Hole of gear base assembly
One way base assembly
Reel drive gear assembly
Shaft of gear base assembly
Pin of mechanicaldeck assembly
Hole of link (S) assembly
Adjustments after Replacement
7. Timing belt tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-5.)
8. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-90 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-27. Holder Assembly Sensor (ID) Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the holder assembly sensor (ID)Installing the holder assembly sensor (ID)Operation checkInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assembly
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nHolder assembly sensor (ID) can be replaced when the cassette compartmentattaches to the unit.
Removal
1. Removing the full top sensorassembly
(Refer to Section 7-16.)
2. Removing the cassette stopper(Refer to Section 7-23.)
3. Removing the holder assembly sensor(ID)
While pressing the claws at the three locationswith a pair of tweezers, remove the holderassembly sensor (ID) by pulling it up.
Claws
Claw
Holder assembly sensor (ID)
7-91HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Installing the holder assembly sensor(ID)
Install the new holder assembly sensor (ID) byinserting the bosses and claws into the five holeson the MDC-13G board.
5. Operation checkCheck that the detection pin moves up and downsmoothly and also returns to the original position.
6. Installing the cassette stopper(Refer to Section 7-23.)
7. Installing the full top sensor assembly(Refer to Section 7-16.)
MDC-13G board
Detection pins Detection pins
Boss
Boss
Claws
Claw
Holder assembly sensor (ID)
Holes
Holes
Hole
7-92 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-28. Top Sensor Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the top sensor assemblyInstalling the top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assembly
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the cleaning assembly(Refer to Section 7-6.)
2. Removing the gear block assembly(Refer to Section 7-24.)
3. Removing the top sensor assemblyRemove the two precision screws. While removing the connector (CN508) on theMDC-13G board, remove the top sensor assembly.
7-93HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
4. Installing the top sensor assembly(1) Align the position-setting pin of the new top
sensor assembly with the reference hole. Atthe same time while holding the lower flangeof the T4 tape guide as shown, connect theconnector of the top sensor to the connector(CN508) on the MDC-13G board.
(2) Install the top sensor with precision screw.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
5. Installing the gear block assembly(Refer to Section 7-24.)
6. Installing the cleaning assembly(Refer to Section 7-6.)
MDC-13G board (CN508)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Top sensor assembly
Position-setting pin
Connector
Top sensor holder
T4 tape guide
T4 tape guideReference hole
7-94 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-29. Pinch Arm Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the T-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyCleaning the mount shaftApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyCleaning the pinch roller assembly
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the pinch arm assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
. Oil : 7-661-018-18
7-95HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the T-tension regulatorassembly
Remove the stop washer and remove T-tensionregulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)
2. Removing the pinch arm assembly(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) using
phillips screwdriver counter-clockwise untilthe pinch roller assembly is completelydisengaged from the rib of the cassettestopper.
(2) Remove the stop washer with a pair oftweezers and remove the pinch arm assembly.
Stop washer
Pinch arm assembly
Rib of cassette stopper
7-96 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
3. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the mount shaft and bearing using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
4. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/2 drop of oil to the mount shaft andbearing respectively.
5. Installing the pinch arm assembly(1) While running the cam groove of the arm
assembly through the bearing, install themount shaft to the pinch arm assembly mountshaft.
(2) Fix the new stop washer.
6. Installing the T-tension regulatorassembly
Fix the T-tension regulator assembly with thenew stop washer. (Refer to Section 7-22.)
7. Cleaning the pinch roller assembly(1) After installing it, clean the pinch roller
assembly surface using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.
(2) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) usingphillips screwdriver clockwise until theunthreading-end state is established.
Bearing of F link assembly (Apply oil after cleaning)
Pinch roller assembly (Cleaning after installation)
Pinch arm assembly
Stop washer
Cam groove of arm assembly
Mount shaft (Apply oil after cleaning)
Adjustments after Replacement
8. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
9. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
7-97HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-30. Threading Arm Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the threading arm assemblyCleaning the mount shaftApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the threading arm assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyCleaning the guide of the S-tension regulator (S5)Cleaning the guide of the threading arm assembly (S4)
Adjustments after replacementS3 guide height adjustmentS-Tension regulator operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustment
Note
Height of S3 guides becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When threading arm assembly is replaced, be sure to adjust the S3 guide height.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the threading arm assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. S3 guide height check tool : J-6531-270-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Oil : 7-661-018-18
7-98 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly
(Refer to Section 7-8.)
2. Removing the S-tension regulatorassembly
(Refer to Section 7-21.)
3. Removing the threading arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove threadingarm assembly.
nBe careful not to lose the S arm spring because itjumps out when the threading arm is removed.
Installation
4. Cleaning the mount shaftClean the mount shaft and the bearing using acleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
5. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/2 drop of oil to the mount shaft andbearing respectively.
Threading arm assemblyStop washer
Drawer S rink assembly
S arm spring
S3 tapeguide
Roller
S cam assembly
7-99HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Installing the threading arm assembly(1) Pass the “A” portion of the S arm spring
through the hole of the new threading armassembly and hook it on the shaft. Then hookthe “B” portion of the S arm spring on thespring stay.
Shaft
Threading arm assembly
Spring stayHole
A portion
B portionS arm spring
S3 tapeguide(cleaning)
S4 tape guide(cleaning)
Stop washer
Threading arm assembly
B portion of S arm spring
Spring stay of mechanical deckassembly
Groove of the S cam assembly
Roller of S link drawer assembly (Apply oil after cleaning)
Mount shaft (Apply oil after cleaning)
(2) Pass the groove of the S cam assembly on thethreading arm assembly through the rollerand hook it on the mount shaft. Then removethe “B” portion of the S arm spring from thespring stay and re-hook it on the spring stayof the mechanical deck assembly.
(3) Fix the threading arm assembly with the newstop washer.
7-100 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Installing the S-tension regulator assembly(Refer to Section 7-21.)
8. Installing the S-tension regulator band assembly(Refer to Section 7-8.)
9. Cleaning the guide of the S-tension regulator arm (S5)(Refer to Section 7-21.)
10. Cleaning the threading arm assembly (S4)Clean the guides of the threading assembly (S3, S4) using a cleaning cloth moist-ened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.
Adjustments after Replacement
11. S3 guide height adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-7.)
12. S-Tension regulator operating position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)
13. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
14. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7-101HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-31. CUE/TC Head Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the guide plate assemblyRemoving the CUE/TC head assemblyCUE/TC head replacementInstalling the CUE/TC head assemblyInstalling the guide plate assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyCleaning the CUE/TC head assembly
Adjustments after replacementTape run adjustmentVideo tracking adjustmentCUE/TC head height adjustmentCTL head position adjustmentCUE/TC head position adjustmentAudio system alignment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Hexagon bit (across 1.5) : J-6326-120-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-102 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
nNever loosen nor tighten the screws that are notspecified below when replacing the CUE/TC headassembly. Doing to gives adverse effect on CUE/TC head azimuth and zenith that results inadverse effect on tape running condition andvideo tracking adjustment.
1. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assem-bly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
2. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
3. Removing the guide plate assemblyRemove the two precision screws and remove theguide plate assembly .
4. Removing the CUE/TC head assembly(1) Remove the connector (CN506) on the MDC-
13G board.(2) Remove the three precision screws and
remove the CUE/TC head assembly.
MDC-13G board (CN506)
Guide plateassembly
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5 Precision screw
P1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
CUE/TC head assembly
7-103HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. CUE/TC head replacement(1) Remove the screw (PSW2 x 4) and hexagon
socket bolt (2 x 4) and remove the CUE/TChead from shield case.
(2) Remove soldering of the four wires that areconnected to the CUE/TC head printedwiring board and connect the wires to thenew head by soldering.
nDo not make mistake of soldering positionsof the wires.
PSW2 x 4
Hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt
Shield case CUE/TC head
Soldering
Soldering
WHT
RED
GRY
BLK
PSW2 x 4
Head assembly
Hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt
Shield case
CUE/TC head
Harness
(3) Install the CUE/TC head in a shield case.Pass the harness through the head assemblyand fix it with the screw (PSW2 x 4) andhexagon socket bolt (2 x 4).The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm) (PSW2 x 4)30 x 10_2 N.m (3 kgf.cm)(hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt)
7-104 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
6. Installing the CUE/TC head assembly(1) Insert the position-setting pins of the TC head
assembly and the mechanical deck assemblyinto the reference holes and fix them with thethree precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Connect the connector of the CUE/TC headassembly to the connector (CN506) on theMDC-13G board.
(3) While removing extra play of harness in thedirection of the arrow, route the harnessalong with the groove of mechanical deckassembly.
7. Installing the guide plate assemblyInstall the guide plate assembly with the twoprecision screws.nWhen installing the guide plate assembly, becareful not to pinch the harness between the guideplate assembly and mechanical deck assembly.
8. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the threeprecision screws.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
9. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
10. Cleaning the CUE/TC head assemblyClean the CUE/TC head using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
CN506
CN506
MDC-13G board
Connector
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Harness
Guide plateassembly
Harness
Top view
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
CUE/TC head assembly
Reference hole
Referencehole
Position-setting pin
Position-setting pin
Groove of mechanical deck assembly
7-105HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after Replacement
11. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
12. Video tracking adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
13. CUE/TC head height adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
14. CTL head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
15. CUE/TC head position adjustment (Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
16. Audio system alignment(Refer to Section 10-2.)
7-106 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-32. S Slider Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the S-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the threading arm assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the S railRemoving the S slider assemblyInstalling the S slider assemblyInstalling the S railGear chain phase adjustmentInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the threading arm assemblyInstalling the S-tension regulator assembly replacementInstalling the S-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyOperation checkCleaning the heads and tape running surface
Adjustments after replacementS-Tension regulator arm operating position adjustmentFWD back tension adjustmentTape run adjustment
Note
Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through thereplacement work.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the S slider assembly.Prepare three new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
7-107HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Tools
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the full top sensorassembly
Remove the precision screw and full top sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
2. Removing the S-tension regulatorband assembly
Remove the stop washer and remove the S-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-8.)
3. Removing the S-tension regulatorassembly
Remove the two precision screws and S-tensionregulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-21.)
4. Removing the threading arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and the threading armassembly.(Refer to Section 7-30.)
5. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove thecassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
6. Removing the S rail(1) Remove the six precision screws and remove
the stop washer.(2) Raise the front of the S rail in the direction of
arrow A first, and then remove the S railtogether with the S slider assembly in thedirection of arrow B.nWhen removing the stop washer, do notapply excessive force to the S gear assembly.
A
B
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
S slider assemblyStop washer
S gear assembly
S rail
7-108 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Removing the S slider assemblySlide the S slider back toward rear and removethe S slider assembly from the S rail.
S slider assembly
S rail
S2 tape guide
Pin 1
Pin 2Pin 3
Pin 4Pin 5
S2 tape guide (plastic roller)
S1 tape guide
S slider assembly
S rail
Holder
Installation
8. Installing the S slider assemblyInsert the pins of the new S slider assembly intothe groove of the S rail in the order starting frompin 1 through pin 5 until the S slider assembly isinserted in the S rail holder.
m. Do not make mistake of the order of pins when
inserting the them. (The tape guide S2 must belocated before the tape guide S1.)
. Do not apply excessive force to the S sliderassembly and to the S rail.
. After they are installed, check that the pinheads have not come out off the S rail groove.
7-109HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9. Installing the S rail(1) Insert the claw on the rear of the S rail to the
bottom of the S plate assembly and lower thefront of the S rail in the direction of A.
(2) Insert the pin of the S gear assembly into thehole of the S link assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.nDo not apply excessive force to the S gearassembly when installing the stop washer.
(3) Install the S rail with the six precision screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
10. Gear chain phase adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-8.)
11. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with the precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
12. Installing the threading arm assemblyInstall the threading arm assembly with the newstop washer.(Refer to Section 7-30.)
13. Installing the S-tension regulatorassembly replacement
Install the S-tension regulator assembly with thetwo precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-21.)
14. Installing the S-tension regulator bandassembly
Install the S-tension regulator band assembly withthe new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-8.)
15. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with theprecision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
A
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
S slider assemblyStop washer
Hole of S link assembly
S rail
Pin of S gear assembly
S plate assembly
Claw of S rail
7-110 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
16. Operation checkRotate the worm wheel of the gear block assembly with a phillips screwdriver andcheck that the threading and unthreading operations are performed smoothly.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)
nDo not rotate the worm wheel more than necessary. Otherwise it may damage theunit.
17. Cleaning the heads and tape running surfaceClean the following places using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Upper drum tape running surface (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Lower drum rabbet guide and tape running surface (Refer to Section 2-1-3.). All tape guides and pinch roller assembly (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.
Adjustments after Replacement
18. S-tension regulator arm operating position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-2.)
19. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
20. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7-111HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-33. T Slider Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the T-Tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the T railRemoving the T slider assemblyInstalling the T slider assemblyInstalling the T railGear chain phase adjustmentInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyOperation checkCleaning the heads and tape running surface
Adjustment after replacementTape run adjustment
Note
Be careful not to touch the drum, tape guides and stationary heads all through thereplacement work.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the T slider assembly.Prepare a new stop washer (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
Tools
. Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth: 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid: 9-919-573-01
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
7-112 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the full top sensorassembly
Remove the precision screw and full top sensorassembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
2. Removing the T-tension regulatorassembly
Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)
3. Removing the pinch arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the pincharm assembly.(Refer to Section 7-29.)
4. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove thecassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
5. Removing the T rail(1) Remove the T soft brake.(2) Remove the six precision screws and remove
the washer.(3) Raise the front of the T rail in the direction of
arrow A first, and then remove the T railtogether with the T slider assembly in thedirection of arrow B.nWhen removing the stop washer, do notapply excessive force to the T gear assembly.
A
B
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
T gear assembly
T slider assembly
T rail
Brake spring of T soft brake
Stop washer
7-113HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Removing the T slider assemblySlide the T slider assembly in the direction of thearrow and remove it from the T rail.
T rail
T slider assembly
Tape guide T2
Installation
7. Installing the T slider assemblyInsert the pins of the new T slider assembly intothe groove of the T rail in the order starting frompin 1 through pin 4 until the T slider assembly isinserted in the T rail holder.m. Do not make mistake of the order when insert-
ing the pins. (The tape guide T2 must belocated before the tape guide T1.)
. Do not apply excessive force to the T sliderassembly and to the T rail.
. After they are installed, check that the pinheads have not come out off the rail groove.
Tape guide T1
Tape guide T2
Pin 4
Pin 3
T rail
Pin 1
Pin 2
T slider assembly
7-114 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Installing the T rail(1) Insert the claw on the rear of the T rail to the
bottom of the T plate assembly and lower thefront of the T rail in the direction of A.
(2) Insert the pin of the T gear assembly into thehole of the T link assembly and fix it with thenew stop washer.nDo not apply excessive force to the T gearassembly when installing the stop washer.
(3) Install the T rail with six screws.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(4) Install the spring of the T soft brake.
9. Gear chain phase adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-8.)
10. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precisionscrews.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
11. Installing the pinch arm assemblyInstall the pinch arm assembly with the new stopwasher.(Refer to Section 7-29.)
12. Installing the T-tension regulatorassembly
Install the T-tension regulator assembly with thenew stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-22.)
13. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly precisionscrew.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
A
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
T rail
Stop washer
T slider assembly
Hole of T link assembly
T plate assembly
Drum
Brake spring of T soft brake
Pin of T gear assembly
7-115HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
14. Operation checkRotate the worm wheel of the gear block assembly with a phillips screwdriver andcheck that the threading and unthreading operations are performed smoothly.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)nDo not rotate the worm wheel more than necessary. Otherwise it may damage theunit.
15. Cleaning the heads and tape running surfaceClean the following places using a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.. Video head (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Tape running surface of upper drum (Refer to Section 2-1-2.). Rabbet guide and tape running surface of lower drum
(Refer to Section 2-1-3.). All tape guides and pinch roller assembly. (Refer to Section 2-1-5.)
nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off the cleaned portions using a drycleaning cloth.
Adjustment after Replacement
16. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
7-116 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-34. Cam Gear Assembly Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the cassette stopperRemoving the drum assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator band assemblyRemoving the T-tension regulator assemblyRemoving the pinch arm assemblyRemoving the CUE/TC head assemblyRemoving the T sliderRemoving the F link assemblyRemoving the eject link assembly (A)Removing the eject link assembly (B)Removing the cam gear assemblyCleaning the mount shaft of the cam gear assemblyApplying oil to the mount shaftInstalling the cam gear assemblyCleaning the mount shaft of eject link assemblyApplying grease to the mount shaftApplying oil to the joint blockInstalling the eject link assembly (B)Installing the eject link assembly (A)Cleaning the mount shaft of the F link assemblyApplying oil to the rollerInstalling the F link assemblyInstalling the T slider assemblyInstalling the CUE/TC head assemblyInstalling the pinch arm assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator assemblyInstalling the T-tension regulator band assemblyInstalling the drum assemblyInstalling the cassette stopperInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assembly
7-117HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Check that the machine is in the unthreading-end state.
nThe stop washer is used to fix the cam gear assembly.Prepare the 10 new stop washers (3-559-408-11) when replacing it.
nCam gear assembly can be replaced when the mechanical deck assembly attaches tothe unit..
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
. Oil : 7-661-018-18
. Grease (SGL-601) : 7-651-000-10
. Grease (SGL-801) : 7-651-000-11
Removal
1. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and cleaning assembly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
2. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and remove the gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
3. Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the full top sensor assembly.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
4. Removing the cassette stopperRemove the two precision screws and remove the cassette stopper.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
5. Removing the drum assemblyRemove the two screws and remove the drum assembly.(Refer to Section 7-3.)
7-118 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Removing the T-tension regulatorband assembly
Remove the two stop washers and remove the T-tension regulator band assembly.(Refer to Section 7-9.)
7. Removing the T-tension regulatorassembly
Remove the stop washer and remove the T-tension regulator assembly.(Refer to Section 7-22.)
8. Removing the pinch arm assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the pincharm assembly.(Refer to Section 7-29.)
9. Removing the CUE/TC head assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe CUE/TC head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-31.)
10. Removing the T slider assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the sixprecision screws. Remove the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.)
11. Removing the F link assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the F linkassembly.
12. Removing the eject link assembly (A)Remove the stop washer and remove the ejectlink assembly (A).
13. Removing the eject link assembly (B)Remove the two stop washers and remove theeject link assembly (B).
14. Removing the cam gear assemblyRemove the stop washer and remove the cam gearassembly.
Cam gear assembly
Eject link assembly (A)
Eject link assembly (B)F link assembly
Stop washer
Stop washer
Stop washers
7-119HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
15. Cleaning the mount shaft of the camgear assembly
Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
16. Applying oil to the mount shaftApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the mount shaft of thecam gear assembly.
17. Installing the cam gear assembly(1) Rotate the ST gear arm pin of the T gear
assembly counter-clockwise until top of thearm is positioned just on top of the boss ofthe mechanical deck assembly.
(2) Remove the protection sheet from the newcam gear assembly.nBe careful not to attach the dust and scar onthe seal of the cam gear assembly.
(3) While aligning the triangle mark of the camgear assembly with the claw of the gear block(B) assembly, install it to the shaft of themechanical deck assembly.
(4) Install the new stop washer.(5) Apply grease to the area (shaded area )
of the cam gear assembly.
Mount shaft (cleaning)
Cam gear assembly
Stop washer
Apply grease here
Triangle mark of cam gear assembly
ST arm pin of T gear assembly
Claw of gear block (B) assembly
Boss of mechanical deck assembly
7-120 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
18. Cleaning the mount shaft of eject linkassembly
Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
19. Applying grease to the mount shaftApply grease to the mount shaft of the eject linkassembly.
20. Applying oil to the joint blockApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the joint block of theeject link assembly.
21. Installing the eject link assembly (B)(1) While inserting the brake link shaft of the
eject link assembly into the groove of thecam gear assembly as shown, install it to thetwo shafts of the mechanical deck assembly.
(2) Install the two new stop washers.
22. Installing the eject link assembly (A)(1) While aligning the link shaft of the eject link
assembly (A) with the shaft mechanical deckassembly, install it.
(2) Install the new stop washer.
23. Cleaning the mount shaft of the F linkassembly
Clean the mount shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluidoff the cleaned portions using a dry cleaningcloth.
24. Applying oil to the rollerApply a 1/4 drop of oil to the roller of the F linkassembly.
25. Installing the F link assembly(1) While inserting the link (A) shaft of the F
link assembly with the groove of the camgear assembly as shown, install it to theframe shaft.
(2) Install the new stop washer.
Joints of eject link assembly (B) (Apply oil)
Stop washer
Stop washer
Stop washer
Stop washer
Brake link shaft of F link assembly (B)
Roller of F link assembly (Apply oil)
Link shaft of eject link assembly (B)
Shaft of mechanical deck assembly
Eject link assembly (A)
Mount shaft (Apply grease after cleaning)
Mount shaft (Apply grease after cleaning)
Link (A) shaft of F link assembly
7-121HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
26. Installing the T slider assemblyInstall the T slider assembly with six precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-33.)
27. Installing the CUE/TC head assemblyInstall the CUE/TC head assembly with three precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-31.)
28. Installing the pinch arm assemblyInstall the pinch arm assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-29.)
29. Installing the T-tension regulator assemblyInstall the T-tension regulator assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-22.)
30. Installing the T-tension regulator band assemblyInstall the T-tension regulator band assembly with new stop washer.(Refer to Section 7-9.)
31. Installing the drum assemblyInstall the drum assembly with the two screws.(Refer to Section 7-3.)
32. Installing the cassette stopperInstall the cassette stopper with two precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-23.)
33. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
34. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precision screws.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
35. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
7-122 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-35. Mechanical Deck Assembly Removal/Installation
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the mechanical deck assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly
Adjustment after installationTape Run Adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)
nRemoval and installation of mechanical deck assembly can be performed in the statethat the cassette compartment is being installed in the unit.
Tools
. Hexagon bit (across 1.5 m) : J-6326-120-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Removal
1. Removing the mechanical deckassembly
(1) Remove the flexible card wire from theconnector (CN4) on the MDR-14G board andthe connector (CN101) on the MB-1096board.nLife of flexible card wire will be significantlyshortened if it is folded. Be very careful notto fold the flexible card wire.
MB-1096 board
MDR-14G board
CN101
CN4
Flexible card wires
7-123HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
(2) Remove the FL-283 printed wiring boardfrom the connector (CN1) on the CCM-45Gboard.nLife of the FL-283 printed wiring board issignificantly shortened if folded. Be carefulnot to fold it.
(3) While removing the cable retainer 2 from thenotch, remove the FL-283 printed wiringboard and remove it.
CCM-45G board
CN1
FL-283 printed wiring board
Cable retainer 2
Notch
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
(4) Loosen the five hexagon hole bolts (withdrop-safe) completely with hexagon bit.
7-124 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
(5) Hold the cassette stopper and cassettecompartment arm, and lift up the mechanicaldeck assembly gently.
nIf the cassette compartment assembly isalready removed, hold the cassette stopperand cassette guide pin to lift it up.
Mechanical deck assembly
Cassette guide pins
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
7-125HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
2. Installing the mechanical deckassembly
(1) Align the position-setting hole with theposition-setting pin of the mechanical deckassembly, and install it.
(2) Fix the five hexagon hole bolts (with drop-safe) using the hexagon bit.The standard tightening torque value :30 x 10_2 N.m (3 kgf.cm)
(3) Install it by reversing the steps of removal.
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolts (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Hexagon hole bolt (M2 x 8) (with drop safe)
Position-setting pin
Position-setting pin
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Mechanical deck assembly
Adjustment after Installation
3. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2.)
7-126 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the mechanical deck assemblyRemoving the full top sensor assemblyRemoving the end sensor assemblyRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the top sensor assemblyRemoving the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the MDR-14G boardRemoving the MDC-13G boardInstalling the MDC-13G boardInstalling the MDR-14G boardInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet coverInstalling the top sensor assemblyInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyInstalling the end sensor assemblyInstalling the full top sensor assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly
Adjustments after replacementAudio system alignmentServo system adjustment data initializationCapstan FG duty ratio adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustmentDrum phase adjustment
Preparations
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of “11-3-8. A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE”.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)4. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)5. Removing the plug-in boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)7. Removing the SS-92G board (Refer to Section 6-20.)
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
7-127HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the mechanical deck assemblyLoosen the five screws and remove the mechanical deckassembly. (Refer to Section 7-35.)
2. Removing the full top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the full top sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-16.)
3. Removing the end sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the end sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-15.)
4. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the cleaningassembly. (Refer to Section 7-6.)
5. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and remove the gearblock assembly. (Refer to Section 7-24.)
6. Removing the top sensor assemblyRemove the precision screw and remove the top sensorassembly. (Refer to Section 7-28.)
7. Removing the FG magnet coverRemove the precision screw and the step screw 2, andremove the FG magnet cover.
8. Removing the timing beltRemoving the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)
9. Removing the MDR-14G board(1) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN3) of the MDR-14G board.m. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly
shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to foldthe flexible card wire.
. When the removal work is performed with themechanical deck assembly removed, place a protec-tion sheet under the mechanical deck assembly.
(2) Remove the screws (two step screws, one precisionscrew). While removing the connector from the drumassembly, remove the MDR-14G board.
(3) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN504) ofthe MDC-13G board.
Stepscrews
Connectors on drum assembly
Protection sheet
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
CN3
MDR-14G board
Connectors on theMDC-13G board (CN504)
Precision screwP1.4 x 4.5
Step screws 2
FG magnetcover
7-128 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10. Removing the MDC-13G board(1) Disconnect the harness from the connectors
(CN505, CN506, CN507, CN510, CN511) onthe MDC-13G board.
MDC-13G board
Connector on the MDC-13G board (CN511)
Connector onthe MDC-13G board (CN506)
CN505
CN507
CN510
MDC-13G board
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwsP1.4 x 3.5 Precision screws
P1.4 x 3.5
Connector gard(2) Remove the connector gard.
nDepending on the time of production at thefactory, there are sets that have no connectorgard.
(3) Remove the 13 precision screws and removethe MDC-13G board.
7-129HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Installation
11. Installing the MDC-13G board(1) Align the position-setting hole of the new MDC-13G
board with the position-setting pin of the mechanicaldeck assembly and install it with the 13 precisionscrews.The standard tightening torque value :10 x 10_2 N.m (1 kgf.cm)
(2) Install the connector gard. (Fig.1)
12. Installing the MDR-14G boardInstall the MDR-14G board by reversing the steps ofremoval.
13. Installing the timing beltInstall the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)
14. Installing the FG magnet coverInstall the FG magnet cover by reversing the steps ofremoval.15. Installing the top sensor assemblyInstall the top sensor assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-28.)
16. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precisionscrews.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
17. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
18. Installing the end sensor assemblyInstall the end sensor with precision screw. (Refer to Section 7-15.)
19. Installing the full top sensor assemblyInstall the full top sensor assembly with precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-16.)
20. Installing the mechanical deck assemblyInstall the mechanical deck assembly with five screws.(Refer to Section 7-35.)
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Precision screwP1.4 x 3.5
Position-setting hole
Position-setting hole
Position-setting pin
MDC-13Gboard
MDC-13G board
MDC-13Gboard
Connectorgard
Connectorgard
Fig1Shaft of mechanical deck assembly
Shaft of mechanical deck assembly
Shaft of mechanical deck assembly
View from the side
7-130 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustments after Replacement
21. Audio system alignment(Refer to Section 10-2.)
22. Servo system adjustment datainitialization
(Refer to Section 10-5-1.)
23. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-2.)
24. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)
25. Drum phase adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-4.)
nPerform the adjustments in the order starting from“23. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment” and “24.Capstan add-on recording adjustment”.
7-131HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7-37. Capstan Motor Replacement
Replacement (Perform the part replacement according to the followingprocedure.)
Removing the mechanical deck assemblyRemoving the cleaning assemblyRemoving the gear block assemblyRemoving the FG magnet coverRemoving the timing beltRemoving the capstan motorInstalling the capstan motorCleaning the capstan motor shaftInstalling the timing beltInstalling the FG magnet coverInstalling the gear block assemblyInstalling the cleaning assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assemblyOperation check of the manual eject gear (A)
Adjustments after replacementTiming belt tension adjustmentCapstan FG duty ratio adjustmentTape run adjustmentCapstan add-on recording adjustment
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Open the inside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-5.)4. Removing the Plug-in Boards (Refer to Section 1-7.)5. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)6. Removing the SS-92G Board (Refer to Section 6-20.)
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-132 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Removal
1. Removing the mechanical deckassembly
Loosen the five screws and remove the mechani-cal deck assembly.(Refer to Section 7-35.)
2. Removing the cleaning assemblyRemove the screw and remove the cleaningassembly.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
3. Removing the gear block assemblyRemove the three precision screws and removethe gear block assembly.(Refer to Section 7-24.)
4. Removing the timing beltRemove the timing belt.(Refer to Section 7-10.)
5. Removing the FG magnet coverRemove the precision screw and step screw 2,and remove the FG magnet cover.(Refer to Section 7-36.)
6. Removing the capstan motor(1) Remove the connector from the capstan
printed wiring board.nWhen the capstan motor removal is per-formed with the mechanical deck assemblyremoved, place a protection sheet under themechanical deck assembly.
Protection sheet
Connector on the capstan motor board
7-133HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
(2) While holding the capstan motor with hands,remove the two screws from the mechanicaldeck assembly and remove the capstan motorfrom the mechanical deck assembly.nBe careful not to drop the capstan motor.
PS2 x 5
Capstan motor
Installation
7. Installing the capstan motor(1) Install the new capstan motor by reversing
the steps of removal.The standard tightening torque value :20 x 10_2 N.m (2 kgf.cm)
nWhen inserting the capstan motor through thehole of mechanical deck assembly, be carefulnot to touch the capstan motor shaft againstthe mechanical deck assembly. Doing soresults in damage to the capstan.
(2) Connect the connector to the capstan printedwiring board that is removed in step 6 (1).
nConnection of the connector is easy to forget.Be careful that the connector is re-connected.
7-134 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8. Cleaning the capstan motor shaftClean the capstan motor shaft using a cleaning clothmoistened with cleaning fluid.nAfter cleaning, be sure to wipe the cleaning fluid off thecleaned portions using a dry cleaning cloth.
9. Installing the timing beltInstall the timing belt. (Refer to Section 7-10.)
10. Installing the FG magnet coverInstall the FG magnet cover with the precision screw andthe step screw 2. (Refer to Section 7-36.)
11. Installing the gear block assemblyInstall the gear block assembly with the three precisionscrews. (Refer to Section 7-24.)
12. Installing the cleaning assemblyInstall the cleaning assembly with the precision screw.(Refer to Section 7-6.)
13. Installing the mechanical deck assemblyInstalling the mechanical deck assembly with five screws.(Refer to Section 7-25.)
14. Operation check of the manual eject gear (A)Rotate the manual eject gear (A) of the gear block assem-bly with a phillips screwdriver and check that the threadingand unthreading operations are performed smoothly. (Referto Section 7-1-4.)nDo not rotate the manual eject gear (A) more than neces-sary. Otherwise it may damage the unit.
Adjustments after Replacement
15. Timing belt tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-5.)
16. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-2.)
17. Tape run adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2.)
18. Capstan add-on recording adjustment(Refer to Section 10-5-3.)nPerform the above adjustments in the order starting from“16. Capstan FG duty ratio adjustment” , “17.Tape run adjustment ” and “18. Capstan add-on record-ing adjustment ”
Capstan motor shaft (cleaning)
8-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 8Mechanical Adjustment
8-1. Mechanical Adjustment
1. Automatic adjustment of mechanismThis unit has the automatic adjustment function as the mechanism adjustment menu in addition to theother adjustment menus and self-diagnosis.The respective menus of the automatic adjustment are shown on viewfinder and the video monitor whichis connected to the TEST OUT connector.The mechanical adjustment consists of the menu and submenus. It has the following structure.
Menu Submenu Adjustment item
A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A40 : PATH MODE SEL x1 REV SEARCH
REC HEAD PB
SLACK MUTE
CASSE ID MUTE
A41 : DRUM PHASE
8-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. Mechanism adjustment mode(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST)
This menu sets the items that are required for mechanism adjustment.
nImplement this menu item before starting the mechanism adjustment.
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (When a cassette tape is inserted, it is
ejected automatically.)3. Select A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST and press the rotary encoder.
The message “ MECHANISM ADJUST MENU” appears.
MECHANISM ADJUST MENU
A40:PATH MODE SEL A41:DRUM PHASE
A40 : PATH MODE SEL
Contents of this menu item are all saved even after the VTR mainte-nance menu is set to OFF. However, the contents return to OFF whenthe main power is turned off.1. Select “A40 : PATH MODE SEL” on the MECHANISM AD-
JUST MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to change its setting and press the rotary
encoder.
MECHANISM ADJUST MENUA40:PATH MODE SEL
X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : OFF SLACK MUTE : OFF CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF
3. The question mark (?) appears in the left of the ON/OFF.4. Rotate the rotary encoder to switch ON/OFF. Press the rotary
encoder to set ON/OFF.Setting contents of each menu itemx1 REV SEARCH OFF : _4 times speed (normal SEARCH speed)
ON : _1 time speedREC HEAD PB OFF : Normal playback
ON : Playback from the recording headSLACK MUTE OFF : When an error occurs, an error code
appears in the display window and theunit stops its operation.
ON : When an error occurs, an error code isnot displayed and the unit does notstop its operation.
CASSE. ID MUTE OFF : Only the HD cassette tape and acleaning cassette tape can be accepted.
ON : Any types of cassette tape can beaccepted.
A41 : DRUM PHASE
This menu item is exactly same as those of “11-3-4. SERVO SystemAdjustment Mode (A003 : DRUM PHASE)”. Refer to Section 11-3-4.
MECHANISM ADJUST MENUA40:PATH MODE SEL
X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : ?OFF SLACK MUTE : ON CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF
8-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-1. Reel Table Height Adjustment
Notes
. Height of reel tables becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When reel table is replaced, be sure to perform the reel table height adjustment.
. The three polywashers are used under and above the S and T reel tables.The polywasher that is attached above a reel table is reserved as the spare poly-washer in case of need after reel table is replaced.Be careful not to lose or damage the polywashers.Polywasher t0.25 (1 piece) : 3-303-961-11Polywasher t0.13 (2 pieces) : 3-303-961-01
. For the S and T reel table replacement, refer to Section 7-25.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
Tools
. Reel table height gauge : J-6324-150-A
. Cassette reference plate : J-7032-610-C
8-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Installing the cassette reference plateInstall the cassette reference plate to fit thecassette poles (2 poles).Rotate the adjustment screws of the cassettereference plate until the cassette reference platehas no play.
2. Reel table height checkMove the reel table height gauge at every about120 degrees on the flange surface of the S and Treel table assemblies. Check to see that thespecification is satisfied.If the specification is not satisfied, adjust it byperforming step 3.
3. Reel table height adjustmentAdjust the reel table height by increasing/decreas-ing the number of polywashers under the reeltable.. If height of reel table is lower than the specifi-
cations :Remove the polywasher above the reel tableand insert it under the reel table.
. If height of reel table is higher than the specifi-cations :Remove the polywasher under the reel tableand insert it above the reel table.
Confirm again that the specification is satisfied.
Adjustment screw
Cassette pole
Reel table height gauge
Cassette pole
T reel table assembly
S reel table assembly
Cassette reference plate
Specifications :
. Height difference between the blocking surface and passing surface : 0.2 mm
Cassette reference plate
Flange surface
S/T reel table assembly
Passing surface
Blocking surface
Reel table height gauge
The reel table height gauge must pass the passing surface and must be blocked by the blocking surface.
8-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-2. S Tension Regulator Operating Position Adjustment
Note
When the S-tension regulator band assembly and the S reel table assembly isreplaced, be sure to perform the S tension regulator operating position adjustment.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Check Procedure
1. Setting up the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise until the unit reaches thethreading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)
8-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. S Tension Regulator OperatingPosition Check
Confirm that the round hole of the S tensionregulator assembly can be viewed through thesquare hole of the end sensor holder.nCheck that the round hole is not damaged whenviewed from the top.
If the specification is not satisfied, performadjustment as described in step 3.
Adjustment Procedure
3. S tension regulator operating positionadjustment
(1) Loosen the adjustment screw of the link (S)assembly by 1/2 turn.
(2) Insert the 3 mm flat head screwdriver tip intothe adjustment hole of the link (S) assemblyand adjust position of the link (S) assemblyuntil the specification is satisfied.
(3) While maintaining the screwdriver setup asstep (2), tighten the adjustment screw of thelink (S) assembly.Standard tightening torque :20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)
(4) Confirm that the operating position of thetension regulator satisfies the specifications,following step (2).
4. Releasing the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise untilthe unit reaches the unthreading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-4.)
5. S5 tape guide height check(Refer to Section 8-2-1.)
6. FWD back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-3.)
Adjustment screw(PSW2 x 5)
Adjustment hole
S reel table assembly
Link (S) assembly
End sensor holder
Square hole of the end sensor holder
S-tension regulator assembly
Round hole of the S-tension regulator assembly
8-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-3. FWD Back Tension Adjustment
Note
When the S-tension regulator band assembly or the S reel table assembly is replaced,or when the S tension regulator operating position adjustment is performed, be sureto perform the FWD back tension adjustment.
Preparations
Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThis adjustment is recommended to be performed with the cassette compartmentinstalled.If the cassette compartment is not installed, the photo interrupter (cassette compart-ment lock switch) on the MDC-13G board must be covered by a piece of blackpaper to interrupt the incoming light to establish the cassette-lock state. At the sametime, place a weight on top of cassette tape so that the cassette tape will not be raisedout of position for this adjustment.For the cassette compartment lock switch, refer to “7-1-3. Threading-End State/Unthreading-End State”.
Tool
Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
8-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
Set the CASSE. ID MUTE to ON using the VTRmaintenance menu, A40 : PATH MODE SEL.(Refer to Section 11-3-7.)
1. Enter the REC state(1) Turn on the main power.(2) Insert the torque cassette (FWD back tension)
and press the REC button to enter the RECstate.
2. FWD back tension checkCheck that the supply side meter reading of thetorque cassette (FWD back tension) satisfies thespecifications.
Specification: 0.0044 ±0.0004 N.m (44 ±4g f.cm)
If the specification is not satisfied, check whetherthe value is larger or small than the specifiedvalue and then go to step 3.
Adjustment Procedure3. Enter the EJECT state(1) Press the REC button to release the REC
state.(2) Press the EJECT button and remove the
torque cassette (FWD back tension).
4. Back tension adjustmentChange the hook position to which the spring(lock lever) (coil) (ST) of the S-tension regulatorassembly is engaged.
Adjustment point. When the tension is larger than the specified
value, change the hook position in the directionof [_] to which the spring (lock lever) (coil)(ST) is engaged.
. When the tension is smaller than the specifiedvalue, change the hook position in the directionof [+] to which the spring (lock lever) (coil)(ST) is engaged.
5. FWD back tension check afteradjustment
Perform steps 1 and 2 of the check procedure andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.
MW
– 389
+ _
Torque Cassette (FWD back tension)
Cassette compartment assembly
Specifications : 0.0044 ±0.0004 N.m (44 ±4 gf.cm)
Supply side meter
Spring (lock lever) (coil) (ST)
S-tension regulator assembly
8-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-4. REV Back Tension Adjustment
Note
When the T-tension regulator band assembly or the T reel table assembly isreplaced, or when the T tension regulator operating position adjustment is per-formed, be sure to perform the REV back tension adjustment.
Preparations
Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
nThis adjustment is recommended to be performed with the cassette compartmentinstalled.If the cassette compartment is not installed, the photo interrupter (cassette compart-ment lock switch) on the MDC-13G board must be covered by a piece of blackpaper to interrupt the incoming light to establish the cassette-lock state. At the sametime, place a weight on top of cassette tape so that the cassette tape will not be raisedout of position for this adjustment.For the cassette compartment lock switch, refer to “7-1-3. Threading-End State/Unthreading-End State”.
Tool
Torque cassette (FWD back tension) : J-6323-890-A
8-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
Set the CASSE. ID MUTE to ON using the VTRmaintenance menu, A40 : PATH MODE SEL.(Refer to Section 11-3-7.)
1. Enter the REV xxxxx 1 state(1) Turn on the main power.(2) Insert the torque cassette (FWD back tension).(3) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the
VTR maintenance menu, A40 : PATHMODE SEL.
(4) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button.(Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)By doing this, the unit enters the REV x 1 state.
2. REV back tensionCheck that the take-up side meter reading of thetorque cassette (FWD back tension) satisfies thespecifications.
Specification: 0.0049 ±0.001 N.m (50 ±10 gf.cm)
The value should be kept within the specificationeven with a fluctuation.
If the specification is not satisfied, check whetherthe value is larger or small than the specifiedvalue and then go to step 3.
Adjustment Procedure
3. Enter the EJECT state(1) Press the STOP button to exit the REV x 1 state.(2) Press the EJECT button to remove the torque
cassette (FWD back tension).
4. Back tension adjustmentChange the hook position to which the adjustmentspring of the T-tension regulator assembly isengaged.
Adjustment point. When the tension is larger than the specified
value, change the hook position in the directionof [_] to which the spring is engaged.
. When the tension is smaller than the specifiedvalue, change the hook position in the directionof [+] to which the spring is engaged.
5. REV back tension check after theadjustment
Perform steps 1 and 2 of the check procedure andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.
MW
– 389
Cassette compartment assembly
Torque Cassette (FWD back tension)S idler assembly
T-tension regulator arm assemblyTake-up side meter
Specifications : 0.0049 ±0.001 N.m (50 ±10 gf.cm)
+
_
T-tension regulator assembly
T5 tape guide
8-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
Note
When the reel drive gear assembly, capstan motor or timing belt is replaced, be sureto adjust the belt tension.
Preparations
1. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Adjustment Procedure
1. Timing belt tension adjustmentnBelt tension is automatically determined bythe tension coil spring for belt tension 1 inthe illustration.
(1) Disengage the tension coil spring from thehook as shown 2 in the illustration.
(2) Loosen the adjustment screw of the reel drivegear assembly by 1/2 turn to 1 turn.
(3) Push the pulley base assembly in the direc-tion of the arrow. While holding the pulleybase assembly with hands so as not to beraised from the position that is returned bythe spring force, tighten the adjustmentscrew.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
1
Disengage the spring
Pulley base assembly
Pulley base assembly
Adjustment screw
Screwdriver
Adjustment screw
Tension coil spring for belt tension
Tension coil springfor S one-way
Tension coil spring for belt tension
2 Tension coil springfor S one-way
8-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-6. T Tension Regulator Operating Position Adjustment
Note
When the T-tension regulator band assembly and the T reel table assembly isreplaced, be sure to perform the T tension regulator operating position adjustment.
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)4. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.
Tools
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
Check Procedure
1. Setting up the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clock-wise until the unit reaches the threading-end state.(Refer to Section 7-1-3.)
2. T tension regulator operating positioncheck
Specifications :The round hole of the pinch arm assembly can beviewed through the square hole of the T tensionregulator assembly.
m. Check that the round hole is not damaged when
viewed from the top.. If the specification is not satisfied, perform
adjustment as described in step 3.
T-tension regulator assembly
T-Tension regulator band assembly
Pinch arm assembly
Round hole of pinch arm assembly
Eject link assembly (B)
Square hole of T-tension regulator assembly
T reel table assembly
Adjustment screw
Hole for adjustment
8-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
3. T tension regulator operating position adjustment(1) Loosen the adjustment screw of the eject link assembly (B) by 1/2 turn.(2) Insert the 3 mm flat head screwdriver tip into the adjustment hole of the eject
link assembly (B) and adjust position of the eject link assembly (B) until thespecification is satisfied.
(3) While maintaining the screwdriver setup as step (2), tighten the adjustmentscrew of the eject link assembly (B).Standard tightening torque : 20 x 10_2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)
(4) Confirm that the operating position of the T tension regulator satisfies thespecifications.
4. Releasing the modeRotate the manual eject gear (A) clockwise until the unit reaches the unthreading-end state. (Refer to Section 7-1-4.)
5. REV back tension adjustment(Refer to Section 8-1-4.)
8-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-1-7. S3 Guide Height Adjustment
Note
Height of S3 guides becomes the reference of the entire tape running system.When threading arm assembly is replaced, be sure to perform the S3 guide heightadjustment.
Preparations
1. Confirm that the unit is in the unthreading-end state.2. Turn off the main power.3. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)
Tools
. S3 guide height check tool : J-6325-380-A
. Tape guide adjustment screwdriver : J-6325-380-A
. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A
Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-12.)
2. Attach the S3 guide height check tool untilthe following two requirements are satisfied.. Align the cut-out of the S3 guide height
check tool with the installation positionsetting pin.
. Insert the S3 guide height check tool intothe installation reference hole.
nAdjust both of the “O” side and the “X” sideuntil the specifications are satisfied. Eitherside can be used for this adjustment bysetting it against the S3 guide.
S3 guide of the threadingarm assembly S3 guide height check tool
Cut-out
Installation position setting pin
Mechanical deck assemblyInstallation reference hole
Pin
8-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
3. Confirm, using a small dental mirror, that theclearance between the lower flange of the S3guide and the S3 guide height adjustment toolsatisfies the specification 1 and 2.
If the specification is not satisfied, turn the S3guide with the tape guide adjustment screw-driver to adjust height of the S3 guide.. To lower the height : Turn clockwise.. To raise the height : Turn counterclockwise.
cWhen checking height of the S3 guide, neverpush down or push up the S3 guide.
S3 guide
S3 guide
Clearance must exist here.
Clearance must exist here.
S3 guide height check tool
S3 guide height check tool
X mark
O mark
Lower flange
Lower flange
Specification 1 :The X mark side of the S3 guide height adjustment tool has clearance between the specified side of the S3 guide and the S3 guide height adjustment tool as shown in theillustration.
Specification 2 :The O mark side of the S3 guide height adjustment toolhas clearance between the lower flange top and the S3guide height adjustment tool as shown in the illustration.
5 mm to 10 mmManual eject gear (A)
Threading arm
Stopper shaft
4. Upon completion of adjustment, remove theS3 guide height check tool.
5. Turn the manual eject gear (A) with Philips(+) head screwdriver.
6. After moving the threading arm away fromthe stopper shaft by 5 to 10 mm, set themachine into the threading-end state again.
7. Perform steps 1 to 3 of the adjustmentprocedure and confirm that the specification1 and 2 is satisfied.nPerform the adjustment until the specificationis satisfied.
8. Reattach the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 7-12.)
9. Confirm height of the CTL head.(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
10. Confirm position of the CTL head.(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
11. Clean the FE/CTL head assembly.(Refer to Section 2-1-4.)
8-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Specification1 : The trapezoidal hole of the sub cam gear and the round hole of the S gear assembly must be facing each other.
Specification 2 :The round hole of the inter-mittent gear and the round holeof the T gear assembly must befacing each other.
Manual eject gear (A)
Cam gear assemblyT slider assembly
HoleHoleS slider assembly
Roundhole
Round hole
Round hole
Trapezoidalhole
Sub cam gear S gear assembly
T gear assembly
Intermittentgear
8-1-8. Gear Chain Phase Adjustment
NoteThe gear chain phase serves as the reference of the entire tape running system.When the S gear assembly and the T gear assembly are out of phase each other, thegear chain phase adjustment must be executed.
Preparations1. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)2. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 1-9.)
nWhen adjusting the T gear assembly, prepare the two new stop washers (3-559-408-11).
Tools
. Stop washer fastening tool : J-6323-530-A
. Parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) : 3-703-358-04
Check procedure
1. Establish the threading-end state ofmechanism as follows :
. When replacing the S slider assembly :(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-
clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has
entered the state that is described “3. SGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.
. When replacing the T slider assembly :(1) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-
clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has
entered the state that is described “4. TGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.
. When replacing the cam gear assembly :(1) Rotate the cam gear assembly clockwise.(2) Check to see that the mechanism has
entered the state that is described “4. TGear Assembly Adjustment, step (2)”.
2. Confirm the gear chain phase asfollows :
. When replacing the S slider assembly :Confirm that the specification 1 is satisfied.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, go to “3. Sgear assembly adjustment”.
. When replacing the T slider assembly or camgear assembly :Confirm that the specification 2 is satisfied.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, go to “4. Tgear assembly adjustment”.
8-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
S
T slider Manual eject gear (A)
T slider assemblyT gear assembly
Intermittent gear (the white gear that can be seenfrom the clearance of the T slider assembly)
Open
Adjustment Procedure
3. S gear assembly adjustment(1) Remove the S slider assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-32.)(2) Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-
clockwise until the mechanism reaches thethreading-end state.(Confirm that the intermittent gear stopsrotating and the specified portion of the Tgear assembly shown in the illustration, hasfully opened.)
cDo not rotate the intermittent gear after themechanism has reached the threading endstate. If the intermittent gear is kept rotating,it will damage the mechanical parts.
(3) To adjust coupling between the gears, slip offand on the S gear assembly until the roundhole of the S gear assembly faces rightopposite to the trapezoidal hole of the subcam gear. (Fig. 1)
(4) Insert the parallel pin (d = 2.0 mm) into thehole of the S gear assembly and the hole ofthe mechanism frame. (Fig. 2)Confirm that the round hole of the S gearassembly faces right opposite to thetrapezoidal hole of the sub cam gear. (Fig. 1)
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until the mechanismstate described in step (4) is obtained.
(6) When the adjustment is complete, remove theparallel pin and attach the S slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-32.)
S
S
S
S gearassembly
Sub cam gear
Fig. 1 Fig. 2Round hole
Trapezoidalhole
Sub cam gear S gearassembly
Parallel pin(d = 2.0 mm) S gear
assembly
Hole Hole of mechanismframe
8-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. T gear assembly adjustment
(1) Remove the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.).
(2) Enter the unit in the threading-end state.(Confirm that the intermittent gear stopsrotating and the specified portion of the Sgear assembly shown in the illustration, hasfully opened.). When replacing the T slider assembly :
Rotate the manual eject gear (A) counter-clockwise.
. When replacing the cam gear assembly :Rotate the cam gear assembly clockwise.
cDo not rotate the intermittent gear after themechanism has reached the threading endstate. If the intermittent gear is kept rotating,it will damage the mechanical parts.
T
Manual eject gear (A)
Cam gear assembly
S slider
Open
S gear assembly Intermittent gear
T
T
T
Parallel pin(d = 2.0 mm)Hole of the S slider
assembly
Hole of mechanismframe
Hole of theS gear assembly
Fig. 1
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
T gear assembly
T gear assembly
T gear assembly
Intermittent gear
Intermittentgear
Intermittentgear
Roundhole
Round hole
Stop washer
(3) Fix the gear chain by inserting the parallelpin (d = 2.0 mm) from the hole of the S sliderassembly through the S gear assembly’s holeuntil it is inserted into the hole of themechanism frame. (Fig. 1)
(4) Remove the cam gear. (Refer to Section 7-34.)(5) Remove the stop washer and remove the
intermittent gear. (Fig. 2)(6) To adjust coupling between the gears, slip off
and on the T gear assembly or intermittentgear until the round hole of the T gearassembly faces right opposite to the roundhole of the intermittent gear. (Fig. 3)
(7) Attach the intermittent gear using the newstop washer.
(8) Attach the cam gear assembly using the newstop washer. (Refer to Section 7-34.)
(9) When the adjustment is complete, remove theparallel pin and attach the T slider assembly.(Refer to Section 7-33.)
8-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2. Tape Run System Adjustment
Index
1. Identifying the parts of the tape run system
Drum entrance side (Unthreaded end state)
Drum exit side (Unthreaded end state)
CUE/TC head
S plate assemblyCapstan
Top sensor assembly
T4 tape guide
T3 tape guide(Pinch arm assembly)
T2 tape guide(T slider assembly)T1 tape guide
(T slider assembly)
Pinch roller assembly(Pinch arm assembly)
Rabbet guideVideo heads
T5 tape guide(T-tension regulator assembly)
Video heads
FE head block
T plate assembly
Cleaning blade
CTL head
Drum assembly
Rabbet guide
Full top sensor assembly
S1 tape guide(S slider assembly)
S4 tape guide(Threading arm assembly)
S3 tape guide(Threading arm assembly)
S5 tape guide(S-tension regulator assembly)
End sensor assembly
S2 tape guide(S slider assembly)
8-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
2. NotePerform the tape run system adjustment with the cassette compartment installed inthe unit.
3. Preparations(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF.(2) Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)(3) Clean the following portions with a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(Refer to Sections 2-1-2, 2-1-3, 2-1-4, 2-1-5, 7-7 and 7-37.). Video heads. Upper drum tape running surface. Lower drum tape running surface and rabbet guide. Stationary heads. Cleaning blade. All tape guides. Capstan shaft. Pinch roller. S/T plate assembly. S/T slider foot assembly
4. Tools/measuring equipment. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B. Too, 0.89 bit (for repairing) (45) : J-6322-420-3. Hexagon bit (for torque screwdriver) (S : 1.5) : J-6326-120-A. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-A. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A. Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01. Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01. Blank tape (BCT-40HD) : Commercially available on market. Oscilloscope. Locking compound : 7-432-114-11. Skewer. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11Contents of recording
*1 : Any segment of the alignment tape can be used for the CTL head height adjustment.
Timemin. : sec.
Video/AudioTrack
CTL Track
CTL 1 kHz, 0 VU
12 kHz, 0 VU
5.875 MHz(A ch only)
23.5 MHz(All ch)
A, C ch-5.875 MHz
A, C chFirst harf : 5.875 MHzLatter harf : 23.5 MHz
B, D chFirst harf : 23.5 MHzLatter harf : 5.875 MHz
. Video tracking adjustment
. CTL head position adjustment
. CUE head height adjustment
. CUE/TC head position adjustment
. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment
. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contact adjustment
CUE Track Used in*1
00 : 00
15 : 00
20 : 00
25 : 00
30 : 00
(CTL Pulse)
8-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-1. Tape Run Adjustment
Perform the tape run adjustment only when the S1 tape guide or T1 tape guide or T3tape guide or other tape guide assemblies (S2 to S5, T2, T5) is replaced or when theparts such as stationary head in the tape run system are replaced.
Notes
. When the tape run adjustment is going to be started after parts of the tape runsystem are replaced, check first the tape running status and adjust its system usinga cassette tape BCT-40HD that is commercially available, to confirm that a tapecan run safe without damage.If a tape that does not have the CTL signal recording yet, is used, there can be acase that the tension regulator oscillates in the PLAY mode that makes the checkand adjustment works difficult. In such a case, use of a tape that has the CTLsignal recording, is recommended.Upon completion of the above check and adjustment, start the tape run check andfine adjustment using the alignment tape HR2-1A.
. In the following check and adjustment procedures, all procedures are premised onthe use of the alignment tape unless specific cassette tape is specified.
. Tighten the set screw on top of tape guide with the following tightening torque. 10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
. When the adjustment is attempted, be sure to check the video tracking.Upon completion of the video tracking check, apply the locking compound on theset screw on top of tape guide.
Tools
. Screwdriver (Tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B
. Too, 0.89 bit (for repairing) (45) : J-6322-420-3
. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. Cassette tape BCT-40HD : Commercially available on market
. Locking compound (1401B) : 7-432-114-11
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Turn ON the main power.
8-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Drum entrance side
Check Procedure
1. PLAY state (tape top portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
2. F FWD state (tape top portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
3. REW state (tape top portion)Enter the REW state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
4. PLAY state (tape end portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
5. F FWD state (tape end portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
6. REW state (tape end portion)Enter the REW state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 1.If the specification 1 is not satisfied, perform step7 and higher.
Specifications 1 :(A) S5 tape guide
Tape curl must not exist either upper flange and lower flange.Clearance must exist between tape and the upper flange during REW.
(B) S3 tape guideAmount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
(C) S2 tape guideAmount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
(D) S1 tape guideTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.Amount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
(E) Drum rabbet guideTape runs while keeping contact with the drum rabbet guide andmust not have any curl.
Drum assembly
S1 tape guide
S2 tape guide
CTL headFE head assembly
S3 tape guide
S4 tape guide
S5 tape guideEnd sensor assembly
Full top sensor assembly
Drum rabbet guideVideo heads
Tape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.
S5 S4 S2 S1
FE head CTL head
Cleaning blade
Drum
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Tape Lower flange
Curl
Upper flange
Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
Drum rabbet guide. Allowance of tape curl
S3
Clearance must exist between tape and the upper flange during REW.
8-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
7. Tape guide height adjustment(1) Enter the PLAY state using the cassette tape
BCT-40HD.(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the guide with
the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment, rotatethe upper flange until the specification 1 issatisfied.
nDo not rotate the upper flange clockwiseduring the S3 tape guide height adjustment.Only when the threading arm is replaced,make adjustment for the S3 tape guide heightby rotating the upper flange clockwise in therange of 1/2 turn.
(3) Tighten the set screw on top of the guideStandard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
nThe tape guides S2, S3 and S5 do not havethe set screw on the tape guides. Adjustheight by rotating the upper flange.
8. Tape running recheck at drumentrance side
Perform steps 1 to 6 of the check procedure andrecheck that the specification is satisfied.If the specification is not still satisfied, performstep 7 again.
9. Tape running check at drum exit sideCheck the tape running at the drum exit side asdescribed on the following pages.
When the Adjustment is Performed
10. Video tracking check(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
11. CTL head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
12. CTL head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
13. CUE/TC head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
Tape guide adjustment screwdriver
Tape guide
Set screw
Upper flange
8-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Drum exit side
Check Procedure
1. PLAY state (tape top portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
2. F FWD state (tape top portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
3. REW state (tape top portion)Enter the REW state using a tape top (from 01 :00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
4. PLAY state (tape end portion)Enter the PLAY state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
5. F FWD state (tape end portion)Enter the F FWD state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
6. REW state (tape end portion)Enter the REW state using a tape end (from 35 :00 to 40 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD.Check to see that tape runs while satisfying thespecification 2.If the specification 2 is not satisfied, perform step8 and higher.
T2 tape guideT1 tape guide
CUE/TC head
Capstan
T3 tape guide
Pinch roller assembly
T4 tape guide
T5 tape guide
Drum assembly
Drum rabbet guides
Drum
Drum rabbet guides
Capstan
Pinch roller assemblyTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.
Upper flangeAmount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
Tape Lower flange
Curl
. Allowance of tape curl
T3 T4 T5T2T1
Gap must exist
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Specification 2 :(A) T3 tape guide
Gap must exist in between the upper flange and the tape guide.(B) T2 tape guide
Amount of tape curl at the upper or lower flange must be smaller thanthe allowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
(C) T1 tape guideTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.Amount of tape curl at the upper flange must be smaller than theallowable limits.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
(D) Drum rabbet guideTape runs while keeping contact with the drum rabbet guide and mustnot have any curl.
8-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Tape run check at around the capstanshaft
(1) Enter the REW state using a tape top (from01 : 00 to 05 : 00) of the cassette tape BCT-40HD for a few seconds then switch themode from REW to PLAY state.When the mode is switched, check to see thattape running must satisfy the specification 3in the followings.. Between the CUE/TC head and capstan
shaft.. Between the T3 tape guide and capstan
shaft.Repeat the above operation a few times andthen confirm that the specification 3 issatisfied. If the specification 3 is not satisfied,perform step 8 to 15.
(2) Repeat the following switching of modes afew times.. Enter the F FWD state and then switch the
mode to the PLAY state in a few seconds.. Enter the REV x 1 state and then switch
the mode to the PLAY state in a fewseconds.
At the time, check to see that tape runningmust satisfy the specification 3 in the follow-ings.. Between the CUE/TC head and capstan
shaft.. Between the T3 tape guide and capstan
shaft.If the specification 3 is not satisfied, performstep 8 to 15.
How to enter the REV xxxxx 1 mode(1) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the
VTR maintenance menu, A40 : PATHMODE SEL.
(2) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)
CUE/TC head
Capstan
T3 tape guide
Specification 3 :Tape must not be damaged such as wrinkled due to uneven pressure ofpinch roller against capstan. At the same time, there must not existuneven tension in vertical (up/down) direction of tape between the CUE/TC head and capstan shaft and between the capstan shaft and the T3tape guide.
8-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
8. Tape guide height adjustment
(1) Enter the PLAY state using the cassette tape BCT-40HD.
(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the T3 tape guide withthe screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment, rotate the flangefrom the position in which the upper flange contactswith the tape, by 1/4 turn in order to create a gapbetween the upper flange and the tape.
(3) Tighten the set screw on top of the guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)m. The tape guide T4 is fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Do not rotate the upper flange excessively.. The tape guides T2 and T5 do not have the set
screw on the tape guides. Adjust height by rotatingthe upper flange.
(4) Check the tape running between the capstan shaft andthe T3 tape guide. The tape running must satisfy thefollowing conditions.. Tape must run in the state that the tape surface runs
flat as if it is a flat surface of a mirror.. If tape speed deviation exists in the upper or lower
portion of a tape, the tape surface will be distorted.The tape speed deviation must not exist.
nIf the conditions mentioned in (4) are not satisfied, adjustthe T5 tape guide height.. When tape tension is small at the upper portion of a tape :
Move down the T5 tape guide.. When tape tension is small at the lower portion of a tape :
Raise the T5 tape guide.Note that the maximum allowable range of rotation of theT5 tape guide is within one rotation when adjusting the T5tape guide height.
9. Tape running recheck at drum exit sidePerform steps 1 to 7 of the check procedure and recheckthat the specification is satisfied.If the specification is not still satisfied, perform step 8again.
10. Tape running recheck at drum entrance SideRecheck the tape running at the drum entrance side asdescribed on the former pages.
When the Adjustment is Performed
11. Video tracking check(Refer to Section 8-2-2.)
12. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
13. CTL head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
14. CUE/TC head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
15. CUE/TC output level check(Refer to Section 8-2-9.)
Tape guide adjustment screwdriver
Tape guide
Set screw
Upper flange
8-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-2. Video Tracking Adjustment
Notes
. Tighten the set screw on top of tape guide with the following tightening torque.10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
. When the video tracking is adjusted, be sure to check the tape running state.Upon completion of the video tracking check, apply the locking compound on theset screw on top of tape guide.
Tools
. Screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment (45) : J-6322-420-B
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-A
. Mirror (small oval type) : J-6080-840-A
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel
assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Loosen the two screws (with drop-safe) and
remove the shoulder pad.4. Remove the two screws (P2 x 4) and remove
the plate.5. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board6. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : REC A PB/Circuit board on the HN-255 assemblyTRIG : SERVO CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly
7. Turn on the main power.8. Enter the REC-head playback mode using the
maintenance menu.9. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Video tracking check(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (side
B) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.
(2) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from00 : 00 to 15 : 00).
(3) Check that the amplitude at the entrance andexit does not become greater than the ampli-tude at the center of envelope waveformwhen the TRACKING control (RV401)/MDC-13G board is rotated.The amplitude at the entrance and exit becomegreater than the amplitude at the center, per-form the adjustment (drum entrance side ordrum exit side) of step 5 and higher.
(4) Rotate the TRACKING control so that the RFenvelope waveform is reduced to about 80%of the maximum amplitude. Check at this timethat the RF waveform meets the specifications1 to 3. If it does not meet the specifications of 1to 3, perform the adjustment (drum entranceside or drum exit side) of step 3 and higher.
2. Video tracking check at the respectivemodes
(1) Raise the unit from the horizontal posture tothe upright posture. Check that the RFwaveform meets the specifications 1 to 3when the unit is raised from the horizontalposture to the upright posture.If it does not meet the specifications of 1 to 3,perform the adjustment (drum entrance sideor drum exit side) of step 3 and higher.
(2) Return the unit to the horizontal posture.Repeat switching of mode from EJECT stateto the PLAY state a few times. Check that theRF waveform remains unchanged from theamplitude in the PLAY state and also it meetsthe specifications 1 to 3 when the unit isreturned from upright to horizontal posture. Ifthe RF waveform changes or it does not meetthe specifications of 1 to 3, perform theadjustment (drum entrance side or drum exitside) of step 3 and higher.
(3) Repeat the following switching of modes afew times and then confirm that the specifica-tions 1 to 3 are satisfied.. Mode is switched from the REV x 3 state
to the PLAY state.. Mode is switched from the STOP state to
the PLAY state.If the RF waveform changes or it does notmeet the specifications of 1 to 3, perform theadjustment (drum entrance side or drum exitside) of step 3 and higher.
How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button.(Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)
1234
MDC-13G board (side B)
S402
D404:Flashing
ON
S40
3
RV401
A
B
RF max 100%
RF max 100%
Off the track to 80 %.
Off the track to 80 %.
Specification 1 :Amplitude fluctuation of the entire waveform must be as follows when the maximum amplitude of the RF waveform is taken as 100%.A < 20% (RF max = 100%)When replacing the drum assembly of the main unitA < 30% (RF max = 100%)When replacing the upper drum assembly
Specification 2 :Amplitude fluctuation of each portion of the RF waveform must be 10% or less when the maximum amplitude of the RF waveform is taken as 100%.B < 10% (RF max = 100%)
Specification 3 :Tape must run while keeping contact with the upper flange of the S1 and T1 tape guides.Amount of tape curl must be less than 1/10 of tape width.
8-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
Drum entrance side
3. Tracking adjustment at drum entranceside
(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (sideB) to OFF.
(2) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(3) Loosen the set screw on top of the S1 guide
with the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment.(4) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guide using
the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment untilthe 1 to 2 peaks are created in the RF wave-form as shown.Check the followings at this time.. There does not exist clearance between the
upper flange of the S1 guide and the tapeedge.
. There exists clearance between the upperflange of the S2 guide and lower edge oftape.
(5) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guideclockwise until the RF waveform becomesalmost flat.
(6) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.
(7) Play back HR2-1A (from 01 : 00 to 15 : 00 ).(8) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401) so
that the center of the RF waveform is reducedto about 80% of the maximum amplitude.
(9) Rotate the upper flange of the S1 guide forfine adjustment until the specifications 1 to 3are satisfied.
(10)Tighten the set screw on top of the S1 guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Tape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.
S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
FE head CTL head
Cleaning blade
Drum
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
Drum rabbet guide
RF waveform
REC A PB(ch 1)
(Flattering at top) 1 to 2 peaks
8-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Video tracking recheckRecheck the video tracking by performing steps 1and 2 of the check procedure.
5. Tape run checkCheck the tape running status (drum entranceside) following Section 8-2-1.
Drum exit side
6. Tracking adjustment at drum exit side(1) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(2) Loosen the set screw on top of the T1 guide
with the screwdriver (tool) TG adjustment.(3) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guide
counter-clockwise using the screwdriver(tool) TG adjustment until the 1 to 2 peaksare created in the RF waveform as shown.Check the followings at this time.. There does not exist clearance between the
upper flange of the T1 guide and the topedge of tape.
. There exists clearance between the lowerflange of the T2 guide and lower edge oftape.
(4) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guideclockwise until the RF waveform becomesalmost flat.
(5) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (sideB) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.
(6) Play back HR2-1A (from 15 : 00 to 20 : 00).(7) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401) so
that the center of the RF waveform is reducedto about 80% of the maximum amplitude.
(8) Rotate the upper flange of the T1 guide forfine adjustment until the specifications 1 to 3are satisfied.
(9) Tighten the set screw on top of the T1 guide.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
RF waveform
REC A PB(ch 1)
(Flattering at top) 1 to 2 peaks
Drum
Drum rabbet guides
Capstan
Pinch roller assemblyTape runs while keeping contact with the upper flange.
T3 T4 T5T2T1
Gap must exist
Tape runs while keeping contact with the lower flange.
8-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
7. Video Tracking RecheckRecheck the video tracking by performing steps 1and 2 of the check procedure.
8. Tape Run CheckCheck the tape running status (at drum exit side)referring to Section 8-2-1.
When the Adjustment is Performed
9. CTL head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-3.)
10. CTL head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
11. CUE/TC head position check(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
12. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
8-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-3. CTL Head Height Adjustment
Tools
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. Nut driver (for across : 4.5 mm) : 7-700-751-01
. Oscilloscope
. Skewer
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.4. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board5. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : PB CTL/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : SERVO CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly
6. Turn on the main power.7. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 01 :00 to 15 : 00).
2. CTL head height check(1) Check that the level decreases when the
portion A of the tape is pushed down byskewer.If the level increases, perform step 3.
(2) Check in the same manner that the leveldecreases when the portion B of the tape ispushed up by skewer.If the level increases, perform step 3.
Adjustment Procedure
3. CTL head height adjustment. If the level increases when you push down the tape :
Rotate the height adjustment nut counter-clockwise until the maximum output waveformis obtained.
. If the level increases when you push up the tape :Rotate the height adjustment nut in clockwiseuntil the maximum output waveform is ob-tained.
4. CTL head height recheckRecheck the CTL head height following steps 1and 2.
A
B
CTL headHeight adjustment nut
A
B
FE head CTL head
Cleaning blade
Wav
efor
m le
vel
Wav
efor
m le
vel
Level decreases.
Specifications : Level must decrease when tape is raised up and pushed down by hand.
When the Adjustment is Performed
5. CTL head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-4.)
6. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
8-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-4. CTL Head Position Adjustment
Notes
. The CTL head position adjustment is closely related with the TC head positionadjustment.
. When the CTL head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform the TChead position adjustment.
Tools
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. Nut driver (for across : 4.5 mm) : 7-700-751-01
. Oscilloscope
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the front lid and the outside panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-4.)3. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.
4. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board5. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : REC A PB/Circuit board onthe HN-255 assemblyCH-2 (TRIG) : SERVO CF/Circuit board onthe HN-255 assembly
6. Turn on the main power.7. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 01 :00 to 15 : 00).
2. CTL head position check(1) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board (side
B) to ON.Then D404 turns on and operation of theTRACKING control knob is enabled.
(2) Rotate the TRACKING control (RV401)/MDC-13G board until the center of the RFenvelope waveform becomes maximum.Check at this time that the marker is output atthe specified position with respect to SERVOCF (TRIG) on the envelope waveform asshown.
(3) Set the switch S402/MDC-13G board to OFFand set the TRACKING control to the FIXposition.Check at this time that the output level of theenvelope waveform remains unchanged assame level as in step (2).If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.
Adjustment Procedure
3. CTL head position adjustmentAdjust the CTL head position adjustment nut witha nut driver until the marker position of the RFenvelope waveform satisfies the specification andat the same time the output level of the center ofthe RF envelope waveform becomes maximum.
4. CTL head position recheckRecheck the CTL head position following thesteps 1 and 2.
When the adjustment is performed
5. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
CTL head
Position adjustment nutAlignment tape HR2-1A
1234
S403
1234
S403
MDC-13G board (side B)
S402 D404 : Flashing
RV401
S402 D404 : Flashing
TRACKING volume control (RV401)
CH1 REC A PB ENV
CH2 SERVO CF
Marker
Specification : Adjust the CTL head position until the following two requirements are met. First, the marker in the envelope waveform must be located in the specified position with reference to the SERVO CF signal. Second, amplitude of the center of the envelope waveform must be maximum.
8-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-5. CUE/TC Head Height Adjustment
Notes
. The CUE head height adjustment is closely related to the azimuth adjustment,tape-to-head adjustment and position adjustment.
. When the CUE head height adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).
Tools
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Nut driver
. Oscilloscope
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board4. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assembly
5. Turn on the main power.6. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 00 :00 to 15 : 00).
2. CUE /TC head height check(1) When the portion A of the tape as shown in
illustration is pushed down, check that thelevel decreases.If the level increases, perform step 3.
(2) When the portion B of the tape as shown inillustration is pushed up, check that the leveldecreases in the same manner.If the level increases, perform step 3.
(3) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times and checkthat the output level remains unchanged fromthe previous level.If the level changes, perform step 3.
(4) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and check that the outputlevel remains unchanged from the previouslevel.If the level changes, perform step 3.
How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press the REWbutton. (Both the PLAY and REW buttons on thekeyboard turn on.)
A
B
Specifications :
A
B
Height adjustment nut
CUE/TC head assembly
CUE/TC head
CUE/TC head
Level must decrease when tape is raised up and pushed down by hand.
8-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
3. CUE/TC head height adjustment. If the level increases when you push down the tape :
Rotate the height adjustment nut in counter-clockwise until the maximum output waveformis obtained.
. If the level increases when you push up the tape :Rotate the height adjustment nut in clockwiseuntil the maximum output waveform is ob-tained.
4. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-6.)
5. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactcheck
(Refer to Section 8-2-7.)
6. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
7. CUE/TC head height checkRecheck it following step 2.
8-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-6. CUE/TC Head Azimuth Adjustment
Notes
. Judgment if the CUE head azimuth is correctly adjusted or not is very difficult asfar as the tape running system is concerned.Therefore, perform the CUE head azimuth adjustment without making judgment ifit is adjusted correctly or not.
. The CUE head azimuth adjustment is closely related to the position adjustmentand the height adjustment.
. When the CUE head azimuth adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).
Tools
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Oscilloscope
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board4. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assembly
5. Turn on the main power.6. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 15 :00 to 30 : 00).
2. CUE Head azimuth adjustment(1) Rotate the azimuth adjustment screw either in
clockwise or counter-clockwise directionuntil the maximum output waveform isobtained.
(2) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times andconfirm that the output level remains un-changed and the same as that in step (1).
(3) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and confirm that theoutput level remains unchanged and the sameas that in step (1).
How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)
3. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactcheck
(Refer to Section 8-2-7.)
4. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
5. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
CUE/TC head assembly
Azimuth adjustment screw
Maximum the amplitude.
8-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-7. CUE/TC Head Tape-to-Head Contact Adjustment
Notes
. The CUE/TC head tape-to-head contact adjustment is closely related to the heightadjustment, azimuth adjustment and position adjustment.
. When the CUE/TC head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).
Tools
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Oscilloscope
. Hexagon bit (for torque screwdriver) (for across : 1.5) : J-6326-120-A
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board4. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255 assemblyTRIG : CH-1
5. Turn on the main power.6. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 15 :00 to 30 : 00).
2. CUE head tape-to-head contact check(1) Push the portions A and B of the tape as
shown in illustration.(2) At this moment, check that amount of
increase in the output level satisfies thespecifications.
Specifications :Amount of increase in the output level is lessthan 5%.
If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.
Adjustment Procedure
3. CUE head tape-to-head contact check(1) Loosen the hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt by 1/4
to 1/2 turn.(2) Insert a flat head (_) 2 mm screwdriver tip
into the notch of the gooseneck adjustmentplate.
(3) Adjust the CUE head position by a screw-driver until the maximum output level isobtained.
(4) While maintaining the screwdriver setup asstep (3), tighten the bolt.Standard tightening torque :30 x 10_2 N.m (3.0 kgf.cm)
4. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactrecheck
Recheck it following steps 1 and 2.
5. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-6.)
6. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
7. CUE/TC head position adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-8.)
A
B
Hexagon socket 2 x 4 bolt
Notch of gooseneck adjustment plate
Tape
B A
Specifications : x 100 < 5 %A
B _ A
8-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-8. CUE/TC Head Position Adjustment
Notes
. Be sure to complete the CTL head position adjustment before starting this adjust-ment. The CUE/TC head position adjustment is adjusted using the CTL headposition as the reference of the adjustment.
. The CUE/TC head position adjustment is closely related to the CUE head heightadjustment, azimuth adjustment and tape-to-head adjustment.
. When the CUE/TC head position adjustment is performed, be sure to perform therelated other adjustments (or checks).
Tools
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. Torque screwdriver bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
. Torque screwdriver (for 3 kg) : J-6325-400-A
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Oscilloscope
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board4. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : SHAPED CTL/Circuit board on theHN-255 assemblyCH-2 : TC/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : SV REF CF/Circuit board on the HN-255 assembly
5. Turn on the main power.6. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
8-44 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Check Procedure
1. Alignment tape playbackPlay back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from 00 :00 to 15 : 00).
2. CUE/TC head position check(1) Confirm that the relationship between the
CTL pulse fall-down edge and the TC signalrise-up edge satisfies the specifications.
If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.
(2) Repeat changing the mode from the EJECTstate to the PLAY state a few times andconfirm that the specification is satisfied.
If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.
(3) Repeat changing the mode from REV x 3 toPLAY a few times and confirm that thespecification is satisfied.
If the specification is not satisfied, performstep 3 and the subsequent steps.
How to enter the REV xxxxx 3 modeAfter pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)
Adjustment Procedure
3. CUE/TC head position adjustment(1) Loosen the fixing screw of the CUE head
mounting plate by 1/4 to 1/2 turn.(2) Insert a flat head (_) screwdriver tip into the
notch of the CUE head mounting plate .(3) Adjust the CUE/TC head position with
screwdriver until the specification is satisfied.(4) While maintaining the screwdriver setup as
step (3), tighten the screw.Standard tightening torque :10 x 10_2 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
4. CUE/TC head position recheckRecheck it following steps 1 and 2.
50
65 35 50 50 50
65 35 50 50
PB CTLwaveform(CH-1)
PB TC waveform(CH-2)
Specification : A=0 ±400 us
Fixing screw Notch
CUE/TC head mounting plate
0 ±400 usec
8-45HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. CUE/TC head azimuth adjustment(Refer to Section 8-2-6.)
6. CUE/TC head tape-to-head contactcheck
(Refer to Section 8-2-7.)
7. CUE/TC head height check(Refer to Section 8-2-5.)
8. CUE/TC head position recheckCheck it following the steps 1 and 2.
8-46 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
8-2-9. CUE/TC Output Level Check
Tools
. Alignment tape HR2-1A : 8-960-076-11
. HN-255 assembly : A-8315-553-B
. Oscilloscope
A B
Specifications 1 : x 100 < 5 % (fluctuation)A
B _ A
Specifications 2 : x 100 > 70 % CD
Preparations
1. Turn off the main power.2. Remove the shoulder pad and the plate.3. Connect the HN-255 assembly to the MDC-
13G board.. 5-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN902/MDC-13G board. 8-pin connector on the HN-255 assembly :
CN903/MDC-13G board4. Connect an oscilloscope.
CH-1 : PB CUE/Circuit board on the HN-255assemblyTRIG : CH-1
5. Turn on the main power.6. Insert the alignment tape HR2-1A.
Check Procedure
1. CUE output level check(1) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from
15 : 00 to 25 : 00).(2) Confirm that fluctuation of the CUE output
level satisfies the specification 1.(3) Play back the alignment tape HR2-1A (from
00 : 00 to 15 : 00) in PLAY state.(4) Take note of the CUE output level. (Level at
this state is named C.)(5) Enter the REV x 1 state.(6) Confirm that fluctuation of the CUE output
level (level at this state is named D) satisfiesspecification 2.
(7) When specification 2 is not satisfied :Perform the T3 and T5 tape guide heightadjustment again.
How to enter the REV xxxxx 1 mode(1) Set the x 1 REV SEARCH to ON using the
VTR maintenance menu, A40 : PATHMODE SEL.
(2) After pressing the PLAY button, press theREW button. (Both the PLAY and REWbuttons on the keyboard turn on.)
P2 x 4
Plate
Shoulder pad
Screws(with drop-safe)
9-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 9Electrical Alignment of Camera System
9-1. General Information on ElectricalAlignment
This section describes all of the electrical adjustmentprocedures that are required upon completion of repair andcircuit board replacement.
9-1-1. Notes on Electrical Alignment
Allow the unit to warm-up for about 10 minutes beforestarting adjustment by turning on the main power and bysetting the VTR to the “SAVE” position.When you want to extend a circuit board, first turn off themain power of the unit.
Bar Indication in the Top Right of the Setup Menu Display
A bar appears in the top right of the setup menu display onVF in some adjustment procedures that use the setupmenu. This bar indicates the adjustable range and the setvalue of the currently-selected menu item.
9-1-2. Required Equipment, Fixtures and Tools
. OscilloscopeTektronix 2465 or equivalent
. HD analog waveform monitorTektronix 1735HD or equivalent
. HD digital waveform monitorTektronix WFM1125 or equivalent
. Frequency counterAdvantest TR5821AK or equivalent
. Digital voltmeterAdvantest TR6845 or equivalent
. B/W monitor (with horizontal resolution of 900 lines ormore, supporting HD SDI)Sony BVM-D20F1J or equivalent
. HD D/A Converter BoardSony HKPF-102
. HD Digital Video Interface UnitSony PFM-HD300/HD50A
. Pattern box (PTB-500 90-240 Vac)J-6029-140-B
. Gray-scale chart (16 : 9)Transparent-type : J-6394-080-A
. DR extension assemblyA-8327-707-A
. Blank tape (Recordable tape on which all of the previousrecordings are erased)
. HD color monitorHDM-20E1U/14E1U/14E5U
9-1-3. Initial Position of Switches duringAdjustment
Some adjustments require the unit to be put into the servicemode of the setup menu. Enter the service mode whenrequired as follows. For the details of the setup menu, referto Section 4, “Setup Menu”.
1. Turn off the main power.2. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.3. Turn on the main power.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position.
nWhen any adjustment is performed using the service mode,the value of the adjusted item in the User Mode returns to 0.
Initial Position of SwitchesThe following switches need to be returned their initialpositions as shown below before starting the electricaladjustments. In the same manner, when the various GAINswitches are set in any position other than the defaultposition when shipped from the factory, return theseswitches to their default positions referring to the Opera-tion Manual before starting the electrical adjustments.
Inside pane :VTR SAVE/STBY switch → STBYGAIN switch → L (0 dB)OUTPUT/DCC switch → CAM/OFFMENU ON/OFF switch → OFFWHITE BAL switch → PRST
Front panel :SHUTTER switch → OFFFilter knob → 1B
Lens :LENS → MANUIRIS → C (CLOSE)
Setup menu (OPERATION menu) :. 01*OUTPUT SEL
HD SDI OUT → ONTEST OUT SELECT → SD
. 10*GAIN SWGAIN LOW → 0 dBGAIN MID → 6 dBGAIN HIGH → 12 dB
9-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Setup menu (PAINT menu) :. 01* SW STATUS
GAMMA → ONBLACK GAMMA → OFFMATRIX → OFFKNEE → ONWHITE CLIP → ONDETAIL → ONAPERTURE → ONTEST SAW → OFF
. 03* BLACKOUTPUT SELECT → Y
. 06* KNEE 1KNEE SATURATION → ONKNEE SAT LEVEL → 0
. 10* SKIN DETAILSKIN DETAIL ALL → OFF
Setup menu (MAINTENANCE menu) :. 14* FUNCTION 3
WHT FILTER INH → OFFCOLOR BAR SEL → 100%
. 15* GENLOCKGENLOCK → ONRETURN VIDEO → OFF
9-1-4. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance
Use of a reflective-type gray-scale chart (with reflectanceof 89.9%) is recommended for the PA Gain adjustment. Ifa reflective-type gray-scale chart is not available, use atransparent-type gray-scale chart with a well-maintainedpattern box.Calibrate illuminance (or luminance) on the surface of thegray-scale chart to the specified value as follows. Also,calibrate the color temperature to exactly 3200K byadjusting the illumination.
Reflective-Type Gray-Scale Chart (16 : 9)
Availability of reflective-type gray-scale chartThe reflective-type gray-scale chart (16 : 9) is commercial-ly available.
Name : Reflective-type gray-scale chart inwooden case (GS-HD of MurakamiColor Research Lab. Inc. or equivalent)
Available from : Murakami Color Research Lab. Inc.
Address : 3-11-3 Kachidoki, Chuo-ku,Tokyo 104-0054
TEL : (Japan) 03-3532-3011FAX : (Japan) 03-3532-2056
Notes on handling. Do not touch the chart surface with bare hands.. Do not rub or stain the chart surface.. Do not expose or use the chart under direct sunlight for a
long time.. Do not leave or store the chart in a place that is very
humid or contains toxic gas.. Do not place anything on top of the chart surface.. When a chart is stored for a long time without using it,
open the wooden case and leave the chart to dry for 30minutes or 1 hour once or twice every month.
Guideline of replacing the chart when used as thereference chartThe reflective characteristics of the reflective-type gray-scale chart can easily deteriorate over time. As a guideline,the chart should be replaced every 2 years, but the replace-ment interval depends on the storage conditions of thechart.
9-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Luxmeter Light source
Chart
Setting Illuminance (In case of using reflective-type chart)
Measuring equipment : Luxmeter (pre-calibrated)
1. Turn on the light source that illuminates the chart andallow it to warm-up for about 30 minutes.
2. Fix a luxmeter in front of the reflective-type chart.Obtain an illuminance of 2000 lx uniformly over theentire surface of the chart by adjusting the position andangle of the illuminations.nPlace the light source at the same height and directionof the camera that shoots the chart surface.
Setting Luminance (In case of using transparent-type chart)
Measuring equipment : Photometer (Minolta LS-110 orequivalent, pre-calibrated)
1. Turn on the pattern box and allow it to warm-up forabout 30 minutes.
2. Place the pattern box such that direct light does not fallon the chart surface.(Alternatively, place a cover the inside of which ispainted with unglazed black, around the entire chart.)
3. Fix a photometer 1 m in front of the chart in thepattern box.
4. Obtain the luminance of 573 ±6 cd/m2 at the center ofthe chart by adjusting the BRIGHTNESS control ofthe pattern box.nAdjusting luminance of 573 ±6 cd/m2 creates the sameilluminance of 2000 lx on the reflective-type gray-scale chart with reflection of 89.9%.
Chart
Photometer
1 m
9-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.Adjustment point : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 03*LEVEL ADJITEM : Y LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV
TP
HDW-F900R
CH2IN
CH2OUT
Frequency counterOscilloscope
A
9-2. VCO Frequency Adjustment
NoteAllow the unit to warm-up for about 10 minutes beforestarting adjustment
Preparation
Complete the equipment connection as shown below.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Equipment : Frequency counter, oscilloscopeMeasurement point : .TP1 (C-2)/DCP-43 board :
(when DC-110A board is notinstalled)
.TP1 (A-2)/DC-110A board :(A side)(when DC-110A board isinstalled)
Adjustment point : MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VCO CONT
Specifications : 74.175824 ±100 MHz(59.94i mode)74.249865 ±100 MHz (50i mode)
9-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-4. VF DC Level Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : CN4 pin-10 (A-1)/DCP-43 boardMENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VF Y DC LEVELSpecifications : A = 0.0 ±0.1 V
AGND
1
2
3
4
A B C D E
CN4
TP1
RV700
DCP-43 board (A side)
TP201TP200
TP400
TP601
TP202
TP1
TP600
1
2
3
4
A B C D
DC-110A board (A side)
9-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-5. VA Gain Adjustment
Notes. Start this adjustment upon completion of the adjustment
“9-3. TEST OUT Level Adjustment”.. When the AD LEVEL setup value is modified, wait 1 to
2 seconds and then measure the waveform amplitudeafter the waveform is stabilized.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/OFF
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD
MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFF
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R AD LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G AD LEVELSpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B AD LEVELSpecifications : C = 700 ±5 mV
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → ON
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : TEST SAW → OFFITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → Y
A, B, C
9-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
B, D, F
A, C, E
9-6. Black Offset Adjustment
Preparation
. Lens iris → CLOSE
. GAIN switch → H
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD
MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 30 dB
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : DC ADJ MODE → ON
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : B/W monitor, OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : R DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (A) appear
on the right end of monitor displaywhen the rotary encoder is turned toincrease the value in the menu in thepositive (+) direction. The two whitevertical lines (B) appear below A whenthe rotary encoder is turned to increasethe value in the menu in the negative(_) direction. The two lines of A and Bshould have unity brightness.
nRecord the value generated through the adjustmentof step 2. This will be used in steps 4, 8, 12.
m. Do not change the setting of the R DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines A and B are difficult to view on the
screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of A and B.
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 12 dB
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : R DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.
If the level does not change even aftermoving the offset by ±5, return theoffset value that is obtained at the endof step 2, and finish the adjustment.
5. Complete the setting of the following two items byusing the setup menu.
MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 30 dB
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
A
9-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : G DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (C)
appear on the right end of monitordisplay when the rotary encoder isturned to increase the value in themenu in the positive (+) direction.The two white vertical lines (D)appear below C when the rotaryencoder is turned to increase the valuein the menu in the negative (_)direction. The two lines of C and Dshould have unity brightness.
m. Do not change the setting of the G DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines C and D are difficult to view on the
screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of C and D.
7. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 12 dB
8. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : G DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.
If the level does not change even aftermoving the offset by ±5, return theoffset value that is obtained at the endof step 2, and finish the adjustment.
9. Complete the setting of the following two items byusing the setup menu.
MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 30 dB
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
10. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : B DC OFFSET 180Specification : The two white vertical lines (E)
appear on the right end of monitordisplay when the rotary encoder isturned to increase the value in themenu in the positive (+) direction.The two white vertical lines (F)appear below E when the rotaryencoder is turned to increase the valuein the menu in the negative (_)direction. The two lines of E and Fshould have unity brightness.
m. Do not change the setting of the B DC OFFSET 0.. If the lines E and F are difficult to view on the
screen, open the lens iris a little. It facilitatesviewing of the lines of E and F.
11. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 10*GAIN SWITEM : GAIN HIGH → 12 dB
12. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : B DC OFFSETSpecification : Minimize A.
If the level does not change even aftermoving the offset by ±5, return theoffset value that is obtained at the endof step 2, and finish the adjustment.
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 06*RP DC OFFSETITEM : DC ADJ MODE → OFF
9-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-7. VSUB Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot an all white chart with a high illumination to fillthe entire screen of the under-scanned picture frame.
. Lens iris → Open
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP2/EX-776 board
(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : R VSUBSpecifications : 3.2 ±0.1 V
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP4/EX-776 board
(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : G VSUBSpecifications : 3.2 ±0.1 V
3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP6/EX-776 board
(DR extension assembly)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : B VSUBSpecifications : 2.4 ±0.1 V
9-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-8. PA Gain Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.
. Lens iris → F10
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFFMENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFF
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
2. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : TEST OUT connector
(outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP2/EX-776 board
(DR extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV402 (E-1)/PA-340 board
(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV403 (E-1)/PA-340 board
(B side)Specifications : A = 700 ±14 mV
B = Minimize the carrier leak.
B
A
Waveform on WFM
Waveform on oscilloscope1H
1H
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP4/EX-776 board (DR
extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV502 (C-2)/PA-340 board
(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV503 (D-2)/PA-340 board
(B side)Specifications : A = 700 ±14 mV
B = Minimize the carrier leak.
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Equipment 1 : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point 1 : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)Equipment 2 : OscilloscopeMeasurement point 2 : TP6/EX-776 board (DR
extension assembly)Adjustment point : 1RV602 (B-2)/PA-340 board
(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV603 (C-2)/PA-340 board
(B side)Specifications : A = 700 ±14 mV
B = Minimize the carrier leak.
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 04*CCD ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → YMENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → ONMENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ON
PA-340 board (B side)
ABCDE
1
2
3
RV402 RV403
RV502RV503
RV602RV603
9-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-9. Pre Knee Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/OFF
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → RITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → ON
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R PRE KNEESpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G PRE KNEESpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B PRE KNEESpecifications C = 700 ±5 mV
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → OFF
A, B, C
9-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-10. DCC Pre Knee Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → RITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → ON
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : R PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications : A = 700 ±5 mV
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : G PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications : B = 700 ±5 mV
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : B PRE KNEE DCCSpecifications: : C = 700 ±5 mV
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 03*VA ADJUSTITEM : PREKNEE ADJ MODE → OFF
A, B, C
9-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-11. Black Shading Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Lens iris → CLOSE
. Set the waveform monitor as follows:LUM modeVOLT FULL SCALE range → 0.5
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : R BLACK H SAWITEM : R BLACK H PARAITEM : R BLACK V SAWITEM : R BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : G BLACK H SAWITEM : G BLACK H PARAITEM : G BLACK V SAWITEM : G BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 02*BLK SHADINGITEM : B BLACK H SAWITEM : B BLACK H PARAITEM : B BLACK V SAWITEM : B BLACK V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
(H SAW) (H PARA) (V SAW) (V PARA)
9-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-12. White Shading Adjustment
NoteBe careful of the following point. Unless a chart is freefrom non-uniformity, illumination is correct, lens iris is setin the specified position and the lens zoom is set in thespecified ratio, the white shading adjustment will result inpoor performance.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Lens iris → AUTO
. Shoot a white pattern to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.
. Set the waveform monitor as follows:LUM modeVOLT FULL SCALE range → 0.5
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : R WHITE H SAWITEM : R WHITE H PARAITEM : R WHITE V SAWITEM : R WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : G WHITE H SAWITEM : G WHITE H PARAITEM : G WHITE V SAWITEM : G WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
6. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : B WHITE H SAWITEM : B WHITE H PARAITEM : B WHITE V SAWITEM : B WHITE V PARASpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
7. Switch the lens to the EXTENDER.
8. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R
(H SAW) (H PARA) (V SAW) (V PARA)
9-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : R WHITE H SAW EXITEM : R WHITE H PARA EXITEM : R WHITE V SAW EXITEM : R WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
10. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → G
11. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : G WHITE H SAW EXITEM : G WHITE H PARA EXITEM : G WHITE V SAW EXITEM : G WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
12. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → B
13. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 01*WHT SHADINGITEM : B WHITE H SAW EXITEM : B WHITE H PARA EXITEM : B WHITE V SAW EXITEM : B WHITE V PARA EXSpecifications : Make the waveform flat.
(H SAW) (H PARA) (V SAW) (V PARA)
9-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-13. Flare Adjustment
Preparation
. Lens iris → MAN
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A
. Shoot a gray-scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame and execute AWB.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Adjustment point : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop
from the reference value(A = 700 ±14 mV).
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : G FLARE → 0
2. Select a horizontal scanning line in the portion B onthe waveform monitor using the LINE SELECTfunction.
3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : R FLARESpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at
the portion C.
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 03*BLACKITEM : B FLARESpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at
the portion C.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 several times.
A
B
C
9-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-14. Gamma Correction Adjustment
Preparation
. Lens iris → MAN
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A
. Shoot a gray-scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame and execute AWB.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)Adjustment point : Open the lens iris to obtain the
white level of A = 700 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*GAMMAITEM : TEST SAW → DIGITALSelect a horizontal scanning line in the portion B onthe waveform monitor using the LINE SELECTfunction.
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 04*GAMMAITEM : R GAMMASpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at
the portion C.
3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 04*GAMMAITEM : B GAMMASpecifications : Minimize the color difference level at
the portion C.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 several times until the carrier leakis removed at “C”.
A
B
C
9-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-15. Knee and White Clip Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/OFF
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : TEST SAW → ON
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE → OFFITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFF
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE POINTSpecifications : A = 665 ±14 mV
2. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → H (12 dB)
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP → ON
4. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP LEVELSpecifications : B = 763 ±14 mV
5. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)
6. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFF
7. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 06*KNEE 1ITEM : KNEE SLOPESpecifications : C = 763 ±14 mV
nThe above value is the adjustment value on the premisethat the white clip level is set to 763 mV. When the whiteclip level is set to any value other than 763 mV, set theKNEE SLOPE adjustment value to the same value as theWHITE CLIP LEVEL adjustment value.
A
B
C
9-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-16. DCC Knee Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC POINT → 0ITEM : DCC GAIN → 0
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.
. AUTO W/B BAL switch (inside panel) → WHT(Execute the auto white balance adjustment.)Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector
(outside panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 2.5 F-stops
from the reference iris position(A = 700 ± 14 mV).
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD analog waveform monitorMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC RANGE (Default value when
shipped from the factory : 600%)Specifications : Adjust the DCC range for the
customer’s preference.
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC POINT (Default value when
shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the KNEE characteristics for
the customer’s preference.
3. Select the lens EXTENDER and shoot the gray scalechart to fill the entire screen of the under-scannedpicture frame.
4. Return the EXTENDER to the original position.
5. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 12*DCC ADJUSTITEM : DCC GAIN (Default value when
shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the KNEE characteristics for
the customer’s preference.
AStandard
(600 %)
MIN
(300 %)
9-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-17. Crispening Adjustment
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : CRISPENINGSpecifications : Adjust the crispening level such that
the noise is not significant on the grayscale.
9-18. Level Depend Adjustment
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ONITEM : LEVEL DEPEND → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : LEVEL DEPENDSpecifications : Decrease the details signal amplitude
of the portion B to the level that doesnot affect the detail signal level at theportion A.
NoteUpon completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform thefollowing two adjustments : “9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment”and “9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment”.
A
A
BB A
9-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-19. Detail Signal FrequencyAdjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.
. Select a horizontal scanning line in the bottom of thewhite area in the center of the waveform monitor usingthe LINE SELECT function.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL FREQ.Specifications : Adjust the edge width of the B portion
for the customer’s preference.
NoteUpon completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform thefollowing two adjustments : “9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment”and “9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment”.
A
B
9-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-20. H/V Ratio Adjustment
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 560 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : B/W monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL H/V RATIOSpecifications : Adjust the ratio of the detail signal
(white peak) in the horizontal direc-tion and that in the vertical directionfor unity.
9-21. Detail Signal Level Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1lens irisSpecifications : A = 560 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 08*DETAIL1ITEM : DETAIL LEVEL (Default value when
shipped from the factory : 0)Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the detail
signal that is added to the steps of thegray-scale signal for the customer’spreference.
A
A
H
V
9-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-22. Knee Aperture Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : KNEE APERTURE → ON
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 2 F-stops from
the iris position to createA = 700 ±14 mV.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : KNEE APT LEVELSpecifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portion
(p-p value of the spikes on the 3rd stepfrom peak white) for the customer’spreference. (Reference value : 40 mV)
9-23. H. Detail Black Clip Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop from
the iris position to createA = 700 ± 14 mV.
. Select a horizontal scanning line in the bottom of thewhite area in the center of the waveform monitor usingthe LINE SELECT function.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : DETAIL BLK LIMIT
(Default setting when shipped fromthe factory: 0)
Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portionfor the customer’s preference.
A
B
Line select
B
9-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-24. V. Detail Black Clip Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)Adjustment point : 1 lens irisSpecifications : Open the lens iris by 1 F-stop
from the reference iris position(A = 700 ±14 mV).
. Select a horizontal scanning line in the bottom of thewhite area in the center of the waveform monitor usingthe LINE SELECT function.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 09*DETAIL2ITEM : DETAIL V-BLK LIMIT
(Default setting when shipped fromthe factory: 0)
Specifications : Adjust the amplitude of the B portionfor the customer’s preference.
B
9-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-25. Skin Tone Adjustment
NotePerform this adjustment as needed by the customer.
Preparation
. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL ALL → ONITEM : SKIN AREA IND → ONITEM : SKIN DTL SELECT →
Select as desired by customer.ITEM : SKIN DETAIL → ON
. Shoot face of human being.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : Either color monitor or view finder orHD analog waveform monitor
Measurement point : TEST OUT connector or HD SDIconnector (rear panel)
1. Shoot face of human being in the window at the centerof VF screen.
2. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETECT → EXEC
(Automatic color detection is performed.)
3. Press the rotary encoder. (The detection range isshown by the zebra pattern.)
4. Perform the following procedures as needed bycustomer.Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DTL SAT. (Signal component in the
direction of saturation)SKIN DTL HUE (HUE)SKIN DTL WIDTH (Signal component inthe direction of color phase HUE)
The range in which the SKIN DETAIL is effective, isshown by the zebra pattern on viewfinder. Adjust theabove items such that the zebra zone is not excessive norinsufficient showing the effective range.
5. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL LVLSpecifications : Adjust the detail signal level for the
customer’s preference.
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 10*SKIN DETAILITEM : SKIN DETAIL ALL → OFFITEM : SKIN DETECT → OFFITEM : SKIN AREA IND → OFFITEM : SKIN DETAIL → OFF
SATURATION
HUE
R-Y
B-Y
WIDTH
9-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-26. Zebra Adjustment
Preparation
. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → OFFITEM : KNEE → OFFITEM : WHITE CLIP → OFFITEM : TEST SAW → ANALOG
MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA 1 DET.LVL → 70%ITEM : ZEBRA 2 DET.LVL → 100%
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector (outside panel)
1. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1
2. Complete the setup as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 05*DCP ADJUSTITEM : VF ZEBRA 1 OFFSETSpecifications : A = 490 ±5 mV
3. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 2
4. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → M (6 dB)
5. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1Specifications : B = 700 ±5 mV
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
. Set the GAIN switch (inside panel) → L (0 dB)
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 11*VF SETTINGITEM : ZEBRA SELECT → 1
MENU : PAINTPAGE : 01*SW STATUSITEM : GAMMA → ONITEM : KNEE → ONITEM : WHITE CLIP → ONITEM : TEST SAW → OFF
Bottom of the zebra area level
B
Center of the zebra area levelA
9-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-27. Auto Iris Adjustment
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot the gray scale chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.
. Lens iris : AUTO
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : HD digital waveform monitorMeasurement point : HD SDI connector (rear panel)
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS APL RATIOSpecifications : Adjust the auto iris in accordance with
the application of customer.(It determines at which signal level the auto iriscontrol starts operating.)IRIS APL RATIO = _99 (peak value operation)IRIS APL RATIO = 99 (average value operation)
2. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS LEVELSpecifications : A = 700 ±14 mV.
3. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : IRIS SPEED (Default value when
shipped from the factory : 2)Specifications : Adjust the operating speed of auto iris
control of the lens as desired.
4. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 13*AUTO IRIS 2ITEM : CLIP HIGH LIGHT → ON or OFFSpecifications : Adjust the operating speed of auto iris
control of the lens for the customer’spreference.
9-28. Adjustment upon Replacement ofFilter Disc Unit
Whenever a filter disc unit is replaced, the white balancecorrection is required. Perform the white balance correc-tion as follows.
Preparation
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → A or B
. Shoot a all white chart to fill the entire screen of theunder-scanned picture frame.
. Lens iris → AUTO
. Connect a B/W monitor to the TEST OUT connector ofthis unit.
Adjustment Procedure
Equipment : B/W monitor
1. Complete the setting as shown below by using thesetup menu.MENU : MAINTENANCEPAGE : 16*ND COMPITEM : ND OFFSET ADJUST → ONITEM : CLEAR ND OFFSET → EXEC
2. Set the filter knob to 1B.
3. Set the WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → WHT(Execute auto white balance adjustment.)nConfirm that a message “ND1 DET = OK!” appearson monitor.
4. Select the filter knob to 2B then 3B then 4B andexecute step 3 at every filter position.nConfirm that a message “COMPLETE!” appears onmonitor when all the adjustments of 1B to 4B arecompleted normally. The ND OFFSET ADJUSTsetting returns to the OFF position.
A
9-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-29. SD VCO Adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the HKDW-702 (DC-110A board) is installed.
Preparation
. Allow warm-up of about 10 minutes.
. Complete setup with the use of the setup menu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI LOCK/FREE → FREE
. Complete the equipment connection as shown below.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Measurement point : TP400 (B-3)/DC-110A board
(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI VCO FREQ.Specifications : 27.0 ±0.1 MHz
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD SDI LOCK/FREE → LOCK
9-30. SD Y Level Adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the HKDW-702 (DC-110A board) is installed.
Preparation
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS
. Complete setup with the use of the setup menu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : 01*OUTPUT SELITEM : REAR BNC OUTSEL → VBS
DOWN CON MODE → LETTR
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : SD waveform monitor or
oscilloscopeMeasurement point : TEST OUT connector
(outside panel)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD VBS LEVELSpecifications : A = 714 ±5 mV (For NTSC)
A = 700 ±5 mV (For PAL)
TP
HDW-F900R
CH2IN
CH2OUT
Frequency counterOscilloscope
A
TP201TP200
TP400
TP601
TP202
TP1
TP600
1
2
3
4
A B C D
DC-110A board (A side)
9-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-31. SD ZEBRA Clamp Level Adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the HKDW-702 (DC-110A board) is installed.
Preparation
OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP201 (B-4)/DC-110A board
(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD ZEBRA Y OFSTSpecifications : A = 0 ±10 mV dc
9-32. SD ZEBRA Y Level Adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the HKDW-702 (DC-110A board) is installed.
Preparation
OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → BARS
Adjustment Procedure
1. Complete the adjustment as shown below by using thesetup menu.Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP201 (B-4)/DC-110A board
(A side)MENU : SERVICEPAGE : 09*SD ADJUSTITEM : SD ZEBRA Y LEVELSpecifications : A = 714 ±5 mV (For NTSC)
A = 700±5 mV (For PAL)
A
DC 0V A
TP201TP200
TP400
TP601
TP202
TP1
TP600
1
2
3
4
A B C D
DC-110A board (A side)
9-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-33. RPN Concealment
RPN (Residual Point Noise) on CCD is automaticallycorrected (APR) during ABB (Auto Black Balance Adjust-ment) operation. For the RPN which cannot be correctedby APR, perform the manual RPN concealment by follow-ing Section 9-33-1.When there remains the RPN which cannot be concealedeven after completion of the adjustment shown in Section9-33-1, follow the flowchart shown in Section 9-33-4.
9-33-1. Manual RPN Concealment
Use the SERVICE menu for the manual RPN concealment.Refer to Section 4-1-2 for how to display the SERVICEmenu.
Preparation
. Adjust the black balance automatically. (Refer to theSection 4-1 in operation manual of HDW-F900R.)
. Complete the setting as shown below by using the setupmenu.MENU : OPERATIONPAGE : OUTPUT SELITEM : TEST OUT SELECT → HD
MENU : SERVICEPAGE : MANUAL RPNITEM : FIELD/FRAME → FRAME
. When the RPN recognition is difficult since the RPNhides behind the character on a screen or is very close tothe character :ITEM : TEST OUT MENU → OFF
. Connect the HD color monitor to the TEST OUTconnector (on the outside panel).
? 07OMANUAL RPN OUTPUT SELECT : Y RPN CURSOR : OFF TEST OUT MENU : OFF CURSOR H POS. : 0 CURSOR V POS. : 0 CURSOR JUMP : CURR RECORD RPN : EXEC DELETE RPN : EXEC FIELD/FRAME : FIELD
Adjustment Procedures
nThe points adjacent to the already corrected RPN in the up,down, right, and left directions cannot be corrected.
1. Select the channel (R, G, or B) to be corrected.ITEM : OUTPUT SELECT → R, G, B
2. Adjust the values of H and V so that the center of thecross cursor is aligned just over the RPN.The RPN is concealed when the cursor is aligned withthe pixel.nThe RPN may appear to be concealed even when thecursor is aligned with the pixel one line or one pixeloff from the RPN. Before proceeding to step 3, movethe cursor one line or one pixel to confirm that thecursor is aligned with the correct pixel.
ITEM : RPN CURSOR → ONITEM : CURSOR H POS.ITEM : CURSOR V POS.nOne full rotation of the rotary encoder is equivalent tothe movement by one-pixel. Since the cursor occupiesthe area equivalent to two pixels, the cursor moveswith two rotations of the rotary encoder.
3. Press the rotary encoder to record the RPN data(concealed value).ITEM: RECORD RPN → EXEC
4. “RECORD DATA OK? YES → NO” is displayed.After confirming that the RPN is corrected, rotate therotary encoder until “YES” blinks.
5. Press the rotary encoder. “COMPLETE!” is displayed,and concealment will be performed.nMake sure that RPN is corrected before executing theRPN concealment.
6. If the RPN concealment is going to be executed foranother RPN, repeat steps 2 to 5.nWhen there exists an RPN that cannot be correctedwith this adjustment, follow the flowchart of theSection 9-33-4.
Setting after Adjustment
ITEM : RPN CURSOR → OFFITEM : FIELD/FRAME → FIELD
9-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-33-2. When RPN Concealment Does NotSucceed
If the RPN is still present even after manual RPN conceal-ment, the following causes may exist:. The concealment was performed on an adjacent pixel.. Another RPN point prevented concealment.
Checking the pixel to conceal1. Set RPN CURSOR to ON.2. Use the CURSOR JUMP function to check that no
pixel has been concealed near the pixel you want toconceal.nIt is effective to move the cursor to the place near thepixel you want to conceal beforehand by using CUR-SOR H POS. or CURSOR V POS.
When the pixel you want to conceal is above thecursor positionITEM : CURSOR JUMP → PREVWhen the pixel you want to conceal is below thecursor positionITEM : CURSOR JUMP → NEXT
3. When the cursor jumps to a pixel near the pixel youwant to conceal
(1) Delete the data recorded for concealing the RPN wherethe cursor is aligned.ITEM : DELETE RPN → EXEC
(2) “DELETE DATA OK? TEST → NO” is displayed.Select YES with the rotary encoder, and press therotary encoder.nIf RPN appears next (above, below, right, or left) tothe pixel you want to conceal, it means that RPN existsadjacent to that pixel. In such a case, RPN conceal-ment is not possible, and the CCD or the CCD blockmust be replaced. Contact your local Sony SalesOffice/Service Center.
(3) If nothing changes, change the concealment point.Move the cursor horizontally to check if the RPN canbe concealed.
(4) When the RPN is successfully concealed, record thatdata.ITEM : RECORD RPN → EXEC
(5) “RECORD DATA OK? YES → NO” is displayed.Select OK and press the rotary encoder.
(6) “COMPLETE!” is displayed, and the data will berecorded.
(7) Other RPN points may not have been automaticallyrecognized due to the RPN that has not been concealedsuccessfully. Perform the auto RPN concealment.<Basic idea of the RPN concealment>. Basically, perform concealment using the auto RPN
recognition.. If auto RPN recognition does not succeed, perform
manual RPN concealment. Be sure to perform autoRPN recognition every time an RPN point isconcealed.
. If concealment still does not succeed, clear the RPNconcealment data resulted from the manual RPNconcealment, and manually conceal the RPN.
4. To conceal other RPN points, repeat steps 2 and 3.
9-33-3. Effectively Performing Auto RPNRecognition
1. Open the RPN MANAGE page of the SERVICEmenu.
2. Perform only auto RPN concealment.ITEM : AUTO CONCEAL → EXEC
nBe sure to set IRIS to the CLOSE position.Be sure to set BARS SW to the OFF position.Be sure to set SHUTTER SW to the OFF position.If AUTO CONCEAL is performed with a wrong switchconfiguration, clear all the data stored. The RPN conceal-ment data returns to the factory default settings.
ITEM : RPN ALL PRESET → EXEC
9-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
9-33-4. RPN Concealment Flowchart
If there remains an RPN that cannot be corrected with the manual RPN concealment, follow the flowchartshown below.
ProcedureThere remains an RPN that cannot be corrected
by the manual RPN concealment.(Refer to Section 9-33-1.)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Does RPN disapper?
Is RPN level lowered?
Push the SHUTTER switch at the front to set the shutter to 1/2000.
Correction works.
Can the adjustment beperformed correctly?
Check the connectors used betweenDR-614 and TG-256 boards, andalso TG-256 and PA-340 boards.
Replace flexible wire cable used betweenDR-614 and DCP-43 boards.
Perform RPN adjustment once again.
One or more of DCP-43, RP-131, DR-614, TG-256, PA-340 boards are defective. Replace one board at a time to identify
the defective board.
Correction works.
Is RPN corrected?
Correction works.
RPN cannot be corrected due to adjacent RPN.
Replace CCD block.
As a result of the adjustment, does
RPN disappear?
Perform manual RPN concealment.(Refer to Section 9-33-1.)
If RPN remains still visible, perform AUTO BLACK BALANCE adjustment
(keep pressing AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK position), or perform manual RPN concealment
once again. (Refer to Section 9-33-1.)
Perform NVRAM adjustment.RP-131 board : Refer to Section 1-17-16.
Perform AUTO BLACK BALANCE adjustment(keep pressing AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK position) six times.
Can the adjustment beperformed correctly?
Perform RPN adjustment.RP-131 board : Perform BLACK OFFSET
adjustment. (Refer to Section 9-6.)
10-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 10Electrical Alignment of VTR System
10-1. Preparation
Required Equipment. Audio analyzer
Tektronix AA501A (OP.2) or equivalent. Generator
Tektronix SG-5010 or equivalent. Oscilloscope
Tektronix TDS460A or equivalent. Digital voltmeter
Advantest TR6845 or equivalent. Standard playback machine
Fixtures and Tools. Alignment tape (HR5-1A: 8-960-076-01). Working tapenPrepare a working tape for electrical adjustment that hasbeen used as few times as possible. A recorded tape canalso be used, but an internal signal will be recorded on it.
PrecautionsBefore starting adjustment of this section, check theproduct destination that is indicated on the SS-92G boardand the setting of the model selection switches (S101-6, 7 :IMX/HDCAM/D-B, S101-8 : NTSC/PAL) on the sameboard. (Refer to “1-10. On-Board Switch Description”)
Initial Position of SwitchesInside panel :
AUDIO IN selector switch CH1, CH2 → REAROUTPUT/DCC switch → CAM/ON
Rear panel :AUDIO IN selector switch CH1, CH2 → LINE
Setup menu (MAINTENANCE menu) :. AUDIO-2
AU REC EMPHASIS → OFFCUE REC → ONAU REF LEVEL → _20 dBAU REF OUT → 0 dBAU AGC SPEC → _6 dB
0 10
Alignment tape (HR5-1A)The same CUE signal is recorded on the alignment tape(HR5-1A) every 5 minutes.If a recorded position specified by this document becomesworn-out, use different recorded positions of the CUE signal.Example : The CUE signal of 3 kHz at _20 VU is recorded
in the following positions in addition to theposition 00 : 02 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 02 : 55 : 00.. 00 : 07 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 07 : 55 : 00. 00 : 12 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 12 : 55 : 00. 00 : 17 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 17 : 55 : 00
AUDIO LEVEL CH1, CH2 Control KnobsReference PositionSet the control knobs to the invertedtriangle ( ) (2 o’clock position).
10-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-2. Audio System Alignment
The audio system adjustment is performed in the factory atthe time of shipment, and the adjustment values are savedin the EEPROM (IC819) on the FP-152 board.When replacing the EEPROM (IC819) or the FP-152board, perform the audio system adjustment.Also, when replacing the volume control RV2 or RV3 onthe FP-152 board, perform “AUDIO LEVEL VolumeControl (Inside Panel) Adjustment”.In Audio System Alignment, adjustments are performedusing the SERVICE menu.
10-2-1. Audio A/D Error Adjustment
Equipment/Tools. Generator
Adjustment Procedure1. Set the AUDIO SELECT switch (CH1, CH2) to “AUTO”.2. Input a +4dBu, 1kHz sine wave to the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector and CH2 connector at the rear.3. Perform AUDIO A/D ADJUST from the VTR MAIN-
TENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.
S12OVTR MAINTE TOP C0: SERVO CHECK C1: RF CHECK C2: AUDIO CHECK A0: SERVO ADJUST A1: RF ADJUST→A2: AUDIO ADJUST A4:MECHANISM ADJUST A9: OTHERS ADJUST
AUDIO ADJUST MODE
A20:AUDIO A/D ADJ A21:AUDIO D/A ADJ→A22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJ
ADJUST START →YES NO
SET BOTH OF THE LINE/AES/EBU/MIC SWITCHESTO "LINE". INPUT THE SINE WAVE OF+4dBU OF 1KHZ TO THE AUCH1&CH2 XLR ON THE REAR
4. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.The auto adjustment starts. The following screen isdisplayed during the auto adjustment.
Screen during the CH1 adjustment
Screen during the CH2 adjustment after the CH1 adjustment
Screen when the adjustments for both CHs are complete
5. When the adjustment is complete, press down theMENU ESCAPE switch.
m. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears in the adjustment screen,
check the input signal etc and perform the adjustmentagain.
. If “INPUT OVER ERR” appears in the adjustmentscreen, check the signal level since the level of the signalbeing input may be too large.
. If “INPUT UNDER ERR” appears in the adjustmentscreen, check the signal level since the level of the signalbeing input may be too small.
. If “NO INPUT ERR” appears in the adjustment screen,check the input signal since the signal may not be inputcorrectly.
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1:ADJUSTING CH2: CH3: CH4:
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1:COMPLETE CH2:ADJUSTING CH3: CH4:
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1:COMPLETE CH2:COMPLETE CH3:COMPLETE CH4:COMPLETE
10-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-2-2. Audio D/A Error Adjustment
Equipment/Tools. Audio analyzer
Adjustment Procedure1. Perform AUDIO D/A ADJUST from the VTR MAIN-
TENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.
2. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.
3. Turn the CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-1output level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.
4. Turn the CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-2output level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.
5. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.nIf “NO” is selected, the data adjusted this time be-comes invalid, and the previously adjusted databecomes valid.
6. When the adjustment is complete, press down theMENU ESCAPE switch.
10-2-3. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Control(Inside Panel) Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure1. Turn the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the
position one scale away to the left from the centerposition.
2. Perform AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ from the VTRMAINTENANCE page in the SERVICE menu.
3. Turn the MENU knob to select “YES”, and press theMENU knob.
4. When the adjustment is complete, press down theMENU ESCAPE switch.
nIf “NG” is being displayed in the adjustment result screen,perform the adjustment from Step 2. If “NG” appearsagain, replace the volume control (RV2 or RV3 on the FP-152 board) of the LEVEL knob.
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST
ADJUST START YES →NO
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST
COMPLETE ADJUSTING? YES →NO
TURN CH1 AND CH2 AU LEVEL KNOBS SO THAT CH1 AND CH2 OUTPUT LEVELS BECOME 0dBm +-0.05dB
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
ADJUST START →YES NO
BEFORE ADJUST START,ALIGN CH1&CH2 AU KNOBSTO THE POS ONE SCALELEFT OF MECHA CENTER POS
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
CH1:OK DATA:0380 CH2:OK DATA:0280
ADJUST COMPLETE
10-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-3. CUE Audio Alignment
10-3-1. Bias Trap Adjustment
Preparation
Remove the DCP-43 board, DVP-41 board and mechanismdeck dust protection sheet.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.
2. Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP602 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardGND : E501 (C-5)/MDC-13G boardAdjustment point : 1LV601 (C-6)/MDC-13G boardSpecifications : A = minimum
(Reference value : 2.5 Vp-p or less)
3. Eject the working tape.
10-3-2. CUE Playback Level Adjustment
Preparation
. S502 (C-4)/FP-152 board (B side) → CUE
. DISPLAY CTL/TC/DATA switch/inside panel → TC
. 1RV603 (D-6) /MDC-13G board (B side)→ Mechanical center
. 1RV604 (D-6) /MDC-13G board (B side)→ Mechanical center
Adjustment Procedure
1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and play back the1 kHz, 0 VU signal segment (TIME; 00 : 00 : 00 : 00to 00 : 01 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Adjustment point : 1RV605 (D-6)/MDC-13G board(B side)
Specifications : 0.0 ±0.1 dBm (600 Z)
2. Play back the 1 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 01 : 30 : 00 to 00 : 02 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Measure the playback signal level, and take notes ofthe values of the level.
3. Play back the 7 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 03 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 03 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Adjustment point : 1RV604 (D-6)/MDC-13G board(B side)
Specifications : Within ±0.2 dB with referenceto the 1 kHz playback level
A
10-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. Play back the 12 kHz, _20 VU signal segment (TIME ;00 : 04 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 04 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point: AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Adjustment point : 1RV603 (D-6)/MDC-13G board(B side)
Specifications : Within ±0.2 dB with reference tothe 1 kHz playback level
5. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and play back the1 kHz, 0 VU signal segment (TIME ; 00 : 00 : 00 : 00to 00 : 01 : 25 : 00).Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Adjustment point : 1RV605 (D-6)/MDC-13G board(B side)
Specifications : 0.0 ±0.1 dBm (600 Z)
10-3-3. CUE Recording Bias PresetAdjustment
Preparation
. If any cable is connected to the AUDIO IN connector/rear panel, remove it.
. Remove the DCP-43 board, DVP-41 board and mecha-nism deck dust protection sheet.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.
2. Equipment : Digital voltmeterMeasurement point : TP603 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardGND : TP604 (D-6)/MDC-13G boardAdjustment point : 1RV602 (D-6)/MDC-13G board
(B-5)Specifications : 18.5 ±1.0 mV (rms)
G F E D
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
B
A
S501
S502EECUE
(Factory set)
HG
FED
C
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
TP606
E501
LV601TP602
TP603
TP604
TP601
TP605
TP
202
TP
201
TP
301
TP
203
TP
204
TP
101
TP
102
TP
302
H G
F E D
C
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
S403
S401S402
RV401
RV605
RV603
RV604RV602
FP-152 board (B side) MDC-13G board (B side)
MDC-13G board (A side)
10-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjustment-1
Preparation
. AUDIO SELECT switch CH1/inside panel → AUTO
. CUE IN SELECT switch/inside panel → CH1
. Connect sine wave of 1 kHz at +4 dBu to AUDIO CH1IN connector/rear panel.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.(Record a working tape for about 20 seconds.)
2. Play back the recorded segment of a working tape.
3. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Confirm that the audio level “A” is 0.4 ±0.2 dBm (600 Z).If the audio level “A” is outside the range of 0.4 ±0.2dBm (600 Z), take notes of the values the audio level“A” and proceed to step 4.
4. Rewind a working tape and play back the recordedsegment of a working tape again.
5. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : TP501 (B-3)/FP-152 board
(B side)GND : E501 (B-3)/FP-152 board
(B side)Measure the audio level “B”.
6. Compensate the amount of deviation of the playbacksignal from the specifications.Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : TP501 (B-3)/FP-152 board
(B side)GND : E501 (B-3)/FP-152 board
(B side)Adjustment point : 1RV503 (B-3)/FP-152 board
(B side)Specifications : B_ (A_0.4) ±0.2 dBu
7. Enter the REC mode. (Record a working tape for about20 seconds.)
8. Play back the recorded segment of a working tape.
9. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelCH1 (X) : Pin-2CH1 (Y) : Pin-3GND : Pin-1
Confirm that the audio level is 0.4 ±0.2 dBm (600 Z).If the audio level does not meet the specifications,repeat the procedure starting from step 3 again.
G F E D
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
B
A
E501TP501
RV503
FP-152 board (B side)
10-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-3-5. CUE Record Level Adjustment-2
Preparation
. AUDIO SELECT switch CH1/inside panel → AUTO
. CUE IN SELECT switch/inside panel → CH1
. Connect sine wave of 10 kHz at +4 dBu to AUDIO INCH1 connector/rear panel.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Insert a working tape and enter the REC mode.(Record a working tape for about 10 seconds.)
2. Play back the recorded segment of a working tape.
3. Equipment : Audio analyzerMeasurement point : AUDIO OUT connector/
rear panelConfirm that the audio level “A” is 0.4 ±1.5 dBm (600Z).nThe audio level “A” is the signal level when 1 kHz isinput at step 3 in “10-3-4. CUE Record Level Adjust-ment-1”.
4. If the audio signal level “A” does not meet the specifi-cations, adjust 1RV602 (D-6)/MDC-13G board (Bside) as follows.If the measured level is larger than the specifications:
Turn RV602 slightly clockwise.If the measured level is smaller than the specifications:
Turn RV602 slightly counter-clockwise.
5. If RV602 is adjusted in step 4, repeat the adjustmentstarting from step 1.
Setting upon Completion of Adjustment
Return the switch S502 (C-4)/FP-152 board (B side) to theoriginal position (default setting when shipped from thefactory).
H G
F E D
C
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
S403
S401S402
RV401
RV605
RV603
RV604RV602
MDC-13G board (B side)
10-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-4. System Control Alignment
10-4-1. Battery Voltage CorrectionAdjustment
This adjustment supplies accurate +12 V power voltage tothe DC IN connector. The Battery Voltage CorrectionAdjustment is required when the FP-152 board is replaced.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION”. The
message “FEED ACCURATE DC +12V, PUSH RETO ADJUST” appears.
4. Press the rotary encoder to start adjustment.5. When adjustment is complete, the message “COM-
PLETE” appears. Then press the rotary encoder.
10-4-2. Antenna Tuning FrequencyAdjustment (Tele-File)
Adjustment Procedure
m. The adjustment frequency is 13.56 MHz.. Set the oscilloscope Filter and Bandwidth Limiter, etc to
OFF. Check that the oscilloscope probe is alreadycalibrated.
1. Insert a cassette on which the memory label is at-tached.
2. Connect TP103 with the frame chassis (metallic part)of the unit with a shorting clip.
3. Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP101 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardAdjustment point : CT101 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardSpecifications : A = Maximum amplitude
(9 Vp-p or more)
4 Equipment : OscilloscopeMeasurement point : TP102 (A-2)/CCM-45G boardSpecifications : A > 9 Vp-p
B
A
1 2 3 4
CT101
TP101TP102
TP103
A
CCM-45G board (A side)
10-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-5. Servo System Alignment
All adjustments of the servo system are performed usingthe adjustment menu of the maintenance mode.The data obtained by adjustment is automatically saved inthe servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board).nBefore starting the servo system adjustment, be sure to setthe VTR SAVE/STBY switch on the inside panel to theSTBY position.
When an adjustment failsWhen an adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears on the menu display. The following two causes arepossible.. The adjustment itself has not been completed to its end.. The adjustment ended successfully but the data failed to
be saved in the servo system EEPROM.To determine which of the above two causes applies,execute “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE”. If this endswith the message “INCOMPLETE”, communicationwith the servo system EEPROM may have an error.For details of how to execute “A000 : NV-RAMINITIALIZE”, refer to Section 10-5-1.
Adjustment items Menu display
10-5-1. Servo System A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZEAdjustment DataInitialization
10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYAdjustment
10-5-3. Capstan Add-On A002 : CAPSTAN DELAYRecording Adjustment
10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment A003 : DRUM PHASE
nFor the procedure of starting up the maintenance mode,refer to Section 11-2-2.
10-5-1. Servo System Adjustment DataInitialization
When the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13Gboard) is replaced, the servo adjustment data must beinitialized as follows.nBe sure to turn off the main power upon completion of theservo system adjustment data initialization. Then turn themain power back on and perform all of the adjustmentsshown in Sections 10-5-2 through 10-5-4.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE”. The message
“PUSH RE TO INITIALIZE” appears.4. Press the rotary encoder to start initialization.
The message “NOW INITIALIZING ...” appearswhile the initialization is in progress.
5. When initialization ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears.
6. Turn off the main power once.
When the adjustment failsWhen the initialization fails, the message “INCOM-PLETE” appears.Check the following possible causes.. IC403/MDC-13G board is defective.. Communication between the MDC-13G board and the
SS-92G board is defective.
10-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-5-2. Capstan FG Duty Ratio Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.3. Select “A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY”. The message
“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.4. Press the rotary encoder to start adjustment.
The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.
5. When adjustment ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears. The adjustment data isautomatically saved in the servo system EEPROM(IC403/MDC-13G board).
When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears.Check the following possible causes.. MDC-13G board capstan FG amplifier or capstan motor
driver circuit is defective.. SS-92G board capstan drive output signal or duty ratio
adjustment output signal is abnormal.. Capstan motor is defective.
10-5-3. Capstan Add-On RecordingAdjustment
Adjust it by 59.94i format. A working tape is required forthe adjustment. Use the center position, which is at about20 to 25 minutes of a BCT-40HD cassette tape.nYou can check that a working tape is at about the 20-minute position as follows:. The 4 black square indicators “ ” turn on in the
remaining tape indication area on the display window/inside panel.
. The message “20-15” appears in the remaining tapeindication area on VF.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Cue up a working tape to about the 20-minute position.2. Eject the working tape.3. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.5. Select “A002: CAPSTAN DELAY”. The message
“INSERT WORK TAPE” appears.6. Insert a working tape (that has already been cued up to
about the 20-minute position.)7. When the working tape is inserted, the adjustment
starts automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.
8. When adjustment ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears. The adjustment data isautomatically saved in the servo system EEPROM(IC403/MDC-13G board).
9. The working tape is ejected automatically.
When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the working tape is ejected automatically.Check the following possible causes and repeat thisadjustment again.. Tape run is abnormal or the tape is damaged.. Tension of the timing belt needs adjustment.nRefer to the following sections for adjusting the tension ofthe timing belt.8-1-3. FWD Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-4. REV Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
10-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-5-4. Drum Phase Adjustment
The alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) isrequired for this adjustment. The alignment tape (HR2-1A)is used at the position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 10 : 00 : 00.nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tapeother than the specified alignment tape is used for thisadjustment, the correct drum phase cannot be obtainedeven though “COMPLETE” appears upon completion ofadjustment.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Cue up the alignment tape (HR2-1A ) to the positionof 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.
2. Eject the alignment tape.3. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.4. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.5. Select “A003 : DRUM PHASE”.
The message “PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.6. Press the rotary encoder.
The message “INSERT HR2-1A” appears.7. Insert the alignment tape (HR2-1A ) that has been
already cued up to the position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.8. When the alignment tape is inserted, the adjustment
starts automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.
9. When adjustment ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears. The adjustment data isautomatically saved in the servo system EEPROM(IC403/MDC-13G board).
10. The alignment tape is ejected automatically.
When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the alignment tape is ejected automatically.Check the following possible causes and repeat thisadjustment again.. The alignment tape (HR2-1A ) is not cued up to the
correct position of 00 : 01 : 00 : 00.. Tape running is abnormal during playback mode.. IC303/MDC-13G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the MDC-13G board and the SS-
92G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the EQ-88G board and the MDR-
14G board is defective.. Signal circuit between the MDC-13G board and the
MDR-14G board is defective.. Drum motor unit is defective.
10-6. RF System Alignment
All adjustments of the RF system are performed using theadjustment menu of the maintenance mode.nIt is necessary to adjust each 59.94i/50i/23.98PsF frequen-cy of the frame.
Adjustment items Menu display
10-6-1. RF System Continuous A17 : A11 - A16 ALL ADJUSTAutomatic Adjustment
10-6-2. Saving the RF System A1F : NV-RAM CONTROLAdjustment Data
10-6-3. PB Channel Condition C11 : PB CH CONDITIONCheck
10-6-4. REC Channel Condition C12 : REC CH CONDITIONCheck
10-6-1. RF System Continuous AutomaticAdjustment
When this adjustment is once initiated, the followingadjustments are performed automatically in the ordershown below.1. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-
ment during playback mode (A13 : PLAY PLL)2. RF signal A/D conversion gain adjustment (A16 : A/D
GAIN)3. Playback level of PB heads and playback equalizer
circuit gain/phase adjustment (A11 : EQUALIZER)4. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-
ment in FWD mode (A14 : FWD PLL)5. Playback PLL circuit VCO free-run frequency adjust-
ment in REV mode (A15 : REV PLL)6. Record current/record frequency response adjustment
of recording heads (A12 : REC CURRENT)
nFor the above adjustment items 1 through 5, be sure to usethe alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).For the adjustment item 6, use a working tape (BCT-40HD).The correct adjustment cannot be executed if a tape otherthan the specified tape is used for adjustment.
10-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A) and rewind the
alignment tape to the tape top.3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST”. The message
“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Press the rotary encoder and the playback system
adjustment is started automatically.The message “NOW ADJUSTING ...” appears whilethe adjustment is in progress.
6. When playback system adjustment ends successfully,the message “SET WORK TAPE FOR REC CUR-RENT ADJUSTMENT” appears. The alignment tapeis ejected automatically.nThe playback system alignment takes about 3 to 4 min-utes.
7. When a working tape is inserted, the record systemadjustment starts automatically.
8. When the record system adjustment ends with success,the message “AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE” appears.The recording system adjustment takes about 4 to 5minutes.
When the adjustment failsWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears and the alignment is halted automatically at theinstant when an error occurs. The subsequent adjustmentitems are not executed.When the adjustment fails, check the followings in theorder shown below.1. Check whether the alignment tape is HR5-1A or not.2. If the unit is not cleaned, perform cleaning as de-
scribed below and perform the adjustment again.a) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and
repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the adjustment.b) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again
and repeat the above adjustment.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the adjustment.
c) Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth(refer to Section 2-1) and repeat the above adjustmentagain.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the adjustment.If the adjustment fails still, check the followingpossible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo
circuit is defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were
worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part
mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.. Brush/slip ring assembly or its mounting or connec-
tion is defective.. Connection of the flexible board (between the MDR-
14G board and the EQ-88G board) is defective.
10-6-2. Saving the RF System AdjustmentData
nIf the automatic adjustment does not end with success, donot save the adjustment data.
Procedure
1. Select “A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL”.2. Rotate the rotary encoder to move the cursor to
“SAVE ALL ADJUSTMENT DATA”.3. Press the rotary encoder to start saving the data. The
message “NOW SAVING ....” appears while saving isin progress.
4. When saving the data ends successfully, the message“COMPLETE” appears.
10-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
10-6-3. PB Channel Condition Check
This check requires the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No.8-960-076-01).Use the segment of the alignment tape that has the continu-ous recording of 2 minutes or longer.
Check Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A).3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “C11 : PB CH CONDITION”. The message
“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Move the cursor to “ALL” and press the rotary
encoder to start checking.The message “NOW CHECKING ...” appears whilethe checking is in progress.
6. All channels are checked starting from A-CH in order.7. When the check ends successfully, the message
“GRN” appears in the right of “ALL”.
When the check failsWhen the check fails, the message “CONDITION NG” appears.When the check fails, perform the check again in thefollowing order shown below.1. Change the playback position of the alignment and
perform the check again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and
repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again
and repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth
(refer to Section 2-1) and perform the above checkagain.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo
circuit is defective.. Defective adjustment of the RF playback system.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were
worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part
mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.
10-6-4. REC Channel Condition Check
This check requires a working tape (BCT-40HD).
Check Procedure
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Insert a working tape.3. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to
the ON position to start up the maintenance mode.4. Select “C12 : REC CH CONDITION”. The message
“PUSH RE TO ADJUST” appears.5. Move the cursor to “ALL” and press the rotary
encoder to start checking.The message “NOW CHECKING ...” appears whilethe checking is in progress.
6. All channels are checked starting from A-CH in order.7. When the check ends successfully, the message
“GRN” appears in the right of “ALL”.
When the check failsWhen the check fails, the message “CONDITION NG”appears.When the check fails, perform the check again in thefollowing order shown below.1. Perform PB Channel Condition Check using the
alignment tape (HR5-1A). (Refer to Section 10-6-3.)If any abnormality is found, follow the instructionsdescribed in “When the check fails” of Section 10-6-3.When no abnormality is found, proceed to step 2.
2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape andrepeat Section 10-6-4 using a working tape.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again
and repeat the above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (refer
to Section 2-1) and repeat the above check again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of
the check.If the check fails still, check the following possiblecauses.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo
circuit is defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were
worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part
mounting is defective.. The EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.
11-1HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Section 11VTR Maintenance Mode
11-1. Introduction
The VTR maintenance mode of the HDW-F900R is for maintenance and diagnosis, and consists of thetop menu and submenus. The menu structure of the VTR maintenance mode is shown below.The respective menu contents are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit and on the video monitorconnected to the TEST OUT connector of the unit.
Menu Structure of VTR Maintenance Mode
S13 : VTR MAINTE
C0 : SERVO CHECK
C00-03 : SERVO CHECK
C00 : INPUT CHECK
C000 : CASSETTE SW C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SWC002 : TAPE T/E SENSORC003 : HUMID SENSORC004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STSC005 : FUNCTION CAM POS
C1 : RF CHECK
A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZEA001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYA002 : CAPSTAN DELAYA003 : DRUM PHASE
C11 : PB CH CONDITIONC12 : REC CH CONDITION
C2 : AUDIO CHECK
C20 : AUDIO A/D CHKC21 : AUDIO D/A CHKC22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK
A2 : AUDIO ADJUST
A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJA21 : AUDIO D/A ADJA22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
A0 : SERVO ADJUST
A00 : SERVO ADJUST
A1 : RF ADJUST
A11 : EQUALIZERA12 : REC CURRENTA13 : PLAY PLLA14 : FWD PLLA15 : REV PLLA16 : A/D GAINA17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA1F : NV-RAM CONTROL
A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST
A40 : PATH MODE SELA41 : DRUM PHASE
A9 : OTHERS ADJUST
A90 : BATTERY CORRECTIONA91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE
C01 : FUNCTION CAM CHECK C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECKC03 : SLACK CHECK
11-2 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-2. Operation Procedure
11-2-1. Identifying Switches
MENU ON/OFF switchUse this switch to turn the VTR maintenance menu on and off. When the lid is closed, the switch is set inthe OFF position.ON : The VTR maintenance menu is shown on the display.OFF : The VTR maintenance menu is not shown on the display.
ESCAPE switchUse this switch to return to the previous display.
Rotary encoderRotate : Rotate the rotary encoder to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow (→) to select the
desired item.Press : Press the rotary encoder to set the selected item.
11-2-2. How to Enter VTR Maintenance Mode
1. Set the switch S1-1/AT-172 board to the ON position.2. Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to the ON position to start up the maintenance
mode.3. The TOP MENU display appears.4. Select SERVICE and press the rotary encoder.
Rotary encoder
CANCEL/PRSTOFF
ONESCAPE
MENU
ON/SEL
OFFSTATUS
MENU ON/OFF switch
ESCAPE switch
S <TOP MENU>
USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS SERVICE →
.
.
.
.
.
11-3HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. The SERVICE display appears.
6. Select S13 VTR MAINTE and press the rotary encoder.7. The top menu of the VTR MAINTE appears.
nAlternatively, the VTR Maintenance mode can be started as follows instead of steps 6 and 7.
6. Select S00. CONTENTS and press the rotary encoder.(The arrow mark (→) appears next to the submenu.)
7. Rotate the rotary encoder to move the arrow mark (→) to 13. VTR MAINTE and press the rotaryencoder.
11-2-3. How to Exit VTR Maintenance Mode
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch on the inside panel to the OFF position. (Closing the lid turns off theMENU ON/OFF switch automatically.)
11-2-4. Tips on Operations
. The function buttons for inserting a cassette tape, shooting, recording and playing back can be operatedfrom the displays on which the black square box ( ) appears at the top right. Note that operation maynot work as expected when the function buttons are operated while CHECK/ADJUST is in progress.Note that the function buttons for inserting a cassette tape and other functions cannot be operated on thedisplays without the black square box ( ) displayed at the top right.
. There is no specific order of operation in the respective menu items; each menu item can be operatedindependently. However, by performing all of the menu items in numerical order of menu number, theunit can be thoroughly checked and adjusted by the built-in CHECK/ADJUST functions.
. Be sure to use the specified alignment tape and/or working tape in the CHECK/ADJUST items thatrequire a cassette tape to be used.
S00.CONTENTS TOP 01.MENU SET 02.SP FUNC 03.VA ADJUST 04.CCD ADJUST 05.DCP ADJUST 06.RP DC OFFSET 07.MANUAL RPN 08.SD ADJUST 09.DR ADJUST 10.VTR MODE-7
VTR MAINTENANCE MENU
C0 : SERVO CHECK C1 : RF CHECK C2 : AUDIO CHECK A0 : SERVO ADJUST A1 : RF ADJUST A2 : AUDIO ADJUST A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST A9 : OTHERS ADJUST
11-4 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3. Contents of Menus
11-3-1. Servo System Self-Diagnosis Mode(C0 : SERVO CHECK)
This mode self-diagnoses the servo system automatically or manually.nTo self-diagnose the servo system manually, the outside panel needsto be removed.
Operation procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select C0 : SERVO CHECK and press the rotary encoder.
(If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected automatically.)The message “C00-03 : SERVO CHECK” appears.
SERVO CHECK MENU
C00-03:SERVO CHECK
SERVO CHECK MENU C0 :SERVO CHECK C00:INPUT CHECK C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK C03:SLACK CHECK
4. Press the rotary encoder. The SERVO CHECK MENU displayappears.
C00 : INPUT CHECK
Checks the sensor operations automatically or manually.1. From the SERVO CHECK MENU display, select “C00 : INPUT
CHECK” and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to be checked and press the rotary encoder.3. The selected item is checked.4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the INPUT CHECK
display.
SERVO CHECK MENU C00:INPUT CHECK C000:CASSETTE SW C001:CASSETTE COMP. SW C002:TAPE T/E SENSOR C003:HUMID SENSOR C004:DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS C005:FUNCTION CAM POS
11-5HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Sensor locations
nThe numbers that are put to the sensors in the illustration correspond to the menu item numbers of theINPUT CHECK in Section 11.
2 Cassette- in sensor
1 REC INHIBIT sensor
3 Tape-end sensor 3 Full-top sensor
4 Humid sensor
4 Humid sensor
3 Tape-top sensor6 Function cam sensors
2 Cassette lock sensor
1 Cassette ID sensor
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
ID-5
ID-6
11-6 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11111 C000 : CASSETTE SWChecks the functions of the cassette ID sensor and the REC INHIBITsensor.
1. Select “C000 : CASSETTE SW” and press the rotary encoder.2. Press the cassette ID sensor and the REC INHIBIT sensor with a
fingertip. Alternatively, insert a cassette tape so that the abovesensors are pressed down.
3. Check that the bit corresponding to the pressed sensor changes to“1” on the display. (The bit corresponding to the un-pressedsensor remains “0”.)(For details of the respective sensors, refer to Section 1-1-3,“Sensor Layout Diagram and Function Description”.)mIf the bit that corresponds to the pressed sensor does not change to“1”, or does not return to “0” when released, check the following.For the cassette ID sensor. The corresponding cassette ID sensor (Refer to the table below.). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
boardFor the REC INHIBIT sensor. REC INHIBIT sensor (Refer to the table below.). Signal path between the SE-613 board and the MDC-13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
board
Sensor correspondence tableCassette ID sensor
ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 ID-5 ID-6
Ref./ S308 S304 S305 S303 S301 S302MDC-13G board
REC INHIBIT sensor
ID B
Ref./ S1SE-613 board
SERVO CHECK MENU C000:CASSETTE SW 3:ID-3 1:ID-1 2:ID-2 5:ID-5 4:ID-4 6:ID-6
B:S REC INH
B 312 SW B654321 5 4 0000000 6
11-7HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
22222 C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SWChecks functions of the sensors used in the cassette compartmentblock.
1. Select “C001 : CASSETTE COMP. SW” and press the rotaryencoder.
2. Check to see that the sensor of the cassette compartment changesits status on the monitor from “OFF” → “DET” → “OFF” whenthe cassette lid is opened, and a cassette tape is inserted gently andthen the cassette is pushed in until the clicking sound is heard.
3. Check that the cassette-in sensor changes its status on the monitorfrom “OUT” to “IN”.
4. Check that the status returns from “IN” to “OUT” when theEJECT button is pressed. (The status of the cassette-lock sensoron the monitor changes from “OFF” → “DET” → “OFF” eitherwhen the cassette lid is closed and when the EJECT button ispressed.)mIf status of the cassette-in sensor does not change its status to“IN” or does not return to “OUT”, or if status of the cassette-locksensor does not return to “OFF”, check the followings.For the cassette-in sensor. Cassette-in sensor (S2/SE-613 board). Signal path between the SE-613 board and the MDC-13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
boardFor the cassette-lock sensor. Cassette-lock sensor (PH307/ MDC-13G board). Cassette lock detector circuit (Q307 and others/MDC-13G
board and IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
board
nFunction of the cassette-in sensor can be checked by pressing thecassette-in sensor with finger. However, if it is pressed by finger, theunit judges that a cassette tape is inserted and SLACK-342 occurs.
SERVO CHECK MENU C001:CASSETTE COMP. SW
CASSETTE IN SW:OUT
CASS-COM LOCK :OFF
11-8 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
33333 C002 : TAPE T/E SENSORChecks functions of the tape-top sensor, tape-end sensor and full-topsensor.
1. Select “C002 : TAPE T/E SENSOR” and press the rotary encoder.2. Bring a piece of metal (such as screwdriver tip) closer to the full-
top sensor. Check that status of the full-top sensor on the monitorchanges from “OFF” to “DET”. Check also that status returnsfrom “DET” to “OFF” when a piece of metal is removed from thesensor.
3. Insert a cassette tape and rewind it to the tape top. Check to seethat status of the top-sensor changes to “DET” at the tape top andthen returns to “OFF”.At the same time, the tape is advanced in fast-forward (or play).Check to see that status of the end-sensor change to “DET” at thetape end and then returns to “OFF”.mIf “DET” is not displayed at the specified position or status doesnot return to “OFF”, check the followings.. Tape position detector circuit (IC304 and others/MDC-13G
board and IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the respective sensors and the MDC-13G
board (CN508, CN509, CN512). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
board
mThis unit monitors the following sensors.. When a cassette tape is running in the FWD direction :
Tape-end sensor. When a cassette tape is running in the REW direction :
Tape-top sensor. When a cassette tape is not inserted : Full-top sensor
SERVO CHECK MENU C002:TAPE T/E SENSOR
FULL TOP SENSOR:OFF
TOP SENSOR:OFF
END SENSOR:OFF
11-9HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
44444 C003 : HUMID SENSORChecks operation of the humid sensor.
1. Select “C003 : HUMID SENSOR” and press the rotary encoder.2. Touch the humid sensor (2 locations) with a cotton swab moist-
ened with water.3. Check to see that “DRY” changes to “WET” when the humid
sensor is moistened.n“WET” appears even only one of the two sensors is moistenedand detects humidity. Therefore, check the two sensors respec-tively.
4. Check that the monitor display changes to “DRY” when thehumid sensor is dried as it is wiped with a dry cotton swab or asthe water content is evaporated by blowing air with a blower.mIf the monitor display does not change from “DRY” to “WET”when the humid sensor is moistened or if the monitor display doesnot return from “WET” to “DRY” when the humid sensor isdried, check the followings.. Humid sensor. Humid detector circuit (IC303 and others/MDC-13G board, IC1
and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the respective sensors and the MDC-13G
board (CN510, CN511). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
boardnThe TALLY lamp keeps turning on for about 60 seconds after thedisplay returned from “WET” to “DRY” and the HUMID displayappears on the display window.(For the details of the warning system, refer to “8-3. OperationWarnings” of the Operation Manual.)
SERVO CHECK MENU C003:HUMID SENSOR
HUMID SENSOR : DRY
11-10 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
55555 C004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STSIndicates the operating status of drum motor and capstan motor.
nIn order to let the capstan motor enter the “LOCK” state, a cassettetape on which the CTL signal is already recorded, must be playedback.Playback an appropriate cassette tape on which the CTL signal isalready recorded, or playback the alignment HR2-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-11) or HR5-1A (Part No. 8-960-076-01).
1. Select “C004 : DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS” and press the rotaryencoder.
2. The operating status of drum motor and capstan motor aredisplayed on display.<Status of each motor>When stopped : STOPWhen rotating (non-locked) : ROTATEWhen rotating (locked) : LOCK
mIf a motor does not rotate, or if the monitor display does notchange even if the motor is rotating, check the followings.. Drum motor and the motor driver circuit (IC1 and others/MDR-
14G board). Drum FG/PG detector circuit (IC4 and others/MDR-14G board,
IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Reference signal (DVP_REF_FRM/CF) (DVP-41 board). Capstan motor and the motor driver circuit (IC102 and others/
MDC-13G board). Capstan FG detector circuit (IC201 and others/MDC-13G
board, IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between and the MDR-14G board and the MDC-
13G board. Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
board
SERVO CHECK MENU C004:DRUM/CAP MOTOR STS
DRUM MOTOR : STOP
CAPSTAN MOTOR : STOP
11-11HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
nThe display on monitor changes in accordance with thestatus of the function cam sensor as shown in the FunctionCam Code Transition Table.The status of each sensor can be checked by either one ofthe following two methods.
1. Observe the check-land (CL301 to CL304/MDC-13Gboard) with an oscilloscope. The SS-92G board musthave been removed earlier to connect an oscilloscopeto the check-land. As the function cam can be movedof its position by hand, the sensor status also changes.Move the function cam by hand as follows and checkthat the sensor status changes accordingly as shown inthe table.. While pushing the manual eject gear with a flat-head
screwdriver tip, rotate the manual eject gear in theclockwise direction (unloading direction) or counter-clockwise direction (loading direction). (Refer toSection 1-11.)
nIf the front lid has been opened, never rotate the gearin the clockwise direction.
2. Connect the SS-92G board connector (CN201) and theMDC-13G board connector (CN201) with the use ofthe EX-764 board and the two flexible card wires (45pins). Check the function cam sensor status with anoscilloscope referring to the function cam codetransition table.In this case, the function cam is controlled of itsposition automatically by the SS-92G board. There-fore, check that the function cam sensor status matcheswith the monitor display as shown in the FunctionCam Code Transition table.
Function Cam Code Transition Table
Detecting Sensor status (MDC-13G board)position
Monitor CL304 CL303 CL302 CL301
display (CN201-39) (CN201-40) (CN201-41) (CN201-42)
B0 H L L L
EJECT H L L H
B1 H L H H
STBY H L H L
B2 H H H L
LOAD1 H H H H
LOAD2 H H L H
LOAD H H L L
LIMIT L H L L
B3 L H L H
STOP L H H H
B4 L H H L
RUN L L H L
B5 L L H H
CL L L L H
B6 L L L L
MDC-13G board (A side)
66666 C005 : FUNCTION CAM POSIndicates the detecting position of the function gear.
1. Select “C005: FUNCTION CAM POS” and press the rotaryencoder.
2. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-ly available) and check to see that the arrow mark (→) moves.
3. Check to see that the arrow mark (→) moves when the tapeEJECT button is pressed.mIf the arrow mark (→) does not move even when the tape isinserted or ejected, check the followings.. Function cam sensor (PH301 to PH304/MDC-13G board). Cam position detector circuit (Q301 and others/MDC-13G
board, IC1 and others/SS-92G board). Signal path between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G boardIf the function cam does not operate correctly, the SLACK erroroccurs. Take an appropriate measure in accordance with the corre-sponding error code referring to Section “3. Error Diagnostics”.
CL3
04
CL3
03
CL3
02
CL3
01
SERVO CHECK MENU C005:FUNCTION CAM POS
1.B0 9.LIMIT 2.EJECT 10.B3 3.B1 11.STOP 4.STBY 12.B4 5.B2 13.RUN 6.LOAD1 14.B5 7.LOAD2 15.CL 8.LOAD 16.B6
→
11-12 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
C01 : FUNCTION CAM CHECK
Checks operation of the function cam automatically.1. Select “C01: FUNCTION CAM CHECK” on the SERVO
CHECK MENU display and press the rotary encoder.
SERVO CHECK MENU C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK
PUSH RE TO CHECK
SERVO CHECK MENU C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK
NOW CHECKING......
SERVO CHECK MENU C01:FUNCTION CAM CHECK
COMPLETE
2. Press the rotary encoder again, then the self-diagnosis starts.
3. The self-diagnosis ends and the result of the self-diagnosis isdisplay.When the self-diagnosis ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the self-diagnosis fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.
4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.mIf the message “INCOMPLETE” appears (the SLACK indicationdoes not appear), perform the following.1) Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECK
MENU display.2) Let the display show C01: INPUT CHECK → C005 : FUNC-
TION CAM. POS and check the faulty positions. (The arrowmark (→) stops at the position where error occurs.)
3) Investigate the cause of the trouble by following Error Code61 and Error Code 62 in Section “3. Error Diagnostics”.
11-13HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK
Checks operation of the servo system motor automatically.1. Select “C02 : MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK” on the SERVO
CHECK MENU display and press the rotary encoder.
SERVO CHECK MENU C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK
PUSH RE TO CHECK
SERVO CHECK MENU C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK
NOW CHECKING......
SERVO CHECK MENU C02:MOTOR SERVO & FG CHECK
COMPLETE
SERVO CHECK MENU C03:SLACK CHECK
SLACK CODE DATE TIME1.0000 00/00 00:002.0000 00/00 00:003.0000 00/00 00:004.0000 00/00 00:005.0000 00/00 00:006.0000 00/00 00:007.0000 00/00 00:008.0000 00/00 00:00
2. Check that a cassette tape is not inserted, and press the rotaryencoder. The self-diagnosis starts.
3. The self-diagnosis ends and the result of the self-diagnosis isdisplay.When the self-diagnosis ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the self-diagnosis fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.
4. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” appears, perform thefollowing.The TALLY lamp flashes and an error code appears in thetimecode position on the display window.(For the details of the warning system, refer to “3-1-2. Details ofError Codes”.)
C03 : SLACK CHECK
Displays the history of the eight slack detections that have occurred inthe past.1. Select “C03 : SLACK CHECK” on the SERVO CHECK MENU
display and press the rotary encoder.2. The SLACK information in the past is displayed as follows.
1 : Newest information8 : Oldest informationFor details of the SLACK information, refer to “3. Error Diagnostics”.
3. Press the ESCAPE switch to return to the SERVO CHECKMENU display.
11-14 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-2. RF System Self-Diagnosis Mode(C1 : RF CHECK)
Checks the error conditions of the RF system during recording andplayback. Result of the self-diagnosis is displayed in 3 steps (GRN,YEL and RED).
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected
automatically.)3. Select “C1 : RF CHECK” and press the rotary encoder. The RF
CHECK MENU display appears.
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
C12:REC CH CONDITION
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
PUSH RE TO CHECK
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
NOW CHECKING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D GRN E F G H ALL
C11 : PB CH CONDITION
1. Select “C11: PB CH CONDITION” on the RF CHECK MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.
11111 To diagnose all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).
nSelect the portion of the alignment tape that has 2 minutes ofcontinuous recording.
2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The self-diagnosis starts from channel A.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the self-diagnosisstarts.
11-15HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed.When the adjustment ends normally :“GRN” is displayed in the ALL column.
nWhen the adjustment fails: “CONDITION NG” is displayed, checkthe followings in the order as shown below again.
1. Change the playback position of the alignment and perform thecheck again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.
2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and repeat theabove check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.
3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again and repeatthe above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.
4. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (referring toSection 2-1) and repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is
defective.. Defective adjustment of the RF playback system.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting is
defective.. EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective
22222 To check the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).
nSelect the portion of the alignment tape that has 30 seconds ofcontinuous recording.
2. Select the desired channel to check and press the rotary encoder.3. The check result appears in the selected channel only. (It is not
displayed in the ALL column.)
When the adjustment fails :“CONDITION NG” is displayed. The worst result isdisplayed in the ALL column.
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
COMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C GRN D GRN E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN→ALL GRN
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
CONDITION NG
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D RED E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN ALL RED→
RF CHECK MENU C11:PB CH CONDITION
COMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E GRN F G H ALL
→
11-16 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
C12 : REC CH CONDITION
1. Select “C12 : REC CH CONDITION” on the RF CHECK MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.
RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION
PUSH RE TO CHECK
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION
NOW CHECKING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D GRN E F G H ALL
RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION
COMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C GRN D GRN E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN→ALL GRN
RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION
CONDITION NG
CH RSLT CH RSLT A GRN B GRN C YEL D RED E GRN F GRN G GRN H GRN ALL RED→
11111 To diagnose all channels1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-
ly available).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The self-diagnosis starts from channel A.
If a working tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT WORKTAPE” appears and the cassette lid opens. When a working tapeis inserted, the self-diagnosis starts.
4. The self-diagnosis results of all channels are displayed.
When the self-diagnosis ends normally :“GRN” is displayed in the ALL column.
When the self-diagnosis fails : “CONDITION NG” isdisplayed. The worst result is displayed in the ALLcolumn.
11-17HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
nWhen the adjustment fails and “CONDITION NG” is displayed,check the followings in the order as shown below.
1. Perform C11 : PB CH CONDITION check again using thealignment tape (HR5-1A).
2. If any abnormality is found, check the possible causes referring ton of C11 : PB CH CONDITION.
If abnormality cannot be found in the above check, perform the checkagain in the following order shown below.1. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape and check the
“REC Channel Condition Check” using a working tape.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.
2. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning tape again and repeatthe above check.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.
3. Perform cleaning with the use of a cleaning cloth (referring toSection 2-1) and repeat the above adjustment again.→ When no abnormality is found, this is the end of the check.If the check fails still, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is
defective.. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting is
defective.. EQ-88G board is defective.. Drum assembly is defective.
22222 To check the desired channel only1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-
ly available).2. Select the desired channel to check and press the rotary encoder.3. The check result appears in the selected channel only. (It is not
displayed in the ALL column.)
RF CHECK MENU C12:REC CH CONDITION
COMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E GRN F G H ALL
→
11-18 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-3. Audio System Adjustment Value Check Mode(C2 : AUDIO CHECK)
This mode checks the audio system adjustment values stored in theunit.
Operation procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “C2 : AUDIO CHECK”, and press the rotary encoder.
C2 : The AUDIO CHECK MODE display appears.
C20 : AUDIO A/D CHECK
1. Select “C20 : AUDIO A/D CHK” on the AUDIO CHECK MODEdisplay, and press the rotary encoder. Results of all the channelsappears.
C21 : AUDIO D/A CHECK
1. Select “C21 : AUDIO D/A CHK” on the AUDIO CHECK MODEdisplay, and press the rotary encoder. Results of all the channelsappears.
C22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK
1. Select “C22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK” on the AUDIO CHECKMODE display, and press the rotary encoder. Results for the CH1and CH2 appears.
AUDIO CHECK MODE
C20:AUDIO A/D CHK C21:AUDIO D/A CHK C22:AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK
AUDIO CHECK MODEC20:AUDIO A/D CHECK
CH1 A/D DATA:1DF0 CH2 A/D DATA:1DE2 CH3 A/D DATA:1DA1 CH4 A/D DATA:1DBB
AUDIO CHECK MODEC21:AUDIO D/A CHECK
CH1 D/A DATA:1EDC CH2 D/A DATA:1F58 CH3 D/A DATA:1EDC CH4 D/A DATA:1F58
AUDIO CHECK MODEC22:AUDIO SIDE VOL CHK
CH1 DATA:0280 CH2 DATA:03C0
11-19HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-4. SERVO System Adjustment Mode(A0 : SERVO ADJUST)
This mode adjusts the servo system automatically.The adjustment data obtained by this adjustment is automaticallysaved in the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board) uponcompletion of this adjustment.n. Before starting the servo system adjustment, be sure to set the VTR
SAVE/STBY switch on the inside panel to the STBY position.. When an adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE” appears
on the menu display. The following two causes are possible.1. The adjustment itself has not completed to its end.2. The adjustment ended successfully but the data failed to be
saved in the servo system EEPROM.To determine which of the above two causes applies, execute “A000: NV-RAM INITIALIZE” to check if communication with the servosystem EEPROM is faulty or not. If “A000 : NV-RAM INITIAL-IZE” ends with the message “INCOMPLETE”, communication withthe servo system EEPROM may have an error and the data savingoperation has ended with fail.
The SERVO system adjustment is required when the following boardsand the parts are replaced.When the following boards or parts are replaced, execute the corre-sponding adjustment item as shown below.
nWhen both A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY and A002 : CAPSTAN DE-LAY must be executed, execute them in the order of A001 → A002.
Replaced board/part Adjustment item to be executed
MDR-14G board A003 : DRUM PHASE
Upper drum assembly A003 : DRUM PHASE
Drum assembly A003 : DRUM PHASE
S-tension regulator band assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
T-tension regulator band assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
Timing belt A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
S/T idler assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
S-soft-brake assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
T-soft brake arm A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
S-tension regulator assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
T-tension regulator assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
Reel table A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
Reel drive gear assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
Pinch arm assembly A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
MDC-13G board A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY
A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
A003 : DRUM PHASE
Capstan motor A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY
A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
11-20 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “A0 : SERVO ADJUST” and press the rotary encoder.
The A00 : SERVO ADJUST appears.4. Press the rotary encoder. (If a cassette tape is inserted, it is ejected
automatically.)SERVO ADJUST MENU display appears.
A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE
When the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board) isreplaced, the servo system adjustment data is initialized.m. Turn off the main power of this unit when adjustment is completed.. Turn on the main power again, then be sure to implement the
following servo adjustments.A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTYA002 : CAPSTAN DELAYA003 : DRUM PHASE
1. Select “A000 : NV-RAM INITIALIZE” on the SERVO ADJUSTMENU display and press the rotary encoder.
2. Press the rotary encoder again, then the initialization starts.
SERVO ADJUST MENU
A00:SERVO ADJUST
SERVO ADJUST MENU
A000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE A001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY A002:CAPSTAN DELAY A003:DRUM PHASE
SERVO ADJUST MENUA000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE
COMPLETE
3. Initialization ends.When the initialization ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the initialization fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the initialization fails and the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes.. IC403/MDC-13G board is defective.. Communication between the MDC-13G board and the SS-92G
board is defective.
11-21HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY
Adjusts the duty ratio of the capstan FG signal.1. Select “A001 : CAPSTAN FG DUTY” on the SERVO ADJUST
MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Press the rotary encoder again to start adjustment.
SERVO ADJUST MENU
A000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE A001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY A002:CAPSTAN DELAY A003:DRUM PHASE
SERVO ADJUST MENUA001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY
COMPLETE
3. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)).When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes.. MDC-13G board capstan FG amplifier or capstan motor driver
circuit is defective.. SS-92G board capstan drive output signal or duty ratio adjust-
ment output signal is abnormal.. Capstan motor is defective.
11-22 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY
Adjusts the capstan add-on recording.Perform this adjustment in the 59.94i format. A working tape isrequired for this adjustment. Use the center position, which is at about20 to 25 minute position of a BCT-40HD cassette tape.nYou can check that a working tape is at about the 20-minute positionas follows:. The 4 black square indicators “ ” turn on in the remaining tape
indication area on the display window/inside panel.. The message “20-15” appears in the remaining tape indication area
on VF.
1. Select “A002 : CAPSTAN DELAY” on the SERVO ADJUSTMENU display and press the rotary encoder.
2. Press the rotary encoder again. The cassette lid opens automatical-ly.
3. When a working tape is inserted, the adjustment starts automati-cally.
SERVO ADJUST MENU
A000:NV-RAM INITIALIZE A001:CAPSTAN FG DUTY A002:CAPSTAN DELAY A003:DRUM PHASE
SERVO ADJUST MENUA002:CAPSTAN DELAY
INSERT WORK TAPE
SERVO ADJUST MENUA002:CAPSTAN DELAY
COMPLETE
4. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)). Aworking tape is ejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes and then performA002 : CAPSAN DELAY adjustment again.. Tape run is abnormal or the tape is damaged.. Tension of the timing belt needs adjustment.Refer to the following sections for adjusting the tension of thetiming belt.8-1-3. FWD Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-4. REV Holdback Tension Adjustment8-1-5. Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
11-23HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A003 : DRUM PHASE
Adjusts the drum phase.The alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) is required forthis adjustment. The alignment tape (HR2-1A) is used at the positionof 00 : 01 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 10 : 00 : 00.Contents of this adjustment is same as that of “11-3-7. MechanismAdjustment Mode (A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST), A41 : DRUMPHASE (Adjusts the drum phase)”.
1. Select “A003: DRUM PHASE” on the SERVO ADJUST MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.
SERVO ADJUST MENUA003:DRUM PHASE
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
SERVO ADJUST MENUA003:DRUM PHASE
INSERT HR2-1A
SERVO ADJUST MENUA003:DRUM PHASE
COMPLETE
2 Press the rotary encoder again. The cassette lid opens automatical-ly.
3. When the alignment tape (HR2-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-11) isinserted, the adjustment starts automatically.nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tape other thanthe specified alignment tape is used for this adjustment, thecorrect drum phase cannot be obtained even though “COM-PLETE” appears upon completion of adjustment.
4. The adjustment ends. (The adjustment data is automatically savedin the servo system EEPROM (IC403/MDC-13G board)). Thealignment tape is ejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “INCOMPLETE” appears.mWhen the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE”appears, check the following possible causes and then performA003 : DRUM PHASE adjustment again.. The alignment tape is not cued up to the correct position of 00 :
01 : 00 : 00.. Tape running is abnormal during playback mode.. IC303/MDC-13G board is defective.. Signal circuit between MDC-13G board and the SS-92G board
is defective.. Signal circuit between EQ-88G board and the MDR-14G board
is defective.. Signal circuit between MDC-13G board and the MDR-14G
board is defective.. Drum motor unit is defective.
11-24 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-5. RF System Adjustment Mode(A1 : RF ADJUST)
This item adjusts the RF system automatically.The data display appears while the STOP button is being pressed. It isnot displayed while the adjustment is in progress.
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (When a cassette tape is inserted, it is
ejected automatically.)3. Select “A1 : RF ADJUST” and press the rotary encoder. The RF
ADJUST MENU display appears.nIn order to save the respective adjustment data, select A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL and execute “SAVE ALL ADJUSTMENTDATA”.To return the adjustment data to the original data before startingadjustment, execute “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” on theA1F : NV-RAM CONTROL.
nIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed in the automaticadjustment, do not save the adjustment data in the NV-RAM(IC1104/EQ-88G board).
A11 : EQUALIZER
Adjusts the playback level (VC) of the PB heads, and the gain (FQ)and the phase (PH) of the playback equalizer circuit.1. Select “A11: EQUALIZER” on the RF ADJUST MENU display
and press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENU
A11:EQUALIZER A12:REC CURRENT A13:PLAY PLL A14:FWD PLL A15:REV PLL A16:A/D GAIN A17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST A1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
ch VC FQ PH ch VC FQ PH A XX YY ZZ B XX YY ZZ C XX YY ZZ D XX YY ZZ E XX YY ZZ F XX YY ZZ G XX YY ZZ H XX YY ZZ ALL
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX, YY and ZZ are the 1-byte data.)
11-25HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).
nBe sure to use the specified alignment tape. If any tape other thanthe specified alignment tape is used, the adjustment cannot beperformed correctly.
2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts from channel A.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed.When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER
NOW ADJUSTING... CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA11:EQUALIZER
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.
22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
11-26 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH I EQ CH I EQ A XX YY B XX YY C XX YY D XX YY E XX YY F XX YY G XX YY H XX YY ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT
NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA12:REC CURRENT
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.22222 To adjust the desired channel only
1. Insert a working tape (blank tape : BCT-40HD that is commer-cially available).
2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
A12 : REC CURRENT
Adjusts the recording current and recording frequency responsecharacteristics of the record heads automatically.1. Select “A12 : REC CURRENT” on the RF ADJUST MENU
display and press the rotary encoder.
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX and YY are the 1-byte data.)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert a working tape (blank tape: BCT-40HD that is commercial-
ly available).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts from channel A.
If a working tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT WORKTAPE” appears and the cassette lid opens. When a working tapeis inserted, and then the adjustment starts.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
11-27HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A13 : PLAY PLL
Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the PLAY mode automatically.1. Select “A13 : PLAY PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display
and press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH VR CH VR A XX B XX C XX D XX E XX F XX G XX H XX ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL
NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA13:PLAY PLL
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX is the 1-byte data.)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.
11-28 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
11-29HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A14 : FWD PLL
Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the FWD mode automatically.1. Select “A14 : FWD PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display and
press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH VR CH VR A XX B XX C XX D XX E XX F XX G XX H XX ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL
NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA14:FWD PLL
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX is the 1-byte data.)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.
11-30 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
11-31HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A15 : REV PLL
Adjusts the VCO free-running frequency of the playback PLL circuitthat is used in the REV mode automatically.1. Select “A15 : REV PLL” on the RF ADJUST MENU display and
press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH VR CH VR A XX B XX C XX D XX E XX F XX G XX H XX ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL
NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA15:REV PLL
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX is the 1-byte data.)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.
11-32 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A: Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
11-33HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A16 : A/D GAIN
Adjusts gain of the A/D converter that is used to A/D convert theplayback RF signal automatically.1. Select “A16 : A/D GAIN” on the RF ADJUST MENU display
and press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
CH VR CH VR A XX B XX C XX D XX E XX F XX G XX H XX ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN
NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL OK
RF ADJUST MENUA16:A/D GAIN
INCOMPLETE
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B NG C OK D OK E OK F OK G OK H OK ALL NG
When the STOP button is pressed at this timing, the adjustmentdata as of this timing is displayed.(XX is the 1-byte data.)
11111 To adjust all channels1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select ALL and press the rotary encoder.3. The adjustment starts.
If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.nIf the message “WAITING ...” keeps appearing even though theautomatic adjustment is started, the un-recorded segment mighthave been played back. In such a case, change the playbackposition of the alignment tape.
4. The adjustment results of all channels are displayed. When STOPis pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.
When the adjustment ends normally :OK is displayed in all channels and in the ALLcolumn.
When the adjustment fails :NG is displayed in the channel in which an erroroccurs and in the ALL column.
nWhen the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed inboth cases of 1 and 2, refer to the item “If themessage “INCOMPLETE” is displayed” in Section11-3-5.
11-34 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
22222 To adjust the desired channel only1. Insert the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).2. Select the channel to adjust and press the rotary encoder.3. Result of adjustment appears for the selected channel only. (OK/
NG is not displayed in the ALL column.)When STOP is pressed, data as of this timing is displayed.When the adjustment ends normally : OK is displayed.When the adjustment fails : NG is displayed.
11-35HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST
Adjusts all of the items of A11 to A16 in this order.1. Select “A17 : A11-A16 ALL ADJUST” on the RF ADJUST
MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Insert alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).
nBe sure to use the alignment tape (HR5-1A : Part No. 8-960-076-01).If a tape other than the specified tape is used for adjustment, thecorrect adjustment cannot be executed.
3. The adjustment starts.If the alignment tape is not inserted, the message “INSERT HR5-1A” appears and the cassette lid opens. When the alignment tapeis inserted, “WAITING ...” appears and then the adjustment starts.
4. The adjustments are performed in the order starting from A13 :PLAY PLL, A16 : A/D GAIN, A11 : EQUALIZER, A14 : FWDPLL and A15 : REV PLL. (It takes about 3 to 4 minutes.)nWhen an error occurs in the middle of the adjustment, the adjust-ment is stopped at the timing when an error occurs. The subse-quent adjustments will not be performed.
5. When the A15 : REV PLL adjustment is complete, the alignmenttape is ejected automatically.
6. Replace the alignment tape and insert a working tape (BCT-40HD) instead.
RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST PUSH RE TO ADJUST
RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA13:PLAY PLL NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A B C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST
SET A WORK TAPE FOR
REC CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUSTA12:REC CURRENT NOW ADJUSTING...
CH RSLT CH RSLT A OK B OK C D E F G H ALL
RF ADJUST MENUA17:A11-A16 ALL ADJUST
AUTO ADJUST COMPLETE
RETURN TO A1F TO SAVE
7. The A12 : REC CURRENT adjustment starts automatically.(It takes about 4 to 5 minutes.)
8. The adjustment results of all items are displayed. The tape isejected automatically.When adjustment ends successfully, the message “COMPLETE”appears.When the adjustment fails, the message “INCOMPLETE” appearson the display of the item and the adjustment is stopped at thetiming when an error occurs. The subsequent adjustments will notbe performed.nWhen the adjustment fails and the message “INCOMPLETE” ap-pears, refer to the corresponding item that is described in this Section.
11-36 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL
This is the menu that is prepared to save the RF system adjustmentdata in the NV-RAM (IC1104/EQ-88G board).Executing this menu saves all of the RF system adjustment data in theNV-RAM at once. All of the RF system adjustment data can bereturned to the original status before starting the adjustment byexecuting “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” if the data is not saved yetin the NV-RAM.nIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed in the automatic adjust-ment, do not save the adjustment data in the NV-RAM (IC1104/EQ-88G board).
1. Select “A1F : NV-RAM CONTROL” on the RF ADJUST MENUdisplay and press the rotary encoder.
RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
NO OPERATION SAVE(ALL)NEW DATA RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA
PUSH RE TO EXECUTE
RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
NOW SAVING......
RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
COMPLETE
RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
NOW LOADING......
RF ADJUST MENUA1F:NV-RAM CONTROL
COMPLETE
11111 To save the data1. Select “SAVE (ALL) NEW DATA” and press the
rotary encoder.
2. Saving is complete.
22222 To load the data1. Select “RESTORE PREVIOUS DATA” and press the
rotary encoder.
2. Loading is complete.
11-37HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayedIf the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed while the respectiveadjustment menus are in progress from A11 to A17, check the follow-ing items in order.. When the alignment tape is used, check if it is the specified (HR5-
1A Part No. 8-960-076-01) or not.→ If it is not the specified tape, use the specified tape and imple-
ment the adjustment.. Perform drum (video head) cleaning referring to n of
Section 11-2-2 C11: PB CH CONDITION and n of C12 :REC CH CONDITION. When cleaning is already implemented, it isnot necessary.
. If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed while executing anymenu other than A17, implement the automatic adjustment using theA17 menu.
If the message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed even after the aboveadjustments are performed, check the following possible causes.. Defective adjustment of the servo system, or servo circuit is defec-
tive.→ Servo System Re-Alignment (A0 : SERVO ADJUST)→ Servo System check (C0 : SERVO CHECK)
. The playback heads inside the drum assembly were worn out.→ If required, replace the upper drum assembly or drum assembly.
. Defective adjustment of tape run system, or part mounting isdefective.→ Re-adjustment or re-installation
. EQ-88G board is defective.
. Drum assembly is defective.
. Brush/slip ring assembly is defective or its mounting is defective.→ Replacement or re-installation
. Connection of the flexible board (between the MDR-14G board andthe EQ-88G board) is defective.
11-38 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-6. Audio System Adjustment Mode(A2 : AUDIO ADJUST)
This mode adjusts the audio system.
Operation procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder.3. Select “A2 : AUDIO ADJUST”, and press the rotary encoder.
The AUDIO ADJUST MODE display appears.
A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJUST
Adjusts the audio A/D error correction value by inputting the refer-ence signal through LINE.
1. Select “A20 : AUDIO A/D ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.
2. Set the AUDIO SELECT switch (CH1, CH2) to “AUTO”.Set the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch to “LINE”, and input a+4dBu, 1kHz sine wave to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector andCH2 connector at the rear.
3. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.
4. The auto adjustment starts from CH1.
AUDIO ADJUST MODE
A20:AUDIO A/D ADJ A21:AUDIO D/A ADJ A22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
ADJUST START YES →NO
SET BOTH OF THE LINE/AES/EBU/MIC SWITCHESTO "LINE". INPUT THE SINE WAVE OF+4dBU OF 1KHZ TO THE AUCH1&CH2 XLR ON THE REAR
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1:ADJUSTING CH2: CH3: CH4:
11-39HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
5. The results for the all the channels are displayed.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears for all the channels.When the adjustment fails :The message “ERR” appears for the channel with an error.m. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears, check the input signal and
perform the adjustment again.. If “INPUT OVER ERR” appears, check the signal level since
the level of the signal being input may be too large.. If “INPUT UNDER ERR” appears, check the signal level since
the level of the signal being input may be too small.. If “NO INPUT ERR” appears, check the input signal since the
signal may not be input correctly.
A21 : AUDIO D/A ADJUST
Adjusts the audio D/A error correction value with reference to theinternal SG.
1. Select “A21 : AUDIO D/A ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.
2. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.3. Turn the CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-1 output
level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.4. Turn the CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL knob so that the CH-2 output
level becomes 0 dBm ±0.05 dB.
5. Select “YES” for COMPLETE ADJUSTING?, and press therotary encoder.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “COMPLETE” appears.nIf “NO” is selected, the data adjusted this time becomes invalid,and the previously adjusted data becomes valid.
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA20:AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1:COMPLETE CH2:COMPLETE CH3:COMPLETE CH4:COMPLETE
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST
ADJUST START YES →NO
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST
COMPLETE ADJUSTING? YES →NO
TURN CH1 AND CH2 AU LEVEL KNOBS SO THAT CH1 AND CH2 OUTPUT LEVELS BECOME 0dBm +-0.05dB
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA21:AUDIO D/A ADJUST
COMPLETE →YES NO
11-40 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
Adjusts the correction value of the AUDIO LEVEL volume control(inside panel).
1. Select “A22 : AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ” on the AUDIO ADJUSTMODE display, and press the rotary encoder.
2. Turn the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the position one scaleaway to the left from the center position.
3. Select “YES” for ADJUST START, and press the rotary encoder.4. The auto adjustment starts from CH1.
5. The results for CH1 and CH2 are displayed.When the adjustment ends successfully :The message “OK” appears for CH1 and CH2, and “ADJUSTCOMPLETE” appears.When the adjustment fails :The message “ERR” appears for the channel with an error.nIf “TIME OVER ERR” is displayed, perform the adjustmentagain. If “TIME OVER ERR” appears again, replace the volumecontrol (RV2 or RV3 on the FP-152 board) of the LEVEL knob.
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
ADJUST START YES →NO
BEFORE ADJUST START,ALIGN CH1&CH2 AU KNOBSTO THE POS ONE SCALELEFT OF MECHA CENTER POS
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
CH1:ADJUSTING CH2:
AUDIO ADJUST MODEA22:AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJ
CH1:OK DATA:0380 CH2:OK DATA:0280
ADJUST COMPLETE
11-41HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-7. Mechanism Adjustment Mode(A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST)
This menu sets the items that are required for mechanism adjustment.
nImplement this menu item before starting the mechanism adjustment.
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Press the rotary encoder. (When a cassette tape is inserted, it is
ejected automatically.)3. Select “A4 : MECHANISM ADJUST” and press the rotary
encoder.The message MECHANISM ADJUST MENU appears.
MECHANISM ADJUST MENU
A40:PATH MODE SEL A41:DRUM PHASE
MECHANISM ADJUST MENUA40:PATH MODE SEL
X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : OFF SLACK MUTE : OFF CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF
MECHANISM ADJUST MENUA40:PATH MODE SEL
X1 REV SEARCH : OFF REC HEAD PB : ?OFF SLACK MUTE : ON CASSE. ID MUTE : OFF
A40 : PATH MODE SEL
Contents of this menu item are all saved even after the VTR mainte-nance menu is set to OFF. However, the contents return to OFF whenthe main power is turned off.1. Select “A40 : PATH MODE SEL” on the MECHANISM AD-
JUST MENU display and press the rotary encoder.2. Select the desired item to change its setting and press the rotary
encoder.
3. The question mark (?) appears in the left of the ON/OFF.4. Rotate the rotary encoder to switch ON/OFF. Press the rotary
encoder to set ON/OFF.Setting contents of each menu itemx1 REV SEARCH OFF : _4 times speed (normal SEARCH speed)
ON: _1 time speedREC HEAD PB OFF : Normal playback
ON: Playback from the recording headSLACK MUTE OFF : When an error occurs, an error code
appears in the display window and theunit stops its operation.
ON : When an error occurs, an error code isnot displayed and the unit does notstop its operation.
CASSE. ID MUTE OFF : Only the HD cassette tape and acleaning cassette tape can be accepted.
ON: Any types of cassette tape can be accepted.
A41 : DRUM PHASE
This menu item is exactly same as those of Section 11-3-4. SERVO Sys-tem Adjustment Mode (A003 : DRUM PHASE). Refer to Section 11-3-4.
11-42 HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
11-3-8. Other Adjustments (A9 : OTHERS ADJUST)
Implement this menu item only when the voltage drop due to internalcircuit is going to be corrected and when the MDC-13G board is goingto be replaced.
Operating procedure1. Let the display show the top menu of VTR MAINTE menu.
(Refer to Section 11-2-2.)2. Confirm that a cassette tape is not inserted and press the rotary
encoder.3. Select “A9 : OTHERS” and press the rotary encoder.
The message OTHERS ADJUST MENU appears.
A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION
This item applies the exact +12 V voltage from outside to correct thevoltage drop in the internal circuit.1. Select “A90 : BATTERY CORRECTION” and press the rotary
encoder.
OTHERS ADJUST MENU
A90:BATTERY CORRECTION A91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE
OTHERS ADJUST MENUA90:BATTERY CORRECTION
FEED ACCURATE DC+12V
PUSH RE TO ADJUST
OTHERS ADJUST MENUA90:BATTERY CORRECTION
COMPLETE
2. Press the rotary encoder again. The adjustment ends.
11-43HDW-F900R/V1 (E)
A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE
This item performs the setting that enables saving the contents of thebackup RAM into the EEPROM (IC403) of the new replacementMDC-13G board when the MDC-13G board is going to be replaced.
nPerform this setting immediately before replacing the MDC-13Gboard.When this setting is performed, the contents of the backup RAM aresaved in the EEPROM at the first power-on after the MDC-13G boardis replaced.
1. Select “A91 : MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE “ and press the rotaryencoder.
OTHERS ADJUST MENUA91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE
CHANGE : NO
OTHERS ADJUST MENUA91:MDC-13 BOARD CHANGE
CHANGE : YES
TURN OFF POWER
2. When the rotary encoder is rotated, NO changes to YES.
3. When the YES message appears, turn off the main power once.4. Replace the MDC-13G board.5. Turn on the main power.
nFor the replacement procedure of the MDC-13G board, refer to“7-36. MDC-13G Board Replacement”.
Printed in Japan
Sony Corporation 2006. 6 16
©2006
HDW-F900R (SY) E
9-968-281-01